IDRISI Taiga

Guide to GIS and Image Processing

August 2009
J. Ronald Eastman

Clark Labs
Clark University
950 Main Street
Worcester, MA
01610-1477 USA

tel: +1-508-793-7526
fax: +1-508-793-8842
email: [email protected]
web: www.clarklabs.org

IDRISI Source Code

©1987-2009
J. Ronald Eastman

IDRISI Production
©1987-2009
Clark University

Manual Version 16.02

IDRISI Taiga Introduction

License Agreement
The software described in this document is furnished under a license, and may be used or copied only in accordance with
the terms of this license.
The IDRISI Taiga software described in this document is protected by the United States Copyright Law and International
Treaty provisions. This software remains the property of Clark Labs, Clark University. However, Clark Labs grants the
purchaser non-exclusive license to use this software subject to the terms outlined in this statement.
The purchaser of a single-user license of IDRISI Taiga is licensed to install and use the software on no more than one sin-
gle-user computer system. The purchaser is also permitted to make a backup copy of the IDRISI Taiga distribution media
for the sole purpose of protecting the purchaser’s investment from loss. The purchaser may not rent or lease the software,
but may transfer the license to another user upon written agreement from Clark Labs. The user may not reverse-engineer,
decompile, or disassemble the IDRISI Taiga software or any of its associated software programs contained on the distri-
bution media.
The PDF manuals that accompany this software are also protected by United States Copyright Law and International
Treaty provisions. All rights are reserved. No part of the manuals may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopy, microfilm, recording, or otherwise without
written consent of Clark Labs. Direct translation of any part of the manuals is also prohibited without the written permis-
sion of the copyright holder.

Warranty
This software is sold “as is,” and the information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Furthermore, the
Clark Labs assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document, or in the software it describes.
CLARK LABS DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
POSE WITH RESPECT TO DEFECTS IN THE CD-ROM AND/OR DOCUMENTATION, AND THE PRO-
GRAM LICENSE GRANTED HEREIN IN PARTICULAR, AND WITHOUT LIMITING OPERATION OF THE
PROGRAM LICENSE WITH RESPECT TO ANY PARTICULAR APPLICATION, USE, OR PURPOSE. IN NO
EVENT SHALL CLARK LABS BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL
DAMAGE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER
DAMAGES.

Trademarks
IDRISI and CartaLinx are registered trademarks of Clark University. Windows and Access are trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation. ArcInfo and ArcView are trademarks of Environmental Systems Research Institute, Inc. MapInfo is a regis-
tered trademark of MapInfo Corporation. Adobe and the Adobe logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987-2009 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. GfK Macon’s digital maps are
protected by copyright (Copyright GfK Macon GmbH). All other product names mentioned in this volume may be trade-

Chapter 1 IDRISI Taiga Introduction 1

marks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.

Introduction
Thank you for choosing IDRISI Taiga and welcome to Clark Labs.
IDRISI is the industry leader in raster analytical functionality, covering the full spectrum of GIS and remote sensing needs
from database query, to spatial modeling, to image enhancement and classification. Special facilities are included for envi-
ronmental monitoring and natural resource management, including land change modeling and time series analysis, multi-
criteria and multi-objective decision support, uncertainty and risk analysis, simulation modeling, surface interpolation and
statistical characterization. Yet, despite the highly sophisticated nature of these capabilities, the system is very easy to use.
IDRISI consists of a main interface program (containing the menu and toolbar system) and a collection of nearly 300 pro-
gram modules that provide facilities for the input, display and analysis of geographic data. See the IDRISI Modules
chapter for an overview of the menu structure and a listing of all modules and their capabilities. Detailed information
about each module, as well as a variety of other technical information, may be found in the on-line Help System.
Along with this manual, the IDRISI software package also includes a set of tutorial exercises and data that guide the new
user through the concepts of GIS and Image Processing while also introducing the features of IDRISI. The tutorial exer-
cises are appropriate for use in either self-training or in classroom settings.

About Clark Labs

Clark Labs is dedicated to the research and development of geospatial technologies for effective and responsible decision
making for environmental management, sustainable resource development and equitable resource allocation.
Clark Labs is best known for its flagship product, the IDRISI GIS and Image Processing software. Since 1987, IDRISI
has been used by professionals in a wide range of industries in more than 175 countries worldwide. Environmental man-
agers and researchers benefit from the unsurpassed range of geospatial tools—nearly 300 modules for the analysis and
display of digital spatial information.
Based within the world-renowned Graduate School of Geography at Clark University, Clark Labs is known for pioneering
advancements in areas such as decision support, uncertainty management, classifier development, change and time series
analysis, and dynamic modeling. Partnering with such organizations as the Gordon and Betty Moore Foundation,
Google.org, USDA, the United Nations and Conservation International, Clark Labs leverages its academic base to
develop innovative and customized research tools, provide software solutions to organizations in need and apply geospa-
tial expertise to a range of real-world problems.

IDRISI is not an Acronym!

A Muslim scholar of international reputation in the Mediterranean world of his day, Abu Abd Allah Muhammed al-Idrisi
(1100-1166 A.D.) was born in a town on the North African coast, probably contemporary Ceuta, at that time, like much
of Andalucia (southern Spain) and western North Africa, part of the Almoravid state. Educated at the University of Cor-
doba, and widely traveled in Europe, North Africa, the Middle East, and Central Asia, al-Idrisi was a cartographer and
geographer of major significance during the medieval period. Commissioned by the Norman king Roger of Sicily to pre-
pare a geographical survey of the world, al-Idrisi led a fifteen-year collaborative effort by scholars and technicians based at
the Norman Court at Palermo. Based on direct field studies as well as archival sources, the maps and texts that resulted
from that collaborative effort served as primary reference material for over 500 years. It is to this spirit of collaboration in
geographic inquiry that the IDRISI software system is dedicated.

Chapter 1 IDRISI Taiga Introduction 2

Exploring IDRISI
The best introduction to IDRISI is through the Tutorial which can be accessed through the Help menu of the IDRISI
program. Parallel to working on the exercises, you should read the remainder of the IDRISI Guide to GIS and Image
Processing.
The first three chapters present a general overview of IDRISI (this chapter), GIS, and Remote Sensing and Image Pro-
cessing.
The next several chapters explore the use of the IDRISI system. The chapter System Overview describes the nature of
the user interface. The chapter Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures outlines the
logic with which IDRISI organizes data and gives an overview of the file structures of the most commonly used data files.
The Display System chapter discusses issues related to the display of geographic data and the interactive display features
available for their exploration. The Database Workshop chapter describes the database management system, giving
detailed information on all its functions, including the ability to link the database to a map, and its ability to use structured
query language (SQL). The IDRISI Modules chapter gives an overview of the capabilities of the IDRISI modules and
their typical usage. It also outlines the logic of the menu structure. The chapter IDRISI Modeling Tools describes the
use of IDRISI's Macro Modeler, Image Calculator, macro scripting language and API (COM Server) modeling tools. The
Database Development chapter covers some of the important issues for the development and creation of GIS data-
bases, especially techniques for importing data to IDRISI.
The Georeferencing chapter presents issues of geodesy, geodetic datums, projections and reference systems in under-
standable terminology. While many project-level applications of GIS and image processing do not require georeferencing
to a geodetic system, integration of data with local or national government mapping will unquestionably require that the
issues treated in this chapter be addressed.
The Decision Support chapters will be of particular interest to those involved with resource allocation and planning. It
covers the special procedures required to undertake multi-criteria / multi-objective analyses, as well as decision making in
the presence of uncertainty.
Several chapters are included that relate to the use of remotely-sensed data and image processing techniques. The Image
Restoration chapter suggests methods for removing or diminishing the degree of random and systematic distortions that
occur in imagery. A separate chapter on Fourier Analysis continues this discussion of methods for noise removal. The
Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery chapter outlines in detail the IDRISI approach to image classification,
including the use of "soft" and "fuzzy" classifiers for this process. Use of hyperspectral data is also discussed in this chap-
ter. The RADAR Imaging and Analysis chapter provides some suggestions for the use of radar imagery. The chapter
on Vegetation Indices describes the vegetation index models included in IDRISI for the transformation of satellite
imagery into images that indicate the relative amount of biomass present. The Time Series/Change Analysis chapter
deals with an increasingly important set of tools in environmental monitoring. Topics covered include pairwise compari-
sons, procedures for distinguishing true change from natural variability, temporal profiling, and time series analysis by
means of Principal Components Analysis.
The Land Change Modeler chapter presents a discussion on the tools included with LCM for analyzing landcover
change, projecting its course into the future, and assessing its implications for habitat and biodiversity change.
The Earth Trends Modeler chapter presents a discussion on the tools included within ETM for the analysis of trends
and dynamic characteristics of these phenomena as evident in time series images.
Another group of chapters addresses issues of modeling continuous raster surfaces. In the Anisotropic Cost Analysis
chapter, the brief discussion of cost distance procedures in the Introduction to GIS chapter is extended to consider the
case of anisotropic forces and frictions (i.e., forces and frictions that act differently in different directions). These tools are
somewhat experimental, but offer special opportunities for the modeling of dynamic phenomena such as groundwater
flows, forest fire movements, oil spills, and so on. Three chapters focus on issues of spatial interpolation from sample

Chapter 1 IDRISI Taiga Introduction 3

data. The Surface Interpolation chapter gives an overview of the techniques commonly encountered in GIS and points
out some of their relative advantages and disadvantages. It also indicates how these techniques are carried out in IDRISI.
The Triangulated Irregular Networks and Surface Generation chapter details the IDRISI implementation of the
TIN. The chapter Geostatistics presents background information for the use of advanced geostatistical procedures such
as kriging and simulation.
This volume also contains a series of Appendices containing georeferencing parameters, most importantly, detailed
tables of constants used for transformation between map datums (yes, in geodesy, the plural of datum is datums, and not
data!), as well as error propagation formulae referred to in the Decision Support chapter.
The Tutorial manual is intended as a means of learning (and teaching) the IDRISI system and the basic tools used in GIS
and image processing. The exercises are in a format suitable for classroom use as well as individual instruction. Literally
thousands of users have learned the basics of GIS by means of these exercises.
In addition to the manuals described above, IDRISI also contains a very robust on-line Help System. This does not dupli-
cate the information in the IDRISI Guide to GIS and Image Processing, but acts as a very important supplement to it.
Specifically, the Help System contains detailed information on the use of every module in the IDRISI set. This includes
information on operation, special notes, explanations of error messages, command line syntax, and so on. Every module
has a help button that can be clicked on to get help for that module. The Help System can also be accessed by clicking on
the Help menu item. You will find there a table of contents, index, and a keyword search facility. The Help System also
contains a basic glossary and detailed information about IDRISI file formats.

Contacting Clark Labs

We hope you enjoy your use of IDRISI Taiga. Our users are encouraged to provide feedback on their experience and
methods of application.
To contact Clark Labs, our address is:
Clark Labs. Clark University. 950 Main Street. Worcester, MA. 01610-1477. USA
To contact us by phone, fax, electronic mail, or to visit our Web site:
Customer Support: +1.508.793.7526
Fax: +1.508.793.8842
Email: [email protected]
Web site: www.clarklabs.org
Our office hours are from 09:00-17:00 hours US Eastern Time (-5 hours GMT Winter/-4 hours GMT Summer) Monday
through Friday. An answering machine takes messages after hours.

Clark Labs Return Policy

Returns are only accepted due to installation difficulties and must receive prior authorization from Customer Support.

Chapter 1 IDRISI Taiga Introduction 4

Clark Labs Technical Support
Clark Labs is dedicated to providing registered users with quality technical support. For those who have purchased techni-
cal support we provide expert assistance on the following types of issues:
• Software Installation
• Tutorial Exercise Assistance
• Software Operation
• Import and Export of Supported Data Formats
• Identification of Appropriate Module(s) for Particular Analyses
To receive technical assistance, you must have purchased technical support and be running the latest available update of
IDRISI, Land Change Modeler or CartaLinx. We maintain free software updates (also known as patches) that any regis-
tered user can download from our web site at www.clarklabs.org/support/index.cfm. Check the version number of your
installed software in the Help/About menu and then visit our web site’s download area to compare with the update’s
release number. If your installed version has a lower release number, download and install the update. After updating,
check to see if your problem has been resolved.
If you are experiencing a technical problem with a specific module or you are receiving unexpected results, the problem
resolution may be found within the Help System. Check the context-sensitive Help for the module you are running. Infor-
mation concerning the module’s limitations may be found in the respective Notes section.
If the update and the Help System information have not resolved your problem, contact our Technical Assistance Staff
via email at [email protected]. For your convenience, we provide online forms on our Web site’s Technical Assistance
page. These forms provide us with all of the information we require to resolve your problem as quickly as possible.
You must provide the following in your initial contact with us:
• Your Customer ID number, name, phone and e-mail address (if available).
• The name and version number of the Clark Labs product you are using.
• A description of your hardware and operating system.
• A detailed description of the problem you are experiencing. This should include a list and description of the data sets
involved, a description of the operation you are trying to accomplish, and a step by step description of what you have tried
so far (with the specific values you entered into the module’s dialog box). You should also include the exact text of any
error messages you receive.

Clark Labs Staff

As of February 2009, the Clark Labs Staff included:
Gurina Bajaj (India), Product Support
Sam Blanchard (USA), Product Support
Michelle Bozeman (USA), Technical Support
Scott Broo (USA), Product Support
Laurie Canavan (USA), Assistant Director

Chapter 1 IDRISI Taiga Introduction 5

KyuMin Chae (South Korea), Student Assistant
Hao Chen (China), Research Associate
Christina Connolly (USA), Customer Service Assistant
Stefano Crema (Brazil), Research Associate
Weiwei Dai (China), Research Assistant
Nan Deng (China), Research Assistant
Ngoc Dinh (Vietnam), Student Assistant
Ron Eastman (Canada), Director / Chief Architect
Bardan Ghimire (Nepal), Research Assistant
David Johnson (USA), Product Support
Cao Kang (China), Research Assistant
Michael Lindgren (USA), Product Support
Suyi Liu (China), IT Assistant
Xiaoduo Liu (China), IT Assistant
Ivan Lucena (Brazil), Research Associate
Elia Axinia Machado (Spain), Research Assistant
Joel Masselink (USA), Product Support
Neeti Neeti (India), Research Assistant
So Eun Park (South Korea), Student Assistant
Benoit Parmentier (Belgium), Research Assistant
Charlynn Pearsall (USA), Research Assistant
Prajna Regmi (Nepal), Research Assistant
Florencia Sangermano (Argentina), Research Assistant
Shaleen Shrestha (Nepal), Student Assistant
Diane Sutter (USA), Customer Support Manager
Benjamin Terrett (UK), Product Support
James Toledano (USA), Executive Director
Sankalp Vedalankar (India), IT Assistant
Yangyang Wang (China), Product Support
Pete Wason (USA), Information Technology
Qingling Wu (China), Research Assistant
Yingzi Yang (China), Product Support
Boyd Zapatka (USA), Technical Support
Honglei Zhu (China), Senior Research Associate

Chapter 1 IDRISI Taiga Introduction 6

Introduction to GIS
A Geographic Information System (GIS) is a computer-assisted system for the acquisition, storage, analysis and display of
geographic data. Today, a variety of software tools are available to assist this activity. However, they can differ from one
another quite significantly, in part because of the way they represent and work with geographic data, but also because of
the relative emphasis they place on these various operations. In this chapter, we will explore these differences as a means
of understanding the special characteristics of the IDRISI system.

Components of a GIS
Although we think of a GIS as a single piece of software, it is typically made up of a variety of different components. Fig-
ure 2-1 gives a broad overview of the software components typically found in a GIS. Not all systems have all of these ele-
ments, but to be a true GIS, an essential group must be found.

Spatial and Attribute Database

Central to the system is the database—a collection of maps and associated information in digital form. Since the database
is concerned with earth surface features, it can be seen to be comprised of two elements—a spatial database describing
the geography (shape and position) of earth surface features, and an attribute database describing the characteristics or
qualities of these features. Thus, for example, we might have a property parcel defined in the spatial database and qualities
such as its landuse, owner, property valuation, and so on, in the attribute database.
In some systems, the spatial and attribute databases are rigidly distinguished from one another, while in others they are
closely integrated into a single entity—hence the line extending only half-way through the middle circle of Figure 1.
IDRISI is of the type that integrates the two components into one. However, it also offers the option of keeping some

Images

Maps Image Statistical

Processing Reports
System
Map Statistical
Digitizing Analysis
System System

SpatialAttribute
Data Data
Base Base
Geographic Database
Analysis Manage-
System ment
System

Cartographic Statistics
Display
System Tabular Data

Maps
Figure 1

Chapter 2 Introduction to GIS 7

elements of the attribute database quite separate. This will be explored further below when we examine techniques for the
digital representation of map data.

Cartographic Display System

Surrounding the central database, we have a series of software components. The most basic of these is the Cartographic
Display System. The cartographic display system allows one to take selected elements of the database and produce map
output on the screen or some hardcopy device such as a printer or plotter. The range of cartographic production capabil-
ities among GIS software systems is great. Most provide only very basic cartographic output, and rely upon the use of
high quality publication software systems for more sophisticated production needs such as color separation.
IDRISI allows for highly interactive and flexible on-screen cartographic composition, including the specification of multi-
ple data layers, customization and positioning of map elements such as annotation, scale bars, insets and so forth, and cus-
tomized color and symbol sets. IDRISI map compositions may be saved for later display, printed to Windows-compatible
devices, and exported in a variety of common desktop publishing formats.
Software systems that are only capable of accessing and displaying elements of the database are often referred to as View-
ers or Electronic Atlases.

Map Digitizing System

After cartographic display, the next most essential element is a Map Digitizing System. With a map digitizing system, one
can take existing paper maps and convert them into digital form, thus further developing the database. In the most com-
mon method of digitizing, one attaches the paper map to a digitizing tablet or board, then traces the features of interest
with a stylus or puck according to the procedures required by the digitizing software. Many map digitizing systems also
allow for editing of the digitized data.
The CartaLinx software package, also developed and distributed by Clark Labs, provides complete digitizing and vector
editing capability and is fully compatible with IDRISI. There are also a number of independent digitizing software pack-
ages that support the IDRISI data format.
Scanners may also be used to digitize data such as aerial photographs. The result is a graphic image, rather than the out-
lines of features that are created with a digitizing tablet. Scanning software typically provides users with a variety of stan-
dard graphics file formats for export. These files are then imported into the GIS. IDRISI supports import of TIF and
BMP graphics file formats.
Digitizing packages, Computer Assisted Design (CAD), and Coordinate Geometry (COGO) are examples of software
systems that provide the ability to add digitized map information to the database, in addition to providing cartographic
display capabilities.

Database Management System

The next logical component in a GIS is a Database Management System (DBMS). Traditionally, this term refers to a type
of software that is used to input, manage and analyze attribute data. It is also used in that sense here, although we need to
recognize that spatial database management is also required. Thus, a GIS typically incorporates not only a traditional
DBMS, but also a variety of utilities to manage the spatial and attribute components of the geographic data stored.
With a DBMS, it is possible to enter attribute data, such as tabular information and statistics, and subsequently extract
specialized tabulations and statistical summaries to provide new tabular reports. However, most importantly, a DBMS
provides us with the ability to analyze attribute data. Many map analyses have no true spatial component, and for these, a
DBMS will often function quite well. For example, we might use the system to find all property parcels where the head of
the household is single but with one or more child dependents, and to produce a map of the result. The final product (a
map) is certainly spatial, but the analysis itself has no spatial qualities whatsoever. Thus, the double arrows between the
DBMS and the attribute database in Figure 1 signify this distinctly non-spatial form of data analysis.

Chapter 2 Introduction to GIS 8

In IDRISI, a DBMS is provided by Database Workshop. One can perform analyses in Database Workshop, then immedi-
ately apply the results to the proper spatial data, viewing the results as a map. In addition to Database Workshop, an exten-
sive set of program modules is also available for spatial and attribute data management.
Software that provides cartographic display, map digitizing, and database query capabilities are sometimes referred to as
Automated Mapping and Facilities Management (AM/FM) systems.

Geographic Analysis System

Up to this point, we have described a very powerful set of capabilities—the ability to digitize spatial data and attach attri-
butes to the features stored, to analyze these data based on those attributes, and to map out the result. Indeed, there are a
variety of systems on the market that have just this set of abilities, many of which will call themselves a GIS. But useful as
this is, such a set of capabilities does not necessarily constitute a full GIS. The missing component is the ability to analyze
data based on truly spatial characteristics. For this we need a Geographic Analysis System.
With a Geographic Analysis System, we extend the capabilities of traditional database query to include the ability to ana-
lyze data based on their location. Perhaps the simplest example of this is to consider what happens when we are con-
cerned with the joint occurrence of features with different geographies. For example, suppose we want to find all areas of
residential land on bedrock types associated with high levels of radon gas. This is a problem that a traditional DBMS sim-
ply cannot solve because bedrock types and landuse divisions do not share the same geography. Traditional database
query is fine as long as we are talking about attributes belonging to the same features. But when the features are different,
it cannot cope. For this we need a GIS. In fact, it is this ability to compare different features based on their common geo-
graphic occurrence that is the hallmark of GIS. This analysis is accomplished through a process called overlay, thus named
because it is identical in character to overlaying transparent maps of the two entity groups on top of one another.
Like the DBMS, the Geographic Analysis System is seen in Figure 1 to have a two-way interaction with the database—the
process is distinctly analytical in character. Thus, while it may access data from the database, it may equally contribute the
results of that analysis as a new addition to the database. For example, we might look for the joint occurrence of lands on
steep slopes with erodable soils under agriculture and call the result a map of soil erosion risk. This risk map was not in
the original database, but was derived based on existing data and a set of specified relationships. Thus the analytical capa-
bilities of the Geographic Analysis System and the DBMS play a vital role in extending the database through the addition
of knowledge of relationships between features.
While overlay is still the hallmark of GIS, computer-assisted geographic analysis has matured enormously over the past
several years. However, for now it is sufficient to note that it is this distinctly geographic component that gives a true GIS
its identity. In IDRISI, these abilities are extensive and form the foundation of the software system.

Image Processing System

In addition to these essential elements of a GIS—a cartographic display system, a map digitizing system, a database man-
agement system and a geographic analysis system—some software systems also include the ability to analyze remotely
sensed images and provide specialized statistical analyses. IDRISI is of this type. Image processing software allows one to
take raw remotely sensed imagery (such as Landsat or SPOT satellite imagery) and convert it into interpreted map data
according to various classification procedures. In recognition of its major importance as a technique for data acquisition,
IDRISI offers a broad set of tools for the computer-assisted interpretation of remotely sensed data.

Statistical Analysis System

For statistical analysis, IDRISI offers both traditional statistical procedures as well as some specialized routines for the sta-
tistical analysis of spatial data. Geographers have developed a series of specialized routines for the statistical description of
spatial data, partly because of the special character of spatial data, but also because spatial data pose special problems for
inferences drawn from statistical procedures.

Chapter 2 Introduction to GIS 9

Decision Support System
While decision support is one of the most important functions of a GIS, tools designed especially for this are relatively
few in most GIS software. However, IDRISI includes several modules specifically developed to aid in the resource alloca-
tion decision making process. These include modules that incorporate error into the process, help in the construction of
multi-criteria suitability maps under varying levels of tradeoff, and address allocation decisions when there are multiple
objectives involved. Used in conjunction with the other components of the system, these modules provide a powerful
tool for resource allocation decision makers.

Map Data Representation

The way in which the software components mentioned above are combined is one aspect of how Geographic Informa-
tion Systems vary. However, an even more fundamental distinction is how they represent map data in digital form.
A Geographic Information System stores two types of data that are found on a map—the geographic definitions of earth
surface features and the attributes or qualities that those features possess. Not all systems use the same logic for achieving
this. Nearly all, however, use one or a combination of both of the fundamental map representation techniques: vector and
raster.

Vector
With vector representation, the boundaries or the course of the features are defined by a series of points that, when joined
with straight lines, form the graphic representation of that feature. The points themselves are encoded with a pair of num-
bers giving the X and Y coordinates in systems such as latitude/longitude or Universal Transverse Mercator grid coordi-
nates. The attributes of features are then stored with a traditional database management (DBMS) software program. For
example, a vector map of property parcels might be tied to an attribute database of information containing the address,
owner's name, property valuation and landuse. The link between these two data files can be a simple identifier number
that is given to each feature in the map (Figure 2).

Raster
The second major form of representation is known as raster. With raster systems, the graphic representation of features
and the attributes they possess are merged into unified data files. In fact, we typically do not define features at all. Rather,
the study area is subdivided into a fine mesh of grid cells in which we record the condition or attribute of the earth's sur-
face at that point (Figure 2). Each cell is given a numeric value which may then represent either a feature identifier, a qual-
itative attribute code or a quantitative attribute value. For example, a cell could have the value "6" to indicate that it
belongs to District 6 (a feature identifier), or that it is covered by soil type 6 (a qualitative attribute), or that it is 6 meters
above sea level (a quantitative attribute value). Although the data we store in these grid cells do not necessarily refer to
phenomena that can be seen in the environment, the data grids themselves can be thought of as images or layers, each
depicting one type of information over the mapped region. This information can be made visible through the use of a ras-
ter display. In a raster display, such as the screen on your computer, there is also a grid of small cells called pixels. The word
pixel is a contraction of the term picture element. Pixels can be made to vary in their color, shape or grey tone. To make an
image, the cell values in the data grid are used to regulate directly the graphic appearance of their corresponding pixels.
Thus in a raster system, the data directly controls the visible form we see.

Raster versus Vector

Raster systems are typically data intensive (although good data compaction techniques exist) since they must record data
at every cell location regardless of whether that cell holds information that is of interest or not. However, the advantage is
that geographical space is uniformly defined in a simple and predictable fashion. As a result, raster systems have substan-
tially more analytical power than their vector counterparts in the analysis of continuous space1 and are thus ideally suited

Chapter 2 Introduction to GIS 10

to the study of data that are continuously changing over space such as terrain, vegetation biomass, rainfall and the like.
The second advantage of raster is that its structure closely matches the architecture of digital computers. As a result, raster
systems tend to be very rapid in the evaluation of problems that involve various mathematical combinations of the data in
multiple layers. Hence they are excellent for evaluating environmental models such as soil erosion potential and forest
management suitability. In addition, since satellite imagery employs a raster structure, most raster systems can easily incor-
porate these data, and some provide full image processing capabilities.
Vector Raster
While raster systems are predominantly analysis oriented, vector
802 812
2 systems tend to be more database management oriented. Vector
801
810
systems are quite efficient in their storage of map data because
806
they only store the boundaries of features and not that which is
803
804
809 3 inside those boundaries. Because the graphic representation of fea-
1 tures is directly linked to the attribute database, vector systems
808
807 805 usually allow one to roam around the graphic display with a mouse
and query the attributes associated with a displayed feature, such as
ID LAND-USE AREA 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 the distance between points or along lines, the areas of regions
0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2
801 201 6305
0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
defined on the screen, and so on. In addition, they can produce
802 202 6412
0 0 0 3 3 3 2 2 0 simple thematic maps of database queries, such as one showing all
Vector
803
804
112
201
7221
1 0
12532 0Raster
1 3 3 2 0 0 sewer line sections over one meter in diameter installed before
805 Figure
312 2-2 1 1
14638 1 1 3 3 0 0 0
1940.
806 201 1 1
61201 3 3 3 3 3 0
807 111 8914
1 1 1 0 3 3 0 0 0
Compared to their raster counterparts, vector systems do not have
1 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 0

Vector Raster as extensive a range of capabilities for analyses over continuous

space. They do, however, excel at problems concerning move-
Figure 2 ments over a network and can undertake the most fundamental of
GIS operations that will be sketched out below. For many, it is the
simple database management functions and excellent mapping capabilities that make vector systems attractive. Because of
the close affinity between the logic of vector representation and traditional map production, vector systems are used to
produce maps that are indistinguishable from those produced by traditional means. As a result, vector systems are very
popular in municipal applications where issues of engineering map production and database management predominate.
Raster and vector systems each have their special strengths. As a result, IDRISI incorporates elements from both repre-
sentational techniques. Though it is primarily a raster analytical system, IDRISI does employ vector data structures as a
major form of map data display and exchange. In addition, fundamental aspects of vector database management are also
provided.

Geographic Database Concepts

Organization
Whether we use a raster or vector logic for spatial representation, we begin to see that a geographic database—a complete
database for a given region—is organized in a fashion similar to a collection of maps (Figure 3). Vector systems may come
closest to this logic with what are known as coverages—map-like collections that contain the geographic definitions of a set
of features and their associated attribute tables. However, they differ from maps in two ways. First, each will typically con-
tain information on only a single feature type, such as property parcels, soils polygons, and the like. Second, they may con-
tain a whole series of attributes that pertain to those features, such as a set of census information for city blocks.

1. The basic data structure of vector systems can best be described as a network. As a result, it is not surprising to find that vector systems have excellent
capabilities for the analysis of network space. Thus the difference between raster and vector is less one of inherent ability than one of the difference in
the types of space they describe.

Chapter 2 Introduction to GIS 11

 water

roads

soils

elevation

Figure 3

Raster systems also use this map-like logic, but usually divide data sets into unitary layers. A layer contains all the data for a
single attribute. Thus one might have a soils layer, a roads layer and a landuse layer. A few raster systems, including
IDRISI, can link a feature identifier layer (a layer that contains the identifiers of the features located at each grid cell) with
attribute tables. More commonly, separate layers exist for each attribute and on-screen displays and paper maps are pro-
duced from these, either singly or in combination.
Although there are subtle differences, for all intents and purposes, raster layers and vector coverages can be thought of as
simply different manifestations of the same concept—the organization of the database into elementary map-like themes.
Layers and coverages differ from traditional paper maps, however, in an important way. When map data are encoded in
digital form (digitized), scale differences are removed. The digital data may be displayed or printed at any scale. More
importantly, digital data layers that were derived from paper maps of different scales, but covering the same geographic
area, may be combined.
In addition, many GIS packages, including IDRISI, provide utilities for changing the projection and reference system of
digital layers. This allows multiple layers, digitized from maps having various projections and reference systems, to be con-
verted to a common system.
With the ability to manage differences of scale, projection and reference system, layers can be merged with ease, eliminat-
ing a problem that has traditionally hampered planning activities with paper maps. It is important to note, however, that
the issue of resolution of the information in the data layers remains. Although features digitized from a poster-sized world
map could be combined in a GIS with features digitized from a very large scale local map, such as a city street map, this
would normally not be done. The level of accuracy and detail of the digital data can only be as good as that of the original
maps.

Georeferencing
All spatial data files in a GIS are georeferenced. Georeferencing refers to the location of a layer or coverage in space as
defined by a known coordinate referencing system. With raster images, a common form of georeferencing is to indicate
the reference system (e.g., latitude/longitude), the reference units (e.g., degrees) and the coordinate positions of the left,
right, top and bottom edges of the image. The same is true of vector data files, although the left, right, top and bottom
edges now refer to what is commonly called the bounding rectangle of the coverage—a rectangle which defines the limits of

Chapter 2 Introduction to GIS 12

the mapped area.2 This information is particularly important in an integrated GIS such as IDRISI since it allows raster
and vector files to be related to one another in a reliable and meaningful way. It is also vital for the referencing of data val-
ues to actual positions on the ground.
Georeferencing is an extremely important consideration when using GIS. Therefore a separate chapter later in this vol-
ume treats this topic in detail.

Analysis in GIS
The organization of the database into layers is not simply for reasons of organizational clarity. Rather, it is to provide rapid
access to the data elements required for geographic analysis. Indeed, the raison d'être for GIS is to provide a medium for
geographic analysis.
The analytical characteristics of GIS can be looked at in two ways. First, one can look at the tools that GIS provides. Then
one can look at the kinds of operations that GIS allows. Regardless of whether we are using a raster or a vector system, we
will tend to find that the tools fall into four basic groups and that the operations undertaken fall into three.

Analytical Tools
Database Query
The most fundamental of all tools provided by a GIS are those involved with Database Query. Database query simply
asks questions about the currently-stored information. In some cases, we query by location—what landuse is at this location?
In other cases, we query by attribute—what areas have high levels of radon gas? Sometimes we undertake simple queries such as
those just illustrated, and at other times we ask about complex combinations of conditions—show me all wetlands that are
larger than 1 hectare and that are adjacent to industrial lands.
In most systems, including IDRISI, these query operations are undertaken in two steps. The first step, called a reclassifica-
tion, creates a new layer of each individual condition of interest (Figure 2-4). For example, consider a query to find residen-
tial areas on bedrock associated with high levels of radon gas. The first step would be to create a layer of residential areas
alone by reclassifying all landuse codes into only two—a 1 whenever an area is residential and a 0 for all other cases. The
resulting layer is known as a Boolean layer since it shows only those areas that meet the condition (1 = true, residential) and
those that don't (0 = false, not residential). Boolean layers are also called logical layers since they show only true/false rela-
tionships. They are also sometimes called binary layers since they contain only zeros and ones. We will avoid using that
term, however, since it also describes a particular kind of data storage format. Here we will call them Boolean layers.
Once the residential layer has been created, a geology layer is then also reclassified to create a Boolean layer showing areas
with bedrock associated with high levels of radon gas. At this point we can combine the two conditions using an overlay
operation (Figure 4). As mentioned previously, it is only a GIS that can combine conditions such as this that involve fea-
tures with different geographies. Typically, an overlay operation in GIS will allow the production of new layers based on
some logical or mathematical combination of two or more input layers. In the case of database query, the key logical oper-
ations of interest are the AND and OR relational operators, also known as the INTERSECTION and UNION opera-
tions respectively. Here we are looking for cases of residential land AND high radon gas—the logical intersection of our

2. The bounding rectangle is defined by the study region of interest and does not necessarily refer to the actual minimum and maximum coordinates in
the data file.

Chapter 2 Introduction to GIS 13

two Boolean layers.

Soils Boundaries

Reclassification

Overlay

Figure 4

Map Algebra
The second set of tools that a GIS will typically provide is that for combining map layers mathematically. Modeling in par-
ticular requires the ability to combine layers according to various mathematical equations. For example, we might have an
equation that predicts mean annual temperature as a result of altitude. Or, as another example, consider the possibility of
creating a soil erosion potential map based on factors of soil erodability, slope gradient and rainfall intensity. Clearly we
need the ability to modify data values in our map layers by various mathematical operations and transformations and to
combine factors mathematically to produce the final result.
The Map Algebra tools will typically provide three different kinds of operations:
1. the ability to mathematically modify the attribute data values by a constant (i.e., scalar arithmetic);

2. the ability to mathematically transform attribute data values by a standard operation (such as the trigonomet-
ric functions, log transformations and so on);

3. the ability to mathematically combine (such as add, subtract, multiply, divide) different data layers to produce
a composite result.

This third operation is simply another form of overlay—mathematical overlay, as opposed to the logical overlay of data-
base query.
To illustrate this, consider a model for snow melt in densely forested areas:3
M = (0.19T + 0.17D)
where M is the melt rate in cm/day, T is the air temperature and D is the dewpoint temperature. Given layers of the air
temperatures and dewpoints for a region of this type, we could clearly produce a snow melt rate map. To do so would
require multiplying the temperature layer by 0.19 (a scalar operation), the dewpoint layer by 0.17 (another scalar opera-

3. Equation taken from Dunne, T., and Leopold, L.B., (1978) Water in Environmental Planning, (W.H. Freeman and Co.: San Francisco), 480.

Chapter 2 Introduction to GIS 14

tion) and then using overlay to add the two results. While simple in concept, this ability to treat map layers as variables in
algebraic formulas is an enormously powerful capability.

Distance Operators
The third tool group provided by GIS consists of the Distance Operators. As the name suggests, these are a set of tech-
niques where distance plays a key role in the analysis undertaken. Virtually all systems provide the tools to construct buf-
fer zones—areas within a specified distance of designated target features. Some can also evaluate the distance of all
locations to the nearest of a set of designated features, while others can even incorporate frictional effects and barriers in
distance calculations (Figure 5).
When frictional effects are incorporated, the distance calculated is often referred to as a cost distance. This name is used
because movement through space can be considered to incur costs, either in money, time or effort. Frictions increase
those costs. When the costs of movement from one or more locations are evaluated for an entire region, we often refer to
the result as a cost surface (Figure 5). In this case, areas of low cost (presumably near to the starting point) can be seen as
valleys and areas of high cost as hills. A cost surface thus has its lowest point(s) at the starting location(s) and its highest
point(s) at the locations that are farthest away (in the sense of the greatest accumulated cost).4

Target Features Buffers Distance Cost-Distance

Figure 5

There may be cases in which frictions do not affect the cost of movement the same way in all directions. In other words,
they act anisotropically. For example, going up a steep slope might incur a cost that would be higher than going down the
same steep slope. Thus the direction of movement through the friction is important, and must be taken into account
when developing the cost surface. IDRISI provides modules to model this type of cost surface which are explained in
detail in the Anisotropic Cost Analysis chapter.
Given the concept of a cost surface, Geographic Information Systems also commonly offer least-cost path analysis—another
important distance operation. As the name suggests, our concern is to evaluate the least-cost path between two locations.
The cost surface provides the needed information for this to be evaluated (Figure 5).
Regardless of how distance is evaluated, by straight line distance or by cost distance, another commonly provided tool is
allocation. With allocation, we assign locations to the nearest of a set of designated features. For example, we might estab-
lish a set of health facilities and then wish to allocate residents to their nearest facility, where "near" might mean linear dis-
tance, or a cost distance such as travel time.

4. It should be noted here that a cost surface as just described can only be evaluated with a raster system. For vector systems, the closest equivalent
would be cost distances evaluated over a network. Here we see a simple, but very powerful, illustration of the differences between raster and vector sys-
tems in how they conceive of space.

Chapter 2 Introduction to GIS 15

Context Operators
Finally, most Geographic Information Systems provide a variety of Context Operators (also known as neighborhood or local
operators). With context operators, we create new layers based on the information on an existing map and the context in
which it is found. One of the simplest examples of this is surface analysis where we use a digital elevation model to produce
a slope layer by examining the heights of locations in comparison to the heights of neighboring locations. In a similar
fashion, the aspect (the direction of maximum downward slope) can also be evaluated. We might also position an artificial
light source and calculate a shaded relief model. These context operator products and the elevation model from which
they were derived are illustrated in Figure 6.

Elevation Model Slope Aspect Shaded Relief

Figure 6

A second good example of a context operator is a digital filter. Digital filters operate by changing values according to the
character of neighboring values. For example, a surface of terrain heights can be smoothed by replacing values with the
average of the original height and all neighboring heights. Digital filters have a broad range of applications in GIS and
remote sensing, ranging from noise removal to the visual enhancement of images.
Because of their simple and uniform data structure, raster systems tend to offer a broad range of context operators. In
IDRISI, for example, these include surface analysis and digital filtering, identification of contiguous areas, watershed anal-
ysis, viewshed analysis (an evaluation of all areas in view of one or more designated features) and a special supply/demand
modeling procedure where demands are satisfied by taking supplies in a radial fashion from neighboring locations.

Analytical Operations
Given these basic tools, a broad range of analytical operations can be undertaken. However, it would appear that most of
these fall into one of three basic groups: Database Query, Derivative Mapping and Process Modeling.

Database Query
With database query, we are simply selecting out various combinations of variables for examination. The tools we use are
largely the database query tools previously discussed (hence the name), but also include various measurement and statisti-
cal analysis procedures. The key thing that distinguishes this kind of analysis is that we have taken out no more than we
have put into the system. While we may extract combinations we have never examined before, the system provides us
with no new information—we are simply making a withdrawal from a data bank we have built up.
One of the key activities in database query is pattern seeking. Typically we are looking for spatial patterns in the data that
may lead us to hypothesize about relationships between variables.

Chapter 2 Introduction to GIS 16

Derivative Mapping
With derivative mapping, we combine selected components of our database to yield new derivative layers. For example,
we might take our digital elevation data to derive slope gradients, and then take our slope data and combine it with infor-
mation on soil type and rainfall regime to produce a new map of soil erosion potential. This new map then becomes an
addition to our growing database.
How is it that we can create new data from old? Unlike database query where we simply extracted information that was
already in the database, with derivative mapping we take existing information and add to it something new—knowledge of
relationships between database elements. We can create a soil erosion potential map using a digital elevation layer, a soils
layer and a rainfall regime layer, only if we know the relationship between those factors and the new map we are creating.
In some cases, these relationships will be specified in logical terms (such as creating a suitability map for industrial loca-
tion based on the condition that it be on existing forest land, outside protective buffers around wetlands and on low
slopes) and we will use our database query tools. In other cases, however, these relationships will be specified in mathe-
matical terms and we will rely heavily on the map algebra tools. Regardless, the relationships that form the model will
need to be known.
In some cases, the relationship models can be derived on logical or theoretical grounds. However, in many instances it is
necessary that the relationships be determined by empirical study. Regression analysis, for example, is one very common
way in which empirical testing is used to develop a mathematical relationship between variables. If one takes the soil ero-
sion example, one might set up a series of test sites at which the soil erosion is measured along with the slope, soil type
and rainfall data. These sample points would then be used to develop the equation relating soil erosion to these variables.
The equation would then be used to evaluate soil erosion potential over a much broader region.

Process Modeling
Database query and derivative mapping make up the bulk of GIS analysis undertaken today. However, there is a third area
that offers incredible potential—Process or Simulation Modeling.
With process modeling, we also bring something new to the database—knowledge of process. Process refers to the causal
chain by which some event takes place. For example, a simple model of fuel-wood demand satisfaction might run as fol-
lows:
1. Take all the wood you need (if you can) from your present location.
2. If your demand is satisfied or if you have traveled more than 10 kilometers from home, go to step 4.
3. If your demand is not met, move to an immediately adjacent location not already visited and repeat step 1.
4. Stop.
Process modeling is a particularly exciting prospect for GIS. It is based on the notion that in GIS, our database doesn't
simply represent an environment, it is an environment! It is a surrogate environment, capable of being measured, manipu-
lated and acted upon by geographic and temporal processes. Our database thus acts as a laboratory for the exploration of
processes in a complex environment. Traditionally, in science, we have had to remove that complexity in order to under-
stand processes in isolation. This has been an effective strategy and we have learned much from it. However, technologies
such as GIS now offer the tools to reassemble those simple understandings in order to gain an understanding and appre-
ciation of how they act in the full complexity of a real environmental setting. Often even very simple understandings yield
complex patterns when allowed to interact in the environment.
A different sort of process, the decision making process, may also be supported and in some ways modeled with the use
of GIS. GIS technology is becoming more important as a tool for decision support. Indeed, even the simplest database
query results may prove to be invaluable input to the decision maker. However, the more complex process of decision mak-
ing, in which decision makers often think in terms of multiple criteria, soft boundaries (non-Boolean) and levels of
acceptable risk, may also be modeled using GIS. IDRISI provides a suite of decision support modules to help decision

Chapter 2 Introduction to GIS 17

makers develop more explicitly rational and well-informed decisions. The Decision Making chapter discusses this
important use of GIS in detail and provides illustrative case examples.
Despite its evident attraction, process modeling, both in environmental processes and decision making, is still a fairly
uncommon activity in GIS. The reason is quite simple. While more and more modeling tools are becoming available in
the GIS, it is not uncommon that the process of interest requires a capability not built into the system. These cases require
the creation of a new program module. Many systems are not well set up for the incorporation of user-developed rou-
tines. IDRISI, however, has been designed so programs in any computer language may be merged into the system and
called from the IDRISI interface.

The Philosophy of GIS

GIS has had an enormous impact on virtually every field that manages and analyzes spatially distributed data. For those
who are unfamiliar with the technology, it is easy to see it as a magic box. The speed, consistency and precision with which
it operates is truly impressive, and its strong graphic character is hard to resist. However, to experienced analysts, the phi-
losophy of GIS is quite different. With experience, GIS becomes simply an extension of one's own analytical thinking.
The system has no inherent answers, only those of the analyst. It is a tool, just like statistics is a tool. It is a tool for
thought.
Investing in GIS requires more than an investment in hardware and software. Indeed, in many instances this is the least
issue of concern. Most would also recognize that a substantial investment needs to be placed in the development of the
database. However, one of the least recognized yet most important investments is in the analysts who will use the system.
The system and the analyst cannot be separated—one is simply an extension of the other. In addition, the process of
incorporating GIS capabilities into an institution requires an investment in long-term and organization-wide education
and training.
In many ways, learning GIS involves learning to think—learning to think about patterns, about space and about processes
that act in space. As you learn about specific procedures, they will often be encountered in the context of specific exam-
ples. In addition, they will often have names that suggest their typical application. But resist the temptation to categorize
these routines. Most procedures have many more general applications and can be used in many novel and innovative ways.
Explore! Challenge what you see! What you will learn goes far beyond what this or any software package can provide.

Chapter 2 Introduction to GIS 18

Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image
Processing
Of all the various data sources used in GIS, one of the most important is undoubtedly that provided by remote sensing.
Through the use of satellites, we now have a continuing program of data acquisition for the entire world with time frames
ranging from a couple of weeks to a matter of hours. Very importantly, we also now have access to remotely sensed
images in digital form, allowing rapid integration of the results of remote sensing analysis into a GIS.
The development of digital techniques for the restoration, enhancement and computer-assisted interpretation of remotely
sensed images initially proceeded independently and somewhat ahead of GIS. However, the raster data structure and
many of the procedures involved in these Image Processing Systems (IPS) were identical to those involved in raster GIS. As a
result, it has become common to see IPS software packages add general capabilities for GIS, and GIS software systems
add at least a fundamental suite of IPS tools. IDRISI is a combined GIS and image processing system that offers
advanced capabilities in both areas.
Because of the extreme importance of remote sensing as a data input to GIS, it has become necessary for GIS analysts
(particularly those involved in natural resource applications) to gain a strong familiarity with IPS. Consequently, this chap-
ter gives an overview of this important technology and its integration with GIS. The Image Processing exercises in the
Tutorial illustrate many of the concepts presented here.

Definition
Remote sensing can be defined as any process whereby information is gathered about an object, area or phenomenon
without being in contact with it. Our eyes are an excellent example of a remote sensing device. We are able to gather infor-
mation about our surroundings by gauging the amount and nature of the reflectance of visible light energy from some
external source (such as the sun or a light bulb) as it reflects off objects in our field of view. Contrast this with a thermom-
eter, which must be in contact with the phenomenon it measures, and thus is not a remote sensing device.
Given this rather general definition, the term remote sensing has come to be associated more specifically with the gauging of
interactions between earth surface materials and electromagnetic energy. However, any such attempt at a more specific
definition becomes difficult, since it is not always the natural environment that is sensed (e.g., art conservation applica-
tions), the energy type is not always electromagnetic (e.g., sonar) and some procedures gauge natural energy emissions
(e.g., thermal infrared) rather than interactions with energy from an independent source.

Fundamental Considerations
Energy Source
Sensors can be divided into two broad groups—passive and active. Passive sensors measure ambient levels of existing
sources of energy, while active ones provide their own source of energy. The majority of remote sensing is done with pas-
sive sensors, for which the sun is the major energy source. The earliest example of this is photography. With airborne
cameras we have long been able to measure and record the reflection of light off earth features. While aerial photography
is still a major form of remote sensing, newer solid state technologies have extended capabilities for viewing in the visible
and near infrared wavelengths to include longer wavelength solar radiation as well. However, not all passive sensors use
energy from the sun. Thermal infrared and passive microwave sensors both measure natural earth energy emissions. Thus

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 19

the passive sensors are simply those that do not themselves supply the energy being detected.
By contrast, active sensors provide their own source of energy. The most familiar form of this is flash photography. How-
ever, in environmental and mapping applications, the best example is RADAR. RADAR systems emit energy in the
microwave region of the electromagnetic spectrum (Figure 3-1). The reflection of that energy by earth surface materials is
then measured to produce an image of the area sensed.

0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 (μm)

G reen

R ed
Blue
UV Near - infrared

Visible
(1mm) (1m)
Wavelength (μm)
10 −6 10 −5 10 −4 10 −3 10 −2 10 −1 1 10 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 Wavelength
(μm)

C M
id The Te
γr

M
os
N ible let
U
V irav
X

an lev
ea
lt

ic
ay

m s io -I rm
ra

ro
R a
r- U V
ic d isio
s

ys

R
w

ad
ra lI
IR

av
ys n

io
e
a

R
(
)

From Lillesand and Kiefer

Figure 3-1: The Electromagnetic Spectrum

Wavelength
As indicated, most remote sensing devices make use of electromagnetic energy. However, the electromagnetic spectrum is
very broad and not all wavelengths are equally effective for remote sensing purposes. Furthermore, not all have significant
interactions with earth surface materials of interest to us. Figure 3-1 illustrates the electromagnetic spectrum. The atmo-
sphere itself causes significant absorption and/or scattering of the very shortest wavelengths. In addition, the glass lenses
of many sensors also cause significant absorption of shorter wavelengths such as the ultraviolet (UV). As a result, the first
significant window (i.e., a region in which energy can significantly pass through the atmosphere) opens up in the visible
wavelengths. Even here, the blue wavelengths undergo substantial attenuation by atmospheric scattering, and are thus
often left out in remotely sensed images. However, the green, red and near infrared (IR) wavelengths all provide good
opportunities for gauging earth surface interactions without significant interference by the atmosphere. In addition, these
regions provide important clues to the nature of many earth surface materials. Chlorophyll, for example, is a very strong
absorber of red visible wavelengths, while the near infrared wavelengths provide important clues to the structures of plant
leaves. As a result, the bulk of remotely sensed images used in GIS-related applications are taken in these regions.
Extending into the middle and thermal infrared regions, a variety of good windows can be found. The longer of the mid-
dle infrared wavelengths have proven to be useful in a number of geological applications. The thermal regions have
proven to be very useful for monitoring not only the obvious cases of the spatial distribution of heat from industrial activ-
ity, but a broad set of applications ranging from fire monitoring to animal distribution studies to soil moisture conditions.
After the thermal IR, the next area of major significance in environmental remote sensing is in the microwave region. A
number of important windows exist in this region and are of particular importance for the use of active radar imaging.
The texture of earth surface materials causes significant interactions with several of the microwave wavelength regions.
This can thus be used as a supplement to information gained in other wavelengths, and also offers the significant advan-
tage of being usable at night (because as an active system it is independent of solar radiation) and in regions of persistent
cloud cover (since radar wavelengths are not significantly affected by clouds).

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 20

Interaction Mechanisms
When electromagnetic energy strikes a material, three types of interaction can follow: reflection, absorption and/or trans-
mission (Figure 3-2). Our main concern is with the reflected portion since it is usually this which is returned to the sensor
system. Exactly how much is reflected will vary and will depend upon the nature of the material and where in the electro-
magnetic spectrum our measurement is being taken. As a result, if we look at the nature of this reflected component over
a range of wavelengths, we can characterize the result as a spectral response pattern.

Light Source

reflection

absorption transmission

Figure 3-2

Spectral Response Patterns

A spectral response pattern is sometimes called a signature. It is a description (often in the form of a graph) of the degree
to which energy is reflected in different regions of the spectrum. Most humans are very familiar with spectral response
patterns since they are equivalent to the human concept of color. For example, Figure 3-3 shows idealized spectral
response patterns for several familiar colors in the visible portion of the electromagnetic spectrum, as well as for white
and dark grey. The bright red reflectance pattern, for example, might be that produced by a piece of paper printed with a
red ink. Here, the ink is designed to alter the white light that shines upon it and absorb the blue and green wavelengths.
What is left, then, are the red wavelengths which reflect off the surface of the paper back to the sensing system (the eye).
The high return of red wavelengths indicates a bright red, whereas the low return of green wavelengths in the second
example suggests that it will appear quite dark.

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 21

 B G R B G R B G R
bright red dark green yellow

B G R B G R B G R
purple white dark gray

Figure 3-3

The eye is able to sense spectral response patterns because it is truly a multi-spectral sensor (i.e., it senses in more than
one place in the spectrum). Although the actual functioning of the eye is quite complex, it does in fact have three separate
types of detectors that can usefully be thought of as responding to the red, green and blue wavelength regions. These are
the additive primary colors, and the eye responds to mixtures of these three to yield a sensation of other hues. For example,
the color perceived by the third spectral response pattern in Figure 3-3 would be a yellow—the result of mixing a red and
green. However, it is important to recognize that this is simply our phenomenological perception of a spectral response
pattern. Consider, for example, the fourth curve. Here we have reflectance in both the blue and red regions of the visible
spectrum. This is a bimodal distribution, and thus technically not a specific hue in the spectrum. However, we would per-
ceive this to be a purple! Purple (a color between violet and red) does not exist in nature (i.e., as a hue—a distinctive dom-
inant wavelength). It is very real in our perception, however. Purple is simply our perception of a bimodal pattern
involving a non-adjacent pair of primary hues.
In the early days of remote sensing, it was believed (more correctly hoped) that each earth surface material would have a
distinctive spectral response pattern that would allow it to be reliably detected by visual or digital means. However, as our
common experience with color would suggest, in reality this is often not the case. For example, two species of trees may
have quite a different coloration at one time of the year and quite a similar one at another.
Finding distinctive spectral response patterns is the key to most procedures for computer-assisted interpretation of
remotely sensed imagery. This task is rarely trivial. Rather, the analyst must find the combination of spectral bands and the
time of year at which distinctive patterns can be found for each of the information classes of interest.
For example, Figure 3-4 shows an idealized spectral response pattern for vegetation along with those of water and dry
bare soil. The strong absorption by leaf pigments (particularly chlorophyll for purposes of photosynthesis) in the blue and
red regions of the visible portion of the spectrum leads to the characteristic green appearance of healthy vegetation. How-
ever, while this signature is distinctively different from most non-vegetated surfaces, it is not very capable of distinguishing
between species of vegetation—most will have a similar color of green at full maturation. In the near infrared, however,
we find a much higher return from vegetated surfaces because of scattering within the fleshy mesophyllic layer of the
leaves. Plant pigments do not absorb energy in this region, and thus the scattering, combined with the multiplying effect
of a full canopy of leaves, leads to high reflectance in this region of the spectrum. However, the extent of this reflectance
will depend highly on the internal structure of leaves (e.g., broadleaf versus needle). As a result, significant differences
between species can often be detected in this region. Similarly, moving into the middle infrared region we see a significant
dip in the spectral response pattern that is associated with leaf moisture. This is, again, an area where significant differ-
ences can arise between mature species. Applications looking for optimal differentiation between species, therefore, will
typically involve both the near and middle infrared regions and will use imagery taken well into the development cycle.

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 22

 Dry bare soil
Vegetation
Water (clear)

Relative Reflectance
0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4
Wavelength (μm)

Figure 3-4 Adapted from Lillesand and Kiefer 1987

Multispectral Remote Sensing

In the visual interpretation of remotely sensed images, a variety of image characteristics are brought into consideration:
color (or tone in the case of panchromatic images), texture, size, shape, pattern, context, and the like. However, with com-
puter-assisted interpretation, it is most often simply color (i.e., the spectral response pattern) that is used. It is for this rea-
son that a strong emphasis is placed on the use of multispectral sensors (sensors that, like the eye, look at more than one
place in the spectrum and thus are able to gauge spectral response patterns), and the number and specific placement of
these spectral bands.
Figure 3-5 illustrates the spectral bands of the Landsat Thematic Mapper (TM) system. The Landsat satellite is a commer-
cial system providing multi-spectral imagery in seven spectral bands at a 30 meter resolution.
It can be shown through analytical techniques, such as Principal Components Analysis, that in many environments, the
bands that carry the greatest amount of information about the natural environment are the near infrared and red wave-
length bands. Water is strongly absorbed by infrared wavelengths and is thus highly distinctive in that region. In addition,
plant species typically show their greatest differentiation here. The red area is also very important because it is the primary
region in which chlorophyll absorbs energy for photosynthesis. Thus it is this band which can most readily distinguish
between vegetated and non-vegetated surfaces.
Given this importance of the red and near infrared bands, it is not surprising that sensor systems designed for earth
resource monitoring will invariably include these in any particular multispectral system. Other bands will depend upon the
range of applications envisioned. Many include the green visible band since it can be used, along with the other two, to
produce a traditional false color composite—a full color image derived from the green, red, and infrared bands (as
opposed to the blue, green, and red bands of natural color images). This format became common with the advent of
color infrared photography, and is familiar to many specialists in the remote sensing field. In addition, the combination of
these three bands works well in the interpretation of the cultural landscape as well as natural and vegetated surfaces. How-
ever, it is increasingly common to include other bands that are more specifically targeted to the differentiation of surface
materials. For example, Landsat TM Band 5 is placed between two water absorption bands and has thus proven very use-
ful in determining soil and leaf moisture differences. Similarly, Landsat TM Band 7 targets the detection of hydrothermal
alteration zones in bare rock surfaces. By contrast, the AVHRR system on the NOAA series satellites includes several
thermal channels for the sensing of cloud temperature characteristics.

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 23

 Band 1, visible blue Band 2, visible green Band 3, visible red Band 4, near infrared
0.45-0.52 mm 0.52-0.60 mm 0.63-0.69 mm 0.76-0.90 mm

Band 5, middle-infrared Band 6, thermal infrared Band 7, middle-infrared

1.55-1.75 mm 10.4-12.5 mm 2.08-2.35 mm

Figure 3-5

Hyperspectral Remote Sensing

In addition to traditional multispectral imagery, some new and experimental systems such as AVIRIS and MODIS are
capable of capturing hyperspectral data. These systems cover a similar wavelength range to multispectral systems, but in
much narrower bands. This dramatically increases the number of bands (and thus precision) available for image classifica-
tion (typically tens and even hundreds of very narrow bands). Moreover, hyperspectral signature libraries have been cre-
ated in lab conditions and contain hundreds of signatures for different types of landcovers, including many minerals and
other earth materials. Thus, it should be possible to match signatures to surface materials with great precision. However,
environmental conditions and natural variations in materials (which make them different from standard library materials)
make this difficult. In addition, classification procedures have not been developed for hyperspectral data to the degree
they have been for multispectral imagery. As a consequence, multispectral imagery still represents the major tool of
remote sensing today.

Sensor/Platform Systems
Given recent developments in sensors, a variety of platforms are now available for the capture of remotely sensed data.
Here we review some of the major sensor/platform combinations that are typically available to the GIS user community.

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 24

Aerial Photography
Aerial photography is the oldest and most widely used method of remote sensing. Cameras mounted in light aircraft flying
between 200 and 15,000 m capture a large quantity of detailed information. Aerial photos provide an instant visual inven-
tory of a portion of the earth's surface and can be used to create detailed maps. Aerial photographs commonly are taken
by commercial aerial photography firms which own and operate specially modified aircraft equipped with large format (23
cm x 23 cm) mapping quality cameras. Aerial photos can also be taken using small format cameras (35 mm and 70 mm),
hand-held or mounted in unmodified light aircraft.
Camera and platform configurations can be grouped in terms of oblique and vertical. Oblique aerial photography is taken
at an angle to the ground. The resulting images give a view as if the observer is looking out an airplane window. These
images are easier to interpret than vertical photographs, but it is difficult to locate and measure features on them for map-
ping purposes.
Vertical aerial photography is taken with the camera pointed straight down. The resulting images depict ground features
in plan form and are easily compared with maps. Vertical aerial photos are always highly desirable, but are particularly use-
ful for resource surveys in areas where no maps are available. Aerial photos depict features such as field patterns and veg-
etation which are often omitted on maps. Comparison of old and new aerial photos can also capture changes within an
area over time.
Vertical aerial photos contain subtle displacements due to relief, tip and tilt of the aircraft and lens distortion. Vertical
images may be taken with overlap, typically about 60 percent along the flight line and at least 20 percent between lines.
Overlapping images can be viewed with a stereoscope to create a three-dimensional view, called a stereo model.

Large Format Photography

Commercial aerial survey firms use light single or twin engine aircraft equipped with large-format mapping cameras.
Large-format cameras, such as the Wild RC-10, use 23 cm x 23 cm film which is available in rolls. Eastman Kodak, Inc.,
among others, manufactures several varieties of sheet film specifically intended for use in aerial photography. Negative
film is used where prints are the desired product, while positive film is used where transparencies are desired. Print film
allows for detailed enlargements to be made, such as large wall-sized prints. In addition, print film is useful when multiple
prints are to be distributed and used in the field.

Small Format Photography

Small-format cameras carried in chartered aircraft are an inexpensive alternative to large-format aerial photography. A
35mm or 70mm camera, light aircraft and pilot are required, along with some means to process the film. Because there are
inexpensive commercial processing labs in most parts of the world, 35mm systems are especially convenient.
Oblique photographs can be taken with a hand-held camera in any light aircraft; vertical photographs require some form
of special mount, pointed through a belly port or extended out a door or window.
Small-format aerial photography has several drawbacks. Light unpressurized aircraft are typically limited to altitudes
below 4000 m. As film size is small, sacrifices must be made in resolution or area covered per frame. Because of distor-
tions in the camera system, small-format photography cannot be used if precise mapping is required. In addition, presen-
tation-quality wall-size prints cannot be made from small negatives. Nonetheless, small-format photography can be very
useful for reconnaissance surveys and can also be used as point samples.

Color Photography
Normal color photographs are produced from a composite of three film layers with intervening filters that act to isolate,
in effect, red, green, and blue wavelengths separately to the different film layers. With color infrared film, these wave-
lengths are shifted to the longer wavelengths to produce a composite that has isolated reflectances from the green, red
and near infrared wavelength regions. However, because the human eye cannot see infrared, a false color composite is
produced by making the green wavelengths appear blue, the red wavelengths appear green, and the infrared wavelengths

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 25

appear red.
As an alternative to the use of color film, it is also possible to group several cameras on a single aircraft mount, each with
black and white film and a filter designed to isolate a specific wavelength range. The advantage of this arrangement is that
the bands are independently accessible and can be photographically enhanced. If a color composite is desired, it is possi-
ble to create it from the individual bands at a later time.
Clearly, photographs are not in a format that can immediately be used in digital analysis. It is possible to scan photographs
with a scanner and thereby create multispectral datasets either by scanning individual band images, or by scanning a color
image and separating the bands. However, the geometry of aerial photographs (which have a central perspective projec-
tion and differential parallax) is such that they are difficult to use directly. More typically they require processing by special
photogrammetric software to rectify the images and remove differential parallax effects.

Aerial Videography
Light, portable, inexpensive video cameras and recorders can be carried in chartered aircraft. In addition, a number of
smaller aerial mapping companies offer videography as an output option. By using several cameras simultaneously, each
with a filter designed to isolate a specific wavelength range, it is possible to isolate multispectral image bands that can be
used individually, or in combination in the form of a color composite. For use in digital analysis, special graphics hardware
boards known as frame grabbers can be used to freeze any frame within a continuous video sequence and convert it to digi-
tal format, usually in one of the more popular exchange formats such as TIF or TARGA. Like small-format photography,
aerial videography cannot be used for detailed mapping, but provides a useful overview for reconnaissance surveys, and
can be used in conjunction with ground point sampling.

Satellite-Based Scanning Systems

Photography has proven to be an important input to visual interpretation and the production of analog maps. However,
the development of satellite platforms, the associated need to telemeter imagery in digital form, and the desire for highly
consistent digital imagery have given rise to the development of solid state scanners as a major format for the capture of
remotely sensed data. The specific features of particular systems vary (including, in some cases, the removal of a true
scanning mechanism). However, in the discussion which follows, an idealized scanning system is presented that is highly
representative of current systems in use.
The basic logic of a scanning sensor is the use of a mechanism to sweep a small field of view (known as an instantaneous
field of view—IFOV) in a west to east direction at the same time the satellite is moving in a north to south direction.
Together this movement provides the means of composing a complete raster image of the environment.
A simple scanning technique is to use a rotating mirror that can sweep the field of view in a consistent west to east fash-
ion. The field of view is then intercepted with a prism that can spread the energy contained within the IFOV into its spec-
tral components. Photoelectric detectors (of the same nature as those found in the exposure meters of commonly
available photographic cameras) are then arranged in the path of this spectrum to provide electrical measurements of the
amount of energy detected in various parts of the electromagnetic spectrum. As the scan moves from west to east, these
detectors are polled to get a set of readings along the east-west scan. These form the columns along one row of a set of
raster images—one for each detector. Movement of the satellite from north to south then positions the system to detect
the next row, ultimately leading to the production of a set of raster images as a record of reflectance over a range of spec-
tral bands.
There are many satellite systems in operation today that collect imagery that is subsequently distributed to users. Several
of the most common systems include AVHRR, EOS, ERS, IRS, IKONOS, JERS, LANDSAT, SPOT, Quickbird,
RADARSAT, and many more. Each type of satellite data offers specific characteristics that make it more or less appropri-
ate for a particular application.
In general, there are two characteristics that may help guide the choice of satellite data: spatial resolution and spectral resolution.
The spatial resolution refers to the size of the area on the ground that is summarized by one data value in the imagery.

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 26

This is the Instantaneous Field of View (IFOV) described earlier. Spectral resolution refers to the number and width of
the spectral bands that the satellite sensor detects. In addition, issues of cost and imagery availability must also be consid-
ered.

Digital Image Processing

Overview
As a result of solid state multispectral scanners and other raster input devices, we now have available digital raster images
of spectral reflectance data. The chief advantage of having these data in digital form is that they allow us to apply com-
puter analysis techniques to the image data—a field of study called Digital Image Processing.
Digital Image Processing is largely concerned with four basic operations: image restoration, image enhancement,
image classification, image transformation. Image restoration is concerned with the correction and calibration of images
in order to achieve as faithful a representation of the earth surface as possible—a fundamental consideration for all appli-
cations. Image enhancement is predominantly concerned with the modification of images to optimize their appearance to the
visual system. Visual analysis is a key element, even in digital image processing, and the effects of these techniques can be
dramatic. Image classification refers to the computer-assisted interpretation of images—an operation that is vital to GIS.
Finally, image transformation refers to the derivation of new imagery as a result of some mathematical treatment of the raw
image bands.
In order to undertake the operations listed in this section, it is necessary to have access to image processing software.
IDRISI is one such system. While it is known primarily as a GIS software system, it also offers a full suite of image pro-
cessing capabilities.

Image Restoration
Remotely sensed images of the environment are typically taken at a great distance from the earth's surface. As a result,
there is a substantial atmospheric path that electromagnetic energy must pass through before it reaches the sensor.
Depending upon the wavelengths involved and atmospheric conditions (such as particulate matter, moisture content and
turbulence), the incoming energy may be substantially modified. The sensor itself may then modify the character of that
data since it may combine a variety of mechanical, optical and electrical components that serve to modify or mask the
measured radiant energy. In addition, during the time the image is being scanned, the satellite is following a path that is
subject to minor variations at the same time that the earth is moving underneath. The geometry of the image is thus in
constant flux. Finally, the signal needs to be telemetered back to earth, and subsequently received and processed to yield
the final data we receive. Consequently, a variety of systematic and apparently random disturbances can combine to
degrade the quality of the image we finally receive. Image restoration seeks to remove these degradation effects.
Broadly, image restoration can be broken down into the two sub-areas of radiometric restoration and geometric restoration.

Radiometric Restoration
Radiometric restoration refers to the removal or diminishment of distortions in the degree of electromagnetic energy reg-
istered by each detector. A variety of agents can cause distortion in the values recorded for image cells. Some of the most
common distortions for which correction procedures exist include:
uniformly elevated values, due to atmospheric haze, which preferentially scatters short wavelength bands (particularly
the blue wavelengths);
striping, due to detectors going out of calibration;
random noise, due to unpredictable and unsystematic performance of the sensor or transmission of the data; and

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 27

scan line drop out, due to signal loss from specific detectors.
It is also appropriate to include here procedures that are used to convert the raw, unitless relative reflectance values
(known as digital numbers, or DN) of the original bands into true measures of reflective power (radiance).
See the chapter on Image Restoration for a more detailed discussion of radiometric restoration and how it can be imple-
mented in IDRISI.

Geometric Restoration
For mapping purposes, it is essential that any form of remotely sensed imagery be accurately registered to the proposed
map base. With satellite imagery, the very high altitude of the sensing platform results in minimal image displacements
due to relief. As a result, registration can usually be achieved through the use of a systematic rubber sheet transformation
process1 that gently warps an image (through the use of polynomial equations) based on the known positions of a set of
widely dispersed control points. This capability is provided in IDRISI through the module RESAMPLE.
With aerial photographs, however, the process is more complex. Not only are there systematic distortions related to tilt
and varying altitude, but variable topographic relief leads to very irregular distortions (differential parallax) that cannot be
removed through a rubber sheet transformation procedure. In these instances, it is necessary to use photogrammetric rec-
tification to remove these distortions and provide accurate map measurements2. Failing this, the central portions of high
altitude photographs can be resampled with some success.
RESAMPLE is a module of major importance, and it is essential that one learn to use it effectively. Doing so also requires
a thorough understanding of reference systems and their associated parameters such as datums and projections. The
chapter on Georeferencing provides an in-depth discussion of these issues.

Image Enhancement
Image enhancement is concerned with the modification of images to make them more suited to the capabilities of human
vision. Regardless of the extent of digital intervention, visual analysis invariably plays a very strong role in all aspects of
remote sensing. While the range of image enhancement techniques is broad, the following fundamental issues form the
backbone of this area:

Contrast Stretch
Digital sensors have a wide range of output values to accommodate the strongly varying reflectance values that can be
found in different environments. However, in any single environment, it is often the case that only a narrow range of val-
ues will occur over most areas. Grey level distributions thus tend to be very skewed. Contrast manipulation procedures are
thus essential to most visual analyses. Figure 3-6 shows TM Band 3 (visible red) and its histogram. Note that the values of
the image are quite skewed. The right image of the figure shows the same image band after a linear stretch between values
12 and 60 has been applied. In IDRISI, this type of contrast enhancement may be performed interactively through Com-
poser’s Layer Properties while the image is displayed. This is normally used for visual analysis only—original data values

1. Satellite-based scanner imagery contains a variety of inherent geometric problems such as skew (caused by rotation of the earth underneath the satel-
lite as it is in the process of scanning a complete image) and scanner distortion (caused by the fact that the instantaneous field of view (IFOV) covers
more territory at the ends of scan lines, where the angle of view is very oblique, than in the middle). With commercially-marketed satellite imagery, such
as Landsat, IRS and SPOT, most elements of systematic geometric restoration associated with image capture are corrected by the distributors of the
imagery. Thus, for the end user, the only geometric operation that typically needs to be undertaken is a rubber-sheet resampling in order to rectify the
image to a map base. Many commercial distributors will perform this rectification for an additional fee.

2. Photogrammetry is the science of taking spatial measurements from aerial photographs. In order to provide a full rectification, it is necessary to have
stereoscopic images—photographs which overlap enough (e.g., 60% in the along-track direction and 10% between flight lines) to provide two independent
images of each part of the landscape. Using these stereoscopic pairs and ground control points of known position and height, it is possible to fully re-
create the geometry of the viewing conditions, and thereby not only rectify measurements from such images, but also derive measurements of terrain
height. The rectified photographs are called orthophotos. The height measurements may be used to produce digital elevation models.

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 28

are used in numeric analyses. New images with stretched values are produced with the module STRETCH.

Linear Stretch

Figure 3-6

Composite Generation
For visual analysis, color composites make fullest use of the capabilities of the human eye. Depending upon the graphics
system in use, composite generation ranges from simply selecting the bands to use, to more involved procedures of band
combination and associated contrast stretch. Figure 3-7 shows several composites made with different band combinations
from the same set of TM images. (See Figure 3-5 for TM band definitions.) The IDRISI module COMPOSITE is used to
construct three-band 24-bit composite images for visual analysis.

RGB=bands 3,2,1 RGB=bands 4,3,2 RGB=bands 4,5,3 RGB=bands 7,4,2

Figure 3-7

Digital Filtering
One of the most intriguing capabilities of digital analysis is the ability to apply digital filters. Filters can be used to provide
edge enhancement (sometimes called crispening), to remove image blur, and to isolate lineaments and directional trends, to
mention just a few. The IDRISI module FILTER is used to apply standard filters and to construct and apply user-defined
filters.

Pansharpening
Pansharpening is the process of merging lower resolution multispectral imagery with the higher resolution panchromatic
image. Typically, the panchromatic band associated with most systems, e.g., SPOT, IKONOS or QuickBird, are captured
across the visible range of the spectrum affording them a higher resolution, commensurately giving them better detail in
shape and texture. But what they gain in clarity penalizes them in regards to their spectral properties, unlike the multispec-
tral bands. Merging the two results in increasing the resolution of the multispectral imagery while preserving its spectral

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 29

information.

Figure 3-8

Panchromatic merge using Quickbird imagery - multi-

spectral at 2.4 meters, panchromatic at 0.6 meters.
Raw image is on left. Image on right is after the
merge. Note the increased spatial resolution and
heightened texture.

In IDRISI the module PANSHARPEN is used to pansharpen multispectral images using the panchromatic band. Three
methods are available: color space transformation, principal components analysis, and local regression.

Image Classification
Image classification refers to the computer-assisted interpretation of remotely sensed images. The procedures involved
are treated in detail in the chapter titled Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery. This section provides a brief over-
view.
Although some procedures are able to incorporate information about such image characteristics as texture and context,
the majority of image classification is based solely on the detection of the spectral signatures (i.e., spectral response pat-
terns) of landcover classes. The success with which this can be done will depend on two things: 1) the presence of distinc-
tive signatures for the landcover classes of interest in the band set being used; and 2) the ability to reliably distinguish
these signatures from other spectral response patterns that may be present.
There are two general approaches to image classification: supervised and unsupervised. They differ in how the classification is
performed. In the case of supervised classification, the software system delineates specific landcover types based on sta-
tistical characterization data drawn from known examples in the image (known as training sites). With unsupervised clas-
sification, however, clustering software is used to uncover the commonly occurring landcover types, with the analyst
providing interpretations of those cover types at a later stage.

Supervised Classification
The first step in supervised classification is to identify examples of the information classes (i.e., landcover types) of inter-
est in the image. These are called training sites. The software system is then used to develop a statistical characterization of
the reflectances for each information class. This stage is often called signature analysis and may involve developing a charac-
terization as simple as the mean or the range of reflectances on each band, or as complex as detailed analyses of the mean,
variances and covariances over all bands.
Once a statistical characterization has been achieved for each information class, the image is then classified by examining
the reflectances for each pixel and making a decision about which of the signatures it resembles most. There are several
techniques for making these decisions, called classifiers. Most image processing software will offer several, based on varying
decision rules. IDRISI offers a wide range of options falling into three groups, depending upon the nature of the output
desired and the nature of the input bands.
Hard Classifiers
The distinguishing characteristic of hard classifiers is that they all make a definitive decision about the landcover class to
which any pixel belongs. IDRISI offers a host of supervised classifiers in this group. Some like parallelepiped (PIPED),
minimum distance to means (MINDIST), maximum likelihood (MAXLIKE), linear discriminant analysis (FISHER), and
Fuzzy ARTMAP neural network only output one hard classified map. Others can output both a hard and soft outputs.

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 30

These include: multi-layer perceptron (MLP) neural network, self-organizing map (SOM) neural network, k-nearest neigh-
bor (KNN), and classification tree analysis (CTA). All these classifiers differ only in the manner in which they develop
and use a statistical characterization of the training site data. Of the list, the maximum likelihood procedure is unquestion-
ably the most widely used classifier in the classification of remotely sensed imagery.
A distinctive hard classifier is the segmentation classification routine in IDRISI. The module SEGCLASS classifies imag-
ery using a majority rule algorithm that is applied to image segments created by the module SEGMENTATION.
Soft Classifiers
Contrary to hard classifiers, soft classifiers do not make a definitive decision about the landcover class to which each pixel
belongs. Rather, they develop statements of the degree to which each pixel belongs to each of the landcover classes being
considered. Thus, for example, a soft classifier might indicate that a pixel has a 0.72 probability of being forest, a 0.24
probability of being pasture, and a 0.04 probability of being bare ground. A hard classifier would resolve this uncertainty
by concluding that the pixel was forest. However, a soft classifier makes this uncertainty explicitly available, for any of a
variety of reasons. For example, the analyst might conclude that the uncertainty arises because the pixel contains more
than one cover type and could use the probabilities as indications of the relative proportion of each. This is known as sub-
pixel classification. Alternatively, the analyst may conclude that the uncertainty arises because of unrepresentative training
site data and therefore may wish to combine these probabilities with other evidence before hardening the decision to a final
conclusion.
IDRISI offers many soft classifiers. Along with those listed above as hybrid hard and soft classifiers, also included are
classifiers that only output soft images: Bayesian (BAYCLASS), Mahalanobis typicalities (MAHALCLASS), Dempster-
Shafer belief (BELCLASS), linear spectral unmixing (UNMIX), and fuzzy (FUZCLASS) classifiers. The results from
these five can be hardened using the module HARDEN. The difference between them relates to the logic by which uncer-
tainty is specified—Bayesian, Dempster-Shafer, and Fuzzy Sets. In addition, the system supplies a variety of additional
tools specifically designed for the analysis of sub-pixel mixtures (e.g., UNMIX, BELCALC and MAXSET).
Hyperspectral Classifiers
All of the classifiers mentioned above operate on multispectral imagery—images where several spectral bands have been
captured simultaneously as independently accessible image components. Extending this logic to many bands produces
what has come to be known as hyperspectral imagery.
Although there is essentially no difference between hyperspectral and multispectral imagery (i.e., they differ only in
degree), the volume of data and high spectral resolution of hyperspectral images does lead to differences in the way that
they are handled. IDRISI provides special facilities for creating hyperspectral signatures either from training sites or from
libraries of spectral response patterns developed under lab conditions (HYPERSIG) and an automated hyperspectral sig-
nature extraction routine (HYPERAUTOSIG). These signatures can then be applied to any of several hyperspectral clas-
sifiers: spectral angle mapper (HYPERSAM), minimum distance to means (HYPERMIN), linear spectral unmixing
(HYPERUNMIX), orthogonal subspace projection (HYPEROSP), and absorption area analysis (HYPERABSORB). An
unsupervised classifier (see next section) for hyperspectral imagery (HYPERUSP) is also available.

Unsupervised Classification
In contrast to supervised classification, where we tell the system about the character (i.e., signature) of the information
classes we are looking for, unsupervised classification requires no advance information about the classes of interest.
Rather, it examines the data and breaks it into the most prevalent natural spectral groupings, or clusters, present in the
data. The analyst then identifies these clusters as landcover classes through a combination of familiarity with the region
and ground truth visits. For example, the system might identify classes for asphalt and cement which the analyst might
later group together, creating an information class called pavement.
IDRISI includes several unsupervised techniques. The module CLUSTER performs classification based on a set of input
images using a multi-dimensional histogram peak technique. While attractive conceptually, unsupervised classification has

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 31

traditionally been hampered by very slow algorithms. However, the CLUSTER procedure provided in IDRISI is extraor-
dinarily fast and can thus be used iteratively in conjunction with ground truth data to arrive at a very strong classification.
With suitable ground truth and accuracy assessment procedures, this tool can provide a remarkably rapid means of pro-
ducing quality landcover data on a continuing basis.
The KMEANS module is a true K-means clustering routine with several cluster rules (random seed, random partition,
and diagonal axis) and stopping criteria thresholds. Two of IDRISI’s neural network modules also allow for unsupervised
classification, self-organizing map (SOM) and Fuzzy ARTMAP. An ISODATA routine is included also.
In addition to the above-mentioned techniques, two modules bridge both supervised and unsupervised classifications.
ISOCLUST uses a procedure known as Self-Organizing Cluster Analysis to classify up to 7 raw bands with the user specify-
ing the number of clusters to process. The procedure uses the CLUSTER module to initiate a set of clusters that seed an
iterative application of the MAXLIKE procedure, each stage using the results of the previous stage as the training sites for
this supervised procedure. The result is an unsupervised classification that converges on a final set of stable members
using a supervised approach (hence the notion of "self-organizing"). MAXSET is also, at its core, a supervised procedure.
However, while the procedure starts with training sites that characterize individual classes, it results in a classification that
includes not only these specific classes, but also significant (but unknown) mixtures that might exist. Thus the end result
has much the character of that of an unsupervised approach.

Accuracy Assessment
A vital step in the classification process, whether supervised or unsupervised, is the assessment of the accuracy of the
final images produced. This involves identifying a set of sample locations (such as with the SAMPLE module) that are vis-
ited in the field. The landcover found in the field is then compared to that which was mapped in the image for the same
location. Statistical assessments of accuracy may then be derived for the entire study area, as well as for individual classes
(using ERRMAT).
In an iterative approach, the error matrix produced (sometimes referred to as a confusion matrix), may be used to identify
particular cover types for which errors are in excess of that desired. The information in the matrix about which covers are
being mistakenly included in a particular class (errors of commission) and those that are being mistakenly excluded (errors of
omission) from that class can be used to refine the classification approach.

Image Transformation
Digital Image Processing offers a limitless range of possible transformations on remotely sensed data. IDRISI includes
many transformations including: Principal Components Analysis (PCA) allowing both standardized and unstandardized
transformations; Canonical Components Analysis (CCA); Minimum Noise Fraction (MNF) that maximizes the signal to
noise ratio; Temporal Fourier Analysis (TFA) that performs harmonic analysis on temporal images; Color Space Transfor-
mation (COLSPACE); texture calculations (TEXTURE); blackbody thermal transformations (THERMAL); green vegeta-
tion indices (VEGINDEX); and Tasseled Cap (TASSCAP). In addition, a wide variety of ad hoc transformations (such as
image ratioing) that can be most effectively accomplished with the Image Calculator utility. Two transformations are men-
tioned specifically below (VEGINDEX and PCA), because of their special significance in environmental monitoring
applications.

Vegetation Indices
There are a variety of vegetation indices that have been developed to help in the monitoring of vegetation. Most are based
on the very different interactions between vegetation and electromagnetic energy in the red and near infrared wave-
lengths. Refer back to Figure 3-4, which includes a generalized spectral response pattern for green broad leaf vegetation.
As can be seen, reflectance in the red region (about 0.6 - 0.7μ) is low because of absorption by leaf pigments (principally
chlorophyll). The infrared region (about 0.8 - 0.9 μ), however, characteristically shows high reflectance because of scatter-
ing by the cell structure of the leaves. A very simple vegetation index can thus be achieved by comparing the measure of
infrared reflectance to that of the red reflectance.

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 32

Although a number of variants of this basic logic have been developed, the one which has received the most attention is
the normalized difference vegetation index (NDVI). It is calculated in the following manner:
NDVI = (NIR - R) / (NIR + R)
where NIR = Near Infrared
and R = Red
Figure 3-9 shows NDVI calculated with TM bands 3 and 4 for the same area shown in Figures 3-5, 3-6 and 3-7.

Normalized Difference Vegetation Index

-1.00
-0.88
-0.77
-0.65
-0.53
-0.41
-0.30
-0.18
-0.06
0.05
0.17
0.29
0.41
0.52
0.64
0.76
0.88

Figure 3-9

This kind of calculation is quite simple for a raster GIS or image processing software system, and the result has been
shown to correlate well with ground measurements of biomass. Although NDVI needs specific calibration to be used as
an actual measure of biomass, many agencies have found the index to be useful as a relative measure for monitoring pur-
poses. For example, the United Nations Food and Agricultural Organization (FAO) Africa Real Time Information System
(ARTEMIS) and the USAID Famine Early Warning System (FEWS) programs both use continental scale NDVI images
derived from the NOAA-AVHRR system to produce vegetation index images for the entire continent of Africa every ten
days.3
While the NDVI measure has proven to be useful in a variety of contexts, a large number of alternative indices have been
proposed to deal with special environments, such as arid lands. IDRISI offers a wide variety of these indices (19) in the
VEGINDEX module. The chapter on Vegetation Indices offers a detailed discussion of their characteristics and poten-
tial application.

Principal Components Analysis

Principal Components Analysis (PCA) is a linear transformation technique related to Factor Analysis. Given a set of
image bands, PCA produces a new set of images, known as components, that are uncorrelated with one another and are
ordered in terms of the amount of variance they explain from the original band set.
PCA has traditionally been used in remote sensing as a means of data compaction. For a typical multispectral image band
set, it is common to find that the first two or three components are able to explain virtually all of the original variability in
reflectance values. Later components thus tend to be dominated by noise effects. By rejecting these later components, the
volume of data is reduced with no appreciable loss of information.
Given that the later components are dominated by noise, it is also possible to use PCA as a noise removal technique. The

3. An archive dataset of monthly NDVI images for Africa is available on CD from Clark Labs. The Africa NDVI data CD contains monthly NDVI max-
imum value composite images (1982-1999), average and standard deviation of monthly NDVI images for each month over the same time period,
monthly NDVI anomaly images, and ancillary data (DEM, landuse and landcover, country boundaries and coast line) for Africa in IDRISI format. Con-
tact Clark Labs for more information.

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 33

output from the PCA module in IDRISI includes the coefficients of both the forward and backward transformations. By
zeroing out the coefficients of the noise components in the reverse transformation, a new version of the original bands
can be produced with these noise elements removed.
Recently, PCA has also been shown to have special application in environmental monitoring. In cases where multispectral
images are available for two dates, the bands from both images are submitted to a PCA as if they all came from the same
image. In these cases, changes between the two dates tend to emerge in the later components. More dramatically, if a time
series of NDVI images (or a similar single-band index) is submitted to the analysis, a very detailed analysis of environmen-
tal changes and trends can be achieved. In this case, the first component will show the typical NDVI over the entire series,
while each successive component illustrates change events in an ordered sequence of importance. By examining these
images, along with graphs of their correlation with the individual bands in the original series, important insights can be
gained into the nature of changes and trends over the time series. The vertical application Earth Trends Modeler in
IDRISI is a specially tailored to facilitate the processing and analysis of time series data, including the incorporation of
PCA and many other techniques.

Conclusions
Remotely sensed data is important to a broad range of disciplines. This will continue to be the case and will likely grow
with the greater availability of data promised by an increasing number of operational systems. The availability of this data,
coupled with the computer software necessary to analyze it, provides opportunities for environmental scholars and plan-
ners, particularly in the areas of landuse mapping and change detection, that would have been unheard of only a few
decades ago.
The inherent raster structure of remotely sensed data makes it readily compatible with raster GIS. Thus, while IDRISI
provides a wide suite of image processing tools, they are completely integrated with the broader set of raster GIS tools the
system provides.

Chapter 3 Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing 34

IDRISI System Overview
IDRISI consists of a main interface program (with a menu and toolbar system) and a collection of nearly 300 program
modules that provide facilities for the input, display, and analysis of geographic and remotely sensed data. These geographic
data are described in the form of map layers—elementary map components that describe a single theme. Examples of map
layers might include a roads layer, an elevation layer, a soil type layer, a remotely sensed reflectance layer and so on. All
analyses act upon map layers. For display, a series of map layers may be brought together into a map composition.
Because geographic data may be of different types, IDRISI incorporates the two basic forms of map layers: raster image lay-
ers and vector layers.1 Although IDRISI is adept at the input and display of both image and vector layers, analysis is primarily
oriented towards the use of image layers. In addition, IDRISI offers a complete image processing system for remotely
sensed image data. As a result, it is commonly described as a raster system. However, IDRISI does offer strong capabili-
ties for the analysis of vector attribute data, as well as rapid vector-to-raster conversion routines. Thus the system offers a
powerful set of tools for geographic analyses that require both types of map layers.

System Operation
The IDRISI Application Window
When IDRISI is open, the application window will completely occupy the screen (in Windows terminology, it is automat-
ically maximized). Though not required, it is recommended that it be kept maximized because many of the dialog boxes
and images you will display will require a substantial amount of display space.2 The IDRISI application window includes
the menu, the toolbar, IDRISI Explorer, and the status bar.

The Menu System

The menu system is at the top of the application window. You can activate it either with the mouse or by holding the ALT
key and pressing the underlined key of the main menu entry. You can then use the mouse or arrow keys to move around.
If you select a menu option that includes a right-pointing arrow, a submenu will appear. Clicking on a menu option with-
out a right-pointing arrow will cause a dialog box for that module to appear.

The Toolbar
Just below the menu is a set of buttons that are collectively known as the toolbar. Each button represents either a program
module or an interactive operation that can be selected by clicking on that button with the mouse. Some of these buttons
toggle between an active and an inactive state. When active, the button appears to remain depressed after being clicked. In
these cases, the button can be released by clicking it again. You will also notice that some buttons may not always be avail-
able for use. This is indicated when the button icon appears grey. Hold the cursor over an icon to cause the name of the
function or module represented by that icon to momentarily appear. The set of icons represents interactive display func-
tions as well as some of the most commonly-used modules.

1. For an in-depth discussion of raster and vector data structures, see the chapter Introduction to GIS in this volume.

2. For this reason, we recommend that the operating system taskbar be set to "autohide" so that it does not constantly occupy much-needed screen
space. To do so, go to Start/Settings/Taskbar and toggle on the autohide option.

Chapter 4 IDRISI System Overview 35

 Menu
Toolbar Composer

IDRISI
Explorer

Status Bar Progress

The Status Bar

At the bottom of the screen is the status bar. The status bar provides a variety of information about program operation.
When maps and map layers are displayed on the screen and the mouse is moved over one of these windows, the status bar
will indicate the position of the cursor within that map in both column and row image coordinates and X and Y map ref-
erence system coordinates. In addition, the status bar indicates the scale of the screen representation as a Representative
Fraction (RF).3
The status bar will also indicate the progress of the most recently launched analytical operation with a graphic progress
bar as well as a percent done measure. Since IDRISI has been designed to permit multitasking of operations, it is possible
that more than one operation may be working simultaneously. To see a listing of all active processes and their status, sim-
ply double click on the progress bar panel at the bottom right of the screen. Modules may also be terminated from here.

IDRISI Explorer
IDRISI Explorer is a general purpose utility to manage and explore IDRISI files and projects. Use IDRISI Explorer to set
your project environment, manage your group files, review metadata, display files, and organize your data. Tools are pro-
vided to copy, delete, rename, and move. IDRISI Explorer can also be used to view the structure of IDRISI file formats
and to drag and drop files into IDRISI dialog boxes. IDRISI Explorer is permanently docked to the left of the IDRISI
desktop. It cannot be moved but it can be minimized, horizontally resized and closed.

Program Modules
Program modules may be accessed in three ways:

3. A Representative Fraction expresses the scale of a map as a fractional proportion. Thus, an RF of 1/10,000 indicates that the image on the screen is
one ten-thousandth of the actual size of the corresponding features on the ground. IDRISI automatically determines your screen resolution and dimen-
sions, which, in combination with the minimum and maximum X and Y coordinates of the image or vector layer, are used to determine the RF for any
display window.

Chapter 4 IDRISI System Overview 36

1. by selecting the module in the menu structure and activating it with a click of the mouse,
2. by selecting its program icon on the toolbar just below the menu, and
3. by typing in or selecting the module name from the alphabetical list provided by the Shortcut utility.
Each of these methods activates a dialog box for that module. After entering the required information for the operation
to be performed and clicking on the OK button, the program module will run.

Projects
Program modules act upon data—map layers and tabular data stored in data files. These files are stored in folders (also
known as directories) and sub-folders (sub-directories) on drives in the computer. The location of any specific data file is
thus designated by a name consisting of the filename plus the drive, folder and sub-folder locations. Collectively, these are
known as a Project (since they specify the route to a particular collection of data). For example, "c:\massachusetts\middle-
sex\census_tracts.vct" might designate a vector layer of census tracts contained in the Middlesex County sub-folder of the
Massachusetts folder on hard disk drive C.
IDRISI can work with files from any folder (including network folders). However, it can often be a nuisance to continu-
ally specify folder and sub-folder names, particularly when a specific project typically accesses data in a limited set of fold-
ers. To simplify matters, IDRISI allows you to specify these folders as belonging to a specific project. When the paths to
these folders are designated in a Project, IDRISI finds data very easily and with minimal user intervention.

The Project Working Folder

Within any Project, the most important folder is the Working Folder. Users may choose to store all of the data for a project
in the Working Folder (particularly for smaller projects). However, for larger projects, or projects requiring libraries of
carefully organized and protected data sets, additional Resource Folders can also be added to the Project.
While the user is always able to specify any location for input or output data, designating the most commonly-used folders
in a Project facilitates the use of IDRISI. For instance, if input filenames are given without a path designation, IDRISI
automatically looks in the Working Folder first, then in each Resource Folder in turn to locate the file. Similarly, if no alter-
native path is specified, output data are automatically written to the Working Folder.

Project Resource Folders

Resource Folders contain data that can be accessed quickly through the IDRISI Pick List (see below). A Project can con-
tain any number of Resource Folders. To the user, the Working Folder and all Resource Folders function as a single proj-
ect folder. For example, one might ask IDRISI to display a raster map layer named "landuse". If no folder information
was supplied, IDRISI first looks for the file in the Working Folder, and then each Resource Folder in turn, ultimately dis-
playing the first instance it finds. This is very convenient as it allows the user to enter filenames without paths. However, if
duplicate filenames exist in separate folders that are part of the same project, the user must exercise caution and remem-
ber the order in which IDRISI accesses the project folders.

Setting Projects
Establishing a Project for the Working and Resource Folders can be set in IDRISI Explorer from the File menu. Once in
IDRISI Explorer use the Projects tab to set your folders. You can also open IDRISI Explorer by clicking the leftmost
icon on the toolbar.

Chapter 4 IDRISI System Overview 37

Working with IDRISI Dialog Boxes
When any module is activated, a dialog box appears with information on data or option choices that are required for the
module to run. Virtually all input boxes must be filled with information before the module can be run. Only the title and
measurement units input boxes under the Output Documentation button can be left blank. (It is recommended, however,
that these boxes also be filled.) In some cases, input boxes already contain values, or will fill in with values as other infor-
mation is entered. These are default values that may be freely edited. In those cases where a set of choices should be
made, the most common settings are normally pre-selected. These should be examined and changed if necessary. The sys-
tem will display an error message in cases where a needed element of data has been left out.

Pick Lists
Whenever a dialog box requires the name of an input data file (such as a raster image), you have two choices for input of
that value. The first is simply to type the name into the input box. Alternatively, you can activate a Pick List of choices by
either double-clicking into the input box, or clicking the Pick List button to the right of the input box (the small button
with the ellipses characters "..."). The Pick List is organized as a tree directory of all files of the required type that exist in
the Working and Resource Folders. The Working folder is always at the top of the list, followed by each Resource Folder
in the order in which they are listed in the Project Environment. The files displayed in the Pick List depend upon the par-
ticular input box from which the Pick List was launched. All IDRISI file types are designated by unique filename exten-
sions. If an input box requires a raster image, for example, the Pick List launched from that input box will display only
those files that have an .rst extension.
You may select a file from the Pick List by first highlighting it with a click of the left mouse button, and then selecting it
by clicking the OK button or pressing the Enter key. Alternatively, double-clicking the highlighted entry will also cause it
to be selected. The Pick List will then disappear, and the name of that file will appear in the input box. Note that you can
also choose a file that is not in the current project environment by clicking on the Browse button at the bottom of the
Pick List.

Output File Names

You will normally want to give output filenames that are meaningful to you. It is common to generate many output files in

Chapter 4 IDRISI System Overview 38

a single analysis and descriptive filenames are helpful for keeping track of these files.4 File names may be long and can
contain spaces and most keyboard characters (all except / \ : * ? " < > and |). It is not necessary for the user to specify
the three-letter filename extension as IDRISI takes care of this. A full path may be entered in the output filename box. If
no path is entered, the output file will automatically be written to the Working Folder that is specified in the project envi-
ronment.
Clicking on the Pick List button to the right of the output filename box will bring up a standard Windows Save As file-
name dialog box. Here the user may select any folder for the output file and may also enter the filename. When the pick
list button is used, an automatically-generated output filename will be entered by default. To change this name, simply
click into the filename box and type the desired name.
As stated above, users typically give descriptive filenames to help avoid confusion as the database grows. However,
IDRISI can also generate automatic names for output data files. Automatic output names are intended for the quick nam-
ing of temporary files.
Automatic output filenames begin with a user-defined three-letter prefix (set to TMP by default),5 followed by a three
digit number. By default, filenames begin with TMP001 and progress up to TMP999. As these files are normally tempo-
rary, overwrite protection (see below) is disabled for files with names that begin with the designated prefix followed by
three digits. Note that after exiting IDRISI, the cycle will begin again with TMP001 the next time IDRISI is used. Since
the numbering sequence starts from 001 with each new session, the data in such files is likely to be lost in a subsequent
session unless it is intentionally saved under a new name.
To use the autoname feature, move to the output filename box concerned, and either double-click in the box or click the
Pick List button. If the double-click is used, an automatic filename will be generated and placed into the output filename
box. Since no path is specified with this method, output will automatically go to the Working Folder.
In the case where the pick button is clicked beside an output filename box, a standard Windows Save As dialog box will
appear with the temporary name (e.g., TMP001) already selected.

4. The documentation file for output raster and vector data files includes in the lineage field the command line from which the layer was created. This
may be viewed with the Metadata utility in IDRISI Explorer.

5. The automatically-generated output file prefix may be changed in the User Preferences option of the File menu.

Chapter 4 IDRISI System Overview 39

Overwrite Protection
By default, IDRISI checks if the given output file already exists. If it does, it will ask whether you wish to overwrite it. If
not, you will be returned to the dialog box where you can enter a different name.
There are three exceptions to this logic. The first is when an automatic output name is generated (see the section immedi-
ately above). The second is when the user removes overwrite protection in the User Preferences dialog under the File
menu. And the third is when modules are run in macro mode.

Getting Help
While using IDRISI, help is always close at hand. IDRISI contains an extensive on-line Help System that can be accessed
in a variety of ways. The most general means of accessing help is to select it from the main IDRISI menu. However, each
program module also contains a help button. In this case, help is context sensitive, accessing the section in Help associ-
ated with that particular module. In either case, it is worth becoming familiar with the many options the Help System pro-
vides. To do so, select the Using Help option from the main Help menu.

Chapter 4 IDRISI System Overview 40

Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Col-
lections and Data Structures

Map Layers
Map layers are the fundamental units of display and analysis in GIS. A map layer is an elementary theme, a single phenom-
enon that can be mapped across space. Examples would include a landuse layer, a roads layer, an elevation layer, a soils
layer, and so on. Map layers, then, are somewhat different from traditional maps. Traditional maps usually consist of sev-
eral map layers. For example, a topographic map sheet would typically consist of a contour layer, a forest cover layer, an
administrative boundaries layer, a roads layer and a settlements layer. In IDRISI, this same concept is applied. A map is a
graphic representation of space that is composed of one or more map layers using a tool called Composer.
This breakdown of the map into its elementary constituents offers important advantages. Clearly it allows for the simple
production of highly customized maps; we simply pull together the layers we wish to see together. However, the more
important reason for storing data this way is that layers are the basic variables used by the GIS in analytical modeling.
Thus, for example, we might create a map of soil erosion as a mathematical function of soil type, slope, landcover, and
precipitation layers. Indeed, the breakdown of geographic data into layers allows for the production of an extraordinary
range of mathematical and logical models.

Map Layer Types

As detailed in the Introduction to GIS chapter, there are two basic types of layers in GIS: raster image layers, and vector
layers.1 Some systems deal exclusively with one or the other type. IDRISI incorporates both since they each have special
advantages. However, while they have equal stature in terms of display and database query, IDRISI offers a far broader
range of analytical operations for raster layers. This is partly because of IDRISI's historic development from an almost
purely raster system and partly because the range of analytical operations possible in GIS is far greater with raster layers
(as a consequence of their simplicity and predictable regularity).
All IDRISI raster layers have the same basic structure. Sub-types exist only in terms of the numeric data type that is used
to record cell values. As one can easily imagine, raster images are high in data volume. Thus, small changes in the underly-
ing data type can make huge differences in storage requirements. IDRISI supports raster images stored with byte, integer,
and real numbers as well as two special formats for the storage of full-color images.
Vector layers describe the location and character of distinct geographic features. Sub-types include point, line, polygon
and text layers. Point features are phenomena that can be described by a single point, such as meteorological data or (at
small scales) town locations. As the name suggests, line vector layers describe linear features such as rivers and roads. The
term polygon may be less familiar. Polygons refer to areas. Because the boundaries of the areas are made up of straight line
segments between points, the figure formed is technically a polygon. The term polygon has thus become part of the termi-
nology of GIS. Finally, text layers are used to describe the location and orientation of text labels.

Map Layer Names

All analytical modules in IDRISI act on map layers. Thus the input and output filenames that are given in IDRISI opera-
tions are typically those of map layers. In your normal use of IDRISI, map layers are specified with simple names that do
not need to express their data path (the IDRISI Project Environment defines the paths to your Working and Resource

1. In IDRISI, the terms raster layer, raster image layer and image are all used interchangeably.

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 41
folders). It is also not necessary to specify their filename extensions (since IDRISI looks for and creates specific exten-
sions automatically).
Consistent with the 32-bit variants of the Windows operating system, layer names may contain any letter of the alphabet
as well as numerals, spaces and most symbols (excluding \ / : * ? " < > and |). For example, layers might have names such
as "soils" or "landuse 1996." In principle, filenames can be up to 255 characters in length. However, in practical use, it is
recommended that they be only as long as necessary so the entire filename will be visible in the Pick Lists and dialog input
boxes.
In normal use, no distinction is made between image and vector layer names. However, their type is always known by the
system—by the context in which they were created and by the file extension that the system uses internally to store each
layer. Thus a raster image layer named "soils" would be stored as "soils.rst" internally, while a vector layer named "soils"
would be stored as "soils.vct". As a result, it is possible to have raster and vector layers of the same name. However, most
users of IDRISI allow this to occur only in cases where the two files store vector and image manifestations of the same
underlying data.
When filenames are input into IDRISI dialog boxes, the system always knows the appropriate layer type in use. Indeed,
only those files of the appropriate type for that operation will display in the Pick List.

Map Layer Data Files

While we refer to a map layer by a simple name, it is actually stored by IDRISI as a pair of data files. One contains the spa-
tial data, while the second contains information about those data (i.e., documentation or metadata). Thus, while raster
images are stored in data files with an ".rst" extension, they each have an accompanying documentation file with an ".rdc"
extension (i.e., raster documentation). Similarly, while vector data files have a ".vct" extension, each has a companion doc-
umentation file with a ".vdc" extension (i.e., vector documentation). In use, however, you would refer to these layers by
their simple layer names (i.e., "soils" and "districts" respectively). The contents of data documentation files are described
in detail below in the section on file structures.

Vector Layer Collections

Sometimes it makes sense to group map layers together into collections. A good example is when you have a set of vector
features associated with a data table. For instance, a vector file might be created of census tracts within a city. Each of
these tracts possesses multiple attributes such as median income, population density, median educational attainment, and
so on. Each of these attributes can be linked to a vector file defining the geography of the census tracts and displayed as a
map layer. Thus the combination of the vector file and the entire database table constitutes a collection of map layers.
A vector collection produced by linking a geographic or feature definition vector file (such as the digital representation of
census tracks mentioned above) with a database table.2 This is called a linked-table collection and is established with a vec-
tor link file (.vlx) and is created in Database Workshop. All the elements of the collection must reside in the same folder.
Vector link files (.vlx) associate a feature definition vector file with a database table. As a consequence, each of the fields
(columns) of data in the data table becomes a layer, with the entire set of fields producing a linked-table collection. As you
will see, IDRISI has special features for the display and analysis of relationships between layers in such a collection. All
that is required is a link file that can establish four important properties of the collection:
1. the feature definition (i.e., spatial frame) vector file;

2. Feature definition vector files and image files describe the geography of features but not their attributes. Rather, the features have identifier values that
are used to associate attributes stored in database tables or attribute values files.

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 42
2. an associated attribute database;
3. a specific table within that database; and
4. the database field that contains the identifiers which can associate database records with vector features (the link
field).
In Database Workshop, the Establish Display Link utility is used to construct these link files. Only vector point, line or
polygon layers can be specified as a feature definition vector file. The database files and associated tables must be Micro-
soft Access Database Engine files with an ".mdb" extension.

Raster Group Layer

A group of independent raster layers can be associated into a raster group file (.rgf). As the name suggests, a group file is
simply a listing of a set of independent layers that one wishes to associate together. For example, a group file might con-
sist of the seven bands of imagery that make up a Landsat satellite image. Many of the image processing procedures in
IDRISI allow you to specify a group file as input rather than each individual band to be used. This saves a lot of time
when the same group of images is used in several procedures. However, there are more compelling reasons for creating
group files than as a simple means for specifying collections of files.
1. When more than one member of a group is displayed on the screen, you have the option to treat them identi-
cally during zoom and pan operations. Thus when one member is zoomed or panned, all other members of that group
that are on the screen will zoom or pan simultaneously.
2. When the feature properties option is activated, queries about the data values for a specific layer will yield a table (or
optionally, a graph) of the values for all attributes in the collection at that location.
IDRISI Explorer (from the toolbar or the File menu) is used to create raster group files. Note that there is also a special
variant of a group file known as a time series file that is used for time series analysis. Signature files used in image classifica-
tion may also be collected together in signature group files and hyperspectral signature group files. These group files are also cre-
ated with IDRISI Explorer.

Collection and Group Member Naming Conventions

To specify a vector layer that belongs to a collection, one uses the "dot" convention—i.e., the reference is a combination
of the collection name and the layer name, separated by a dot. For example, suppose one had a link file named
CensusTractData99 associating a feature definition vector file with a database table of census statistics. Each of the layers
in the collection would be referenced by a combination of the collection name and the appropriate field name in the table.
Thus the Median_Income layer would be referred to as:
CensusTractData99.Median_Income
Similarly, one might create a group file of the seven multispectral bands in a Landsat image. Perhaps the bands have names
such as OahuBand1, OahuBand2, etc. If the group file that was created to associate them was named LandsatTM, then a
reference to the second band would be as follows:
LandsatTM.OahuBand2

Pick Lists for Group File and Collection Display

The Pick List that IDRISI constructs to facilitate the selection of input files are collection-aware and group-aware. For exam-
ple, when a raster image is required, the Pick List will display raster group files as well as raster images. Group files are
immediately evident in a Pick List by the "+" sign at their point of connection to the directory tree. If you click on the
group file, it will expand to show each of the members. These members are shown with their simple names. However, if

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 43
you choose one, IDRISI will enter its full reference (using the dot convention) into the input box. In some cases, a group
filename may itself be selected as input for a dialog box.

Attribute Files
An attribute file contains information about the characteristics of features, but not the geographic definition of those fea-
tures. IDRISI supports two forms of attribute files, database tables and ASCII values files.

Data Tables
IDRISI incorporates the Microsoft Access Database Engine within its Database Workshop facility. Thus, this form of an
IDRISI attribute files are tables and have ".mdb" extensions, and can also be used and modified with Microsoft Access or
any other Access-compatible system. The linked layer collection can only be created with this type of attribute file. Micro-
soft Access Database files may contain multiple tables, each one of which can be linked to form a layer collection. See the
chapter Database Workshop for more information about using database tables with IDRISI.

Values Files
The second form of attribute file that IDRISI uses is an ASCII values file. This has a very simple file structure that con-
tains the values for a single attribute. It is stored in ASCII text format and consists of two columns of data separated by
one or more spaces. The first column contains an identifier that can be used to associate the value with a feature (either
raster or vector), while the second column contains the attribute value. Attribute values files have an ".avl" extension.
Some modules create these as output files while others require (or can use) them as input for analyses. Attribute values
files may be imported or exported to or from a database table using Database Workshop. In addition, IDRISI provides a
procedure (ASSIGN) to assign those values to a set of features included in a raster image or vector file, and a companion
procedure (EXTRACT) to create a new values file as a statistical summary of the values in another image for the features
of a feature definition image.

Map Layer File Structures

Raster Layers (.rst)
Raster images are the most fundamental and important data type in IDRISI. They are automatically assigned an ".rst" file
extension by the system. Raster layers are both simple in structure and regular in their organization, allowing an extraordi-
nary range of analytical operations. The data structures that IDRISI uses for storing raster images are optimized for sim-
plicity and efficiency.
Raster images define a rectangular region of space by means of a fine matrix of numeric data values that describe the con-
dition or character of the landscape in each cell of a fine grid. These numeric grid cell values are used not only for analysis,
but also for display. By assigning specific colors (in a palette) to designated numeric ranges, a very fine matrix-like color
image is formed (so fine that typically the individual cells cannot be seen without zooming in to a very large scale).
In this grid-cell structure used by IDRISI, rows and columns are numbered starting from zero. Thus an image of 1000
columns and 500 rows has columns numbered from 0-999 and rows numbered from 0-499. Unlike the normal Cartesian
coordinate system, the 0,0 cell is in the top left-hand corner. Cells are numbered left-to-right as you might expect, but
rows are numbered top-to-bottom. This is common with most raster systems because of the directionality of many output
devices, particularly printers, that print from top to bottom.
While the logical structure of an image file is a grid, the actual structure, as it is stored, is a single column of numbers. For

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 44
instance, an image consisting of 3 rows by 5 columns is stored as a single column of 15 numbers. It is the image's docu-
mentation file that allows IDRISI modules to reconstruct the grid from this list. An image that looks like this:

10 15 9 10

1 14 10 11

14 13 11 10

has an image file that looks like this (if one could see it):
10
15
9
10
1
14
10
11
14
13
11
10
The raster documentation file, containing the number of rows and columns, allows the image to be correctly recreated for
display and analysis.
As mentioned earlier, the major sub-types of raster images are differentiated on the basis of the data types that are used to
represent cell values. IDRISI recognizes four raster data types: integer, byte, real, and RGB24.
1. Integers are numbers that have no fractional part and lie within the range of -32768 to +32767. Integer files are
sometimes called 16-bit integer files since they require 16 bits (i.e., 2 bytes) of memory per value (and therefore per pixel).
Integer values can be used to represent quantitative values or can be used as codes for categorical data types. For example,
a soils map may record three soil types in a particular region. Since IDRISI images are stored in numeric format, these
types can be given integer codes 1, 2 and 3. The documentation file records a legend for these, on the relationship
between the integer codes and the actual soil types.
2. Byte values are positive integer numbers ranging from 0 to 255. The byte data type is thus simply a subrange of
the integer type. It is used in cases where the number range is more limited. Since this more limited range only requires 8
bits of memory per value for storage (i.e., 1 byte), only half as much hard disk or memory space for each image is needed
compared to integer. This data type is probably the most commonly used in GIS since it provides an adequate range to
describe most qualitative map data sets and virtually all remotely-sensed data.
3. Real numbers have a fractional part such as 3.14. Real numbers are used whenever a continuous (rather than dis-
crete) data variable is being stored with great precision, or whenever the data range exceeds that of the integer data type.
The real data type of IDRISI raster images is known as single precision real numbers. Thus it can store values within a

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 45
range of ± 1 x 1038 with a precision of 7 significant figures. Single precision values provide a nice balance between range,
precision and data volume. Each number (and thus each pixel) requires 4 bytes of storage. Note that real numbers have no
discrete representation (e.g., 4.0 is the same as 3.99999999999999999999 at some level of precision). Thus, while it is pos-
sible to store whole numbers in a real data type, they cannot then be used as feature identifiers (e.g., for ASSIGN or
EXTRACT) or in modules that require byte or integer values (e.g., GROUP).
4. RGB24 data files use 24 bits (3 bytes) for each pixel to encode full color images. The internal structure is band-
interleaved-by-pixel and can encode over 16 million separate colors. RGB24 images are also constructed using the COM-
POSITE module (in the Display menu). The IDRISI display system allows for interactive and independent contrast
manipulation of the three input bands of a displayed RGB24 image. They are the preferred format for the display of full
color images.
The documentation file associated with each image records the file data type. When a new image is created, it maintains
the prevailing data type of the input image, or it produces a data type that is logical based upon standard mixed arithmetic
rules. Thus, dividing one integer data image by a second integer data image yields a real data image. IDRISI accepts inte-
ger, byte and real data types for almost all operations that would logically allow this. Some modules, though, do not make
sense with real data. For example, the GROUP operation that extracts contiguous groups can only do so for categorical
data coded with integer numbers. If the data type in an image is incorrect for a particular operation, an error message will
be displayed.
The CONVERT module can be used at any time to convert between the integer, byte, and real data types. In the case of
conversion from real numbers to either the integer or byte formats, CONVERT offers the option of converting by
rounding or by truncation.
The data type described above indicates the type of numbers stored in an image. Another parameter, the file type, indi-
cates how these numbers are stored. As with the data type, the file type of an image is recorded in its documentation file.
Image files may be stored in ASCII, binary or packed binary formats, although only the binary form is recommended (for
reasons of efficiency). Binary files are those which are stored in the native binary encoding format of the operating system
in use. In the case of IDRISI, this will be one of the Windows operating system variants. Thus, for example, the binary
coding of a real number is that adopted by Windows and the Intel hardware platform.
Binary files are efficient in both hard disk space utilization and processing time. However, the format is not universal and
not always very accessible. As a consequence, IDRISI also provides limited support for data recorded in ASCII format. A
file in ASCII format is also referred to as a text file, and can be viewed directly with any text editor (such as the Edit mod-
ule in IDRISI). The ASCII file type is primarily used to transfer files to and from other programs, since the coding system
is a recognized standard (ASCII = American Standard Code for Information Interchange). ASCII files are not an efficient
means of storing data and they cannot be displayed. You must convert your files to binary format before continuing with
your analyses. The CONVERT module converts files from ASCII to binary or binary to ASCII. Although binary files
cannot be examined directly, IDRISI provides strong data examination facilities through IDRISI Explorer on the File
menu. Binary files may be viewed as a matrix of numbers using the Show Structure utility of IDRISI Explorer. There is
rarely a need then to convert images to ASCII form.
The packed binary format is a special data compression format for binary integer or byte data, known as run-length
encoding. It played a special role in earlier MS-DOS versions of IDRISI before file compression was available at the oper-
ating system level. However, it is of limited use now that Windows takes an active role in data compression. Its support is
largely for purposes of backward compatibility with earlier versions of IDRISI. Like ASCII files, most IDRISI modules
still support the packed binary data type. However, also like ASCII files, packed binary files cannot be directly displayed.
Thus the use of this file type is also discouraged. As with other conversions, converting raster images to or from packed
binary is undertaken with the CONVERT module.

Raster Documentation Files (.rdc)

Each of the primary file types used by IDRISI (Raster, Vector and Attribute) is associated with a companion documenta-

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 46
tion file. Raster documentation files are automatically assigned an ".rdc" file extension by IDRISI.
Documentation files are always stored in ASCII format. They can be viewed and modified using the Metadata utility in
IDRISI Explorer from the toolbar icon or File menu. After specifying the file you wish to view from the file list, the con-
tents of its documentation file will then be displayed.
The documentation file consists of a series of lines containing vital information about the corresponding image file. The
first 14 characters describe the contents of the line, while the remaining characters contain the actual data. For example,
the documentation file for a soils image (soils.rst) might look like this:

file format : IDRISI Raster A.1

file title : Major Soils Groups
data type : byte
file type : binary
columns : 512
rows : 480
ref. system : US83TM18
ref. units : m
unit dist. : 1
min. X : 503000
max. X : 518360
min. Y : 4650000
max. Y : 4664400
pos'n error : unknown
resolution : 30
min. value : 0
max. value : 3
display min : 0
display max : 3
value units : classes
value error : 0.15
flag value : 0
flag def'n : background
legend cats : 3
code 1 : Podzol Soils
code 2 : Brown Podzolic Soils
code 3 : Gray-Brown Podzolic Soils
lineage : Soil polygons derived from 1:5000 scale color air photography
lineage : and ground truth, with the final compilation being adjusted to the
lineage : map base by hand.
comment : Value error determined by statistical accuracy assessment

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 47
 comment : based on a stratified random sample of 37 points.

This file contains information on major soils groups and is in byte format stored as a binary file. The image contains 512
columns and 480 rows, for a total of 245,760 values. The image is georeferenced with a reference system named
US83TM183 with each coordinate unit representing 1 meter. The minimum and maximum X and Y coordinate values
indicate the reference system coordinates of the left, right, top and bottom edges.
The position error indicates how close a feature's actual position is to its mapped position in the image. It is marked in the
example as unknown. If known, this field should record the RMS (Root Mean Square) error of locational references
derived from the bounding rectangle coordinates. This field is for documentation purposes only and is not currently used
analytically by any module.
The resolution refers to the inherent resolution of the image. In most cases, it should correspond with the result of divid-
ing the range of reference coordinates in X (or Y) by the number of columns (or rows) in the image. However, there are
some rare instances where it might differ from this result. A good example is the case of Landsat Band 6 (Thermal) imag-
ery. The resolution of these data is actually 120 meters and would be recorded as such in this field. However, the data is
distributed in an apparent 30 meter format to make them physically match the dimensions of the other bands in the
image. This is done by duplicating each 120 meter pixel 4 times in X and then each row 4 times in Y. The resolution field
is a way of correctly indicating the underlying resolution of these data.
In most images, the resolution in X and Y will be equal (i.e., pixels will be square). However, when this is not the case, the
coarser resolution is recorded in the documentation file.4 For example, with Landsat MSS data, the pixel resolution is 80
meters in X and 60 meters in Y. In this case, the documentation file would show a resolution value of 80. Rectangular pix-
els will display correctly, however, preserving the true resolution in both X and Y. In addition, all analytical modules using
measures of distance or area calculate resolution in X and Y independently. They, therefore, do not rely on the resolution
value recorded in the documentation file.
The minimum and maximum value fields record the actual range of data values that occurs in image cells, while the dis-
play min and display max values designate what are sometimes called the saturation points of the data range. Values less than
or equal to display min are assigned the lowest color in the palette sequence, while values greater than or equal to display
max are assigned the highest color in the palette sequence. All values in between are assigned palette colors according to
their position in the range (i.e., with a linear stretch). It is very common for the display min and max to match the min and
max values. However, in cases where one wishes to alter the brightness and contrast of the image, altering the saturation
points can produce a significant enhancement.5 Saturation points may be manipulated interactively in the display system
(see the chapter Display System in this volume).
The value units read classes in this example to indicate that the numbers are simply qualitative codes for soil classes, not
quantitative values. The value units field is informational only, therefore any description can be used. It is suggested that
the term classes be used for all qualitative data sets. However, when standard linear units are appropriate, use the same
abbreviations that are used for reference units (m, ft, mi, km, deg, rad).
The value error field is very important and should be filled out whenever possible. It records the error in the data values
that appear in image cells. For qualitative data, this should be recorded as a proportional error. In the example, the error is
recorded as 0.15, indicating cell accuracy of 85% (i.e., what is mapped is expected to be found on the ground 85% of the

3. The reference system indicated in the documentation file is the name of a reference system parameter file (.ref). The parameters of this file are detailed
in the chapter Georeferencing in this volume.

4. Earlier versions of IDRISI calculated and reported the resolution field as that of the X dimension only.

5. Note that one would normally only change the saturation points with quantitative data. In the example illustrated here, the numeric values represent
qualitative classes. In these cases, the saturation points should match the actual minimum and maximum values.

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 48
time). For quantitative data, the value here should be an RMS error figure. For example, for an elevation image, an RMS
error of 3 would indicate 68% of all values will be within ± 3 meters of the mapped value, that approximately 95% will be
within ± 6 meters, and so on. This field is analytical for some modules (e.g., PCLASS) and is intended to be incorporated
into more modules in the future.
The flag value and flag definition fields can be used to indicate any special meaning that certain cell values might carry.
The flag value indicates the numeric value that indicates a flag while the flag definition describes the nature of the flagged
areas. The most common data flags are those used to indicate background cells and missing data cells. These flag defini-
tion field entries are specifically recognized and used analytically by some modules (e.g., SURFACE). Other terms would
be considered only informational at this stage. Note that some modules also output data flags. For example, when SUR-
FACE is used to create an aspect image, aspects derived from a slope of zero are flagged with a -1 (to indicate that the
aspect cannot be evaluated). In the output documentation file, the flag value field reads -1 while the flag definition field
reads "aspect not evaluated, slope=0".
The legend cats field records the number of legend captions that are recorded in the file. Following this, each legend cap-
tion is described, including the symbol code (a value from 0-255) and the text caption.
Finally, the image documentation file structure allows for any number of occurrences in four optional fields: comment,
lineage, consistency and completeness. At present, these fields are for information only and are not read by IDRISI mod-
ules (although some modules will write them). Note that the lineage, consistency and completeness fields are intended to
meet the recommendations of the U.S. National Committee for Digital Cartographic Data Standards (NCDCDS). Along
with the positional (pos'n) error and value error fields, they provide a means of adhering to the current standards for
reporting digital cartographic data quality.6 Multiple occurrences of any of these field types can occur (but only at the end of
the file) as long as they are correctly indicated in the 14 character descriptive field to the left. The lineage field can be used
to record the history of an image. The command line used to generate a new file is recorded in a lineage field of the doc-
umentation file. The user may add any number of additional lineage lines. The consistency field is used to report the logi-
cal consistency of the file; it has particular application for vector files where issues of topological errors would be
reported. The completeness field refers to the degree to which the file comprehensively describes the subject matter indi-
cated. It might record, for example, the minimum mapping unit by which smaller features were eliminated. Finally, the
comment field can be used for any informational purpose desired. Note that the Metadata utility in IDRISI Explorer and
CONVERT module both read and maintain these optional fields. The Metadata utility also allows one to enter, delete or
update fields of this nature (as well as any documentation file fields).

Vector Layers (.vct)

IDRISI supports four vector file types: point, line, polygon and text. All are automatically stored with a ".vct" file exten-
sion. They are stored in a feature-encoded structure in which each feature is described in its entirety before the next is
described. The File Structures section of the on-line Help System provides specific details about the structures of each
vector file type. In addition, vector files may be viewed as ASCII representations using the Show Structure option in
IDRISI Explorer. However, the following descriptions provide all the information that most users will require.

Common Features of All Vector Files

All vector files describe one or more distinct features. Unlike raster images that describe the totality of space within a rect-
angular region, vector files may describe only a small number of features within a similarly defined rectangular region.
Each feature is described by means of a single numeric attribute value and one or more X,Y coordinate pairs that describe
the location, course or boundary of that feature. These points will be joined by straight line segments when drawn. Thus,
curved features require a great number of closely spaced points to give the appearance of smooth curves.
The numeric attribute values can represent either identifiers (to link to values in a data table) or actual numeric data values,

6. For further information about the NCDCDS standard, refer to the January 1988 issue of The American Cartographer, Volume 15, No. 1.

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 49
and can be stored either as integer or real numbers (although identifiers must be integers).7
A special feature of vector files is that their data types (integer or real) are less specific in their meaning than raster files.
The integer type has a very broad range, and is compatible with both the byte and integer type of raster layers as well as
the long integer type commonly used for identifiers in database tables. Very approximately, the vector integer type covers
the range of whole numbers from -2,000,000,000 to +2,000,000,000. Similarly, the vector real data type is compatible with
the single precision real numbers of raster layers, but is in fact stored as a double precision real number with a minimum
of 15 significant figures. IDRISI's conversion procedures from vector to raster handle these translations automatically, so
there is little reason to be concerned about this detail. Simply recognize that integer values represent whole numbers while
real numbers include fractional parts.

Point Files
Point files are used to represent features for which only the location (as a single point location designation) is of impor-
tance. Examples include meteorological station data, fire hydrants, and towns and cities (when their areal extent is not of
concern). Each point feature is described with an attribute value that can be integer or real, and an X,Y coordinate pair.

Line Files
Line files describe linear features such as rivers or roads. Each line feature in a layer is described by an attribute value that
can be integer or real, a count of the number of points that make up the line, and a series of X,Y coordinate pairs (one for
each point).

Polygon Files
Polygon files describe areal features such as forest stands or census tracts. Each polygon feature in a polygon layer is
described by an attribute value that can be integer or real, a count of the number of parts in the polygon, and for each part,
a list of the points (by means of an internal index) that make up that part. This is then followed by an indexed list of the
X,Y coordinate pairs of all points in the polygon. The parts of a polygon are concerned with the issue of holes. A polygon
with one part has no holes, whereas one with two parts has one hole. The first part listed is always the polygon which
encloses the holes.8

Text Files
Text vector files represent text captions that can be displayed as a layer on a map. They store the caption text, their posi-
tion and orientation, and a symbol code that can be used to link them to a text symbol file. Text vector files can be created
with the on-screen digitizing feature in IDRISI or by exporting text from a CartaLinx coverage. Text symbol files are cre-
ated with Symbol Workshop.

Vector Documentation Files (.vdc)

As with image files, all vector files are paired with documentation files. Vector documentation files have a ".vdc" exten-
sion. Any IDRISI module that creates or imports a vector file will automatically create a documentation file. The Meta-
data utility in IDRISI Explorer can be used to update or create documentation files as required.

7. All features in a single vector layer should be encoded with numeric values of the same type. Thus, if integer identifiers are used, all features must have
integer identifiers. Similarly, if real number attributes are encoded, all features in that layer must have real number attributes.

8. Note that islands are treated as separate polygons by IDRISI. Thus, if one were to take the case of the State of Hawaii as an example, one might con-
sider it to be a single polygon with five parts. In IDRISI, though, these would be five separate polygons. However, they can each have the same identifier
allowing them to be linked to a common data entry in a database table.

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 50
A sample vector documentation file appears as follows:

file format : IDRISI Vector A.1

file title : Landuse / Landcover
id type : integer
file type : binary
object type : polygon
ref. system : utm16spe
ref. units : m
unit dist. : 1
min. X : 296000
max. X : 316000
min. Y : 764000
max. Y : 775000
pos'n error : unknown
resolution : unknown
min. value : 1
max. value : 9
display min : 1
display max : 7
value units : classes
value error : 0.15
flag value : 9
flag def'n : Unknown: Obscured by Clouds
legend cats : 7
code 1 : Residential
code 2 : Industrial
code 3 : Commercial
code 4 : Other Urban or Built Up Land
code 5 : Open Water
code 6 : Barren
code 7 : Transitional

As can be seen, the structure of a vector documentation file is virtually identical to that for a raster layer. The only differ-
ences are:
1. the row and column information is absent;
2. data type has been replaced by id type, although the intention is identical. Choices here are integer or real. The rea-
son for the slightly different wording is that coordinates are always stored as double precision real numbers. The id's,

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 51
though, can vary in their data type according to whether they encode identifiers or numeric attribute values.
3. the file type is always binary. (ASCII format for vector files is supported through the Vector Export Format.)
4. the minimum and maximum X and Y values recorded in the documentation file do not necessarily refer to the
minimum and maximum coordinates associated with any feature but to the boundary or limits of the study area. Thus
they correspond to the BND (boundary) coordinates in vector systems such as Arc/Info.

Attribute Files (.mdb and .avl)

In addition to the attributes stored directly in raster or vector layers, IDRISI permits the use of freestanding attribute files.
Two types are recognized, data tables and values files. Only the former can be linked to a vector file for display or to pro-
duce a vector collection. The latter may be used to assign new values to a raster image and will be produced when sum-
mary values for features are extracted from a raster image. Fields from data tables may be exported as values files and
values files may be imported into data tables using Database Workshop.

Data Tables (.mdb)

IDRISI data tables are Microsoft Access-compatible relational database files. Thus, IDRISI attribute tables have an
".mdb" extension. Internally, each can carry multiple tables and can also be used and modified with Microsoft Access or
any other Access-compatible system.

Values Files (.avl)

Values files contain the values for a single attribute. They are stored in ASCII text format with two columns of data sepa-
rated by one or more spaces. The first column contains an identifier that can be used to associate the value with a feature
(either raster or vector), while the second column contains the attribute value. Attribute values files have an ".avl" exten-
sion. The following is an illustration of a simple values file listing the populations (*1000) of the 10 provinces of Canada:
where 1 = Newfoundland, 2 = Nova Scotia, 3 = Prince Edward Island, and so forth.
1 560
2 850
3 129
4 690
5 6360
6 8889
7 1002
8 956
9 2288
10 2780
The feature definition image to be used with this values file would have the value 1 for all pixels in Newfoundland, the
value 2 for Nova Scotia, and so on.

Attribute Documentation Files (.adc)

As with images and vector files, attribute files (of either type) also carry documentation files, but this time with an ".adc"
extension. Similarly, Metadata in IDRISI Explorer is the utility which can be used to create or modify the documentation
file associated with an attribute file.
As with the other documentation files in IDRISI, those for attribute files are stored in ASCII format with the first 14
characters used purely for descriptive purposes.

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 52
A sample attribute documentation file appears as follows:

file format : IDRISI Values A.1

file title : Roads
file type : ASCII
records : 12
fields : 2
field 0 : IDR_ID
data type : integer
format : 0
min. value : 105
max. value : 982
display min : 105
display max : 982
value units : ids
value error : unknown
flag value : none
flag def'n : none
legend cats : 0
field 1 : ROAD_TYPE
data type : integer
format : 0
min. value : 1
max. value : 3
display min : 1
display max : 3
value units : classes
value error : unknown
flag value : none
flag def'n : none
legend cats : 3
code 1 : Major Road
code 2 : Secondary Road
code 3 : Minor Road

This example shows the documentation file for an ASCII attribute values file. This type of file always has two fields. Data-
base tables will normally have many more fields. For each field, the parameters shown are repeated.
In this version of IDRISI, the following file types are supported:
ascii

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 53
 Simple 2-column ASCII format files where the left field contains integer feature identifiers and the right field
contains data about those features. These values files have an ".avl" file extension.

access
A database file in Microsoft Access format having an ".mdb" extension. This format is the current resident data-
base format supported by IDRISI, and is supported by Database Workshop. It is also the format used in the cre-
ation and display of vector collections.

In the case of the simple ASCII form (".avl" file), format information is unimportant, and thus reads 0 in this example.
Spaces or tabs can be used to separate fields. With fixed length ASCII and database files, format information is essential.
The format line simply indicates the number of character positions occupied by the field.
byte and integer data
A single number to indicate the number of character positions to be used.

character string data

A single number to indicate the maximum number of characters.

real number data

Two numbers separated by a colon to indicate the total number of columns and the number of those columns to
be used for recording decimal values. For example, 5:2 indicates that five columns are to be used, two of which
are for the decimal places. Note that the decimal itself occupies one of these columns. Thus the number "25.34"
occupies this field completely.

For most other entries, the interpretation is the same as for raster image layers. Valid data types include byte, integer, real and
string (for character data). However, for data tables (.mdb), many of the data types recognized by the Microsoft Access Jet
Engine are supported. These include:
real (-3.402823E38 to +3.402823E38 real numbers)
byte (0-255, whole numbers)
integer (-32768 to 32767, whole numbers)
longint (long integer, -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647, whole numbers)
text (character strings)
Boolean (true or false)
IDRISI will document these types automatically, and knows how to convert them when they are used in the context of
display (in a vector collection) or when creating an ASCII values file.

Other File Types

While the majority of data files you will work with are those describing layers and their attributes, many others exist within
the IDRISI system and some of them are described below. Other more specialized file types are described in the context
of specific modules and in the File Structures section of the on-line Help System.

Map Composition Files (.map)

Map composition files store the graphic instructions necessary to create a map composition using data from a set of map
layers and associated symbol and palette files. They are described further in the Display System chapter in this volume.

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 54
Symbol and Palette Files (.sm0, .sm1, .sm2, .smt, .smp)
In order to display map layers, it is necessary to set up an association between vector features or image values and partic-
ular graphic renditions. This is done through the use of Symbol Files and Palette Files. A set of symbol and palette files
is included with IDRISI, and may meet most user needs. However, for final output, it is often desirable to create custom
symbol and palette files. This is done with the Symbol Workshop utility under the Display Menu. See the Display System
chapter in this volume for more information about Symbol Workshop.
Symbol files indicate the manner in which vector features should be symbolized (such as the type, thickness and color of
lines or the font, style, size and color of text). Each symbol file lists the characteristics of up to 256 symbols that are iden-
tified by index numbers from 0 to 255. In all, four kinds of symbol files are used, one each for the vector feature types:
point, line, polygon and text. They are stored with file extensions of ".sm0," ".sm1," ".sm2" and ".smt" respectively. As
usual, IDRISI always knows the appropriate symbol file type to use. As a result, you never need to specify a symbol file
with its extension.
For raster images, graphic renditions are specified by the use of palette files. Like symbol files, palette files also define up
to 256 renditions identified by index numbers from 0 to 255. However, in this case, only the color mixture (defined by the
relative amounts of red, green and blue primaries) is specified. Palette files are stored with an ".smp" extension.

Reference System Parameter Files (.ref)

Reference system parameter files record information about specific geographic referencing systems. They include data on
the projection, ellipsoid, datum, and numbering conventions in use with a reference system. IDRISI includes over 400
such files. The user can modify these and also create new reference system parameter files with the Metadata utility in
IDRISI Explorer. See the Georeferencing chapter in this volume for more information about these files.

Chapter 5 Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures 55
Display System

Introduction
The previous chapter described map layers as each representing a single elementary theme. By combining map layers and
giving them graphic renditions, we create a map. Map compositions may contain as few as one layer and as many as 32 lay-
ers. Map compositions are created as a natural consequence of working with the IDRISI display system. As you work,
IDRISI keeps track of all changes and additions you make to the composition. You can then save the composition at any
time. The composition is stored in a file with a ".map" extension and is simply called a map file.
The display system in IDRISI consists of several separate but interdependent program components, each of which is
described in this chapter.

DISPLAY Launcher
DISPLAY Launcher is used to open a new display window. It begins the map composition process, and is always the first
operation required to create a new map display. DISPLAY Launcher can be accessed from its toolbar icon (shown above)
or by choosing it from the Display menu. Doing so opens a dialog box with options to display a raster layer, a vector layer,
or an existing map composition.

When you select a raster or a vector layer, IDRISI uses a set of decision rules based on the values in the layer to suggest an
appropriate palette or symbol file. You may change this selection. You must also specify if the layer should be displayed
with a direct relationship between numeric values and symbol codes, or should be autoscaled (see below). In the case of a
map composition, you will only be required to specify its name, since all display parameters are stored in the map file. See
the chapter System Overview in this volume for options on choosing filenames from the Pick List or typing them in

Chapter 6 Display System 56

directly. Click OK to display the map layer or composition.

Palette and Symbol Files

Palette files define the way the information stored in image pixel values will be displayed on the screen. Similarly, symbol
files define the way vector features with particular ID’s or linked attribute values will appear. Each stores the character of
up to 256 graphic renditions referenced by index numbers 0-255. Palette files store the Red, Green and Blue (RGB) color
mixture for each index while symbol files store a variety of parameters related to specific vector object types (e.g., point
size, line width, color, etc.). The section below on Symbol Workshop lists the parameters that may be defined for each
type of symbol file.
IDRISI comes with a set of standard palettes and symbol files. These are installed in the symbols folder of the IDRISI
Taiga program directory (e.g., C:\Program Files\IDRISI Taiga\Symbols). You may wish to extend that set, either by
modifying existing palettes and symbol files, or by creating entirely new ones. Symbol Workshop can be used for this pur-
pose. User-created palette and symbol files may be stored anywhere, including the IDRISI symbols directory. Typically,
users store commonly-used symbol files in the Symbols directory. Files that are specific to particular data sets are usually
stored with those data.

Advanced Palette/Symbol Selection

DISPLAY Launcher also offers an Advanced Palette/Symbol Selection tab that provides simple access to over 1300 pal-
ette and symbol files.

You should first indicate whether your data express quantitative or qualitative variations. Quantitative data express differ-
ences of degree (such as elevation) while qualitative data express differences of kind (such as landcover categories). Alter-
natively, you can indicate that you wish to symbolize all features with a uniform symbol. You will also need to decide on
the color logic. For each color logic, you are provided four choices which can be selected by pressing the appropriate but-
ton. For Qualitative and Uniform symbol schemes, the choices of the color logic will be straightforward. However, the
choices for quantitative data warrant additional explanation:

Chapter 6 Display System 57

• Unipolar schemes are used to symbolize data that progress either from low to high or high to low.
• Bipolar schemes have two high or two low ends, with a distinct inflection somewhere in between. For example,
population change data may range from +20% to -20%. In this case we have two high ends - high positive
change and high negative change, with a clear inflection point at 0%. The colors in bipolar schemes are designed
to be perceived by the visual system as falling into two qualitatively different groups while maintaining a quanti-
tative relationship in sequence.
• Balance schemes are less common. These are used in cases where two variables perfectly co-vary - i.e., declines
in one are perfectly balanced by increases in the other. For example, imagine a country in which two languages
are used. Districts with 40% of one language group would thus have 60% of the other. The colors in balance
schemes are designed to be seen as varying mixtures of two distinctive components.

Autoscaling
Autoscaling concerns the relationship between raster cell values and palette indices (and, similarly, vector ID’s or linked
attribute values and symbol indices). By default, a direct relationship between them is assumed (i.e., a cell with a numeric
value of 12 should be displayed with the color defined by palette index 12). However, not all images contain integer values
that fall nicely within the allowable range of values for palette indices (0-255). As a result, it is often necessary to scale the
actual range of values into this more limited range. For example, we might have an image layer of temperature anomalies
ranging from (-7.2) degrees to (+4.6) degrees. These values cannot be directly displayed because there is no palette index
of (-7.2). Autoscaling offers a solution to this problem.
Four options for autoscaling are provided: Off (Direct), Equal Intervals, Quantiles and Standard Scores.
• Off (Direct). When autoscaling is off, it is assumed that there is a direct relationship between the numeric values
of pixels or features in the layer and the numeric codes in palettes and symbol files. Thus if a pixel contains the number 5
in a layer, it is symbolized with the palette color 5. This option is only permitted in cases where all pixels or features have
integer values between 0-255.
• Equal Intervals. This is the default for all cases where direct scaling is not possible - i.e., for cases where some
data values are less than zero or greater than 255, and all cases where the layer contains real numbers. In this case, the
range of numeric values is automatically scaled (hence the name autoscaling) into a series of equal-width data classes that
are subsequently assigned to symbols. Thus, for example, a layer containing elevations from 0 to 5000 meters might be
automatically scaled into 10 classes, 500 meters in width. Therefore, the values from 0-499 would be assigned to symbol 0,
500-999 to symbol 1, 1000-1499 to symbol code 2, etc. DISPLAY Launcher will make an initial determination of the
number of classes. However, you have the ability to specify any number from 2-256. Remember, however, that all numeric
series start from 0 in IDRISI. Thus if you were to choose 256 classes, they would be understood to be symbolized by sym-
bols codes 0 through 255. Note that this process of dividing the numeric data range into a series of symbolization classes
is also referred to as classification by cartographers.
• Quantiles. A quantiles classification scheme places an equal number of pixels or features into each class, first by
rank ordering the pixels or features and then assigning them to classes in rank order. Some quantiles schemes are known
by special names. Thus, for example, a quantiles scheme with four classes is known as a quartiles scheme. Quantiles are a
good choice whenever the data are strongly skewed or disproportionately loaded on a small number of equal interval
classes.
• Standardized. A standardized classification scheme divides the data into symbol classes based on standard devia-
tion units. With an even number of classes, the mean will represent the central boundary between classes, while with an
odd number of classes, the mean will be at the center of the middle class. All classes are one standard deviation in width
and the end classes always include all cases below its defining boundary. Thus, for example, the default case of 6 classes
will be defined as:
<=-2sd

Chapter 6 Display System 58

 -2sd to -1sd
-1 sd to mean
mean to +1sd
+1sd to +2sd
>=+2 sd

whereas a selection of 5 classes would yield:

<=-1.5sd
-1.5sd to -0.5sd
-0.5sd to +0.5sd
+0.5sd to +1.5sd
>=+1.5sd

Standardized classes are appropriate whenever the data are approximately normally distributed and one wishes to differ-
entiate unusual from common cases.
There are several further issues that should be noted about autoscaling. First, Equal Intervals autoscaling is automatically
invoked whenever real numbers or integer values outside the 0-255 range must be displayed. Second, while the maximum
range of palette and symbol indices is 0-255, some palette or symbol files may use a more limited range of values for the
purpose of autoscaling (e.g., 1-100). The autoscaling range of a palette or symbol file can be inspected and changed with
Symbol Workshop. Third, while Equal Intervals autoscaling works well for many images, those with extremely skewed
distributions of data values (i.e., with a very small number of extremely high or extremely low values) may be rendered
with poor contrast. In these cases, you can alter the display min and display max values (known as the saturation points)
using the Layer Properties option of Composer (see below). Alternatively, Quantiles autoscaling can be used. Finally, note
that autoscaling does not change the values stored in a data file; it only alters the display. To create a new raster image with
contrast-stretched values, use the module STRETCH.

Automatic Display
IDRISI includes an automatic display feature that can be enabled or disabled from User Preferences, under the File menu.
With automatic display, the results of analytical operations are displayed immediately after the operation has finished. The
system will determine whether to use the Default Qualitative or Quantitative palette (both of which are user-defined in
the Preferences dialog) for display and if autoscaling should be invoked. The artificial intelligence that is used to make
these determinations is not fool-proof, however. Palette and autoscaling choices may be quickly corrected in the Layer
Properties dialog, if necessary. The automatic display feature is intended as a quick-look facility, not as a substitute for
DISPLAY Launcher.

Launching Maps and Layers from IDRISI Explorer

IDRISI Explorer can display layers, both vector and raster, group files and vector collections. Right-click on any file to
display or add-layer to the active map composition. You can also display layers within a group file or vector collection and
they will be displayed with the dot-logic. Alternatively, you can double-click on any layer to display. More than one file can

Chapter 6 Display System 59

be displayed in the above manner, but beware of system resources. If you select too many files and display automatically
from IDRISI Explorer, you can quickly run out of system memory. This automatic display feature has limited information
about the layer, and thus it may not produce the best looking display. Again, this is intended only as a quick-look facility
and not as a substitute for DISPLAY Launcher. Map compositions displayed from IDRISI Explorer are displayed exactly
as they have been saved, since all palette and symbol file information is included in the map file. Although, you can alter
its display from Composer/Layer Properties.

Map Windows and Layer Frames

A map layer is displayed in a Layer Frame. This and all other components of the map composition (e.g., north arrow, leg-
end) are placed in the Map Window. A single Map Window includes a single Layer Frame. The other components that may
be placed in a Map Window are described below in the section on Map Properties. The Map Window may be thought of
as the graphic "page" upon which a map composition is arranged. Its color is set in the Map Properties dialog and it can
be maximized or resized interactively by placing the cursor on the window border until it changes to a double arrow, then
dragging it to the desired position.
A layer frame can be moved by first double-clicking upon it (you will notice a set of sizing buttons then appear) and then
dragging it to its new position.1 It can also be resized by grabbing one of the visible sizing buttons and moving the layer
frame border. In either case (moving or resizing), the action will be completed by clicking on any other map component
or the map window banner. This will cause the sizing buttons to disappear and the layers to resize (preserving the original
aspect ratio) to fit into the layer frame.
Note that there are several toolbar buttons that are useful in layer frame manipulations. These are shown in the table
below. The first, Full Extent Normal, returns the map window and layer frame to their initially-displayed state. This action
can also be triggered by pressing the Home key. The second icon, Full Extent Maximized, causes the map window and
layer frame to expand as much as possible while still being fully visible (the button can also be activated by pressing the
End key). Note that in doing so, the system reserves space for Composer. If you wish to ignore Composer, hold the shift
key while pressing the End key. The third icon, Fit Map Window to Layer Frame, causes the layer frame to close up
around the currently displayed layers. This is particularly useful after resizing, when the new layer frame is not exactly the
right shape to hold the layers.

Toolbar Icon Keyboard Action

HOME Full Extent Normal

END Full Extent Maximized

(leave space for Composer)

SHIFT+END Full Extent Maximized

(ignore Composer)

Fit Map Window to Layer Frame

1. To drag a component, place the cursor over the component (not on the sizing buttons) and hold the left mouse button down while moving the cursor
to the desired position. "Drop" the component in place by releasing the mouse button.

Chapter 6 Display System 60

Composer
As soon as the first IDRISI map window has been opened, the Composer dialog box
appears on the screen. Composer can be considered a cartographic assistant that allows
one to:
a) add or remove layers from the composition;
b) change the order in which layers are drawn (called the priority of a layer);
c)set a layer to be part of a color composite;
d)set a layer to have a transparent background or blend with the layer below it;
e) temporarily toggle a layer to be invisible (i.e., hide it) without removing it;
f) examine and alter the properties of a layer, including the symbol or palette file in use,
display saturation points, and autoscaling;
g)add, delete and modify a variety of map components in the map window;
h) activate Cursor Inquiry mode to examine feature properties of any layer;
i)perform an instant histogram stretch on the active map;
j)save the current composition (as displayed) as a MAP file; and
k) print the composition.
If you have several map windows open, you will notice that Composer displays the infor-
mation for the map window that has focus (or the last one to have received focus if a non-map window, such as a dialog
box or other window, currently has the focus). Focus refers to the ability of a window to receive input messages from the
mouse and keyboard. Windows designates the window that has focus by displaying its banner with a specific color.2 To
bring a window into focus, click on any part of it. To change the characteristics of a particular map composition, first give
it focus. With many map windows open Composer may be difficult to find. Hitting the “c” key on the keyboard will
always bring Composer to the top of the IDRISI desktop.

Add Layer
To add a layer, click the Add Layer3 button on Composer and choose the desired file.4 You will then be presented with a
similar dialog to indicate the palette or symbol file to be used and whether the new layer should be autoscaled. All layers in
a map composition must share a common reference system. If this is not the case, a warning message will appear indicat-
ing this and warning that the layer may not display properly. The bounds of files do not need to match to be displayed
together in a map composition.
When a new layer is added, it is automatically given the highest priority (i.e., it is drawn on top of the other layers). The
first layer displayed will thus, by default, have the lowest priority (priority 0) and will appear to be on the bottom of the

2. This is only one of many settings in the Windows system display that is defined when you choose a color scheme or define the display characteristics
of individual Windows components.

3. Alternatively, pressing Ctrl-R when a map window has focus will bring up the Add Layer dialog set for adding a raster layer, and pressing Ctrl-V will
bring up the Add Layer dialog set for adding a vector layer.

4. Only one layer frame is present in any map window, so all layers are added to the same layer frame. Note that layers may be added from several paths
for display. However, if the composition is to be saved as a map composition file, all the layers must exist in the Working Folder and/or Resource Fold-
ers of the project from which it is displayed again.

Chapter 6 Display System 61

composition. The layer with priority 0 is often referred to as the base layer in this documentation.
When multiple layers are present, their priority can be changed by dragging the name of the layer concerned, and drop-
ping it in the desired position. Whenever a map window is redrawn, the layers are drawn in their priority order, starting
with 0 and progressing to the highest value.
Note that if a raster layer is added it will obscure all the layers beneath it unless it is designated to have a transparent back-
ground or to blend with the layers below it (see the next section for further details).

Layer Interaction Buttons

Immediately above the Add Layer button is a set of buttons that control layer interaction effects. The left-most is the
Blend button. If the currently highlighted layer is raster, clicking it will cause the layer to blend with the visible layer group
below it by 50%. To remove the blend effect, highlight the blended layer and click this button again. The button to the far

right is the Transparency button. If the highlighted layer is raster, clicking it will cause the background color (whatever is
color 0 in the palette) to become transparent. Note that layers can be both blended and transparent as illustrated below.

This sequence shows a hillshading layer and a digital elevation model being blended (third frame). In the fourth frame a
mask layer has been added with black as color 0 and grey as color 1. In the fifth frame, the mask is made transparent
allowing the elevation model to show through the background color. Finally, in the last frame, the mask is also set to blend
allowing the topography to be partially visible through the grey mask.
The remaining buttons are for creating various color composites. The Red, Green and Blue buttons allow you to desig-
nate layers as the red, green and blue primary color components of a full color image. Note that the layers need to be adja-

cent to each other for this to work, but that the specific order is unimportant. The Cyan button (second from the left) is
used to create three dimensional anaglyphs. The creation of an anaglyph requires stereo images -- two views of the same

landscape taken from different locations, and a set of anaglyphic 3-D glasses. When these are superimposed using Add
Layer, assign red primary to the left view and the cyan primary to the right view (this order may need to be reversed
depending upon your glasses). Again, the layers should be next to each other in their priority for this to work.

Chapter 6 Display System 62

Remove Layer
To remove a layer, select its name in the list of layers shown on Composer, then click the Remove Layer button. If you
wish to only temporarily hide the layer, do not remove it, but rather, change its visibility.

Layer Names, Types, and Visibility

Composer displays one row for each layer in the composition. You can toggle a layer visible or invisible by clicking on the
button to the left of its name. Note that toggling a layer off does not remove it from the composition. Rather, it simply
makes it temporarily hidden. This can greatly facilitate visual analysis in some instances.
To the right of the layer name is a graphic symbol which indicates the layer's type: raster, vector point, vector line, vector
polygon or vector text. These are illustrated in the table below. This information is used, for example, to indicate which
file is which when a raster layer and a vector layer are in the same composition.

Layer Type Icon on Composer

Raster

Vector Point

Vector Line

Vector Polygon

Vector Text

Layer Properties
The properties of any layer, including key documentation information and display parameters, are shown in the Layer
Properties dialog. To view this, highlight the layer concerned with a single mouse click on the layer name in Composer,
and then click the Layer Properties button. This will display the Layer Properties dialog associated with that layer.

Chapter 6 Display System 63

The Layer Properties dialog summarizes several important elements of the layer's documentation file organized into three
tab views. The first tab allows you to change the manner in which the image is visually scaled for display including the
number of classes and the classification scheme. In addition, it allows you to change the contrast of the image if it has
been autoscaled using Equal Intervals. This tab also allows you to change the palette or symbol file and gives access to the
Advanced Palette/Symbol Selection page (see the section on DISPLAY Launcher).
The second tab highlights the Metadata for a selected file. If the layer is raster, a histogram of the layer may be launched
using the Histogram button. If the layer is a vector feature definition file linked to an attribute table field, the full data
table may be displayed using the Access Table button.
The third tab accesses the visibility properties, including the ability to set specific blends other than the default 50% acces-
sible from the Blend button on Composer. The drawing sort order affects vector layers only and controls the order in
which vector features are drawn. This is used to establish the proper visual priority when vector features overlap. This dia-
log also allows you to establish at what scale the layer is visible. As you zoom in and out, layers will toggle off if the scale
falls outside the visible range.

Changing the Display Min / Display Max Saturation Points

When Equal Intervals autoscaling is in effect, all values less than or equal to the display min recorded in the documenta-
tion file will be assigned the lowest symbol or palette color in the sequence. Similarly, all values greater than or equal to the
display max will be assigned the highest symbol or color in the sequence.5 It is for this reason that these values are known
as saturation points. Adjusting them will alter the brightness and contrast of the image. If an image is not autoscaled and
you wish to adjust its contrast quickly, you can click on the Instant Stretch icon on Composer.
Two options exist for changing these values within the Layer Properties dialog. They can be edited within the appropriate
input boxes, or they can be adjusted by means of the sliders. The sliders can be moved by dragging them with the mouse,
or by clicking on the particular slider and then pressing either the left or right arrow key. The arrow keys move the slider
by very small increments by default, but will yield larger movements if you hold down the shift key at the same time.6
The best way to become familiar with the effects of changing the saturation points is to experiment. In general, moving
the saturation points toward the center from their corresponding minimum and maximum data values will increase the
contrast. In effect, you sacrifice detail at the tails of the distribution in order to increase the visibility of detail in the rest of
the distribution. If the image seems too dark overall, try moving the display max down. Similarly, if the image seems too
bright, move the display min up. Depending on the distribution of the original data values (which can be assessed with
HISTO), interactively adjusting the saturation points and observing the effects can be very helpful in visual image analy-
sis. This is particularly the case with 24-bit color composite images.

5. Note that the lowest and highest symbols or colors in the sequence are those set as the autoscale min and max in the symbol file or palette. These may
be adjusted in Symbol Workshop.

6. If you always wish to display a layer with particular display min/max values that are not the actual min/max values of the layer, use the Metadata utility
in IDRISI Explorer to set the display min and display max fields of the layer documentation file to the desired values. Whenever the file is displayed,
these values will be used to set the range of values covered by the palette or symbol file. The actual data values remain unchanged.

Chapter 6 Display System 64

Map Properties

While the Layer Properties dialog displays information about a single map layer, the Map Properties dialog describes the
entire map composition. It is used to set the visibility and characteristics of map components such as layer legends, north
arrow and so forth.
The Map Properties dialog can be brought forward by clicking the Map Properties button on Composer or by clicking the
right mouse button in a map window. The right-click method is context sensitive. For example, a right-click over a legend
launches the Map Properties dialog with the legend options visible.
Map Properties is a tabbed dialog. Simply click on the appropriate tab to access the options associated with a particular
map component. Ten tabs are provided: Legends, Georeferencing, Map Grid, North Arrow, Scale Bar, Text Inset,
Graphic Insets, Titles, Background and Placemarks. The options for each are described below.
You can enlarge the Map Window at any time to increase the size of your graphic page and make space for new map com-
ponents. In all cases, the components must be set to Visible to be displayed. All components are movable and many may
be interactively resized. To do so, double-click on the component, make the necessary changes, then click any other ele-
ment to release move/resize mode.

Legends
Up to five layers may have displayed legends in a map composition. Any raster layer or vector point, line or polygon layer
can have a legend. The legend text entries are stored in the layer documentation file and may be entered or altered with
the Metadata utility in IDRISI Explorer. Up to 256 entries are allowed. By default, the legend will display up to 20 catego-
ries (this can be changed in User Preferences under the File menu). However, whenever there are more than 20 legend
entries in the documentation file, a vertical scrollbar will be attached to the legend, and you may scroll through the
remaining entries.
For a quantitative data layer with byte or integer data type and a range of values of 20 or less, a legend will be formed and
labeled automatically (i.e., no legend entries are needed in the documentation file). If the data are real or the data range is
greater than 20, a special continuous legend will be displayed with automatically generated representative category labels.

Georeferencing
The Georeferencing tab shows the reference system and units of the current composition, as well as its bounding rectan-
gle. It also shows the actual bounding rectangle of all features within the composition. The former can be changed using

Chapter 6 Display System 65

the input boxes provided. In addition, a button is provided that will allow you to set the composition bounding rectangle
to the current feature bounds.
The Georeferencing tab is also used to set a very important property regarding vector text layers. Text sizes are set in
points—a traditional printing measurement equal to 1/72 inch. However, in the dynamic environment of a GIS, where one
is constantly zooming in and out (and thus changing scale), it may be more useful to relate point size to ground units. The
Convert Text Point Sized to Map Reference Units option on the Georeferencing Tab does this. When it is enabled, text
captions associated with text layers (but not map components, such as titles) will change size as you zoom in and out,
appearing as if the text is attached to the landscape. The scaling relationship between point size and map reference units is
also user-defined. When this option is disabled, the text captions retain their original size as you zoom in and out of the
map layers.

Map Grid
A map grid can be placed on the layer frame. The intervals may be specified as well as the starting values in X and Y (all in
reference units). You can also choose the type of grid, color and width of the grid lines and the label font. The grid will be
automatically labeled.

North Arrow
A north arrow can be added to a composition using several default styles, or one can create their own and import them as
bitmaps or enhanced metafiles. You set the declination of the arrow and may specify any text to be displayed to the left
and right of the arrow. This would allow you, for example, to change the text to read "Magnetic North" rather than "Grid
North," or to change to a different language.

Scale Bar
Adding a scale bar can also be achieved with the Map Properties dialog. You set the length (in map reference system
units), the number of divisions, color properties and text label of the scale bar. The scale bar automatically adjusts in width
as you zoom.7

Text Inset
The text inset can be used to display blocks of text. This is done by specifying the name of an ASCII text file. The text
inset frame is sizeable and incorporates automatic wordwrap. Font style and background color may be set.

Graphic Insets
Graphic insets can be used to hold inset maps, pictures, logos, or any other graphic image. Any Windows Bitmap
(".bmp") or Metafile (".wmf" or ".emf") may be used as a graphic inset. All graphic insets are resizeable. However, if the
Stretchable option is disabled, resizing is controlled to preserve the original aspect ratio of the inset.

Titles
A title, subtitle, and caption may be added to a map composition. These are not associated with any particular map layer,
but rather belong to the map composition as a whole. However, the title of the base layer, read from its documentation
file, will appear as the title text by default. This may be edited and font properties may be set.

Background
The Background tab allows you to change the color of the backgrounds for the Layer Frame and the Map Window. The

7. This can sometimes prove to be a nuisance since the scale bar may need to expand to be greater than the width of the map window. In these cases,
simply set its visibility to "off" using Map Properties. Otherwise, use Map Properties to reset the size of the scale bar to a smaller length.

Chapter 6 Display System 66

backgrounds of other components, such as legends and the scale bar, are set in their respective tabs. However, the Back-
ground tab also allows you to set the backgrounds of all components to match that of the Map Window. Note that setting
the layer frame background may not be noticeable if a raster layer is present in the composition (since it may cover up the
entire frame). Also note that there is a default background color that is set with the User Preferences dialog under the File
menu.

Placemarks
Finally, the Placemarks tab keeps track of placemarks associated with the map composition. A placemark is a particular
window of the map layers. The Placemarks tab allows you to define new placemarks, delete existing ones, and go to any
specific placemark. Placemarks are described further below in the section on Interactive Display Features.

Feature Properties
The Feature Properties button on Composer invokes the Feature Properties cursor mode, which brings up a table of
properties associated with features identified with the mouse. This may also be invoked with the Feature Properties tool-
bar icon. See the section below on Interactive Display Features for a complete description.

Save Composition
At any point in your use of Composer, it is possible to save your map composition in several formats. The Save Composi-
tion button brings up a dialog presenting the format choices. The first is to save the map composition as a MAP file. A
MAP file contains a complete record of the composition in a file with a ".map" extension.8 This can then be redisplayed
at any time by starting DISPLAY Launcher and indicating that you wish to display a map composition file. With this form
of composition storage, it is possible to restore the composition to its exact previous state, and then continue with the
composition process.
The next three options allow you to save the composition to either a BMP, WMF or EMF graphics file format. These file
types are used in desktop publishing, spreadsheet and word processing software programs. The BMP is a raster bitmap,
produced by simply copying the screen. This is often called a screen dump, since it copies the exact appearance of the map
window, without copying the details of how the composition was formed (i.e., the names of the layers, their symboliza-
tion, and so on). The EMF format is the latest 32-bit Windows "Enhanced Metafile" structure. The WMF format is the
"Windows Metafile" structure used through Windows 3.1. Both store the Windows instructions that can be used to
reconstruct both the vector and raster elements of the map window. These can then be imported into a desktop publish-
ing or graphics program. Whenever you have a choice between WMF and EMF, choose the EMF format.
The next option copies the map window to the Windows clipboard rather than to a file. This facilitates copying composi-
tions immediately into other software programs.
Finally, the last option allows you to save the currently windowed region of the active layer as a new IDRISI layer. If the
layer is raster, only the portion of the raster image that is currently displayed will be written to the new raster file. This is
thus an interactive version of the WINDOW module. However, if the active layer is vector, the entire file will be copied,
but the bounding coordinates will be altered to match the current window. The new file will display the window region,
but all the original data outside that window still exists in the file.

Print Composition
To print a map composition, first display it. Ensure that the map window has focus, then click the Print Composition but-
ton on Composer. In the Print Composition dialog, you will be able to select the desired printer, access its setup options,

8. More information about the MAP file structure may be found in the chapter Map Layers, Collections and Data Structures. Note especially that
the MAP file contains the instructions to construct the map composition, but does not include the map data layers themselves. These separate files are
used to recreate the composition.

Chapter 6 Display System 67

choose to fit the map window as large as possible on the page or print to a user-specified scale. Page margins may be set
and the line widths may be scaled. A preview of the page as it will print is shown. All Windows-compatible printing
devices are supported.

Stretch
At the bottom of Composer are several image stretch buttons. These allow you to stretch the display of the active image
in a map window for optimal display. The inherent values are not altered, just the display minimum and maximum values
stored in the files metadata. All three options perform a saturation stretch, the first option applies it to the entire image,
the second option applies the stretch symetrically around zero, assuming you have values above and below zero. The last
option is used to stretch within a zoomed in display. It will stretch using the values only within the zoomed window, but it
will apply it to the entire image. When you zoom back to the default display, you can click the first icon to optimize for the
entire image.

Symbol Workshop
The map layers in a composition are rendered by means of symbol and palette files. While a set of symbol files is included
with IDRISI, commonly you will want to develop specific symbol files to optimize the impact of the information pre-
sented on your final maps.
Symbol and palette files are created and modified using Symbol Workshop,9 available under the Display menu and
through its toolbar icons. In all, five types of files can be created: point symbol files, line symbol files, polygon symbol
files, text symbol files and palette files. Symbol files record the graphic renditions for up to 256 symbols, indexed 0-255.
For example, a text symbol file might indicate that features assigned symbol index 5 are to have their names rendered
using bold, italic, 10 point Times New Roman text in a red color.
From the Symbol Workshop File menu, you can choose to open an existing file or create a new one. If you choose the lat-
ter, you will need to indicate the symbol type: point, line, polygon, text, or palette. The 256 symbols are then arrayed in a
16 x 16 grid. To change a symbol, simply click within its symbol grid cell. A symbol-specific dialog will then appear, allow-
ing you to alter any of the following settings:

Symbol File Type Attribute

Point Symbols Symbol Type
Fill Style
Size
Fill Color
Outline Color

9. IDRISI for Windows had a separate utility named Palette Workshop for the manipulation of palettes. This was incorporated into Symbol Workshop.

Chapter 6 Display System 68

 Line Symbols Line Style
Line Width
Color
Polygon Symbols Fill Style
Color
Text Symbols Font
Size
Color
Style (normal, bold, italic, underline)
Palette Color

A very important feature of Symbol Workshop is the ability to copy or blend attributes. For example, imagine creating a
point symbol file of graduated circles. Click on symbol 0 and set its properties to yield a very small yellow circle. Then
move to symbol 255 and set it to be a large red circle. Now set the blend end points to be 0 and 255 and click the blend
button. You will now have a sequence of circles smoothly changing in both size and color.
As a companion to the blend option, Symbol Workshop also provides a copy function. With both the blend and copy
functions, it is possible to set options that will cause them only to copy or blend specific attributes (such as color or size).
To get a sense of how the symbols will look on a particular background, you may also set a background color for the Sym-
bol Workshop display.
Finally, the autoscaling range of a symbol file may be specified or altered in Symbol Workshop. All symbol files contain
definitions for 256 symbols. However, by altering the autoscale range, it is possible to create sequences of more limited
range. For example, to set up a palette with 8 colors, set the autoscale min and max to be 0 and 7 respectively. Then define
these 8 colors. In use, it will then appear that the palette has only 8 colors if the layer with which it is used is autoscaled.

Media Viewer
Media Viewer is a facility for creating and displaying video images composed of a series of IDRISI images. Media Viewer
is located under the Display menu. When activated, it will present the basic control dialog with its own separate menu.
Click on the File menu to create a new video or to open an existing video. If you choose to create a new video, you will be
presented with a new dialog that will require the name of either a Raster Group file (".rgf") or a Time Series file (".ts") that
defines the images to be used and their order in the video. You will also be asked to specify a palette to be used and the
time delay to be used between each successive image. The result of the operation will be an ".avi" multi-media video file
that can be displayed at any time using the Media Viewer controls. Note that the viewer can be sized by dragging its bor-
ders. The image can be sized to fit within the viewer by selecting the Fit to Window option under the Properties menu. Also
note that you can place a video into a continuous loop.

Interactive Display Features

One of the remarkable features of GIS is that map displays are not static. Rather, they provide a highly interactive medium
for the exploration of map data. IDRISI includes a number of features that form the basis for this interaction.

Chapter 6 Display System 69

Move and Resize
As discussed earlier, all map components (layer frame, title, legend, etc.) can be moved, and most can also be resized.
Moving is achieved by placing the cursor over the component in question, double-clicking to enter move/resize mode,
and then holding down the left mouse button to "drag" that element to its new location. Clicking on any other compo-
nent, or the map window banner, will exit move/resize mode. While in move/resize mode, resizing is achieved by drag-
ging one of the resizing buttons on the margins of that component.

Cursor Inquiry Mode

As you move the cursor over a map window, the status bar at the bottom of the screen will indicate the X and Y coordi-
nates of the cursor in the geographic reference system (for raster layers, the column/row position is also shown). You can
find out what is at that location by using Cursor Inquiry Mode. To enable Cursor Inquiry mode, click on its button on the
tool bar. The button will appear to be depressed. When this mode is active, you can query the value at any position on the
active layer of any map window. In the case of a raster layer, it will show the numeric value and legend interpretation (if
one exists) of the grid cell immediately below the cursor. For a vector layer, it will show the numeric value and legend
interpretation of the nearest feature. Note especially that when a map window contains several layers, the displayed value
is for the active layer (the one highlighted in Composer). The active layer can easily be changed by clicking onto the
desired layer name in the Composer list. Cursor inquiry can remain active, but you may want to turn it off if you wish
move and resize map components. To do so, simply click the Cursor Inquiry button again.

Feature Properties
Cursor Inquiry Mode allows one to view the values of features for a single layer at a time.
For layers that are members of a collection, the Feature Properties option allows one to
look at a simple tabular view of the values for all members of the collection at the query
location. To activate this feature, either click the Feature Properties button on Composer or
click the Feature Properties button on the tool bar. Click it again if you wish to turn it off.
For multi-layer query mode to work, the layer must have been displayed or added to the
map window as a part of a collection. This is accomplished by either typing in the layer
name using the "dot logic" described in the chapter Map Layers, Collections and Data
Structures in this volume, or by choosing the layer name from within the list of members
under the collection filename in the Pick List. When Feature Properties is used with layers
that are not members of a group, some simple information regarding the layer is presented
in the Feature Properties table along with the value and position of the location queried.
Clearly the major advantage of the Feature Properties table is that one can see the values of
all group members at one time. In addition, it can display these as a graph. Note that con-
trols are also provided to change the position of the separator line in table mode. To turn
off Feature Properties mode, click on the Feature Properties button again, or click its corresponding icon on the tool bar.
Cursor Inquiry mode is automatically invoked whenever Feature Properties is active.

Pan and Zoom

Pan and zoom allow one to navigate around the display at varying scales (magnifications). The simplest method of pan
and zoom is to use the mouse. If your computer has the facility, a center mouse wheel can be used to zoom and out. To
pan, drag the image with the right mouse button. The keyboard arrow keys and page up an page down keys may also be
used. Functions are summarized in the table below. The easiest way to understand the actions of these keys is to imagine
that you are in an airplane. Zooming in lowers your altitude, thus increasing your scale (i.e., you see less area, but with
greater detail). Similarly, zooming out increases your altitude, thus reducing your scale (i.e., you will see more, but with less
detail). The representative fraction (RF) in the status bar changes as you zoom in and out. A similar logic is associated

Chapter 6 Display System 70

with the arrow keys. Pressing the right arrow key (Pan Right) moves your imaginary airplane to the right, causing the scene
to appear to move to the left
In addition to these continuous zoom and pan options, the tool bar also offers several additional options. The zoom in
and zoom out icons will zoom in or out with each right or left mouse click, and also, recenter the image depending on the
location of the mouse when it is clicked. A zoom window option allows you to draw a rectangle around the area you wish
to zoom into. To do so, click the Zoom Window button (shown below) and move your cursor to any corner of the area to
be zoomed into. Then hold down the left button and drag out the rectangle to the corner diagonally opposite the one you
started with. When you release the left mouse button, the zoom will take place. The Home key will revert the map win-
dow and layer frame back to their original size.

Toolbar Icon Keyboard Action

Zoom Window

HOME Restore Original Window

All zoom and pan operations take place within the context of the layer frame. See the earlier section of this chapter on
Map Windows and Layer Frames for information about enlarging both of these.

Group Link
When a raster layer is part of a group, it is possible to have all displayed members of the group zoom and pan simultane-
ously and identically. To activate this, click the Group Link button on the tool bar. Notice that the button depresses and
remains so until clicked again. This feature is especially useful when ground truthing remotely sensed imagery, particularly
when used with the GPS link (see below).
The Group Link works only when layers are launched with their complete collection reference. For layers belonging to
raster group files, these layers exist in isolation as well as being referenced as part of a group. Thus, if you wish to use the
group link feature, be sure to enter the full collection reference (e.g., "spotxs.band3" rather than simply "band3").

Placemarks
Placemarks are the spatial equivalent of bookmarks. Any particular view of a composition can be saved as a placemark. To
do so, either launch the Map Properties dialog and click the Placemarks tab or click the Placemarks icon on the tool bar.
Then choose the appropriate option to name, rename, delete, or go to any placemark. Note that placemarks are saved
with map compositions. They will not be saved if the composition is not saved.

Measure Length
Distances can be measured in map compositions. With an image displayed, click on the Measure Length icon. To begin
measuring the distance, move the mouse to the desired start location and click the left mouse button. A balloon above the
cursor will appear which will indicate the length as you move the mouse. If length is non-linear, click the left mouse but-
ton to indicate inflection points as you measure. End measuring by right clicking the mouse.

Measure Zone
Circular zones can be measured in map compositions. With an image displayed, click on the Measure Zone icon. To begin
measuring circular zones, move the mouse to the desired start location and click the left mouse button. A balloon above
the cursor will appear which will indicate the length from the center of the zone. A circular zone will also be drawn out as
you move the mouse. End measuring by right clicking the mouse.

Chapter 6 Display System 71

GPS Support
IDRISI also provides real-time GPS support, intended for use with a laptop computer. A Global Positioning System
receiver receives continuous position updates in latitude/longitude10 from the system of 21 active GPS navigation satel-
lites. When the IDRISI GPS link is active, this position is shown graphically with a blinking cursor on all map windows
that cover your current location and have a common reference system. IDRISI automatically projects the incoming posi-
tions to the reference system specified (so long as the specified projection is supported by PROJECT).11 In addition,
IDRISI will automatically save your route and allow you to save waypoints—positionally tagged notes.
Most receiver units available today support communication with a computer over an RS232C communications channel
(e.g., the COM1 or COM2 port on your computer), and provide support for the NMEA (National Marine Electronics
Association) communications protocol. In most cases, using such a GPS with IDRISI is remarkably simple, and only
involves the following steps:
1. Set the GPS to output NMEA data (this is usually an option in its setup menu and can remain as a permanent
setting, avoiding this step in future use).
2. Connect the special communication cable that is designed for your GPS to one of the serial communication
ports on your computer. For a laptop, this is typically a 9-pin port known as COM1. By default, IDRISI expects commu-
nication over COM1, but this can be changed (see below).
3. Display an image or map layer that includes your current location. Be sure that it has focus and then click the
GPS button on the tool bar. You will then see the blinking position cursor appear simultaneously in all map windows that
use the same reference system (as long as your actual position is within the currently displayed area).
When you have finished a GPS session, click the GPS button again to turn it off. At that point, it will give you the option
of saving your route as a vector line layer and your waypoints (if any) as a vector point layer.

Saving Routes and Waypoints

While the GPS is connected and communicating with IDRISI, it automatically saves the route that was started when the
GPS button was first clicked. It also keeps a record of any waypoints that are entered along the way. When you click the
GPS button again to terminate GPS communication, you have the option of saving these as layers. The route will be
saved as a vector line layer and the waypoint file will be stored as a text layer.
To save waypoints, simply press the "w" key at those positions for which you wish to record information. A dialog will
then appear, allowing you to enter a text description. IDRISI will keep track of both the location and the text descriptor.
Note that as a text layer, your waypoint information is easily displayed after the file has been saved. However, you will
probably want to keep these waypoint descriptors very brief. Position readings continue to be recorded while waypoint
information is being entered.
Finally, note that IDRISI is not intended as a spatial database development tool. Thus the route and waypoint saving fea-
tures are more suited to simple ground truthing operations rather than database development. For much more extensive
capabilities, we recommend CartaLinx, which provides complete database development facilities with GPS support.

How It Works
When you click the GPS button, IDRISI checks to see if there is a map layer with focus and with a valid reference system.
This can be any system with a Reference System Parameter file that has a projection supported by PROJECT (this does

10. Actually, the native reference system is a three-dimensional datum known as WGS84. However, the NMEA interface for communication of fixes
converts these to latitude/longitude and elevation readings.

11. See the chapter Georeferencing in this volume for a discussion of projections and reference systems.

Chapter 6 Display System 72

not include the system labeled "plane"). This then becomes the output reference system, and all positions will be automat-
ically converted into that form.
Next, IDRISI launches (if it is not already active) a special GPS server program named IDRNMEA.EXE from the folder
called GPS located in the IDRISI Taiga program folder.12 Then it establishes communication with the GPS using com-
munication parameters stored in a special file named "IDRNMEA.CFG," also found in the GPS folder of the IDRISI
Taiga program folder. The default settings stored in this file (1,4800,n,8,1) are probably correct for your unit (since they
assume the use of serial port 1 and comply with the NMEA standard) and can, in most cases, be used without modifica-
tion. However, if you have trouble communicating with the GPS, this file can be edited using an ASCII text editor such as
the IDRISI Edit module or Windows Notepad. Details can be found in the on-line Help System.
Once communication has been established, IDRISI converts the native latitude/longitude format of the NMEA GPS fix
to the designated IDRISI reference system, polls all map windows to find which ones are using this system, and then
moves a blinking cursor to that location on each.

Interactive Screen Digitizing

Another very important interactive capability that IDRISI provides is the ability to digitize on screen. It is important to
recognize, however, that this facility is largely intended as a means of undertaking simple digitizing tasks such as the delin-
eation of training sites for the classification of remotely sensed imagery, or creating text vector layers in a very rapid fash-
ion. For larger and more complex tasks, we recommend CartaLinx, a full spatial database builder software, also available
from the Clark Labs.
The Digitize button on the toolbar is shaped like a cross within a circle, and can be found among a group of three related
digitizing buttons.

Toolbar Icon Action

Digitize

Delete Feature

Save Digitized Data

To digitize on screen, make sure that the appropriate map window has focus, and then click on the Digitize button. If the
active layer (the one highlighted in Composer) is a raster layer, you will be presented with a dialog box in which you can
define the new vector layer to be created. If the active layer is a vector layer, you will first be asked whether you wish to
create a new vector layer for the digitized features or append the new features to those existing in the active layer. If you
choose to append to an existing layer, you will notice that the file information is already filled out and you only need enter
the ID or value. If you are digitizing a new file, you will be asked to specify the following:

Data Type
The data type refers to the attribute stored for each feature. This can be either integer or real. If you are digitizing identifi-
ers to be associated with data in a table, this must be integer.13 In all other cases, use integer for coding qualitative attri-
butes and real for recording quantitative data (where a fractional number may be required), or whenever the value is
expected to exceed the integer range.14

12. This is the same system used by CartaLinx. The GPS server program can simultaneously serve multiple applications. Thus, if it is already loaded for
use by CartaLinx, IDRISI does not load another copy, but simply registers itself as another user.

13. With vector data, no distinction is made between different storage formats of integer. Vector integer data can have values between ±2,147,483,647.

Chapter 6 Display System 73

Layer Type
Specify the nature of the features you wish to create. Note that if you choose to append to an existing layer, both the layer
type and data type are predetermined to match those of the existing layer and you will not be able to change those set-
tings. Layer type options include points, lines, polygons or text.15

Automatic Index
This option is for those cases where you are storing identifiers for features (rather than some attribute directly). When
checked, this option will automatically increment the identifier from one feature to the next. This offers speed when digi-
tizing features whose ID’s increment in this simple manner.

ID or Value / Index of First Feature

This allows you to specify the ID or attribute of the feature to be digitized. When the Automatic Index feature is speci-
fied, this will be used as the starting value for the numeric sequence.
Once you click OK to this startup dialog, a new layer will be added to your composition (unless you chose to append to
an existing layer), and the digitzing cursor will appear in the Layer Frame. Note that if you were in Cursor Inquiry mode or
Feature Properties mode, these will be temporarily disabled until you exit digitizing mode.

Mouse Button Functions When Digitizing

Once the Digitize dialog has been completed and you click on the OK button, you may begin digitizing. To digitize, use
the left mouse button to identify points that define the position, course or boundary of a feature. You will notice it being
formed as you digitize. To finish the feature (or the current sequence of points in the case of point features), click the right
mouse button.

Deleting Features
The Delete Feature button to the immediate right of the Digitize button on the toolbar allows you to select and delete
vector features from the active vector layer. First click on the Delete Feature icon, then select the feature to be deleted (the
cursor will become a hand). When the feature is selected, it will turn red. To delete it from the file, press the Delete key on
the keyboard.

Digitizing Additional Features Within a Single File

Once you have finished a feature by clicking the right mouse button, you can continue to add further features to the same
vector layer data file. Make sure the map window still has focus, and that the layer to which you wish to append another
feature is highlighted, and then click the Digitize button on the toolbar. You will be asked whether you wish to append the
new feature into the designated layer.

Saving The Vector Layer

As you digitize features, they will each in turn be added to the vector layer designated. However, these data are not com-
mitted to disk until you click on the Save Digitized Data button. This can be done repeatedly throughout a session to save
your work incrementally. If a map window is closed before a digitized layer is saved, a message will ask whether or not to
save the layer or changes made to the layer.

14. Although vector layers can carry integer attribute values within a ±2,147,483,647 range, integer raster layers are restricted to a range of ±32,767. Thus,
if you intend to rasterize your digitized data at a later stage, you may wish to specify real if the range is outside the ±32,767 range.

15. When polygons are chosen, an option to digitize a flood polygon is presented. This is useful in image classification for delineating training sites. See
the Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery chapter for more information.

Chapter 6 Display System 74

Digitizing Multiple Layers
You may have multiple vector layers open for digitizing at the same time. Any actions you take will apply only to the active
layer, the name of which is highlighted in Composer.

A Special Note About Digitizing Point Features

With both line and polygon layers, you digitize a single feature at a time, right click, then click the Digitize button again to
digitize the next feature. However, with point vector layers, you can digitize multiple features before ending a sequence
with the right mouse button. To do this, select the Automatic Indexing option.

A Special Note About Digitizing Polygon Features

Polygons are defined by lines that join up to themselves. When digitizing polygonal features, clicking the right button not
only terminates the definition of the feature, but it also adds a final point which is identical to the first, thereby closing the
feature perfectly. As a result, it is not necessary to try to close the feature by hand—it will be done automatically.

A Special Note on Photo Layers

IDRISI has the ability to display photo layers on top of map layers. Photo Layers link photos through IDRISI text vector
files with special syntax. This option is very useful for linking photos from the field during a ground-truthing exercise.
Photos must be in JGP format. Photo Layers are created as text layers during the on-screen digitizing process, either
through digitizing a new text layer or when laying down waypoints during GPS interaction. In both cases, entering the
correct syntax for the text caption will create a Photo Layer. See the Help for details.

A Final Note
Perhaps the best way to learn more about the IDRISI display system is to work through the first few tutorial exercises in
the Tutorial. These give step-by-step instructions and guide you through the basics of map layer display and map compo-
sition in IDRISI.

Chapter 6 Display System 75

IDRISI Modules
The purpose of this chapter is to give a brief overview of the functionality of each of the IDRISI modules. The modules
are presented in the same logic of the IDRISI menu structure. Users should use this chapter to view the breadth of the
IDRISI system. But without a doubt the user will want to follow-up with detail on any module in IDRISI’s on-line Help
system. There you will find an in-depth discussion on a module’s functionality, its algorithm, special considerations, com-
mand line parameters, and when possible, complete references as to where one can find even more detail.
The IDRISI Main Menu is divided into nine headings, each of which is described below. Menu entries followed by an
arrow lead to submenus with further choices. Because some modules are used in different contexts, they may appear in
more than one place in the menu.
The names of IDRISI modules that can be used in macro mode are shown in the menu in all capital letters. All other
interfaces or modules are written with only first letters capitalized.

The File Menu

The File menu includes all the general purpose modules for using IDRISI.
IDRISI Explorer is a general purpose utility to manage and explore IDRISI files and projects. Use IDRISI Explorer to
set your project environment, manage your group files, review metadata, display files, and simply organize your data with
such tools as copy, delete, rename, and move commands.
Collection Editor is used to create group files.
Create TSF is used to create index and image time series files.
Run Macro allows you to run an IDRISI modules in macro mode. Macro scripts allow batch processing of IDRISI mod-
ules. Toggle the Shortcut command on the File menu to open an alphabetical listing of IDRISI command modules.
User Preferences allows you to customize your IDRISI working environment and display preferences.
The Import and Export entries of the File menu activate sub-menus. These submenus are organized into four groups.
General Conversion Tools are modules that may be used alone or in combination to convert files to an IDRISI format.
The Government/Data Provider Formats (import only) group includes modules that import the most commonly used
government and agency data formats. Similarly, the Desktop Publishing Formats group includes modules that import
graphic exchange data formats typically used in desktop publishing software. Finally, the Software-Specific Formats
group provides the modules used to import files from many GIS and related software packages.
GDALIDRISI is a front-end utility that interfaces with the open source GDAL raster translation software.

General Conversion Tools

GENERICRASTER is an all-purpose utility to import raster data in a variety of data types and formats, including byte,
integer and real, band-interleaved by line (BIL), band-interleaved by pixel (BIP) and band sequential (BSQ) formats;
CRLF adds or removes carriage returns or line feeds;
VAR2FIX changes variable-length ASCII files to fixed-length files; and
SSTIDRIS is used to import spreadsheet data when the cells of the spreadsheet are to be interpreted as cells in the result-

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 76

ing image.
XYZIDRIS is used to import ASCII X,Y,Z coordinate data to a point vector file such as might be collected by a GPS unit
or might be entered by hand into a spreadsheet or text file;

Government/Data Provider Formats

Import tools for:
Landsat ETM for Landsat NLAPS, FAST, GEOTIFF or HDF formats;
SPOT for SPOT satellite data in GEOTIFF, SPOT Scene (CAP), or GEOSPOT - SPOTView formats;
GEOTIFF for generic GEOTIFF/TIFF files;
HDFEOS for HDF-EOS4 formats including HDF 4 and HDF-EOS 4;
MODISQC for MODIS quality assurance data products;
GACPIDRISI imports Global Aerosol Climatology Project data into IDRISI;
NETCDF imports NETCDF data into IDRISI;
OLRIDRISI imports Outgoing Longwave Radiation into IDRISI;
PSDIDRISI imports Physical Science Division standard format into IDRISI;
XYZMONTHLY converts the University of Delaware's Center for Climatic Research ASCII monthly x, y, and multi-z
data into IDRISI;
ASDIDRISI imports the spectrometer data collected using the Analytical Spectral Device (ASD);
SACIDRIS for SAC-C satellite data from Argentina;
RADARSAT for RADARSAT International data;
GPCIDRISI imports the International Satellite Cloud and Climatology Project's Global Processing Center data into
IDRISI.
GOODE2LL for Global AVHRR 10-day composite data from USGS NASA DAAC in the Goodes Homosoline projec-
tion;
STDS for Raster Spatial Data Transfer Standard data;
DLG for Digital Line Graphs (Optional Format) data;
CTG for the Composite Theme Grid data; and
DEMIDRIS for USGS Digital Elevation Models.

Desktop Publishing Tools

BMPIDRIS for Windows Bitmap files (BMP);
DXFIDRIS for CAD DXF files;
GEOTIFF/TIFF for Tagged Information File Format files (TIFF); and
JPGIDRIS for JPEG files.
Note that there is the ability to save a currently-displayed map to a Windows Metafile (WMF) or an Enhanced Windows

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 77

Metafile format (EMF) through the Display System Composer's Save Composition dialog box.

Software-Specific Formats
SHAPEIDR, ARCRASTER, and ARCIDRIS for ESRI Shape files, ArcInfo Raster Exchange, and ArcInfo GENER-
ATE/UNGEN file formats, respectively;
ATLIDRIS; for Atlas*GIS BNA files;
ECWIDRIS for ECW files;
ENVIIDRIS for ENVI files;
ERDIDRIS for Erdas LAN and GIS files;
ERMIDRIS for ER Mapper files;
GRASSIDR for GRASS raster files;
MAPIDRIS for Map Analysis Package files;
MIFIDRIS for MapInfo Interchange files;
PALIDRIS for palette files
SPLUSIDRIS for SPLUS statistical files;
SRFIDRIS for Surfer GRD files; and
STATIDRIS for STATISTICA files.
.IDRISI Vector Export for IDRISI vector export format files (.vxp).

The IDRISI File Conversion (16/32) utility converts between earlier 16-bit versions of IDRISI files and the current 32-
bit version.

The Display Menu

The Display menu provides all the tools for either displaying vector or raster files or for enhancing their display character-
istics.
DISPLAY Launcher is the entry point into IDRISI's extensive display and map composition system. It allows you to
either redisplay an existing composition or launch a new composition by displaying either a raster image or a vector layer.
ORTHO is a facility that creates orthographic perspective (3-D) displays of digital elevation models (DEMs) or any con-
tinuous raster image.
Fly Through is an interactive 3-D viewer using OpenGL technology that allows users to simulate movement through
space using existing IDRISI images.
Media Viewer is a presentation utility that can play Windows video (AVI) files and can create AVI video files from a
sequence of IDRISI images.
Symbol Workshop allows one to create and modify symbol and palette files for vector and raster display.

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 78

COMPOSITE produces a 24-bit color composite image from three bands of imagery.
SEPARATE performs color separation of palette images into RGB components.
ILLUMINATE is a hillshading merge facility.
HISTO provides a frequency histogram and statistics of the cell values within an image, presented graphically or numeri-
cally.
STRETCH increases the contrast in an image for the enhancement of visual interpretation.

The GIS Analysis Menu

At the very heart of GIS is the ability to perform analyses based on geographic location. Indeed, no other type of soft-
ware can provide this. IDRISI offers a wealth of analytical tools for geographic analysis.
The GIS Analysis Menu contains eight submenus. The first four are organized by toolset type, following the logic pre-
sented in the Introduction to GIS chapter. The remaining submenus are organized according to the particular type of
analysis to be performed. These groupings are primarily for organizational convenience. Most analyses will require the use
of tools from multiple submenus.
This section contains, in addition to the general descriptions of the individual modules and their typical usage, further
information about the operation and application of the modules to particular problems.

The Database Query Submenu

Database Query is the most fundamental of GIS operations. Following the module descriptions is a section called Per-
forming Database Query with IDRISI, which further describes this procedure.
RECLASS produces a new map image by reclassifying the values of an input image.
OVERLAY can perform nine different operations between two images including add, subtract, multiply, divide, normal-
ized ratio, exponentiate, minimize, maximize, and cover.
CROSSTAB performs a crosstabulation or a crosscorrelation between two qualitative maps.
Edit is the IDRISI text editor utility for creating a variety of ASCII related IDRISI format files.
ASSIGN assigns new values to an image.
EXTRACT calculates summary statistics for a set of input maps.
BREAKOUT creates Boolean maps for all categories in an image.
HISTO provides a graphic or numeric frequency histogram and statistics of the cell values within an image.
AREA calculates the area in a variety of units of each class in an image.
PERIM calculates the perimeter of each class in an image.
PROFILE creates profiles over space by querying the values along a linear transect across an image, or over time by que-
rying the value of the same location across multiple images.
QUERY extracts pixels designated by an independent mask into a sequential file for subsequent statistical analysis.
PCLASS performs a probability reclassification when the level of uncertainty in an image is known.

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 79

Database Workshop is a relational database manager and lies at the heart of IDRISI’s support for layer collections that
link vector feature definition files to database tables. Database Workshop provides the ability to create, edit and analyze
database files in IDRISI. IDRISI uses the Microsoft ADO and Access Jet Engines as the basis for Database Workshop.
With this facility, one can undertake a wide variety of database operations including queries, calculations, and map display.
Both the Calculate and Filter operations are supported through the use of Structured Query Language (SQL). For more
information, see the chapter on Database Workshop in this volume.
Image Calculator is an interactive mathematical modeling tool that allows you to enter a model as a full algebraic equa-
tion using a calculator-like interface and supports mathematical expressions and logical queries.

The Mathematical Operators Submenu

IDRISI, like most raster geographic analysis systems, provides a set of mathematical tools necessary for complete map
algebra.
OVERLAY can perform nine different operations between two images including add, subtract, multiply, divide, normal-
ized ratio, exponentiate, minimize, maximize, and cover.
SCALAR undertakes arithmetic operations between a constant and a single image.
TRANSFORM can perform 15 different mathematical transformations on the attributes of a single image including nat-
ural logarithms and antilogs, a logit transformation, reciprocal, square and square root, absolute value, and all of the trigo-
nometric operations.
Image Calculator is an interactive mathematical modeling tool that allows you to enter a model as a full algebraic equa-
tion using a calculator-like interface and supports mathematical expressions and logical queries.

The Distance Operators Submenu

The third submenu of analytical tools consists of those that may be called distance operators.
DISTANCE calculates the true Euclidean distance of each cell to the nearest of a set of target cells as specified in a sep-
arate image.
SPDIST is the equivalent of the DISTANCE module, except that it accommodates the special case of spherical distance
units (degrees, radians).
COST calculates a distance/proximity surface where distance is measured as the least cost distance in moving over a fric-
tion surface.
BUFFER creates buffers around any set of specified features in an image.
The next set of four modules are used when frictions act with different strengths depending on the direction of move-
ment. For a detailed discussion, consult the chapter on Anisotropic Cost Analysis.
VARCOST computes an anisotropic cost surface for movement having motive energy behind it in terms of direction and
magnitude.
DISPERSE models movement caused by anisotropic forces in terms of direction and magnitude but that have no motive
force of their own, unlike VARCOST.
RESULTANT computes the resultant force vector (as a magnitude and direction image pair) from two input force vec-
tor image pairs.
DECOMP decomposes a force vector (as a magnitude and direction image pair) into X and Y component images, or
takes X and Y component images and produces a force vector image pair.

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 80

PATHWAY calculates the route of least cost distance between one or more points and the lowest point or points on an
accumulated cost distance surface.
ALLOCATE performs spatial allocation based on a distance or cost distance image.
RELOCATE moves features in an image to a target set of features in another image based on minimum distance.
THIESSEN produces Thiessen (Voronoi Tessellation) polygons around a set of irregularly distributed points.

The Context Operators Submenu

The fourth toolset in the Analysis menu contains context operators (also known as local or neighborhood operators). With
context operators, each cell in the output image is assigned a value based on its value in the original image and the values
of its surrounding neighbors.
SURFACE calculates either the slope, aspect, or an analytical hillshading model of surface cells from a given input image
of terrain heights (a DEM) or any quantitative and continuous variable.
FILTER applies 3 by 3, 5 by 5, 7 by 7, or user-defined kernels to calculate new values using a mathematical operation on
the original cell value and its neighbors. The following filters are available: mean, Gaussian, median, standard deviation,
adaptive box, mode, Laplacian edge enhancement, high pass, Sobel edge detection, and user-defined.
PATTERN computes various numerical pattern indices (relative richness, diversity, dominance, frequency, fragmenta-
tion, and others), using a 3 by 3, 5 by 5, or 7 by 7 template.
TEXTURE calculate measures of variability (fractional dimension, class frequency, and edge analysis, and others), using
a 3 by 3, 5 by 5, or 7 by 7 template.
GROUP identifies unique contiguous polygon areas in an image.
VIEWSHED determines all cells visible from one or more viewpoint cells situated on a surface and can calculate the
proportion of viewpoint cells from which a viewshed cell is visible.
WATERSHED calculates all cells belonging to the watersheds of one or more target cells.
HINTERLAND determines the supply area dominated by point demand centers.
PIXEL LOCATION creates new images representing the X and Y coordinate of each cell center.

The Statistics Submenu

Statistics is a field that provides tools for describing groups of numbers. In IDRISI, the Statistics submenu provides a
series of tools for performing both traditional statistical analysis and specialized spatial statistics routines.
HISTO provides a graphic or numeric frequency histogram and statistics of the cell values within an image.
EXTRACT calculates summary statistics for a set of input maps.
PATTERN computes various numerical pattern indices (relative richness, diversity, dominance, frequency, fragmenta-
tion, and others), using a 3 by 3, 5 by 5, or 7 by 7 template.
COUNT calculates a relative frequency probability image derived from a set of input Boolean images.
REGRESS undertakes a linear regression analysis with summary statistics and graphs on images pairs.
MULTIREG performs a multivariate regression analysis between images, one dependent variable and two or more inde-
pendent variables.
LOGISTICREG performs a logistical regression analysis on images, one dependent variable and two or more indepen-

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 81

dent variables.
MULTILOGISTRICREG undertakes a multinomial logistical regression on images where the dependent variable is
multi-categorical.
TREND calculates up to a 9th-order best-fit trend surface between pixel values and their positions within the image.
AUTOCORR calculates the first-lag autocorrelation coefficient, using a “rook’s case” or a “king’s case,” of an image
using Moran's "I" statistic.
QUADRAT performs quadrat analysis, the character of a point set's pattern, in terms of its variance/mean ratio or den-
sity.
CENTER calculates the mean center (“center of gravity”) and standard radius for a set of points.
CRATIO measures the compactness ratio of defined polygons.
CROSSTAB performs a crosstabulation or a crosscorrelation between two qualitative maps.
VALIDATE calculates specialized Kappa measures that discriminate between errors of quantity and errors of location
between two qualitative maps.
ROC calculates the Relative Operating Characteristic providing a measure of the correspondence between a quantitative
modeled image showing the likelihood that a particular class exists and a Boolean image of that class as it actually occurs.
SAMPLE creates systematic, random, and stratified random point sampling schemes.
RANDOM creates a new image of specified dimensions with random values that obey either a rectilinear, normal, or log-
normal distribution, according to a user-specified mean and standard deviation.
STANDARD converts the values in an image to standard scores.
SPLUSIDRIS imports and exports images and data between IDRISI and S-PLUS.
STATIDRIS imports and exports images and data between IDRISI and Statistica.

The Decision Support Submenu

One of the most important applications of GIS is that of decision support. In fact, many of the analyses performed with
the modules in the other menus of IDRISI are intended to support decision making. The modules in this menu are unique
in that they specifically address multi-objective, multi-criteria resource allocation decision problems, as well as problems
of assessing and incorporating uncertainty in the decision making process. For an in-depth discussion of these issues, refer
to the chapters on Decision Support.
The Decision Wizard is an automated assistant that steps you through while recording single- or multi-objective multi-
criteria evaluation problems. The Wizard facilitates your use of WEIGHT, MCE, RANK and MOLA.
WEIGHT employs the Analytical Hierarchy Process to compute a best-fit set of weights through a pairwise comparison
of factors in a multi-criteria evaluation.
MCE performs a multi-criteria evaluation by means of either a Boolean analysis, Weighted Linear Combination (WLC) or
Ordered Weighted Averaging (OWA) of factor images.
RANK orders the every cells in a raster image.
MOLA performs a multi-objective land allocation analysis using a decision heuristic to resolve conflicts.
STANDARD converts an image to standard scores.

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 82

FUZZY evaluates the fuzzy set membership values (possibilities) of data cells based on any of three membership func-
tions: sigmoidal, j-shaped, and linear, or through a user-defined membership. Monotonically increasing, monotonically
decreasing, symmetric, and asymmetric variants are supported.
COUNT calculates a relative frequency probability image derived from a set of input Boolean images.
MDCHOICE resolves conflicts between competing objectives by means of a multiple ideal-point procedure.
The remaining modules in this submenu are used in the evaluation and handling of error in geographic analysis.
PCLASS evaluates the probability with which data cells exceed or are exceeded by a specified threshold based on the
stated RMS error for the input map.
BAYES evaluates the probability that an entity belongs to any of a number of different sets.
Belief employs the Dempster-Shafer Weight-of-Evidence procedure to evaluate the degree to which evidence provides
concrete support for a hypothesis (belief) and the degree to which that evidence does not refute the hypothesis (plausibil-
ity).
RANDOM creates random images according to rectilinear, normal or log-normal models.
SAMPLE creates systematic, random, and stratified random point sampling schemes.
ERRMAT produces an error matrix analysis of categorical map data compared to ground truth information and tabu-
lates errors of omission and commission, marginal and total errors, per-category Kappa Index of Agreement, and selected
confidence intervals.

The Change / Time Series Submenu

Change and time series analysis is an important application area for GIS and Image Processing. There is an ongoing need
to identify and quantify change, as well as to predict the effects of change on the environment, at scales ranging from local
to global. For more information about this application area, see the chapter on Change and Time Series Analysis.
The simplest type of change analysis is a comparison between images from two dates.
IMAGEDIFF compares two quantitative images of the same variable for different dates.
IMAGERATIO compares two quantitative images of the same variable for different dates through ratioing.
CVA (Change Vector Analysis) compares two-band sets of images for two dates and calculates the magnitude and
direction of change.
CALIBRATE adjusts the overall numeric characteristics of an image to match an external standard using either image
regression, user-defined offset and gain, or user-defined mean and standard deviation.
CROSSTAB performs a crosstabulation or a crosscorrelation between two qualitative maps.

To analyze change over multiple dates, the following four modules may be used.
PROFILE, creates profiles over space by querying the values along a linear transect across an image, or over time by que-
rying the value of the same location across multiple images.
TFA performs temporal Fourier analysis on image time-series.
CORRELATE calculates the Pearson Product Moment Coefficient of Correlation between a set of values in an attribute
values file and the values through a time series of images for each pixel of an image.

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 83

KENDALL calculates the monotonic trend in data over time using the non-parametric Mann Kendall statistic.
KENDAL TAU calculates a non-parametric statistic to estimate the degree of correspondence between two ordinal level
variables.
TSTATS computes temporal statistics on a per pixel basis across a raster group of images.
TCOR produces the correlations of a spatial pattern between a single image and each image in a time series.
Media Viewer is a presentation utility that can play Windows video (AVI) files and can create AVI video files from a
sequence of IDRISI images.

The following six modules are used in modeling future change.

MARKOV analyzes two qualitative landcover images from different dates and produces a transition matrix, a transition
areas matrix, and a set of conditional probability images.
STCHOICE (Stochastic Choice) creates a stochastic landcover map by evaluating the conditional probabilities that each
landcover can exist at each pixel location against a rectilinear random distribution of probabilities.
DISAGGREGATE redistributes the conditional probabilities of a particular landcover type according to a designated
pattern.
NORMALIZE linearly adjusts the values for a set of quantitative images so the values sum to 1.0 at each pixel.
LOGISTICREG performs a logistical regression analysis on images, one dependent variable and two or more indepen-
dent variables.
CELLATOM performs a cellular automata set of operations according to a set of rules for changing states.
CA_MARKOV is a combined cellular automata / Markov change landcover prediction procedure that adds an element
of spatial contiguity as well as knowledge of the likely spatial distribution of transitions to Markov change analysis.
GEOMOD is a landuse change simulation model that predicts, forward or backward, the locations of grid cells that
change over time.
VALIDATE calculates specialized Kappa measures that discriminate between errors of quantity and errors of location
between two qualitative maps.
ROC calculates the Relative Operating Characteristic providing a measure of the correspondence between a quantitative
modeled image showing the likelihood that a particular class exists and a Boolean image of that class as it actually occurs.

The Surface Analysis Submenu

The Surface Analysis submenu contains four headings, each leading to further submenus. While the descriptions of the
modules in these submenus often refer to elevation data and digital elevation models as examples, the modules available in
the Surface Analysis submenu provide a powerful set of analytical techniques that can be applied to any continuous quan-
titative data.

Interpolation Submenu
The first of the Surface Analysis submenus is Interpolation. The issues surrounding surface interpolation as well as the
options available in IDRISI are discussed in detail in the chapter Surface Interpolation.
INTERPOL interpolates a distance-weighted average or a potential model surface given an input set of points.
INTERCON interpolates a surface from a set of digitized contour lines.

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 84

TIN interpolation is discussed in detail in the chapter Triangulated Networks and Surface Generation. The modules
used to prepare data for TIN generation, to create and optimize the TIN, and to interpolate a full surface from a TIN are
all found in this submenu.
TIN creates a constrained or non-constrained triangulated irregular network from isoline or point data.
TINSURF interpolates a full raster surface from a TIN model and the original point attribute data
GENERALIZATION creates a point vector file from the vertices of an input line file or thins vector point data accord-
ing to a user-defined radial search distance.
LINTOPNT extracts the vertices of a vector line data file into a vector point data file.
TINPREP adds or removes points along an isoline given a user-specified tolerance distance.
The Kriging submenu leads to three interfaces to the Gstat geostatistical modeling software package.1 The chapter Geo-
statistics gives background on the field of geostatistics and the functions provided through these interfaces.
In the Spatial Dependence Modeler interface, the user employs a wide range of tools to learn about the patterns of spa-
tial dependence in the sample data set. In the Model Fitting interface, the user defines mathematical models to describe
the covariance relationships among sample data. In the Kriging and Simulation interface, full raster surfaces may be cre-
ated from sample data and the models developed through the other interfaces.
THIESSEN produces Thiessen (Voronoi Tessellation) polygons around a set of irregularly distributed points.
TREND calculates up to a 9th-order best fit trend surface between pixel values and their positions within the image.

Geostatistics Submenu
The second submenu in the Surface Analysis submenu is Geostatistics. The field of geostatistics has a broad range of
applications to many types of data and analyses. The chapter on Geostatistics gives a broad overview of Geostatistics
and the functions available in IDRISI through the three interfaces to Gstat (see footnote on previous page).
In the Spatial Dependence Modeler interface, the user employs a wide range of tools to learn about the patterns of spa-
tial dependence in the sample data set. In the Model Fitting interface, the user defines mathematical models to describe
the covariance relationships among sample data. In the Kriging and Conditional Simulation interface, full raster sur-
faces may be created from sample data and the models developed through the other interfaces.

Topographic Variables Submenu

The Topographic Variables submenu is the third submenu of the Surface Analysis group and contains modules that oper-
ate on surface images to calculate a variety of measures. The SLOPE, ASPECT and HILLSHADE entries all open the
SURFACE module interface.
SURFACE calculates either the slope, aspect, or an analytical hillshading model of surface cells from a given input image
of terrain heights (a DEM) or any quantitative and continuous variable.
CURVATURE calculates the maximum rate of change of a curve fit through a pixel in both the direction of aspect and
also in the direction orthogonal to aspect.
FRACTAL calculates the fractal dimension of a surface using a 3 by 3 neighborhood.

1. IDRISI provides a graphical user interface to Gstat, a program for geostatistical modeling, prediction and simulation written by Edzer J. Pebesma
(Department of Physical Geography, Utrecht University). Gstat is freely available under the GNU General Public License from www.gstat.org. Clark
Labs' modifications of the Gstat code are available from the downloads section of the Clark Labs Web site at www.clarklabs.org.

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 85

Feature Extraction Submenu
CONTOUR creates vector isolines at specified contour intervals from a continuous surface.
TOPOSHAPE classifies a surface into eleven different features: peak, ridge, saddle, flat, ravine, pit, convex hillside, sad-
dle hillside, slope hillside, concave hillside, and inflection hillside.
PIT REMOVAL creates an adjusted "depressionless" DEM in which the cells contained in depressions are raised to the
lowest elevation value on the rim of the depression.
RUNOFF calculates the accumulation of rainfall units per pixel as if one unit of rainfall was dropped on every location.
FLOW calculates the flow direction from each pixel into its next “downhill” neighbor.
RUSLE (Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation) simulates farmland and rangeland nonchannelized soil loss by water.
WATERSHED calculates all cells belonging to the watersheds of one or more target cells.
SLOPELENGTH calculates the longest slope length in a given raster region.
FACET produces an image of homogeneity.
SEDIMENTATION evaluates the net soil movement (erosion or deposition) within patches, fields, or river basins.

The Modeling Menu

The items found under the Modeling menu unleash the power of raster analysis in IDRISI. Most of these modules are
found elsewhere in the menu structure but are incorporated here to help structure these diverse but powerful set of tools.
The Modeling menu in IDRISI is comprised of three main groups of options. Model Deployment Tools include mod-
ules for deploying conceptual, theoretical or existing mathematical or logical models. Empirical Model Development
Tools include modules for the empirical development of models from exemplars. Environmental/Simulation Models
are a set of established models that have been implemented in the IDRISI system.
For Model Deployment Tools, probably the most direct and easily understood is Image Calculator - a mathematical
and logical calculator that uses map layers as variables. For more involved algorithmic models, Macro Modeler provides
a very mature graphical modeling interface. Macro Modeler exposes all of IDRISI's GIS modules as objects that can be
linked, dynamically and with feedbacks, with map layers in an algorithmic chain. For the most demanding of algorithmic
modeling applications, or for the development of stand-alone modules as add-ons to IDRISI, a scripting language such as
Python or a full programming language such as C++, Delphi or Visual Basic can be used. In these cases, users can access
IDRISI through the industry-standard COM object model interface. Using COM, client applications can be written that
control all aspects of IDRISI's operations. For simpler modeling tasks, IDRISI offers the Run Macro macro scripting
language. There are also quick links to the main tools used for multi-criteria evaluation (MCE) (normally associated with
our Decision Support menu), because of the frequency with which they are applied to create expert opinion models.
Empirical Model Development Tools provide empirical modeling procedures to analyze examples of known cases and
their relationship between a phenomenon of interest and a set of explanatory variables, most commonly called training
data. Depending on the nature of the data, models can be developed with Presence Data, Presence/Absence Data, or
Abundance/Frequency/Value Data. Menus exist for each modeling type.
Presence Data are cases where we do not know where the phenomenon is, only when it occurs. A classic example of this
is the modeling of species distributions from reports of animal sightings. Few techniques exist for handling data of this
character. However, IDRISI provides the Mahalanobis Typicalities (MAHALCLASS) soft classifier (which requires prior
signature analysis using the module MAKESIG) which works exceptionally with this kind of data.

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 86

Presence/Absence Data tools are for cases where we have both presence and absence data for our exemplars. A wide
range of modeling techniques can be applied including logistic (LOGISTICREG) and multinomial logistic (MULTILO-
GISTRICREG) regression, multivariate image classification procedures (BAYCLASS, FISHER) and machine learning
techniques such as neural networks (MLP, SOM, Fuzzy ARTMAP) and classification trees (CTA).
Abundance/Frequency/Value Data availability affords the use of tools such as single (REGRESS) or multivariate
(MULTIREG) regression.
Environmental/Simulation Models menu group provides links to a series of established models or modeling environ-
ments associated with specific application areas. These fall into two groups: those concerned with modeling landcover
change and those concerned with surface water runoff and soil erosion. These tools include:
LCM (Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability) is an integrated software environment for analyzing landcover
change, projecting its course into the future, and assessing its implications for habitat and biodiversity change.
ETM (Earth Trends Modeler) is an integrated software environment for the display, manipulation, and analysis of time
series data.
GEOMOD is a landuse change simulation model that predicts the locations of grid cells that change over time.
MARKOV analyzes two qualitative landcover images from different dates and produces a transition matrix, a transition
areas matrix, and a set of conditional probability images.
CA_MARKOV is a combined cellular automata / Markov change landcover prediction procedure that adds an element
of spatial contiguity as well as knowledge of the likely spatial distribution of transitions to Markov change analysis.
RUSLE (Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation) simulates farmland and rangeland nonchannelized soil loss by water.
SEDIMENTATION evaluates the net soil movement (erosion or deposition) within patches, fields, or river basins.
RUNOFF calculates the accumulation of rainfall units per pixel as if one unit of rainfall was dropped on every location.

The Image Processing Menu

Alongside the geographic analytical operators found in IDRISI, the Image Processing capabilities round out a full suite of
tools for the processing of spatial data. The Image Processing functions fall into ten categories: restoration, enhancement,
transformation, Fourier analysis, signature development, hard classifiers, soft classifiers, hardeners, hyperspectral analysis
and accuracy assessment.
For background information, consult the Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing chapter. Also, sev-
eral chapters provide in-depth discussions of particular image processing tasks. The Image Restoration chapter dis-
cusses issues of geometric and radiometric correction and the IDRISI modules designed for these purposes. The
Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery chapter provides more detailed information on the classification process
and a tour of the IDRISI classification operators. The Fourier Analysis chapter gives detailed information about the use
and function of FOURIER and its companion modules in the Fourier Analysis submenu. Finally, the Tutorial includes an
extensive set of exercises covering many aspects of image processing.

Restoration Submenu
Image Restoration is the manipulation of remotely sensed images in an attempt to remove known value distortions. Res-
toration can be geometric or radiometric. The first two modules perform geometric corrections which are used to reduce
distortion at the edges of the image and to register the image to a coordinate system. The other modules perform radio-
metric restoration for the removal or diminishment of distortions in the data values of the images.

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 87

RESAMPLE performs a local affine transformation for the geometric restoration of images and can be used to georeg-
ister an image to a reference system or to another file.
LOCALAFFINE is used to rectify images that have an embedded grid of control points with precise known locations.
MOSAIC automates color balancing when adjacent overlapping images are joined into a single larger image.
DESTRIPE removes the striping caused by variable detector output in scanned imagery.
RADIANCE converts raw Landsat data values to calibrated radiance using lookup tables of gain and offset values.
ATMOSC corrects remotely sensed images for atmospheric effects using either the Dark Object Subtraction model,
Chavez's Cos(t) model, the full radiative transfer equation model), or the Apparent Reflectance Model (ARM).
NDVICOMP creates temporal composite images of NDVI imagery using the maximum value or a quadratic mean.
SCREEN uses spatial autocorrelation to screen a hyperspectral series of images for the presence of significant atmo-
spheric noise.
Simple haze removal can be accomplished with the SCALAR module. The linear with saturation option in STRETCH
may often be used to produce the same result.
When DESTRIPE is not applicable or does not perform well, Principal Components Analysis (PCA) or Fourier Analysis
may provide solutions for destriping satellite imagery. See the chapter on Image Restoration for details.

Enhancement Submenu
Image enhancement is the modification of image values to highlight information within the image. Most often these
enhanced images are used in visual analysis only, while the original images are used for automated analyses. The IDRISI
display system includes some facilities for enhancement of the screen display. These include the ability to interactively set
the endpoints used in applying the color palette to images. No new files are created with the Display tools, however. To
create new images that are enhanced, the following three modules are often used.
STRETCH increases the contrast in an image for the enhancement of visual interpretation.
COMPOSITE produces a 24-bit color composite image from three bands of imagery.
FILTER applies 3 by 3, 5 by 5, 7 by 7, or user-defined kernels to calculates new values using a mathematical operation on
the original cell value and its neighbors. The following filters are available: mean, Gaussian, median, standard deviation,
adaptive box, mode, Laplacian edge enhancement, high pass, Sobel edge detection, and user-defined.
PANSHARPEN performs a panchromatic merge using color space transformation, principal component transforma-
tion, and local regression transformation techniques.

Transformation Submenu
PCA provides both standardized and unstandardized principal components analysis.
CCA performs a canonical components analysis transformation.
MNF (Minimum Noise Fraction) maximizes the signal to noise ratio for a set of images.
TFA (Temporal Fourier Analysis) performs harmonic analysis on temporal images;
COLSPACE performs Hue/Lightness/Saturation (HLS) to Red/Green/Blue (RGB) and vice versa color space transfor-
mations.
TEXTURE calculate measures of variability (fractional dimension, class frequency, and edge analysis, and others), using
a 3 by 3, 5 by 5, or 7 by 7 template.

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 88

THERMAL converts Landsat TM Band 6 raw data values to blackbody temperatures.
VEGINDEX calculates 19 slope-based and distance-based vegetation indices from remotely sensed images. See the
Chapter on Vegetation Indices.
TASSCAP performs the Tasseled Cap transformation.

Fourier Analysis Submenu

The modules in the Fourier Analysis submenu support the application of Fourier Analysis, a transformation between spa-
tial and frequency domains. The chapter Fourier Analysis provides detailed information on the use of FOURIER and its
companion modules as well as the interpretation of results.
FOURIER allows for the transformation of images from the spatial domain to the frequency domain and back again.
ZEROPAD is used to prepare images used in FOURIER.
FILTERFQ, FREQDIST and DRAWFILT all facilitate the creation of filters to be applied to frequency domain
images to enhance, suppress or remove particular frequencies prior to performing a reverse Fourier Transform. FIL-
TERFQ offers 26 types of filters, each with several user-defined options. FREQDIST creates a frequency distance image
that may then be manipulated with RECLASS or FUZZY. DRAWFILT provides an interactive display utility in which the
user may use the cursor to trace particular frequencies to be masked out.

Signature Development Submenu

Signature Development is most often associated with the first stages of supervised classification and typically requires two
steps—the creation of training sites and the creation of signature files from the training sites. Training sites are examples
of informational classes, e.g., forests, urban or rangeland, which can be characterized across all bands of imagery. These
characterizations are then used to create signatures or spectral response patterns for each informational class. Delineation
of training sites is often accomplished through on-screen digitizing in the IDRISI Display System or through the import
of GPS data collected in the field. The second step, signature development, is accomplished with the use of the modules
in this submenu.
MAKESIG creates statistical signature files for each informational training site class.
Endsig is used to create end-member (i.e., pure) signatures for use with UNMIX.
FUZSIG produces signatures from data that are assumed to be inherently fuzzy or ambiguous in character.
PURIFY performs a parametric (Mahalanobis distance) or a nonparametric (unsupervised clustering) purification on
existing training site data.
HYPERSIG creates statistical signatures from hyperspectral data, either from training site data or from spectral curve
library files.
HYPERAUTOSIG automatically develops signatures for hyperspectral image data based on the Linear Spectral Unmix-
ing logic.
SIGCOMP graphically displays and compares signatures.
SEPSIG provides statistical measures on the separability of signatures over a given set of bands.
SCATTER creates a scattergram of the band space between images used in the creation of signatures.

Hard Classifiers Submenu

There are two basic approaches to the classification process: supervised and unsupervised classification. IDRISI provides

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 89

the tools for both processes with both hard and soft classifiers available. This submenu lists the hard classifiers available
for both supervised and unsupervised classification.
PIPED is a Parallelepiped classifier.
MINDIST is a Minimum Distance to Means classifier.
MAXLIKE is a Maximum Likelihood classifier with options to specify prior probabilities as values or images.
FISHER provides image classification based on linear discriminant analysis.
KNN is a k-nearest neighbor classifier.
SEGCLASS is a majority rule classifier based on a majority class within a segment.
CLUSTER performs an unsupervised classification using a variant of the histogram peak technique to create a new
image of like clusters.
ISOCLUST is an iterative self-organizing cluster analysis procedure using a predetermined number of clusters.
ISODATA provides an unsupervised classification of input images using an iterative self-organizing data analysis tech-
nique.
KMEANS classifies according to the K-means clustering technique.
MAXSET is a hard classifier that assigns to each pixel the class with the greatest degree of commitment based on a full
Dempster-Shafer hierarchy describing all classes and their hierarchical combination.
MLP undertakes the classification of remotely sensed imagery through the artificial neural network multi-layer percep-
tron technique.
SOM undertakes either a supervised and unsupervised classification of remotely sensed imagery through the artificial
neural network Self-Organizing Map technique.
Fuzzy ARTMAP undertakes either a supervised and unsupervised classification of remotely sensed imagery through the
artificial neural network Fuzzy ARTMAP technique.
CTA undertakes the classification of remotely sensed imagery through Classification Tree Analysis with automatic and
manual pruning options.

Soft Classifiers / Mixture Analysis Submenu

Unlike hard classifiers, soft classifiers defer making a definitive judgment about the class membership of any pixel and
instead make groups of statements about the degree of membership of any given pixel in each of all possible classes. Fur-
thermore, with soft classifiers, the result is not a single image or classification but a set of images (one per class) that
express the degree of membership each pixel possesses in a particular class. These modules are very important in develop-
ing robust signatures and evaluating classification techniques, and are also used for sub-pixel classification and mixture
analysis. Several modules are available, each employing a different set membership metric to express the degree of mem-
bership of any pixel to any class. Modules for use with multispectral and hyperspectral image sets are provided.
BAYCLASS employs Bayesian probability theory to express the degree of membership of a pixel to any class.
MAHALCLASS calculates Mahalanobis distance to produce a new set of signature classes.
BELCLASS employs Dempster-Shafer theory to express the degree of membership of a pixel to any class.
FUZCLASS employs Fuzzy Set theory to express the degree of membership of a pixel to any class.
KNN is a k-nearest neighbor classifier that can express for each category its proportion among the k-nearest neighbors.

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 90

MLP undertakes the classification of remotely sensed imagery through the artificial neural network multi-layer percep-
tron technique with an option to output soft activation level layers for each class.
SOM undertakes either a supervised and unsupervised classification of remotely sensed imagery through the artificial
neural network Self-Organizing Map technique with an option to output soft typicalities or commitment layers for each
class.
UNMIX is used to classify remotely-sensed images using Linear Spectral Unmixing (LSU—also called Linear Mixture
Modeling).
HYPERUSP provides unsupervised classification for hyperspectral image data.
HYPEROSP provides for hyperspectral image classification through an orthogonal subspace projection approach.
HYPERUNMIX extends the capabilities of Linear Spectral Unmixing to hyperspectral data sets.
HYPERABSORB provides for hyperspectral image classification based on library spectra and continuum removal of
absorption areas and the correlation of these areas in terms of fit and depth between the library spectrum and the spectra
from an imaging data set.
BELCALC calculates the degree of membership that each pixel exhibits for each of the classes for which training data
has been provided using the logic of Dempster-Shafer theory.
Belief performs a Dempster-Shafer Weight-of-Evidence classification and extends the logic of mixture analysis, allowing
for the ability to combine new evidence with existing knowledge.
HARDEN produces hard decision images from the soft classifier outputs of BAYCLASS, UNMIX, FUZCLASS, BEL-
CLASS, or MAHALCLASS by choosing the class that has the maximum value.

Segmentation Classifiers Submenu

Three tools are available for classification using image segmention.
SEGMENTATION groups adjacent pixels into image segments according to their spectral similarity.
SEGTRAIN is an interactive training site and signature development tool from segmentation results created with seg-
mentation.
SEGCLASS is a majority rule classifier based on a majority class within a segment.

Hyperspectral Image Analysis Submenu

HYPERSIG extends the logic of signature development to the special case of hyperspectral data. HYPERSIG creates
and displays hyperspectral signatures either from training site data or from spectral curve library files.
ASDIDRISI imports the spectrometer data collected using the Analytical Spectral Device (ASD).
HYPERAUTOSIG automatically develops signatures for hyperspectral image data based on the Linear Spectral Unmix-
ing logic.
SCREEN uses spatial autocorrelation to screen a hyperspectral series of images for the presence of significant atmo-
spheric noise.
HYPERSAM is a spectral angle mapper hard classifier for hyperspectral data using minimum-angle procedure.
HYPERMIN is a minimum-distance hyperspectral hard classifier specifically intended for use with image-based signa-
tures developed using training sites.
HYPERUSP provides unsupervised classification for hyperspectral image data.

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 91

HYPEROSP provides for hyperspectral image classification through an orthogonal subspace projection approach.
HYPERUNMIX extends the capabilities of Linear Spectral Unmixing to hyperspectral data sets.
HYPERABSORB provides for hyperspectral image classification based on library spectra and continuum removal of
absorption areas and the correlation of these areas in terms of fit and depth between the library spectrum and the spectra
from an imaging data set.

Accuracy Assessment Submenu

Accuracy assessment is an important final step in both unsupervised and supervised classifications. Its purpose is to
quantify the likelihood that what you mapped is what you will find on the ground. This is useful in comparing classifica-
tion techniques, and determining the level of error that might be contributed by the landcover image in further analyses in
which it is incorporated.
SAMPLE creates systematic, random, and stratified random point sampling schemes.
ERRMAT produces an error matrix analysis of categorical map data compared to ground truth information and tabu-
lates errors of omission and commission, marginal and total errors, per-category Kappa Index of Agreement, and selected
confidence intervals.

The Reformat Menu

Items in the Reformat Menu allow you to change the data and file type of a file, reorient an image or vector file, change
the extent of the study area, change resolution, generalize the level of detail in the file, join files together, and convert files
from raster to vector and vice versa. For a detailed discussion see the chapter on Georeferencing.
CONVERT changes the data type or file type of an image or vector file.
PROJECT reprojects the reference system coordinates of image or vector files.
RESAMPLE performs a local affine transformation for the geometric restoration of images and can be used to georeg-
ister an image to a reference system or to another file.
WINDOW extracts a rectangular sub-area of a larger image to create a new smaller image. A similar function which
allows the currently-displayed window to be saved to a new image is available through the Save Map Composition dialog
box of Composer in the Display System.
EXPAND alters the resolution of raster images through pixel duplication.
CONTRACT alters the resolution of raster images through pixel thinning or by pixel aggregation.
CONCAT concatenates multiple images or multiple vector files into a single image or vector file.
TRANSPOSE rotates an image by 90 degrees in either direction and can reverse the order of rows or columns.
METAUPDATE updates the documentation files of all files in a raster or vector group file.
RASTERVECTOR converts data between raster and vector formats.
GENERALIZATION is used to generalize vector point and line data. It can also generalize raster data by merging
smaller regions into neighboring regions based on a given threshold.
LINTOPNT extracts the vertices of a vector line data file into a vector point data file

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 92

The Data Entry Menu
IDRISI offers a host of tools to facilitate data entry. In addition to the data entry modules in this menu, you will find con-
version utilities for existing data that are in non-IDRISI formats in the File/Import submenu. The chapter on Database
Development also discusses issues of data entry.
CartaLinx is a full vector topological editor and spatial database development tool also developed and distributed by
Clark Labs. It provides tablet as well as on-screen digitizing capabilities and a wide range of data editing tools.
Edit is the IDRISI text editor utility for creating a variety of ASCII related IDRISI format files.
ASSIGN assigns new values to an image.
INITIAL creates an image containing a single value.
UPDATE assigns single values to specific cells or rectangular groups of cells.
UTMRef facilitates the creation of reference system parameter files based on the Universal Transverse Mercator system,
for subsequent use with PROJECT.
The options in the Surface Interpolation submenu are identical to those of the Analysis / Surface Analysis / Interpola-
tion submenu and are described in that section above. The issues surrounding surface interpolation as well as the options
available in IDRISI are discussed in greater detail in the chapter Surface Interpolation.
Database Workshop is a relational database manager, and lies at the heart of IDRISI’s support for layer collections that
link vector feature definition files to database tables. Database Workshop provides the ability to create, edit and analyze
database files in IDRISI. IDRISI uses the Microsoft ADO and Access Jet Engines as the basis for Database Workshop.
With this facility, one can undertake a wide variety of database operations including queries, calculations, and map display.
Both the Calculate and Filter operations are supported through the use of Structured Query Language (SQL). For more
information, see the chapter on Database Workshop in this volume.
IDRISI Explorer is a general purpose utility to manage and explore IDRISI files and projects. Use IDRISI Explorer to
set your project environment, manage your group files, review metadata, display files, and simply organize your data with
such tools as copy, delete, rename, and move commands.

Window List
The Window List menu item provides a listing of all open windows. Open dialogs are listed with the module name (e.g.,
Composer) and open map windows are listed with the filename that appears in the banner of the map display window.
Clicking on a window name in the list will bring that window into focus. All open map layers and dialogs can be closed
from the Window List menu.

The Help Menu

The Help menu gives you access to the IDRISI on-line Help System.
Contents leads you directly to the IDRISI Help System.
Using Help describes the IDRISI Help System. Here you will find out how to access and navigate through the Help Sys-
tem. Also provided are general information on the Help System screen and functions as well as how a typical program
module's entry is organized within the Help System.

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 93

IDRISI Quick Start provides the basic information you will need to begin using the IDRISI system. You will find here
information on the IDRISI screen, program modules, IDRISI Explorer and IDRISI dialog boxes.
What’s New in the Taiga Edition gives an overview of the newest functionality since the last version.
The IDRISI Manual and IDRISI Tutorial lead you directly to the respective PDF files.
The Clark Labs Home Page will launch the Clark Labs Web site. The IDRISI Technical Support will lead you to an
on-line form on our web site where you can describe your technical problem and send it as an email to our Technical Sup-
port Staff.
About IDRISI Taiga provides licensing and copyright information as well as general information, including contact
addresses and telephone numbers.

ESRI Quick Start Submenu

The ESRI Quick Start section of the help menu gives immediate access to information about Using ArcGIS/ArcView
with IDRISI and to the Help System for modules commonly used to transfer data between the two systems.

Chapter 7 IDRISI Modules 94

Database Workshop
Database Workshop is IDRISI's relational database manager, and lies at the heart of IDRISI's support for layer collections
that link vector feature definition files to database tables. IDRISI uses the Microsoft ADO and Access Jet Engine as the
basis for Database Workshop. With this facility, one can undertake a wide variety of database operations. However, more
importantly, one can interact directly with linked-table collections: database queries can be shown immediately on the
associated map layer, and map layer queries can be directly linked to the data table. In addition, database field values can
be assigned or extracted from raster layers. Each of these is discussed below.

Working with Linked-Table Collections

A linked-table collection consists of a vector feature definition file, a database table and a link file associating the two. The
collection is defined in Database Workshop from the Establish Display Link menu entry under the Query menu.1 The
link file contains information about the vector file, database file, table of the database file (a database file may have several
tables), and link field for the collection. In a linked-table collection each field (column) in the database, linked to the geo-
graphic definition of the features in the vector file, becomes a map layer. These can each be displayed using DISPLAY
Launcher by selecting the layer of interest from below the collection filename, or by typing in the full "dot-logic" name of
the layer. Database Workshop offers several additional ways to examine these data. Once a display link is made, one can
either query the features in a linked map layer to highlight the records in the database, or select a record in the database to
highlight that feature in the vector map layer.

Launching Database Workshop

To launch Database Workshop, either click its icon on the toolbar or select its entry in the Data Entry or Analysis/Data-
base Query menus. When launched, if the selected layer of the map window with focus is from a linked-table collection,
Database Workshop will automatically open that table. Otherwise, use the File/Open menu option on the Database
Workshop menu to select the desired database file and table.

Displaying Layers from Database Workshop

Simply click the mouse into any record (row) of the field (column) you wish to view and then click the Database Work-
shop Display icon from the Database Workshop toolbar. The selected field will then be displayed using autoscaling and
the IDRISI default symbol file. Note that each such action launches a new map window,2 so it is very easy to overload the
display system if you do not have a great deal of RAM. To avoid this, close windows periodically. The first time you dis-
play a layer you will be prompted to indicate the link file to use.

Database Query using an SQL Filter

Database query by attribute is accomplished in Database Workshop by filtering the database. This is simply the identifica-
tion of which records have attributes that meet our query (i.e., filter) criteria. To query the active database table, click on
the Filter Table icon or choose the Filter Table option from the Query menu. This opens the SQL Filter dialog which pro-
vides a simple interface to the construction of a Structured Query Language (SQL) statement.

1. For more about collections, see the chapter Map Layers, Raster Group Files, Vector Collections and Data Structures.

2. This may not be evident since each map window will exactly overlay the previous one. We recommend moving each new window to an unused area of
the screen as it is created so that all can be seen.

Chapter 8 Database Workshop 95

The Select option at the top of the filter dialog specifies which fields to display in the result. The default asterisk indicates
all fields and is fine in most instances. To specify a subset of fields, type their names into this input box separated by com-
mas. Remember that all field names require square brackets around them if they contain spaces in the names. (To avoid
ambiguity, it is a good habit to place square brackets around every field name.)
The Where input box is where the main part of the filter is constructed. The tabbed options to the right facilitate the
placement of filter elements. SQL requires spaces on either side of each operator. If you select elements rather than typing
them in, IDRISI will ensure that this is so. Note also than any valid SQL clause can be typed in; you are not restricted to
the options shown on the tabs.
The Order By input box is optional. It simply causes the results of the query to be sorted according to the field chosen.
Clicking OK causes the filter to be executed. Database Workshop will then show only the records that meet the filter cri-
teria. The records that do not meet the criteria are still in the database, but they are hidden. (Remove the filter to restore
the full database—see below.)

Mapping the Filtered Records

When a filter is executed, IDRISI checks all open map windows to see if any contain an active layer that is linked to the
database that was filtered. If so, it will automatically display the results of the query as a Boolean map with features that
meet the filter criteria shown in red and all others shown in black.

Removing the Filter

To remove any filter, choose the Remove Filter icon from the toolbar or choose the option from the Query menu.

Query by Location
When a map window contains an active layer (the one highlighted in Composer) linked to a database, you can use Cursor
Inquiry Mode (from the IDRISI toolbar) to perform database query by location. When you click on a feature in the map
display, Database Workshop will automatically locate the corresponding record in the database. The located record is indi-
cated with a triangular marker at the left edge of the record in the table display.

Other Database Operations

Calculating Field Values
In addition to querying the database, it is sometimes necessary to create new fields, either through importing external val-

Chapter 8 Database Workshop 96

ues or calculating new values from existing fields. For example, one might calculate a new field of population density val-
ues based on existing fields of population and area. The Calculate Field Values option of the Query menu (also accessed
by clicking its icon on the Database Workshop toolbar) produces an SQL dialog area similar to that of the SQL Filter. In
this case, it facilitates the construction of an SQL UPDATE SET operation to calculate new values for a field as a func-
tion of a mathematical or logical equation. In the SET input box, select the field to be calculated. Then enter the equation
into the main input box after the "=" sign using the tabbed options as an aid. As with Filter, any valid SQL clause can be
entered—you are not restricted to the options specified in the tabbed control.

Advanced SQL Queries across relational tables

An Advanced SQL editor is also available under the Query menu. It can be used to make more complicated SQL com-
mands in the active table and across tables in the active database file. Queries can also be saved to a text file. Consult with
an SQL text for advanced commands.

Finding Specific Records

The Find Next option of the Query Menu (also accessed by clicking the Find Next icon on the Database Workshop tool-
bar) provides a simple way to search for records. The "=" option looks for the next exact match while the "like" option
looks for approximate matches.

Sorting
To sort the records of the database according to the values of a particular field, click the mouse into any record of that
field then click either the ascending or descending sort button on the Database Workshop toolbar.

Entering or Modifying Data

You will specifically need to enter Edit Mode before any cell value in the database can be entered or modified. This guards
against accidental changes to the data values. Enter edit mode by choosing the option from the Edit menu, or by clicking
onto the Edit Mode status button. The grid changes color when you are in edit mode. Several toolbar options are disabled
until edit mode is turned off. You should therefore exit edit mode as soon as you have finished entering data. To do so,
choose the option under the Edit menu, or click onto the Edit Mode status button.

Modifying the Table Structure

The table structure can be modified (i.e., add, rename or remove fields, add or delete records) from the Edit menu. How-
ever, this cannot be done if other "users" have access to the table. Any map windows that are linked to this database are
considered to be users. Thus you will need to close down all of these map windows before the table structure can be
altered.

Assigning Data To and Extracting Data From Raster Layers

Database Workshop provides a very simple means of assigning field data to a raster layer, or extracting data from a raster
layer into a database field. To assign field data to a raster layer, use the Export/Raster Image command from the File
menu in Database Workshop. A link must be established, and row and column information will be need to be specified.
By default, the X and Y coordinates in the new raster image will be taken from the linked vector file. To extract data from
a raster image, use the Import/Raster Image command from the File menu in Database Workshop. A raster feature defi-
nition file will need to be specified representing the ID’s in the raster feature definition image that was used in the extrac-
tion. These identifiers must match one field (the link field) in the database.

Chapter 8 Database Workshop 97

Assigning Data To and Importing Data from Vector Layers
Vector files can be either created or imported from the File menu in Database Workshop. A display link must first be
established. Then, to import vector files, simply select the Import/Vector File command from the menu. A new table will
be added to the open database containing the values in the vector file. A new ID field will also be created. To export a
field to a vector file, simply highlight the field to export and select the Export/Vector File command from the menu. The
vector features created will be based on the linked vector file specified in the vector collection file.

Export and Import

Database Workshop also provides selected import and export options under the File menu. Default formats supported
are xBase, Microsoft Excel, and comma delimited (.csv) and text files.

Chapter 8 Database Workshop 98

Performing Database Query in IDRISI
Perhaps the most fundamental of analytical operations undertaken in GIS is simple database query, in which we ask ques-
tions of the database and examine the results as a map. With a spatial database, two types of questions may be posed—
"What locations have this attribute?" and "What is the attribute at this location?" The first is known as query by attribute,
while the second is called query by location.

Query by Attribute
Query by attribute may be performed several ways, depending on the geography of the layers. If you are working with a
single geography (e.g. farm fields, provinces) defined by a vector file for which you have multiple attributes in a database,
the database query may be accomplished entirely in Database Workshop using an SQL filter. The results may then be
linked to a vector file for display or they may be assigned to a raster feature definition image for subsequent display.
For example, if you had a map of the countries of the world, and multiple attributes for each country stored in a database,
then you could perform a query such as, "Find all the countries where the median per capita annual income is less than
$5000, but the literacy rate is higher than 60%." The query conditions could be used in an SQL filter in Database Work-
shop, and the result linked for display to the original vector feature definition file in DISPLAY Launcher. If a new raster
image file should be made, the attributes may be assigned to a raster feature definition image from Database Workshop.
However, if the geographies of the attributes of interest are not the same, or if the attributes exist only as image layers,
then two steps are involved. First, the features meeting the conditions specified are selected in each layer. This normally
involves the use of RECLASS or ASSIGN. Then those selected data are used in an overlay operation, provided through
the module OVERLAY, to find the locations that meet all the conditions. (Both steps may be carried out with a single
command in Image Calculator, but behind the interface, the individual steps are still carried out in sequence.)
For example, you might ask, "Where are all the locations that have residential land use and are within a half mile of the
primary path of planes taking off from the proposed airport?" In this case, the geography of land use and that of the flight
paths for the airport are not the same. A Boolean image (zeros and ones only) would be made for each condition using
RECLASS or ASSIGN, then these would be combined in an OVERLAY multiply operation. The resulting image would
have the value of one only where both conditions are found:

Input Input Output

Image 1 X Image 2 = Image

0 0 0

1 0 0

0 1 0

1 1 1

Reclassification and overlay are fundamental to query by attribute in GIS. In IDRISI, RECLASS and ASSIGN are the
tools used to perform database queries on single attributes, and may be used to produce Boolean images either directly or
through the Image Calculator.

Chapter 9 Performing Database Query in IDRISI 99

While RECLASS and ASSIGN may be used to produce similar results, there are several important differences between
these modules. Even in cases where either may be used, generally one will be easier to use than the other. The choice will
become more apparent as you become familiar with the characteristics of the two modules.
RECLASS works on an image file. The original image may have byte, integer or real values. However, the new values
assigned may only be byte or integer. Original values may be specified as individual values, or as ranges of values. This
information is entered in the RECLASS dialog box. Any values left out of the specified reclassification ranges will remain
unchanged, except that real values will automatically be rounded to the nearest whole number.
With ASSIGN, a feature definition image file and an attribute values file are required. The latter is commonly created with
Edit or imported from a spreadsheet or statistical software package. The data values in the feature definition image must
be byte or integer. However, the new value to be assigned may be byte, integer or real. Both old and new values must be
specified as single numbers, not as ranges. The old and new values are entered in a values file, rather than in the ASSIGN
dialog box. Any original values not specified in the values file will automatically be assigned the new value zero in the out-
put image.
Whenever the query involves more than one attribute, it is necessary to use OVERLAY. (Again, the user may choose to
use OVERLAY directly, or through the Image Calculator.) For example, to find all agricultural land on soil type 6 requires
that we first isolate soil type 6 as a Boolean image from the soils layer, and the agricultural land as a Boolean image from
the land use layer. These two Boolean images are then overlaid, using the multiplication operation, to find all cases where
it is soil type 6 AND agricultural.
Similarly, the maximum option of OVERLAY may be used to produce the Boolean OR result:

Input Image 1 Max Input Image 2 = Output Image

0.00 0.00 0.00

1.00 0.00 1.00

0.00 1.00 1.00

1.00 1.00 1.00

All of the logical operations can be achieved similarly through simple operations on Boolean images. For example, the
Boolean XOR (exclusive OR) operation can be performed with an addition operation, followed by a reclassification of all
values not equal to 1 to 0. In developing models that require this kind of logic, it is often helpful to construct a table such
as the ones above in order to determine the type of IDRISI operations needed.
In Image Calculator, these analyses are built as logical expressions. While Image Calculator often provides a faster and
easier interface, there are advantages, particularly to those new to GIS, to using the modules directly and performing each
step individually. Doing so allows each step in the process to be evaluated so that errors in logic may be detected more
easily. Using the modules individually also allows the user to become more familiar with their operation, facilitating the
use of these modules outside the limits of database query.

Query by Location
Query by location is most easily accomplished in IDRISI with the Cursor Inquiry tool in the Display System. Select the
Cursor Inquiry icon and with your cursor placed on the location in question, click the left mouse button. The underlying
data value for that location will be displayed on the screen.
Query by location can be extended to include query across multiple raster files by simply creating a raster image group file

Chapter 9 Performing Database Query in IDRISI 100

(.rgf) that contains all files pertaining to a particular group. A query by location in any of the grouped images will bring up
information about the pixel value at that location for all the images in the group. Similarly, query by location in a vector
file that has associated database and vector links files (.vlx) will bring up all the linked database field values for the queried
object. Group and link files are created with the Collection Editor, under the File menu.
Other tools for database query by location include PROFILE, QUERY, WINDOW and EXTRACT. Each of these gives
results based on the attributes found at the location of input features.

Chapter 9 Performing Database Query in IDRISI 101

IDRISI Modeling Tools
One of the most fundamental roles for GIS is in the development, testing and utilization of models—suitability models,
soil erosion models, urban growth models, and the like. IDRISI provides an extensive set of tools for modeling, accom-
modating a range of levels of expertise. The most fundamental is Macro Modeler, a graphical modeling environment that
combines the strengths of extensive capabilities and ease of use. For simpler equation-based modeling using GIS layers,
Image Calculator provides rapid equation entry using a familiar calculator interface. A third facility is a macro scripting
(.iml) language that is provided largely for legacy applications (this was the original form of modeling tool provided in an
early release of IDRISI). Finally, there is the IDRISI API, an industry standard COM interface that provides access to the
internals of the IDRISI system for the most demanding applications and interface development. The API requires a
COM-compliant programming environment such as Visual C++, Delphi, or Visual Basic.

IDRISI Macro Modeler

The IDRISI Macro Modeler is a graphic environment in which you may assemble and run multi-step analyses. Input files,
such as raster images, vector layers, and attribute values files, are linked with IDRISI modules that in turn link to output
data files. The result is a graphic model, much like the cartographic models described in the Introductory GIS Exercises
of the Tutorial. A model may be as simple or complex as desired. Figure 1 shows a simple suitability mapping model.

Figure 1

Model Construction
To work with Macro Modeler, either click on its icon on the tool bar, or select it from the Modeling Menu. This yields a
special workspace in the form of a graphic page along with a separate menu and tool bar. Constructing a model involves
placing symbols for data files and modules on the graphic page, then linking these model elements with connectors. To
place an element, click on its icon (shown in Figure 2) or choose the element type from the Macro Modeler menu, then
choose the specific file or operation from the supplied pick list. (Note that not all IDRISI modules are available for use in
the Macro Modeler.1) To connect elements, click on the connector icon, then click on one of the elements and drag the
cursor onto the other element and release. It is necessary to connect elements in the proper order because the Macro
Modeler assumes that the process flows from the element you first clicked to the element upon which you released the cur-

1. The modules of the Image Processing menu as well as any module that does not create an output file, such as REGRESS, do not work in the Macro
Modeler.

Chapter 10 IDRISI Modeling Tools 102

sor. To delete any element, first click on that element, then click the delete icon or press the delete key on the keyboard.

Data Elements Command Elements

Raster Collection Vector Attribute Module Submodel Connector Delete

Layer Layer Values File Selected
Element
Figure 2

Whenever a module is placed in the model, it is placed with the appropriate output data element for that operation already
linked. Default temporary filenames are assigned to output files. Right-click on a data file symbol to change the filename.
Long filenames are left-justified. To see the entire filename, pause the cursor over the element graphic to cause a balloon
to appear with the entire element name. Filenames are stored without paths. Input files may exist in any folder of the cur-
rent project (specified with IDRISI Explorer) while intermediate and final output files are always written to the Working
Folder.
To specify the parameters for the module, right-click on the module symbol. This opens the module parameters dialog.
Click on any parameter to see and choose other options. Access the Help System for detailed information about the vari-
ous options by clicking the Help button on the parameters dialog.
Submodels are user-constructed models that are subsequently encapsulated into a single command element. When a
model is saved as a submodel, a parameters dialog is created for the submodel in which the user provides captions for all
the model inputs and outputs. A submodel consists of a submodel parameter file (.ims) and its macro model (.imm) file.
When a submodel is placed as a command element in a model, the Macro Modeler knows how many and what types of
input files are required to run the submodel and what types of output files should be produced. For example, you might
create a submodel that stretches a single image then exports it to a JPG image. The model would include both STRETCH
and JPGIDRIS, but the submodel would only require the input image and the output image. The user may change the
input and output data elements of a submodel through the parameters dialog, but settings for module commands that are
part of a submodel must be changed by opening the model from which the submodel was created, making the changes,
then resaving the submodel. Submodels not only simplify multi-step processes, but are important elements when models
have sections that should loop. This is discussed in further detail below.
Models are saved to an IDRISI Macro Model file (.imm). This file preserves all aspects of the model, including the
graphic layout. The file may be opened and modified with the Macro Modeler. The graphic description of the model may
be copied (as a .bmp file) to the operating system clipboard then pasted into other word processing and graphics software.
The graphic may also be printed. The toolbar icons for Macro Modeler file management are shown in Figure 3.

New Open Save Copy to Print

Clipboard

Figure 3

Models may be run at any stage of completion. The Macro Modeler first checks to see if any of the output images already
exist. If so, it shows a message indicating which file exists and asks if you wish to continue. Answering Yes (or Yes to All)
will cause the existing output file to be deleted before the model runs. Answering No will prevent the Macro Modeler
from running the model. As the model runs, the module element that is currently being processed turns green. To stop a
model at any point while it is running, click the stop icon. The model will finish the process it is currently doing and will
then stop.

Chapter 10 IDRISI Modeling Tools 103

The last output created by the model will be automatically displayed. Intermediate images may be displayed by clicking on
the display icon on the Macro Modeler toolbar, then on the data layer symbol. The metadata may be accessed for any data
layer by clicking the Metadata icon on the Macro Modeler toolbar, then the data layer symbol. Toolbar icons for these
functions are shown in Figure 4.

Run Stop Display Metadata

Figure 4

DynaGroups
Two distinctive capabilities of the Macro Modeler are its use of DynaGroups to facilitate running the same model on mul-
tiple data layers and DynaLinks to construct iterative models in which the output of a process becomes an input for the
next iteration of the process.
A DynaGroup is a raster group file or time series file that is used in the Macro Modeler so each member of the group is
used to produce an output. Contrast this with the use of a group file as a regular data input to the Macro Modeler in
which a group file used as input produces a single output as with the module COUNT. More than one DynaGroup may
be used in a process. The module OVERLAY, for example, requires two raster images as input and produces a single ras-
ter image output. If DynaGroups are used as the two inputs, then Macro Modeler will first verify that the same number of
members is in each group, then it will run OVERLAY using corresponding images from the two group files. If a single
raster layer is used as one input and a DynaGroup is used as the other input to OVERLAY, then the modeler will run
OVERLAY with the single raster image and each group member in turn. In all cases the number of output images is equal
to the number of members in the DynaGroup file. Several options for naming the output files are described in the Help
System. In addition, a group file of the output files is automatically constructed. In the model shown in Figure 5, two
DynaGroups are used as input to an overlay operation. The output will be the number of raster images contained in the
input DynaGroups and a raster group file.

Figure 5

DynaLinks
DynaLinks are used to run a model iteratively. An output data element is joined to an initial input data element with a
DynaLink. This indicates that when the model performs the second iteration, the linked output filename should be substi-
tuted in place of the linked input filename. A DynaLink may only be connected to an initial data layer, i.e., one which has
no connector joining to its left-hand side. Macro Modeler asks how many iterations are to be performed and whether each
terminal output of the model or only the terminal output of the final iteration should be displayed. The final output of a
model that includes a DynaLink is a single raster layer. The model shown in Figure 6 uses a DynaLink. When the model is

Chapter 10 IDRISI Modeling Tools 104

run, the Macro Modeler asks for the desired number of iterations. Let us assume that in this case we want 5 iterations. The
input file called Band3 is filtered to create an output image that is called filtered x5_01. On the second iteration, the file
filtered x5_01 is filtered to produce the file filtered x5_02. This file is then substituted back as the input for the next filter
operation and so forth. At the end of the 5th iteration, the final image is named filtered x5. Intermediate images (e.g., fil-
tered x5_03) are not automatically deleted until the model is run again.

Figure 6

Note that the entire model is run during each iteration, even if the substitution occurs near the end of the model. To run
just a portion of a model iteratively, use a submodel that contains a DynaLink (see below).

Using DynaGroups, DynaLinks and Submodels Together

When DynaGroups and DynaLinks are used in the same model, the number of members in the DynaGroup defines the
number of iterations to be run. Each iteration of the model feeds in a new DynaGroup member. The output of a model
that contains both elements is a single data layer. Figure 7 shows a simple model in which a group of raster files is
summed through the use of a DynaGroup and a DynaLink. In the first iteration, the initial layer BLANK (which is simply
an image with value 0 everywhere) is used with the first DynaGroup member in an Overlay Addition operation. This pro-
duces the temporary file SUM_01. SUM_01 is then substituted back into the place of BLANK for the second iteration.
The number of iterations equals the number of images in the DynaGroup.

Figure 7

To iterate or loop only a portion of the model, create a submodel for the portion that should loop. When you run the
model, a dialog box for each submodel will appear asking for the number of iterations for that submodel.

Image Calculator
Image Calculator is a calculator tool for quickly evaluating equations using raster image layers. Equations can be saved and
edited at a later time. It is extremely easy to use since it works exactly like a scientific calculator and offers the functionality
typically associated with calculators. The only special requirement is that all image files must be specified using square
brackets as delimiters. For instance, in the example shown in Figure 8, a calibrated image band is created by multiplying its
values by a gain of 0.9421 and then adding an offset of 0.0168. It can be accessed through its icon on the tool bar, or from
several menu entries: under the Mathematical Operators and Database Query sections of the GIS Analysis menu, and the

Chapter 10 IDRISI Modeling Tools 105

Modeling menu.

Figure 8

Command Line Macros

Macro Modeler and Image Calculator provide very direct and simple interfaces for creating models. However, command
line macro scripts are also supported, primarily to support legacy applications from early versions of IDRISI. A command
line macro is an ASCII file containing the module names and parameters for the sequence of commands to be performed.
It provides no automatic batch capability (though you may quickly copy, paste and edit to achieve this) nor looping.
Specific instructions on the macro command format for each module can be found in the on-line Help System. These
instructions can then be placed into an ASCII file with an ".iml" (an acronym for "IDRISI Macro Language") extension.
Typically, this will be done with the Edit module. Choosing to save as type Macro file will automatically add the correct
filename extension.
Note that some modules do not have a macro command version. These are typically modules that do not produce a
resulting file (e.g., IDRISI Explorer) or modules that require interaction from the user (e.g., Edit). In the menu, any mod-
ule written in all upper-case letters may be used in a macro.
IDRISI records all the commands you execute in a text file located in the Working Folder. This file is called a LOG file.
The commands are recorded in a similar format to the macro command format. It may sometimes be more efficient to
edit a LOG file to have the macro format rather than typing in macro commands from scratch. To do so, open the LOG
file in Edit and alter it to have the macro file format. Save it as a macro file.
Note also that whether from a dialog box or a macro, the command line used to generate each output image is recorded in
that image's Lineage field in its documentation file. This may be viewed with the Metadata utility and may be copied and
pasted into a macro file using the CTL+C keyboard sequence to copy highlighted text in Metadata and the CTL+V key-
board sequence to paste it into the macro file in Edit.

Chapter 10 IDRISI Modeling Tools 106

The Run Macro dialog box, under the File menu, will ask for the name of the macro to execute along with any command
line parameters that should be passed to the macro file itself. This latter box can be left blank if there are none.
Each line in a macro is completed in sequence because the resulting image of one command is often used as input to a
later command. In addition, if more than one macro is launched, the first macro launched will be completed before the
second is begun.

Macro File Structure

IDRISI Macro files support the following syntax.
1. IDRISI modules in command line mode. The following is an example of a valid line in an IML file:
OVERLAY x 3*soilsuit*slopsuit*suitland
The x after the module name indicates that command line mode is invoked. All parameters after the x are separated by asterisks.
Short filenames may be given, as in the example above. In this case, the macro will look for the appropriate file type first
in the Working Folder, then in each Resource Folder in the order in which they are listed in the current project file. Long
filenames, as well as full paths, may also be given in the command line, e.g.:
OVERLAY x 3*c:\data\soil.rst*c:\data\slopes.rst*c:\output\suitable_land.rst
2. The macro processor supports command line variables using the %# format (familiar to DOS users). For example, the
above line could be modified as such:
OVERLAY x 3*%1*%2*%3
In this modification, %1, %2 and %3 are replaced with the first three command line parameters specified in the Macro
Parameters text box of the Macro dialog box.
3. External Applications. Any non-IDRISI application can be called from an IML file. The syntax is as follows:
CALL [Application Name] [Command Line Parameters]
where [Application Name] should specify the full path to the application. For example, to call an application named SOI-
LEROD.EXE in a folder named MODELS on drive C, and pass it the name of an input file named SOILTYPE.RST, the
command would be:
CALL c:\models\soilerod.exe soiltype.rst
4. Other IML files. It is possible to execute other IML files from within a main IML file by using the BRANCH com-
mand. The syntax for such an operation is:
BRANCH [IML File Name] [Command Line Parameters]
The IML filename is the short name of the IML file to call (i.e., without extension). Command line parameters are
optional.

The IDRISI API

IDRISI has been designed as an OLE Automation Server using COM Object technology (i.e., a COM Server). As a con-
sequence, it is possible to use high-level development languages, such as Delphi, Visual C++, Visual Basic, or Visual Basic
for Applications (VBA) as macro languages for controlling the operation of IDRISI. In addition, you can create sophisti-
cated OLE Automation Controller applications that have complete control over the operation of IDRISI. Thus you
would use the API in instances where you wish to:

Chapter 10 IDRISI Modeling Tools 107

--create complex models that require the extensive control structures of a high-level computer language (such as many
dynamic models);
--create custom applications, perhaps to be distributed to others;
--create custom interfaces.
The OLE Automation Server feature of IDRISI is automatically registered with Windows when IDRISI is first run on
your system. Thus, if you have installed IDRISI and run it at least once, you automatically have access to the full API. The
IDRISI OLE Automation server provides a wide range of functions for controlling IDRISI, including running modules,
displaying files, and manipulating IDRISI environment variables. With visual programming environments such as Delphi,
Visual C++ and Visual Basic, access to these functions is very easy. Specific instructions as well as a complete reference
manual can be accessed from the Modeling menu.
While the API provides a wide range of tools, most users only require a few - typically the RunModule operation that can
run any module, the Display File operator (for construction of automatically displayed outputs), and a couple of proce-
dures for accessing the project folder structure.
Instructions are also provided in the API help file (under the Modeling menu) for how to change the scripts for the
IDRISI menu system so that you can develop applications and incorporate them as direct extensions to IDRISI itself.

Chapter 10 IDRISI Modeling Tools 108

Database Development

Introduction
As illustrated in the Introduction to GIS chapter, the database is at the center of the Geographic Information System. In
fact, it provides fuel for the GIS. The tasks of finding, creating, assembling and integrating these data may collectively be
termed database development. While it is seldom the most interesting part, database development can easily consume 80 to
90 percent of the time and resources allocated to any project. This chapter discusses many of the issues encountered in
database development and also presents a summary of the database development tools included in IDRISI. Also pre-
sented are techniques and tips for importing raster data, particularly satellite imagery.

Collecting Data
The first stage in database development is typically the identification of the data layers necessary for the project. While it
is tempting to acquire every available data layer that coincides with the study area, it is usually more efficient to identify
what is needed prior to assessing what is available. This helps to avoid the problems of data-driven project definitions and
encourages a question-driven approach.
In addition to identifying the themes that are necessary (e.g., elevation, landcover), it is also important to determine what
resolution (precision) and what level of accuracy are required. These issues will be discussed more thoroughly below.
Once the necessary data requirements for the project have been specified, the search for data can begin. There are five
main ways to get data into the database:
1. Find data in digital format and import it;
2. Find data in hard-copy format and digitize it;
3. Collect data yourself in the field, then enter it;
4. Substitute an existing data layer as a surrogate;
5. Derive new data from existing data.

Find Data In Digital Format and Import It

Where To Find Data
In many countries, governmental organizations provide data as a service. In the United States, these data are often free for
electronic download or are available for a small fee. The United States Geological Survey, the National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration and the Census Bureau are good examples of governmental agencies in the United States
that have a mandate to create and provide digital data. All these agencies have Web sites that provide information about
the availability of digital data. In addition, it is becoming more and more common for states (or provinces) to have a par-
ticular agency or department that is responsible for creating, maintaining and distributing GIS data layers. In the state of
Massachusetts, for example, the state office MASSGIS has this mandate. For many, the Web is fast becoming the pre-
ferred method for finding and acquiring government-provided data.
Commercial companies also provide digital data. These data might be generic sets of commonly-used base layers, such as
transportation networks, or they might be customized to the needs of specific users. Commercial companies often begin

Chapter 11 Database Development 109

with free government data and "add value" by converting it to a specific software format or updating it.
With the proliferation of GIS and image processing technologies, many non-governmental and academic institutions may
also possess data layers that would be useful to your project. While these organizations seldom create data specifically to
share with others, they will often make available what they have collected. Therefore, it is usually worthwhile to identify
other researchers or institutions working in the same study area to inquire about their data holdings. Electronic discussion
forums also provide a venue to request particular data layers.
Once you have located electronic data useful to your project, you need to import it into the software system you are using.
Sound simple? Ideally, these format conversions are trivial. In reality, it is not uncommon to find that getting from what
you have to what you want is not straightforward.

Physical Media
Data might come on a CD-ROM or DVD. When acquiring data, be sure to ask about the medium on which it will arrive
and make sure you have the ability to read that medium. The ability to download large data files electronically has lessened
this problem substantially, but even with network download, access to the network and appropriate software, such as an
FTP client, are necessary.

Data Formats
You must also determine the file format of the data. In general terms, you should know which category it falls within. For
example, a data layer of Superfund sites could be stored as a raster, vector, database or spreadsheet data file. More specif-
ically, you will need to know if it is in a particular software format, an agency format, or some sort of data interchange for-
mat. IDRISI provides for direct import of a number of standard raster, vector and attribute data formats.
If the particular file format you have is not directly supported by IDRISI import routines, then you may still be able to use
it. Raster data tends to have a simpler structure than vector data and it is often the case that a raster file can be imported
into IDRISI using a low-level tool, such as GENERICRASTER, to re-order the pixels. Vector data are more complex,
and unless the structure is extremely simplistic, it is unlikely that you will be able to import vector data using low-level
tools.
For both raster and vector data, translation software can provide the bridge between the current data format and IDRISI.
Translation software for GIS file formats vary in the number of formats they support and in price. Your goal in using a
translation software is to turn the file you have into something that you can import with IDRISI.
You must also consider data compression when acquiring data. Compression allows files to be stored using less memory
than they would normally require. There are two types of compression of which to be aware. The first is compression that
is used by the GIS software itself. IDRISI, for example, has a run-length encoded packed binary file type. While IDRISI
can use these files analytically, other GIS software will not be able to use them. It is best to avoid sharing files that are
compressed with software-specific routines between different GIS software systems.
The second type of compression, sometimes referred to as "zipping", is used for files that are not currently being used.
This compression is used to make the transfer and storage of files easier. The files must be uncompressed or "unzipped"
prior to use.
Always inquire about the compression software used. If you don't have the same software, get the file in an uncompressed
format, or as a self-extracting executable file (a compressed file that will uncompress itself without the compression soft-
ware installed on your computer).
Information about importing specific file formats is available in the IDRISI on-line Help System.

Find Data In Hard Copy Format and Digitize It

If the data you need is in a hard-copy format, you will need to digitize it (i.e., make it digital) to bring it into your GIS data-

Chapter 11 Database Development 110

base. Some hard-copy data might be digitized by simply typing it into an ASCII editor or a database table. For example,
you might have tabular field notes from sample survey sites that can be typed directly into Database Workshop.
More commonly, hard-copy data is in the form of a map, an orthophoto, or an aerial photograph. If you want to extract
particular features from a map, such as elevation contours, well-head locations or park boundaries, then you will digitize
these as vector features using a digitizing tablet. (Alternatively, features plainly visible on a digital ortho-photo can be cap-
tured with on-screen digitizing, which is discussed below.)
A digitizing tablet (or digitizing board) contains a fine mesh of wires that define a Cartesian coordinate system for the
board. Most boards have 1000 wires per inch, which results in a maximum resolution of 1/1000 inch. The user attaches
the hard copy map to the digitizing board, then traces features on the map with a digitizing puck (a mouse-like device) or
stylus (a pen-like device). The digitizing tablet senses the X,Y positions of the puck as the features are traced and commu-
nicates these to the digitizing software.
Digitizing software packages vary tremendously in ease of use and capability. CartaLinx, also a product of the Clark Labs,
combines an easy user interface with flexible digitizing and post-digitizing editing, and is recommended for use with
IDRISI.
Most digitizing software will allow the user to "register" the map on the digitizing tablet. This process establishes the rela-
tionship between the tablet's Cartesian coordinates and the coordinate system of the paper map. The software compares
the tablet coordinates and the map coordinates for a set of control points and then derives a best-fit translation function.
This function is then applied to all the coordinates sent from the board to the software. If your digitizing software does
not provide this translation, the RESAMPLE module in IDRISI may be used to transform the tablet coordinates to map
coordinates after digitizing.
In addition to digitizing using a digitizing tablet, scanners can be used to digitize hard-copy images such as maps or aerial
photos. Unlike digitizing tablets that produce vector data, scanners produce raster data. Also, scanners do not capture dis-
tinct features but measure the relative reflectance of light across a document according to a user-specified resolution, nor-
mally specified as dots per inch. Each dot becomes a pixel in the resulting image. Sensors detect the reflection of red,
green, and blue (or grey level) and record these as digital values for each pixel. The scanned image is then imported to the
GIS software as a raster image. Scanned images are normally imported to IDRISI through either the .BMP or .TIF file
formats.
Once scanned, features such as roads may be extracted into a vector file format using specialized software. However, this
process is often too costly or inaccurate, and it requires very clean hard-copy sources for scanning. Another method to
extract vector features from scanned raster images is with on-screen digitizing.
With on-screen digitizing, sometimes referred to as "heads-up" digitizing, the scanned source map or photo is displayed
on screen and features are digitized using a standard mouse. The RESAMPLE module may be used to georegister the
image before digitizing. Both IDRISI and CartaLinx allow you to capture features as vector format files from a displayed
raster image through on-screen digitizing.

Collect Data Yourself in the Field then Enter It

For many research projects, it is necessary to go into the field and collect data. When collecting data in the field for use in
a GIS, it is imperative to know the location of each data point collected. Depending upon the nature of the project and
level of accuracy required, paper maps may be used in conjunction with physical landmarks (e.g., roads and buildings) to
determine locations. However, for many projects, traditional surveying instruments or Global Positioning System (GPS)
devices are necessary to accurately locate data points.
Locational coordinates from traditional surveys are typically processed in Coordinate Geometry (COGO) software and
may then be transformed into a GIS-compatible vector file type. CartaLinx is able to perform this transformation.
For many GIS applications, however, GPS devices may provide a less expensive alternative. The Global Positioning Sys-
tem is composed of 274 US Department of Defense satellites orbiting the Earth at approximately 20,000 kilometers. Each

Chapter 11 Database Development 111

satellite continuously transmits a time and location signal. A GPS receiver processes the satellite’s signals and calculates its
position.1 The level of error in the position depends on the quality (and price) of the receiver, atmospheric conditions and
other variables. Some units provide display of locations only, while others record locational information electronically for
later download to a computer.
IDRISI includes a GPS link. When this is active, the position recorded by the GPS receiver is displayed on the active dis-
play window and is updated as the position changes. The geodetic coordinates produced by the receiver are automatically
projected to the reference system of the display. This GPS link is intended primarily to display and save waypoints and
routes. CartaLinx also includes a GPS link and allows for more flexibility in creating data layers from the GPS data.
Most GPS data processing software supports several GIS export formats. Shape files and DXF files are commonly used
as a bridge to IDRISI. If those formats are not available or if the data set is small enough to be entered by hand, creation
of an IDRISI vector file is easily accomplished through the use of a text editor like the Edit module in IDRISI.
Additionally, GPS software typically exports to several types of ASCII text files. The XYZIDRIS module in IDRISI
imports one of the more common types. The input to XYZIDRIS must be a space- or comma-delimited ASCII file in
which numeric X, Y, and Z values (where Z = elevation or a numeric identifier) are separated by one or more spaces and
each line is terminated by a CR/LF pair. XYZIDRIS produces an IDRISI vector point file.

Substitute an Existing Data Layer as a Surrogate

At times, there is simply no way to find or create a particular data layer. In these cases, it may be possible to substitute
existing data as a surrogate. For example, suppose an analysis requires powerline location information, but a powerlines
data file is not available and you don't have time or funds to collect the data in the field. You know, however, that in your
study area, powerlines generally follow paved roads. For the purposes of your analysis, if the potential level of error intro-
duced is acceptable, you may use a paved roads layer as a surrogate for powerlines.

Derive New Data from Existing Data

New data layers may also be derived from existing data. This is referred to as derivative mapping and is the primary way in
which a GIS database grows. With derivative mapping, some knowledge of relationships is combined with existing data
layers to create new data layers. For example, if an image of slopes is needed, but none exists, you could derive the slope
image (using the IDRISI SURFACE module) from a digital elevation model, if available. Similarly, if you need an image of
the relative amount of green biomass on the ground, you might derive such an image from the red and infrared bands of
satellite imagery.
Another common form of derivative mapping is the interpolation of a raster surface (e.g., an elevation model or tempera-
ture surface) from a set of discrete points or isolines using TIN modeling or Geostatistics, both of which are available in
IDRISI. See the Surface Interpolation chapter for more information about this form of derivative mapping.

Considerations
Resolution
In all database development tasks, no matter the source of data, there are several issues to consider. The first consider-
ation is the resolution of the data. How much detail do you need? Resolution affects storage and processing time if too
fine and limits the questions you can ask of the data if too coarse.
Resolution may refer to the spatial, temporal or attribute components of the database. Spatial resolution refers to the size
of the pixel in raster data or the scale of the map that was digitized to produce vector data. Temporal resolution refers to
the currency of the data and whether the images in the time series are frequent enough and spaced appropriately. Attri-

1. Several GPS companies (e.g., Trimble, Magellan) have excellent Web sites explaining how positions are calculated from the satellite signals.

Chapter 11 Database Development 112

bute resolution refers to the level of detail captured by the data values. This might be exemplified by the difference
between a landcover map with a single forest class, a landcover map with hardwood and softwood forest classes, and a
landcover map with many different forest classes.

Accuracy
Accuracy is the second consideration. While accuracy does have a relationship to resolution, it is also a function of the
methods and care with which the data were collected and digitized. Unfortunately, it is not always easy to evaluate the
accuracy of data layers. However, most government mapping agencies do have mapping standards that are available. The
IDRISI metadata (documentation) file structure includes fields for accuracy information, but many other file formats
carry no accuracy information. In addition, even when such information is reported, the intelligent use of accuracy infor-
mation in GIS analysis is still an avenue of active research. The capabilities of IDRISI in this area are discussed in the
chapter on Decision Support.

Georeferencing
The third consideration is georeferencing. Data layers from various sources will often be georeferenced using different
reference systems.2 For display and GIS analysis, all data layers that are to be used together must use the same reference
system. Providing that the details of the reference systems are known, they can usually be converted with the IDRISI
module PROJECT.
However, it may be possible to download graphic files from the Web, for example, that are not georeferenced. Also, while
IDRISI supports many projections, you may find data that are in an unsupported projection. In both cases, you will not
be able to use PROJECT. It is sometimes possible to georeference an unreferenced file or a file with an unsupported pro-
jection through resampling (the IDRISI module RESAMPLE) if points of known locations can be found on the unrefer-
enced image. All users are encouraged to read the chapter on Georeferencing for more information about this key issue.
Also, see the section on Data Integration below.

Cost
Finally, the fourth consideration in database development is cost. This must be assessed in terms of both time and money.
Other considerations include whether the data will be used once or many times, the accuracy level necessary for the par-
ticular (and future) uses of the data, and how often it must be updated to remain useful. Don't underestimate the amount
of labor required to develop a good database. As stated in the introduction, database development quite commonly con-
sumes a large portion of the labor allocated to a GIS project.

General Import Tips

IDRISI requires files to be in Intel format. This typically is only an issue when integer data are acquired from Macintosh,
UNIX, workstation and mainframe platforms which use the Motorola format. The byte order is different between the
two formats. The GENERICRASTER module can be used to reverse the byte order of an integer file.

Tools for Import

Files are sometimes in an unspecified format. The following modules are useful for inspecting files and changing file
structures.
Edit: Displays and edits an ASCII file. Vector data are often ASCII.

2. A reference system is defined by a projection, datum and grid system. See the chapter on Georeferencing for more information.

Chapter 11 Database Development 113

CONVERT: Converts raster and vector ASCII or binary files.
IDRISI Explorer Show Structure: Displays byte-level contents of any file (in ASCII or binary format). Used to view data
files for presence and size of headers, as well as to check files for carriage returns (CR's) and line feed (LF's).
CRLF: Adds or removes carriage returns and line feeds. Used with import modules that require specific fixed record
lengths (e.g., DLG's, DEM's).
VAR2FIX: Converts variable length ASCII files to fixed length. Used in conjunction with CRLF.
IDRISI Explorer Metadata Utility: Creates and updates documentation files for data files already in IDRISI format.
GENERICRASTER: Imports, converts and swaps byte order on single or multi-banded raster data in band-interleaved-
by-line (BIL), band-interleaved-by-pixel (BIP) or band sequential (BSQ) format.
SSTIDRIS: Converts raster images entered in from a spreadsheet program or any ASCII grid format into an IDRISI
image.

Importing Satellite Imagery

IDRISI includes several special import routines for specific satellite image formats, such as Landsat, HDF-EOS and
SPOT. If a specific import routine isn’t available for the format of your data, the generic import tools available in IDRISI
may be used to bring the satellite imagery into IDRISI. When preparing to import satellite data using the generic tools,
there are three primary concerns: the location and contents of the header information (the information that describes the
data), the size of the data in bytes, and the format in which the data are stored.
The first task is to locate and read the header information. Commonly, the header will be stored as a separate file in ASCII
format or it will be distributed as paper documentation. Use the Edit module to read this data. If, as a third possibility, the
header is attached to the data file, it will be stored in binary format because satellite imagery is usually distributed in binary
format. In this case, you can try to read the information from the header with the Show Structure utility of the IDRISI
Explorer which displays binary data as ASCII text. If you know the number of rows and columns in the image, but not
the header size, there is a way to figure this out. If the image is in byte binary format, the number of bytes in the image
should equal the number of pixels in the image. To find the number of pixels in the image, multiply the number of rows
by the number of columns. The extra bytes in the data file should be the size of the header. If the file contains 2-byte inte-
ger data, the number of bytes in the image equals rows multiplied by columns multiplied by 2. You can determine the
exact file size of a file by using the Properties command in Windows Explorer. For example, if an image has 512 rows and
512 columns, and the data type is binary, the file size with no header must be 262,144. As another example, if we know the
file has 512 rows and 512 columns, and the file size is 262,656, we can assume that the header size is 512 bytes.
The contents of the header information will be presented in a variety of formats and with varying levels of detail. This
section will tell you what to look for in the header, but it cannot anticipate the format in which you will find that informa-
tion.
There are three pieces of information you must find in the header (the answers to 1 and 2 will determine the import rou-
tine you will use):
1) the data file format;
2) whether a header file is attached to the data file, and its size; and
3) the number of rows and columns in the data file.
Most satellite imagery is distributed in one of two file formats: band sequential (BSQ) and band-interleaved-by-line (BIL).
Band sequential format is the same as IDRISI image format. The data values are stored as a single series of numbers and
each band of imagery is contained in a separate data file. SPOT panchromatic33 and Landsat TM and MSS satellite imag-
ery are commonly distributed in this format. Band-interleaved-by-line (BIL) format stores all the bands of multi-spectral

Chapter 11 Database Development 114

imagery in a single data file. The bands are combined by storing the first row of data from the first band of imagery, fol-
lowed by the first row of data from the second band and so on for every band of imagery stored in the data file. The data
file then continues with the second row of data from the first band, the second row of data from the second band and so
on. SPOT multispectral imagery (SPOT-XS) is commonly distributed in BIL format. A third format, band-interleaved-by-
pixel (BIP), is uncommon but used with older datasets. The figures below illustrate the three formats.

Satellite Imagery Formats

Band Sequential (BSQ ) with three bands 4 colum ns by 4 rows

Band-interleaved-by-pixel (BIP)
with the bands 12 columns by 4 rows

Band-interleaved-by-line (BIL)
with three bands 4 columns by 12 rows

Figure 1

With BSQ format files, the following two import routines apply:
1. If a header is attached to the data file, use the GENERICRASTER module, specify BSQ and no header. GENERI-
CRASTER will remove the header, rename the data file to have an .RST extension, and create a documentation file.
GENERICRASTER will ask for the number of rows and columns, the minimum information necessary to create the
documentation file. GENERICRASTER will ask for additional information as well, such as the reference system parame-
ters which you should be able to find in the header. When in doubt, you can try the following values: Minimum X=0,
Maximum X=1 (or # of columns), Minimum Y=0, Maximum Y=1 (or # of rows), Reference System=Plane.
2. If the header file is separate from the data file, then run GENERICRASTER and use the BSQ option and specify one
band. Then specify the appropriate reference information as in the step above. Again, you must know the number of col-
umns and rows in order to complete this step, but you should also enter any reference system information that is available
from the header. If the values are unknown, try entering the values noted in the previous paragraph, with the addition of

3. The documentation for the SPOT panchromatic band will indicate that it is in BIL format, but it contains only one band, so there is no interleaving.
This is the same as BSQ format.

Chapter 11 Database Development 115

Reference Units=meters and Unit Distance=1.
For all BIL files, with or without a header, the following import routine is used:
If a header is attached, determine its size (in bytes) and then use the GENERICRASTER module. GENERICRASTER
will pull apart and create individual IDRISI format image and documentation files for each band of imagery.
There are some common errors during the import process that can give the user some useful information for correction.
If the header size is incorrectly specified using GENERICRASTER, the image will not be correctly imported. Because
too much or too little is taken out of the file as a header, the actual data left behind is either incomplete or contains extra
information. This can lead to an error message informing you that the image is incorrectly sized, or the image will display
improperly (e.g., data from the right side may appear moved to the left side). You will need to determine the correct
header size and try again.
If an image seems to successfully import, but the display of the image is staggered or skewed to one side, it is possible that
you have incorrectly specified the number of rows and columns in the documentation file. Recheck your documentation
file for the correct information or use the method discussed above to determine the correct rows and columns based on
the image and header size. If an image seems to successfully import but the display of the image contains a venetian blind
striping effect, there are two possible causes. If the striping is vertical, try importing the image as a BIP format file using
GENERICRASTER. If the striping is horizontal, try importing as a BIL format file. The first figure below left illustrates
an import when the incorrect number of bands is specified during a BIL import. The figure in the center illustrates a com-
mon result when the header is not calculated correctly. The figure on the right demonstrates a result when the incorrect
number of columns is specified.
A common error associated with importing integer data results from data originating from the UNIX environment. If
after successfully importing integer data the result shows very maximum and minimum values in the image, most likely
the bytes need to be swapped. Run the GENERICRASTER routine again, but check the option to Swap byte order. The
byte swapping option is used for the conversion of UNIX and Macintosh files that have the low byte/high byte order
reversed from Intel-based systems.

Common errors during import

Figure 2

Importing GIS Data

Much of the information presented above regarding the import of satellite imagery also applies to the import of raster
GIS data. Specific import routines are also available in IDRISI for many common agency and software-specific GIS for-
mats. The procedures for importing common GIS data formats are found in the on-line Help System. Search the Help
System index for the name of the format you would like to import. In many cases, GIS data can be saved in a format that
can be imported into IDRISI, such as ERDAS Imagine, ESRI ArcRaster, GEOTIFF or GRASS files.

Chapter 11 Database Development 116

Data Integration
Requirements for Data Integration
Data integration refers to the use of various data layers together in display or analysis. There are several parameters that
must match if data layers are to be used together. First, the reference systems must match.4 This is important because we
are often combining separate themes based on their spatial characteristics. A roads vector layer can be properly overlayed
on a raster satellite image, for example, only if both layers have the same reference system. A particular X,Y coordinate
pair in the vector file must represent exactly the same place on the ground as that same X,Y coordinate pair in the raster
image.
For raster layers to be used in image-to-image operations, such as OVERLAY, the extent of the images, the number of
rows and columns in the images, and the pixel resolution of the images must all match. Note that if any two of these three
conditions are met, the third is met automatically.
The steps used to integrate data layers, especially if data is transformed, should be recorded in the lineage field of the doc-
umentation file of each data layer. For example, it is trivial to make smaller pixels from larger pixels, and this is often done
to achieve data integration. However, it is important to note that the information carried by those smaller pixels still rep-
resents data gathered at a coarser resolution. Such information should be recorded in the new image's documentation file
so users will be aware that the apparent resolution exceeds that of the information.

Tools for Data Integration

The modules PROJECT and RESAMPLE are the primary tools available in IDRISI for georeferencing and changing ref-
erence systems. The chapter on Georeferencing details the differences between these two modules and when they
should be employed. In addition, the Tutorial includes exercises on the use of RESAMPLE and PROJECT.
The WINDOW module is used to change the extent of raster images. It works by saving a subset of a larger image as a
new image.
Changing the number of rows and columns in an image and/or changing the image pixel resolution can be accomplished
with the modules CONTRACT, EXPAND and PROJECT. CONTRACT and EXPAND work by thinning or duplicating
pixels in an image by an integer multiple. For example, an image with 100 rows and 100 columns and a pixel resolution of
30 meters could be contracted to an image of 25 rows and 25 columns by using a contraction factor of 4. Similarly, an
image of 100 rows and 100 columns could be transformed to an image of 1000 rows and 1000 columns by using
EXPAND and an expansion factor of 10.
If it is necessary to contract or expand an image by a non-integer factor (e.g., 1.5), CONTRACT and EXPAND cannot be
used. In these cases, the easiest method to use is PROJECT. Project to the same reference system that the file is currently
in, enter the new number of rows and columns, and choose the resampling technique that best suits your data and appli-
cation. In general, if quantitative data are used, then the bilinear resampling type should be chosen, but if qualitative data
are used, the nearest neighbor resampling type should be chosen.

Conclusions
Database development is seldom quick and easy. The quality of the database, in many ways, limits the quality of any result-
ing analysis to be carried out with the data. There are a significant number of technical pitfalls that are typically encoun-
tered during database development and it is easy to become overwhelmed by these. However, despite these difficulties, it

4. The reference system projection, datum and grid system must all match for the reference system to match.

Chapter 11 Database Development 117

is important to maintain a project-driven approach to GIS analysis and to limit the influence data constraints can have on
the definition of the problems to be addressed.

Chapter 11 Database Development 118

Georeferencing
Georeferencing refers to the manner in which map locations are related to earth surface locations. Georeferencing
requires several ingredients:
• a logic for referring to earth surface locations—a concern of the field of Geodesy;
• a specific implementation of that logic, known as a Geodetic Datum—a concern of the field of Surveying;
• a logic for referring locations to their graphic positions—a concern of the field of Cartography; and
• an implementation of that logic, known as a data structure—a concern of GIS and Desktop Mapping soft-
ware, and in this case, IDRISI.

Geodesy
Geodesy is that field of study which is concerned with the measurement of the size and shape of the earth and positions
upon it. The most fundamental problem that geodesists face is the fact that the earth's surface is irregular in shape. For
example, imagine two locations (A and B) at either end of a thin straight beach bordered by a steep cliff (Figure 1). Clearly
the distance one would determine between the two locations would depend upon the route chosen to undertake the mea-
surement. Measuring the distance by the cliff route would clearly be longer than that determined along the coast. Thus
irregularities (hills and valleys) along the measuring surface can cause ambiguities in distance (and thereby, location). To
alleviate this situation, it has long been a common practice to reduce all measurements to a more regular measuring sur-
face—a reference surface.

Figure 1

Geoid
The oldest reference surface used for mapping is known as the geoid. The geoid can be thought of as mean sea level, or
where mean sea level would be if the oceans could flow under the continents. More technically, the geoid is an equipotential
surface of gravity defining all points in which the force of gravity is equivalent to that experienced at the ocean's surface.
Since the earth spins on its axis and causes gravity to be counteracted by centrifugal force progressively towards the equa-
tor, one would expect the shape of the geoid to be an oblate spheroid—a sphere-like object with a slightly fatter middle
and flattened poles. In other words, the geoid would have the nature of an ellipse of revolution—an ellipsoid.
As a reference surface, the geoid has several advantages—it has a simple physical interpretation (and an observable posi-
tion along the coast), and it defines the horizontal for most traditional measuring instruments. Thus, for example, leveling
a theodolite or sextant is, by definition, a process of referring the instrument to the geoid.

Chapter 12 Georeferencing 119

Reference Ellipsoids
Unfortunately, as it turns out, the geoid is itself somewhat irregular. Because of broad differences in earth materials (such
as heavier ocean basin materials and lighter continental materials, irregular distributions such as mountains, and isostatic
imbalances), the geoid contains undulations that also introduce ambiguities of distance and location. As a result, it has
become the practice of modern geodetic surveys to use abstract reference surfaces that are close approximations to the
shape of the geoid, but which provide perfectly smooth reference ellipsoids (Figure 2). By choosing one that is as close an
approximation as possible, the difference between the level of a surveying instrument (defined by the irregular geoid) and
the horizontal of the reference ellipsoid is minimized. Moreover, by reducing all measurements to this idealized shape,
ambiguities of distance (and position) are removed.

earth surface
geoid

reference ellipsoid

Figure 2

There are many different ellipsoids in geodetic use (see Appendix 1:

Ellipsoid Parameters). They can be defined either by the length of the
b
major (a) and minor (b) semi-axes1 (Figure 11-3), or by the length of the
semi-major axis along with the degree of flattening [f = (a-b) / a]. The a
reason for having so many different ellipsoids is that different ones give
better fits to the shape of the geoid at different locations. The ellipsoid
chosen for use is that which best fits the geoid for the particular location
of interest.
Figure 3

Geodetic Datums
Selecting a specific reference ellipsoid to use for a specific area and orienting it to the landscape, defines what is known in
Geodesy as a datum (note that the plural of datum in geodesy is datums, not data!). A datum thus defines an ellipsoid (itself
defined by the major and minor semi-axes), an initial location, an initial azimuth (a reference direction to define the direc-
tion of north), and the distance between the geoid and the ellipsoid at the initial location. Establishing a datum is the task
of geodetic surveyors, and is done in the context of the establishment of national or international geodetic control survey
networks. A datum is thus intended to establish a permanent reference surface, although recent advances in survey tech-
nology have led many nations to redefine their current datums.
Most datums only attempt to describe a limited portion of the earth (usually on a national or continental scale). For exam-
ple, the North American Datum (NAD) and the European Datum each describe large portions of the earth, while the
Kandawala Datum is used for Sri Lanka alone. Regardless, these are called local datums since they do not try to describe
the entire earth. By contrast, we are now seeing the emergence of World Geodetic Systems (such as WGS84) that do try to

1. The major and minor semi-axes are also commonly referred to as the semi-major and semi-minor axes.

Chapter 12 Georeferencing 120

provide a single smooth reference surface for the entire globe. Such systems are particularly appropriate for measuring
systems that do not use gravity as a reference frame, such as Global Positioning Systems (GPS). However, presently they
are not very commonly found as a base for mapping. More typically one encounters local datums, of which several hun-
dred are currently in use.

Datums and Geodetic Coordinates

Perhaps the most important thing to bear in mind about datums is that each defines a different concept of geodetic coor-
dinates—latitude and longitude. Thus, in cases where more than one datum exists for a single location, more than one
concept of latitude and longitude exists. It can almost be thought of as a philosophical difference. It is common to assume
that latitude and longitude are fixed geographic concepts, but they are not. There are several hundred different concepts
of latitude and longitude currently in use (one for each datum). It might also be assumed that the differences between
them would be small. However, that is not necessarily the case. In North America, a change is being undertaken to con-
vert all mapping to a recently defined datum called NAD83. At Clark University, for example, if one were to measure lati-
tude and longitude according to NAD83 and compare it to the ground position of the same coordinates in the previous
system, NAD27, the difference is in excess of 40 meters! Other locations in the US experience differences in excess of
100 meters. Clearly, combining data from sources measured according to different datums can lead to significant discrep-
ancies.
The possibility that more than one datum will be encountered in a mapping project is actually reasonably high. In recent
years, many countries have found the need to replace older datums with newer ones that provide a better fit to local geoi-
dal characteristics. In addition, regional or international projects involving data from a variety of countries are very likely
to encounter the presence of multiple datums. As a result, it is imperative to be able to transform the geodetic coordinates
of one system to those of another. In IDRISI, the PROJECT option under the Reformat menu incorporates full datum
transformation as a part of its operation.

Cartographic Transformation
Once a logic has been established for referring to earth locations and a set of measurements has been made, a means of
storing and analyzing those positions is required. Traditionally, maps have been the preferred medium for both storage
and analysis, while today that format has been supplemented by digital storage and analysis. Both, however, share a com-
mon trait—they are most commonly flat! Just as flat maps are a more manageable medium than map globes, plane coor-
dinates are a more workable medium than spherical (ellipsoidal) coordinates for digital applications. As a result, surveyed
locations are commonly transformed to a plane grid referencing system before use.

Projection
The process of transforming spheroidal geodetic coordinates to plane coordinate positions is known as projection, and
falls traditionally within the realm of cartography. Originally, the concern was only with a one-way projection of geodetic
coordinates to the plane coordinates of a map sheet. With the advent of GIS, however, this concern has now broadened
to include the need to undertake transformations in both directions in order to develop a unified database incorporating
maps that are all brought to a common projection. Thus, for example, a database developed on a Transverse Mercator
projection might need to incorporate direct survey data in geodetic coordinates along with map data in several different
projections. Back projecting digitized data from an existing projection to geodetic coordinates and subsequently using a for-
ward projection to bring the data to the final projection is thus a very common activity in GIS. The PROJECT module in
IDRISI supports both kinds of transformation.
Projection of spheroidal positions to a flat plane simply cannot be done without some (and oftentimes considerable) dis-
tortion. The stretching and warping required to make the transformation work leads to continuous differences in scale
over the face of the map, which in turn leads to errors in distance, area and angular relationships. However, while distor-

Chapter 12 Georeferencing 121

tion is inevitable, it is possible to engineer that distortion such that errors are minimized and certain geometrical qualities
are maintained.
Of particular importance to GIS are the family of projections known as conformal or orthomorphic. These are projections in
which the distortion is engineered in such a manner that angular relationships are correctly preserved in the near vicinity
of any location. Traditionally, the field of surveying has relied upon the measurement of angular relationships (using
instruments such as a theodolite) in order to measure accurate distances over irregular terrain. As a result, conformal pro-
jections have been important for the correct transfer of field measurements to a map base, or for the integration of new
surveys with existing map data. For the same reasons, conformal projections are also essential to many navigation proce-
dures. As a consequence, virtually all topographic map bases are produced on conformal projections, which form the
basis for all of the major grid referencing systems in use today.

Grid Referencing Systems

A grid referencing system can be thought of very simply as a system-
atic way in which the plane coordinates of the map sheet can be
related back to the geodetic coordinates of measured earth posi-
tions. Clearly, a grid referencing system requires a projection (most
commonly a conformal one). It also requires the definition of a
plane Cartesian coordinate system to be superimposed on top of
that projection. This requires the identification of an initial position
that can be used to orient the grid to the projection, much like an
initial position is used to orient a datum to the geoid. This initial
position is called the true origin of the grid, and is commonly located
at the position where distortion is least severe in the projection (Fig-
ure 4). Then, like the process of orienting a datum, a direction is
established to represent grid north. Most commonly, this will coincide
with the direction of true north at the origin. However, because of
distortion, it is impossible for true north and grid north to coincide
true origin
over many other locations.
false origin
Once the grid has been oriented to the origin and true north, a num-
bering system and units of measure are determined. For example,
the UTM (Universal Transverse Mercator) system uses the equator
Figure 4
and the central meridian of a 6-degree wide zone as the true origin
for the northern hemisphere. The point is then given arbitrary coor-
dinates of 500,000 meters east and 0 meters north. This then gives a false origin 500 kilometers to the west of the true ori-
gin (see figure above). In other words, the false origin marks the location where the numbering system is 0 in both axes. In
IDRISI, the numbering logic of a grid referencing system is always given by specifying the latitude and longitude of the
true origin and the arbitrary coordinates that exist at that point (in this example, 500,000 E and 0 N).

Georeferencing in IDRISI
The logic that IDRISI uses for georeferencing is quite simple, and is based on the issues previously described.

Chapter 12 Georeferencing 122

All geographic files are assumed to be stored according
to a grid reference system where grid north is aligned Maximum Y
with the edges of the raster image or vector file. As a
result, the minimum X of a raster image is always the Grid
left-hand edge, the maximum Y is the top edge, and so North
on (Figure 5). The georeferencing properties of an
IDRISI coverage (accessible through the Metadata utility
in IDRISI Explorer) include an entry specifying the ref-
erence system used by that file when referring to geo- Minimum Y
graphic locations. The particulars of that reference
system (e.g., projection, datum, origin, etc.) are then con- Minimum X Maximum X
tained in a reference system parameter file (.ref) (see below).
Figure 5
Whenever a projection or datum transformation is
required, the PROJECT module refers to this informa-
tion to control the transformation process.
Every grid reference system must have a reference system parameter file. The only exception to this is a system identified
by the keyword "plane". Any coverage that indicates a plane coordinate referencing system is understood to use an arbi-
trary plane system for which geodetic and projection parameters are unknown, and for which a reference system parame-
ter file is not provided. A coverage in a plane reference system cannot be projected.
Over 400 reference system parameter files are supplied with IDRISI. However, .ref files can be created for any grid refer-
encing system using the Metadata utility in IDRISI Explorer or Edit modules. Details on the structure of this simple
ASCII text file format are provided below and in the on-line Help System.
For simplicity, geodetic coordinates (lat/long) are recognized as a special type of grid referencing system. The true and
false origins are identical and occur at 0 degrees of longitude and 0 degrees of latitude. Units are in decimal degrees or
radians. Longitudes west of the prime (Greenwich) meridian and latitudes south of the equator are expressed as negative
numbers. Thus, for example, Clark University has approximate coordinates of -71.80,+42.27 (71°48' W, 42°16' N).
Although geodetic coordinates are truly spheroidal, they are logically treated here as a plane coordinate system. Thus, they
are implicitly projected according to a Plate Carrée projection,2 although the projection will actually be listed as "none".
Be aware that there are many possible interpretations of the concept of latitude and longitude, depending upon the datum
in use. A single .ref file has been supplied (called LATLONG) for the case where the datum is WGS84. This should be
copied and modified for other interpretations.
In IDRISI, the registration point for referencing raster images is in the lower left corner of any cell. Thus, for example,
with an image of 10 columns by 5 rows, using a plane reference system of cells 10 meters by 10 meters, the lower left-most
corner of the lower left-most cell has the coordinates 0,0 while the upper right-most corner of the upper right-most cell
has the position 100.50. Note also that this lower left-most cell is considered to be in column 0 and row 4 while the upper
right-most cell is in column 9, row 0.
IDRISI image and vector documentation files contain several fields that describe the reference system of the file. The min
X, max X, min Y, and max Y entries give the edge coordinates of an image or bounding rectangle of a vector file in refer-
ence system coordinates. For image files, the number of rows and columns is also given.
The reference system name (ref. system) identifies the reference system of the file, and may be “plane”, “lat/long”, or a spe-
cific reference system described by a reference system parameter file. In the latter case, the ref. system entry in the docu-
mentation file should match exactly the name of the corresponding reference system parameter file, without the .ref

2. Note, however, that geodetic coordinates are not considered to be identical to a system based on the Plate Carrée since no new numbering scheme has
been undertaken. PROJECT supports transformations based on the Plate Carrée as well, where it is understood that a true plane coordinate system with
its own special numbering scheme has been superimposed onto the projected geodetic coordinates.

Chapter 12 Georeferencing 123

extension.
The reference units entry indicates the unit of measure used in the reference coordinate system (e.g., meters).
The unit distance refers to the ground distance spanned by a distance of one unit (measured in reference units) in the refer-
ence system. Thus, for example, if the hypothetical image in Figure 11-6 had a unit distance of 2.0 and reference units in
meters, it would imply that as we move one in the reference coordinates (e.g., from X=99 to X=100) we actually move 2.0
meters on the ground. Simply think of the unit distance parameter as a multiplier that should be applied to all coordinates
to yield the reference units indicated. The unit distance will be 1.0 in most cases. However, the unit distance should be
specified as a value other than 1.0 whenever you have reference units that are not among the standard units supported
(meters, feet, miles, kilometers, degrees or radians). For example, a data file where the coordinates were measured in min-
utes of arc (1/60 of a degree) should have reference units set to degrees and the unit distance set to 0.016667.
In IDRISI, as you move the cursor over a displayed image, the row and column position and the X and Y coordinates are
indicated on the status bar at the bottom of the screen. Vector files can also be overlaid (using Composer) onto the raster
image, provided they have the same reference system. There is no need for the bounding rectangle of the vector file to match that of the
raster image. IDRISI will correctly overlay the portion of the vector file that overlaps the displayed raster image. Onscreen
digitizing will always output coordinates in the same reference system as the raster image being displayed.

Reference System Parameter Files

As previously indicated, IDRISI comes with over 400 reference system parameter files. These include one for geodetic
coordinates (latitude/longitude) using the WGS84 datum, 160 for the UTM system (one each for the 60 zones, for both
the northern and southern hemispheres) using the WGS84 datum, 32 based on the Gauss-Kruger projection, 40 for the
UTM system covering North America using NAD27 and NAD83, and 253 for all US State Plane Coordinate (SPC) sys-
tems based on the Lambert Conformal Conic and Transverse Mercator projections. Appendix 3: Supplied Reference
System Parameter Files lists each of these files by geographic location. In CartaLinx, the Georeferencing tab of the Pref-
erences/Properties/Options dialog provides a list box in which any specific .ref file can be selected. During program installa-
tion, these supplied files are installed in the \Georef subfolder of your IDRISI program folder. The contents of these files
may be viewed with the Metadata utility in IDRISI Explorer or Edit.

Where .ref Files are Stored

As indicated above, supplied .ref files are stored in a subfolder of the IDRISI program folder called \Georef. If your
IDRISI program folder is C:\IDRISI Taiga, then the supplied reference system parameter files are in c:\IDRISI
Taiga\Georef. When you create new reference system parameter files, we recommend that you store them in this folder,
always adding to your master library of reference files. However, reference system parameter files may be stored any-
where. When a reference system parameter file is given without its path in a dialog box or macro, IDRISI always looks
first in the Working Folder, followed by the Resource folders in the order they are named in the current project. If the file
is not found, IDRISI will next look in the \Georef subfolder.

Creating New .ref Files

Although IDRISI supplies more than 400 reference system parameter files, many users will need to create new .ref files to
suit the needs of specific systems. There are two options available to do this:
1. For cases where a different version of the UTM system is required, the module UTMREF can be used. This will simply
require that you enter the zone number, the hemisphere (northern or southern), and the name of the datum along with its
associated Molodensky constants. The constants can be found in Appendix 2: Mododensky Constants for Selected
Geodetic Datums and are used by PROJECT to undertake datum transformations. If you enter a datum that is not
included, you will need to supply the name of the reference ellipsoid and the length of its major and minor semi-axes.
These constants for many reference ellipsoids are given in Appendix 1: Reference Ellipsoids.
2. For all other cases, IDRISI Explorer or Edit can be used to create the appropriate file. Often the easiest procedure is to

Chapter 12 Georeferencing 124

use the copy function in IDRISI Explorer to duplicate an existing .ref file, and then modify it using the Metadata utility in
IDRISI Explorer or Edit. The section below indicates the structure and contents of a .ref file.

The .ref File Structure

Like all IDRISI documentation files, .ref files are simple ASCII text files that can be modified by means of any ASCII text
editor.
The .ref file type follows the conventions of other documentation files by having the first 14 characters of each line
devoted to a field description. Here is an example of a reference system parameter file named UTM-19N:

ref. system : Universal Transverse Mercator Zone 19

projection : Transverse Mercator
datum : NAD27
delta WGS84 : -8 160 176
ellipsoid : Clarke 1866
major s-ax : 6378206.5
minor s-ax : 6356584
origin long : -69
origin lat : 0
origin X : 500000
origin Y : 0
scale fac : 1
units : m
parameters : 0

The first line is simply a title and has no analytical use. The second line indicates the projection. In the current release of
IDRISI, the following projections are supported:
Mercator
Transverse Mercator
Gauss-Kruger (Gauss-Krueger spelling also accepted.)
Lambert Conformal Conic
Plate Carrée
Hammer Aitoff
Lambert North Polar Azimuthal Equal Area
Lambert South Polar Azimuthal Equal Area
Lambert Transverse Azimuthal Equal Area
Lambert Oblique Azimuthal Equal Area
North Polar Stereographic
South Polar Stereographic
Transverse Stereographic
Oblique Stereographic
Albers Equal Area Conic
Sinusoidal
none (i.e., geodetic coordinates)

Note that each of the names above are keywords and must appear exactly in this form to be understood by the PROJECT module.

Chapter 12 Georeferencing 125

The next line lists the geodetic datum. The text here is informational only, with the exception of the keywords NAD27
and NAD83. These latter two cases are the keywords for the two existing implementations of the North American datum.
When PROJECT encounters these keywords as elements of the input and output systems, it uses a special (and more pre-
cise) datum transformation technique. For all other cases, the Molodensky transform is used.
The next line lists the differences between the center (i.e., earth center) of the datum in use and that of the WGS84 datum
(World Geodetic System, 1984). The values express, in meters, the differences in the X, Y and Z axes respectively, relative
to WGS84. These are known as the Molodensky constants. Appendix 2: Datum Parameters contains a list of these con-
stants for most datums worldwide. They are used by PROJECT to undertake datum transformations except in the case of
conversions between NAD27 and NAD83. These conversions use the US National Geodetic Survey's NADCON proce-
dure.
The next three lines give information about the reference ellipsoid. The line listing the name of the ellipsoid is for infor-
mational purposes only. The following two lines describe, in meters, the major and minor semi-axes of the ellipsoid used
by the datum. These entries are used analytically by the PROJECT module. Appendix 1: Reference Ellipsoids contains
a list of ellipsoids and the lengths of their semi-axes.
The next four lines describe the origin and numbering system of the reference system. The origin long and origin lat entries
indicate the longitude and latitude of the true origin. The origin X and origin Y entries then indicate what coordinate values
exist at that location in the reference system being described.
The scale fac entry indicates the scale factor to be applied at the center of the projection. A typical value would be 1.0,
although it is equally permissible to indicate "na" (an abbreviation for "not applicable"). The most likely case in which
users will encounter a need to specify a value other than 1.0 is with the UTM system and other systems based on the
Transverse Mercator projection. With the UTM system, the scale fac should read 0.9996.
The units entry duplicates the units information found in raster and vector documentation files and is included here for
confirmation by the system. Therefore, in both reference and documentation files, units should be considered as analytical
entries.
Finally, the parameters entry indicates the number of special parameters included with the .ref file information. Of the pro-
jections currently supported, only the Lambert Conformal Conic and Alber's Equal Area Conic require special parame-
ters. All others should have a value of 0 for this entry. In cases using either the Lambert Conformal Conic or Alber's
Equal Area Conic projections, the parameters entry should read 2 and then include the latitudes (in decimal degrees) of the
two standard lines (lines of no distortion) on the following two lines. Here, for example, is the .ref file for the Massachu-
setts State Plane Coordinate System, Zone 1 (SPC83MA1), based on the NAD83 datum:

ref. system : Massachusetts State Plane Coordinate System Mainland Zone

projection : Lambert Conformal Conic
datum : NAD83
delta WGS84 : 000
ellipsoid : GRS80
major s-ax : 6378137
minor s-ax : 6356752.31
origin long : -71.5
origin lat : 41
origin X : 200000
origin Y : 750000
scale fac : na
units : m
parameters : 2

Chapter 12 Georeferencing 126

 stand ln 1 : 41.72
stand ln 2 : 42.68

Note that the latitude of the "lower" standard line (i.e., that which is nearer the equator) is listed first and that of the lati-
tudinally "higher" standard line is listed second. Future additions of other projections may dictate the need for additional
special parameters. However, in this version, only those reference systems based on the Lambert Conformal Conic and
Alber's Equal Area Conic projections require special parameters.

Projection and Datum Transformations

The PROJECT option of the COVERAGE menu in CartaLinx provides full transformation between reference systems.
As a consequence, it undertakes transformation of both projection and datum characteristics.
Projection transformations for all supported projections are undertaken using ellipsoidal formulas accurate to 2 cm on
the ground. As CartaLinx uses double precision floating point numbers (15 significant figures) for the representation of
coordinate data, this precision is maintained in all results. However, be aware that the precision of exported coordinates
depends on the numeric precision used by the export format being used.
For datum transformations, the primary method used is the Molodensky transformation described in DMA (1987).
Whenever the keywords "NAD27" and "NAD83" are encountered in a transformation, however, the more precise US
National Geodetic Survey NADCON procedure is used (see Dewhurst, 1990). This latter procedure should only be used within
the continental US. For other regions covered by the North American Datum, do not use the NAD27 or NAD83 keywords,
but rather some other spelling in the datum field, and indicate the correct Molodensky transformation constants from
Appendix 2: Datum Parameters.3

Algorithms Used by PROJECT

Forward and backward ellipsoidal projection formulae were taken from Snyder (1987). For datum transformations, the
Molodensky transform procedure (DMA, 1987) is used. However, for the specific case of NAD27/NAD83 transforma-
tions within the continental US, the US National Geodetic Survey's NADCON procedure is used. This procedure is
described in Dewhurst (1990) and is accompanied by relevant data files. Briefly, the procedure involves a matrix of correc-
tions to longitude and latitude that are accessed as a two-dimensional look-up table. Final correction values are then inter-
polated between the four nearest values in the matrix using a bilinear interpolation. To facilitate this, the NADCON data
files for the continental US were converted into IDRISI images. These images are contained in the GEOREF subdirec-
tory under the IDRISI program directory. There are two of these files, NADUSLON and NADUSLAT, for the correc-
tions to longitude and latitude respectively.

Further Reading
Geodesy is not a familiar topic for many in GIS. However, as one can see from the material in this chapter, it is essential
to effective database development. The following readings provide a good overview of the issues involved:

3. Note that while a set of constants exist for the North American Datum as a whole, Molodensky constants also exist for more specific portions of the
regions covered to enhance the precision of the transformation.

Chapter 12 Georeferencing 127

Burkard, R.K., (1964) Geodesy for the Layman, (St. Louis, MO: USAF Aeronautical Chart and Information Center).

Smith, J.R., (1988) Basic Geodesy, (Rancho Cordova, CA: Landmark Enterprises).

For projections, there are few texts that can match the scope and approachability of:

Maling, D.H., (1973) Coordinate Systems and Map Projections, (London: George Phillip and Son).

Snyder, J.P., (1987) Map Projections: A Working Manual. U.S. Geological Survey Professional Paper 1395, (Wash-
ington, DC: US Government Printing Office).

Finally, with respect to the procedures used for datum transformations, please refer to:

DMA, (1987) Department of Defense World Geodetic System 1984: Its Definition and Relationships with Local Geo-
detic Datums, DMA TR 8350.2, (Washington, DC: The Defense Mapping Agency).

Dewhurst, W.T., (1990) NADCON: The Application of Minimum Curvature-Derived Surfaces in the Transformation
of Positional Data from the North American Datum of 1927 to the North American Datum of 1983, NOAA
Technical Memorandum NOS NGS-50, (Rockville, MD: National Geodetic Information Center).

Chapter 12 Georeferencing 128

Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis
With rapid increases in population and continuing expectations of growth in the standard of living, pressures on natural
resource use have become intense. For the resource manager, the task of effective resource allocation has thus become
especially difficult. Clear choices are few and the increasing use of more marginal lands puts one face-to-face with a broad
range of uncertainties. Add to this a very dynamic environment subject to substantial and complex impacts from human
intervention, and one has the ingredients for a decision making process that is dominated by uncertainty and consequent
risk for the decision maker.
In recent years, considerable interest has been focused on the use of GIS as a decision support system. For some, this role
consists of simply informing the decision making process. However, it is more likely in the realm of resource allocation
that the greatest contribution can be made.
Over the past several years, the research staff at the Clark Labs have been specifically concerned with the use of GIS as a
direct extension of the human decision making process—most particularly in the context of resource allocation decisions.
However, our initial investigations into this area indicated that the tools available for this type of analysis were remarkably
poor. Despite strong developments in the field of Decision Science, little of this had made a substantial impact on the
development of software tools. And yet, at the same time, there was clear interest on the part of a growing contingency of
researchers in the GIS field to incorporate some of these developments into the GIS arena. As a consequence, in the early
1990s, we embarked on a project, in conjunction with the United Nations Institute for Training and Research (UNITAR),
to research the subject and to develop a suite of software tools for resource allocation. These were first released with Ver-
sion 4.1 of the MS-DOS version of IDRISI, with a concentration on procedures for Multi-Criteria and Multi-Objective
decision making—an area that can broadly be termed Decision Strategy Analysis. Since then, we have continued this devel-
opment, most particularly in the area of Uncertainty Management.
Uncertainty is not simply a problem with data. Rather, it is an inherent characteristic of the decision making process itself.
Given the increasing pressures that are being placed on the resource allocation process, we need to recognize uncertainty
not as a flaw to be regretted and perhaps ignored, but as a fact of the decision making process that needs to be under-
stood and accommodated. Uncertainty Management thus lies at the very heart of effective decision making and consti-
tutes a very special role for the software systems that support GIS. The following discussion is thus presented in two
parts. This chapter explores Decision Strategy Analysis and the following chapter discusses Uncertainty Management.

Introduction1
Decision Theory is concerned with the logic by which one arrives at a choice between alternatives. What those alterna-
tives are varies from problem to problem. They might be alternative actions, alternative hypotheses about a phenomenon,
alternative objects to include in a set, and so on. In the context of GIS, it is useful to distinguish between policy decisions
and resource allocation decisions. The latter involves decisions that directly affect the utilization of resources (e.g., land)
while the former is only intended to influence the decision behavior of others who will in turn make resource commit-
ments. GIS has considerable potential in both arenas.
In the context of policy decisions, GIS is most commonly used to inform the decision maker. However, it also has poten-
tial (almost entirely unrealized at this time) as a process modeling tool, in which the spatial effects of predicted decision
behavior might be simulated. Simulation modeling, particularly of the spatial nature of socio-economic issues and their

1. The introductory material in this chapter is adapted from Eastman, J.R., 1993. Decision Theory and GIS, Proceedings, Africa GIS '93, UNITAR,
Geneva. (out of print)

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 129

relation to nature, is still in its infancy. However, it is to be expected that GIS will play an increasingly sophisticated role in
this area in the future.
Resource allocation decisions are also prime candidates for analysis with a GIS. Indeed, land evaluation and allocation is
one of the most fundamental activities of resource development (FAO, 1976). With the advent of GIS, we now have the
opportunity for a more explicitly reasoned land evaluation process. However, without procedures and tools for the devel-
opment of decision rules and the predictive modeling of expected outcomes, this opportunity will largely go unrealized.
GIS has been slow to address the needs of decision makers and to cope with the problems of uncertainty that lead to
decision risk. In an attempt to address these issues, the Clark Labs has worked in close collaboration with the United
Nations Institute for Training and Research (UNITAR) to develop a set of decision support tools for the IDRISI soft-
ware system.
Although there is now fairly extensive literature on decision making in the Management Science, Operations Research and
Regional Science fields (sometimes linked together under the single name Decision Science), there is unfortunately a broadly
divergent use of terminology (e.g., see Rosenthal, 1985). Accordingly, we have adopted the following set of operational
definitions which we feel are in keeping with the thrust of the Decision Science literature and which are expressive of the
GIS decision making context.

Definitions
Decision
A decision is a choice between alternatives. The alternatives may represent different courses of action, different hypothe-
ses about the character of a feature, different classifications, and so on. We call this set of alternatives the decision frame.
Thus, for example, the decision frame for a zoning problem might be [commercial residential industrial]. The decision
frame, however, should be distinguished from the individuals to which the decision is being applied. We call this the candi-
date set. For example, extending the zoning example above, the set of all locations (pixels) in the image that will be zoned is
the candidate set. Finally, a decision set is that set of all individuals that are assigned a specific alternative from the decision
frame. Thus, for example, all pixels assigned to the residential zone constitute one decision set. Similarly, those belonging
to the commercial zone constitute another. Therefore, another definition of a decision would be to consider it the act of
assigning an individual to a decision set. Alternatively, it can be thought of as a choice of alternative characterizations for
an individual.

Criterion
A criterion is some basis for a decision that can be measured and evaluated. It is the evidence upon which an individual
can be assigned to a decision set. Criteria can be of two kinds: factors and constraints, and can pertain either to attributes
of the individual or to an entire decision set.

Factors
A factor is a criterion that enhances or detracts from the suitability of a specific alternative for the activity under consider-
ation. It is therefore most commonly measured on a continuous scale. For example, a forestry company may determine
that the steeper the slope, the more costly it is to transport wood. As a result, better areas for logging would be those on
shallow slopes — the shallower the better. Factors are also known as decision variables in the mathematical programming lit-
erature (see Feiring, 1986) and structural variables in the linear goal programming literature (see Ignizio, 1985).

Constraints
A constraint serves to limit the alternatives under consideration. A good example of a constraint would be the exclusion
from development of areas designated as wildlife reserves. Another might be the stipulation that no development may

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 130

proceed on slopes exceeding a 30% gradient. In many cases, constraints will be expressed in the form of a Boolean (logi-
cal) map: areas excluded from consideration being coded with a 0 and those open for consideration being coded with a 1.
However, in some instances, the constraint will be expressed as some characteristic that the decision set must possess. For
example, we might require that the total area of lands selected for development be no less than 5000 hectares, or that the
decision set consist of a single contiguous area. Constraints such as these are often called goals (Ignizio, 1985) or targets
(Rosenthal, 1985). Regardless, both forms of constraints have the same ultimate meaning—to limit the alternatives under
consideration.
Although factors and constraints are commonly viewed as very different forms of criteria, material will be presented later
in this chapter which shows these commonly held perspectives simply to be special cases of a continuum of variation in
the degree to which criteria tradeoff in their influence over the solution, and in the degree of conservativeness in risk (or
alternatively, pessimism or optimism) that one wishes to introduce in the decision strategy chosen. Thus, the very hard
constraints illustrated above will be seen to be the crisp extremes of a more general class of fuzzy criteria that encompasses
all of these possibilities. Indeed, it will be shown that continuous criteria (which we typically think of as factors) can serve
as soft constraints when tradeoff is eliminated. In ecosystems analysis and land suitability assessment, this kind of factor is
called a limiting factor, which is clearly a kind of constraint.

Decision Rule
The procedure by which criteria are selected and combined to arrive at a particular evaluation, and by which evaluations
are compared and acted upon, is known as a decision rule. A decision rule might be as simple as a threshold applied to a
single criterion (such as, all regions with slopes less than 35% will be zoned as suitable for development) or it may be as
complex as one involving the comparison of several multi-criteria evaluations.
Decision rules typically contain procedures for combining criteria into a single composite index and a statement of how
alternatives are to be compared using this index. For example, we might define a composite suitability map for agriculture
based on a weighted linear combination of information on soils, slope, and distance from market. The rule might further
state that the best 5000 hectares are to be selected. This could be achieved by choosing that set of raster cells, totaling
5000 hectares, in which the sum of suitabilities is maximized. It could equally be achieved by rank ordering the cells and
taking enough of the highest ranked cells to produce a total of 5000 hectares. The former might be called a choice function
(known as an objective function or performance index in the mathematical programming literature—see Diamond and Wright,
1989) while the latter might be called a choice heuristic.

Choice Function
Choice functions provide a mathematical means of comparing alternatives. Since they involve some form of optimization
(such as maximizing or minimizing some measurable characteristic), they theoretically require that each alternative be
evaluated in turn. However, in some instances, techniques do exist to limit the evaluation only to likely alternatives. For
example, the Simplex Method in linear programming (see Feiring, 1986) is specifically designed to avoid unnecessary eval-
uations.

Choice Heuristic
Choice heuristics specify a procedure to be followed rather than a function to be evaluated. In some cases, they will pro-
duce an identical result to a choice function (such as the ranking example above), while in other cases they may simply
provide a close approximation. Choice heuristics are commonly used because they are often simpler to understand and
easier to implement.

Objective
Decision rules are structured in the context of a specific objective. The nature of that objective, and how it is viewed by
the decision makers (i.e., their motives) will serve as a strong guiding force in the development of a specific decision rule.
An objective is thus a perspective that serves to guide the structuring of decision rules.2 For example, we may have the

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 131

stated objective to determine areas suitable for timber harvesting. However, our perspective may be one that tries to min-
imize the impact of harvesting on recreational uses in the area. The choice of criteria to be used and the weights to be
assigned to them would thus be quite different from that of a group whose primary concern was profit maximization.
Objectives are thus very much concerned with issues of motive and social perspective.

Evaluation
The actual process of applying the decision rule is called evaluation.

Multi-Criteria Evaluations
To meet a specific objective, it is frequently the case that several criteria will need to be evaluated. Such a procedure is
called Multi-Criteria Evaluation (Voogd, 1983; Carver, 1991). Another term that is sometimes encountered for this is model-
ing. However, this term is avoided here since the manner in which the criteria are combined is very much influenced by the
objective of the decision.
Multi-criteria evaluation (MCE) is most commonly achieved by one of two procedures. The first involves Boolean overlay
whereby all criteria are reduced to logical statements of suitability and then combined by means of one or more logical
operators such as intersection (AND) and union (OR). The second is known as Weighted Linear Combination (WLC)
wherein continuous criteria (factors) are standardized to a common numeric range, and then combined by means of a
weighted average. The result is a continuous mapping of suitability that may then be masked by one or more Boolean con-
straints to accommodate qualitative criteria, and finally thresholded to yield a final decision.
While these two procedures are well established in GIS, they frequently lead to different results, as they make very differ-
ent statements about how criteria should be evaluated. In the case of Boolean evaluation, a very extreme form of decision
making is used. If the criteria are combined with a logical AND (the intersection operator), a location must meet every cri-
terion for it to be included in the decision set. If even a single criterion fails to be met, the location will be excluded. Such
a procedure is essentially risk-averse, and selects locations based on the most cautious strategy possible—a location suc-
ceeds in being chosen only if its worst quality (and therefore all qualities) passes the test. On the other hand, if a logical
OR (union) is used, the opposite applies—a location will be included in the decision set even if only a single criterion
passes the test. This is thus a very gambling strategy, with (presumably) substantial risk involved.
Now compare these strategies with that represented by weighted linear combination (WLC). With WLC, criteria are per-
mitted to tradeoff their qualities. A very poor quality can be compensated for by having a number of very favorable quali-
ties. This operator represents neither an AND nor an OR—it lies somewhere in between these extremes. It is neither risk
averse nor risk taking.
For reasons that have largely to do with the ease with which these approaches can be implemented, the Boolean strategy
dominates vector approaches to MCE, while WLC dominates solutions in raster systems. But clearly neither is better—
they simply represent two very different outlooks on the decision process—what can be called a decision strategy. IDRISI
also includes a third option for multi-criteria evaluation, known as an Ordered Weighted Average (OWA) (Eastman and
Jiang, 1996). This method offers a complete spectrum of decision strategies along the primary dimensions of degree of
tradeoff involved and degree of risk in the solution.

Multi-Objective Evaluations
While many decisions we make are prompted by a single objective, it also happens that we need to make decisions that
satisfy several objectives. A multi-objective problem is encountered whenever we have two candidate sets (i.e., sets of enti-
ties) that share members. These objectives may be complementary or conflicting in nature (Carver, 1991: 322).

2. It is important to note here that we are using a somewhat broader definition of the term objective than would be found in the goal programming lit-
erature (see Ignizio, 1985). In goal programming, the term objective is synonymous with the term objective function in mathematical programming and choice
function used here.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 132

Complementary Objectives
With complementary or non-conflicting objectives, land areas may satisfy more than one objective, i.e., an individual pixel
can belong to more than one decision set. Desirable areas will thus be those which serve these objectives together in some
specified manner. For example, we might wish to allocate a certain amount of land for combined recreation and wildlife
preservation uses. Optimal areas would thus be those that satisfy both of these objectives to the maximum degree possi-
ble.
Conflicting Objectives
With conflicting objectives, competion occurs for the available land since it can be used for one objective or the other, but
not both. For example, we may need to resolve the problem of allocating land for timber harvesting and wildlife preserva-
tion. Clearly the two cannot coexist. Exactly how they compete, and on what basis one will win out over the other, will
depend upon the nature of the decision rule that is developed.
In cases of complementary objectives, multi-objective decisions can often be solved through a hierarchical extension of the
multi-criteria evaluation process. For example, we might assign a weight to each of the objectives and use these, along with
the suitability maps developed for each, to combine them into a single suitability map. This would indicate the degree to
which areas meet all of the objectives considered (see Voogd, 1983). However, with conflicting objectives the procedure is
more involved.
With conflicting objectives, it is sometimes possible to rank order the objectives and reach a prioritized solution (Rosenthal,
1985). In these cases, the needs of higher ranked objectives are satisfied before those of lower ranked objectives are dealt
with. However, this is often not possible, and the most common solution for conflicting objectives is the development of
a compromise solution. Undoubtedly the most commonly employed techniques for resolving conflicting objectives are those
involving optimization of a choice function such as mathematical programming (Fiering, 1986) or goal programming
(Ignizio, 1985). In both, the concern is to develop an allocation of the land that maximizes or minimizes an objective
function subject to a series of constraints.

Uncertainty and Risk

Clearly, information is vital to the process of decision making. However, we rarely have perfect information. This leads to
uncertainty, of which two sources can be identified: database and decision rule uncertainty.

Database Uncertainty
Database uncertainty is that which resides in our assessments of the criteria which are enumerated in the decision rule.
Measurement error is the primary source of such uncertainty. For example, a slope of 35% may represent an important
threshold. However, because of the manner in which slopes are determined, there may be some uncertainty about
whether a slope that was measured as 34% really is 34%. While we may have considerable confidence that it is most likely
around 34%, we may also need to admit that there is some finite probability that it is as high as 36%. Our expression of
database uncertainty is likely to rely upon probability theory.

Decision Rule Uncertainty

Decision rule uncertainty is that which arises from the manner in which criteria are combined and evaluated to reach a
decision. A very simple form of decision rule uncertainty is that which relates to parameters or thresholds used in the
decision rule. A more complex issue is that which relates to the very structure of the decision rule itself. This is sometimes
called specification error (Alonso, 1968), because of uncertainties that arise in specifying the relationship between criteria (as
a model) such that adequate evidence is available for the proper evaluation of the hypotheses under investigation.
Decision Rule Uncertainty and Direct Evidence: Fuzzy versus Crisp Sets
A key issue in decision rule uncertainty is that of establishing the relationship between the evidence and the decision set.
In most cases, we are able to establish a direct relationship between the two, in the sense that we can define the decision

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 133

set by measurable attributes that its members should possess. In some cases these attributes are crisp and unambiguous.
For example, we might define those sewer lines in need of replacement as those of a particular material and age. However,
quite frequently the attributes they possess are fuzzy rather than crisp. For example, we might define suitable areas for
timber logging as those forested areas that have gentle slopes and are near to a road. What is a gentle slope? If we specify
that a slope is gentle if it has a gradient of less than 5%, does this mean that a slope of 5.0001% is not gentle? Clearly there
is no sharp boundary here. Such classes are called fuzzy sets (Zadeh, 1965) and are typically defined by a set membership
function. Thus we might decide that any slope less than 2% is unquestionably gentle, and that any slope greater than 10%
is unquestionably steep, but that membership in the gentle set gradually falls from 1.0 at a 2% gradient to 0.0 at a 10%
gradient. A slope of 5% might then be considered to have a membership value of only 0.7 in the set called "gentle." A
similar group of considerations also surround the concept of being "near" to a road.
Fuzzy sets are extremely common in the decision problems faced with GIS. They represent a form of uncertainty, but it is
not measurement uncertainty. The issue of what constitutes a shallow slope is over and above the issue of whether a mea-
sured slope is actually what is recorded. It is a form of uncertainty that lies at the very heart of the concept of factors pre-
viously developed. The continuous factors of multi-criteria decision making are thus fuzzy set membership functions, whereas Boolean
constraints are crisp set membership functions. But it should be recognized that the terms factor and constraint imply more than
fuzzy or crisp membership functions. Rather, these terms give some meaning also to the manner in which they are aggre-
gated with other information.
Decision Rule Uncertainty and Indirect Evidence: Bayes versus Dempster Shafer
Not all evidence can be directly related to the decision set. In some instances we only have an indirect relationship
between the two. In this case, we may set up what can be called a belief function of the degree to which evidence implies the
membership in the decision set. Two important tools for accomplishing this are Bayesian Probability Theory and Demp-
ster-Shafer Theory of Evidence. These will be dealt with at more length later in this chapter in Part B on Uncertainty
Management.

Decision Risk
Decision Risk may be understood as the likelihood that the decision made will be wrong.3 Risk arises as a result of uncer-
tainty, and its assessment thus requires a combination of uncertainty estimates from the various sources involved (data-
base and decision rule uncertainty) and procedures, such as Bayesian Probability theory, through which it can be
determined. Again, this topic will be discussed more thoroughly in Part B of this chapter.

3. Note that different fields of science define risk in different ways. For example, some disciplines modify the definition given here to include a measure
of the cost or consequences of a wrong decision (thus allowing for a direct relationship to cost/benefit analysis). The procedures developed in IDRISI
do not preclude such an extension. We have tried here to present a fairly simple perspective that can be used as a building block for more specific inter-
pretations.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 134

A Typology of Decisions
Given these definitions, it is possible to set out a very broad typology of decisions as illustrated in Figure 1.

Single Criterion Multi-Criteria

Single Objective
Multi-Objective

Figure 1

Decisions may be characterized as single- or multi-objective in nature, based on either a single criterion or multiple criteria. While
one is occasionally concerned with single criterion problems, most problems approached with a GIS are multi-criteria in
nature. For example, we might wish to identify areas of concern for soil erosion on the basis of slope, landuse, soil type
and the like. In these instances, our concern lies with how to combine these criteria to arrive at a composite decision. As a
consequence, the first major area of concern in GIS with regard to Decision Theory is Multi-Criteria Evaluation.
Most commonly, we deal with decision problems of this nature from a single perspective. However, in many instances, the
problem is actually multi-objective in nature (Diamond and Wright, 1988). Multi-objective problems arise whenever the
same resources belong to more than one candidate set. Thus, for example, a paper company might include all forest areas
in its candidate set for consideration of logging areas, while a conservation group may include forest areas in a larger can-
didate set of natural areas to be protected. Any attempt, therefore, to reconcile their potential claims to this common set
of resources presents a multi-objective decision problem.
Despite the prevalence of multi-objective problems, current GIS software is severely lacking in techniques to deal with
this kind of decision. To date, most examples of multi-objective decision procedures in the literature have dealt with the
problem through the use of linear programming optimization (e.g., Janssen and Rietveld 1990; Carver, 1991; Campbell et.
al., 1992; Wright et. al., 1983). However, in most cases, these have been treated as choice problems between a limited num-
ber (e.g., less than 20) of candidate sites previously isolated in a vector system. The volume of data associated with raster
applications (where each pixel is a choice alternative) clearly overwhelms the computational capabilities of today's com-
puting environment. In addition, the terminology and procedures of linear programming are unknown to most decision
makers and are complex and unintuitive by nature. As a consequence, the second major area of Decision Theory of
importance to GIS is Multi-Objective Land Allocation. Here, the focus will be on a simple decision heuristic appropriate
to the special needs of raster GIS.

Multi-Criteria Decision Making in GIS

As indicated earlier, the primary issue in multi-criteria evaluation is concerned with how to combine the information from
several criteria to form a single index of evaluation. In the case of Boolean criteria (constraints), the solution usually lies in
the union (logical OR) or intersection (logical AND) of conditions. However, for continuous factors, a weighted linear
combination (Voogd, 1983: 120) is most commonly used. With a weighted linear combination, factors are combined by
applying a weight to each followed by a summation of the results to yield a suitability map, i.e.:
S = Σwixi where S= suitability
wi = weight of factor i
xi = criterion score of factor i
This procedure is not unfamiliar in GIS and has a form very similar to the nature of a regression equation. In cases where

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 135

Boolean constraints also apply, the procedure can be modified by multiplying the suitability calculated from the factors by
the product of the constraints, i.e.:
S = Σwixi*∏cj where cj = criterion score of constraint j
∏= product
All GIS software systems provide the basic tools for evaluating such a model. In addition, in IDRISI, a special module
named MCE has been developed to facilitate this process. However, the MCE module also offers a special procedure
called an Ordered Weighted Average that greatly extends the decision strategy options available. The procedure will be
discussed more fully in the section on Evaluation below. For now, however, the primary issues relate to the standardiza-
tion of criterion scores and the development of the weights.

Criterion Scores
Because of the different scales upon which criteria are measured, it is necessary that factors be standardized4 before com-
bination using the formulas above, and that they be transformed, if necessary, such that all factors maps are positively cor-
related with suitability.5 Voogd (1983: 77-84) reviews a variety of procedures for standardization, typically using the
minimum and maximum values as scaling points. The simplest is a linear scaling such as:
xi = (Ri-Rmin) / (Rmax-Rmin) * standardized_range where R = raw score
However, if we recognize that continuous factors are really fuzzy sets, we easily recognize this as just one of many possible
set membership functions. In IDRISI, the module named FUZZY is provided for the standardization of factors using a
whole range of fuzzy set membership functions. The module is quick and easy to use, and provides the option of stan-
dardizing factors to either a 0-1 real number scale or a 0-255 byte scale. This latter option is recommended because the
MCE module has been optimized for speed using a 0-255 level standardization. Importantly, the higher value of the stan-
dardized scale must represent the case of being more likely to belong to the decision set.
A critical issue in the standardization of factors is the choice of the end points at which set membership reaches either 0.0
or 1.0 (or 0 and 255). Our own research has suggested that blindly using a linear scaling (or indeed any other scaling)
between the minimum and maximum values of the image is ill advised. In setting these critical points for the set member-
ship function, it is important to consider their inherent meaning. Thus, for example, if we feel that industrial development
should be placed as far away from a nature reserve as possible, it would be dangerous to implement this without careful
consideration. Taken literally, if the map were to cover a range of perhaps 100 km from the reserve, then the farthest point
away from the reserve would be given a value of 1.0 (or 255 for a byte scaling). Using a linear function, then, a location 5
km from the reserve would have a standardized value of only 0.05 (13 for a byte scaling). And yet it may be that the pri-
mary issue was noise and minor disturbance from local citizens, for which a distance of only 5 kilometers would have
been equally as good as being 100 km away. Thus the standardized score should really have been 1.0 (255). If an MCE
were undertaken using the blind linear scaling, locations in the range of a few 10s of km would have been severely deval-
ued when it fact they might have been quite good. In this case, the recommended critical points for the scaling should
have been 0 and 5 km. In developing standardized factors using FUZZY, then, careful consideration should be given to
the inherent meaning of the end points chosen.

Criterion Weights
A wide variety of techniques exist for the development of weights. In very simple cases, assigning criteria weights may be
accomplished by dividing 1.0 among the criteria. (It is sometimes useful for people to think about "spending" one dollar,
for example, among the criteria). However, when the number of criteria is more than a few, and the considerations are

4. In using the term standardization, we have adopted the terminology of Voogd (1983), even though this process should more properly be called normal-
ization.

5. Thus, for example, if locations near to a road were more advantageous for industrial siting than those far away, a distance map would need to be trans-
formed into one expressing proximity.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 136

many, it becomes quite difficult to make weight evaluations on the set as a whole. Breaking the information down into
simple pairwise comparisons in which only two criteria need be considered at a time can greatly facilitate the weighting
process, and will likely produce a more robust set of criteria weights. A pairwise comparison method has the added advan-
tages of providing an organized structure for group discussions, and helping the decision making group hone in on areas
of agreement and disagreement in setting criterion weights.
The technique described here and implemented in IDRISI is that of pairwise comparisons developed by Saaty (1977) in
the context of a decision making process known as the Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP). The first introduction of this
technique to a GIS application was that of Rao et. al. (1991), although the procedure was developed outside the GIS soft-
ware using a variety of analytical resources.
In the procedure for Multi-Criteria Evaluation using a weighted linear combination outlined above, it is necessary that the
weights sum to one. In Saaty's technique, weights of this nature can be derived by taking the principal eigenvector of a
square reciprocal matrix of pairwise comparisons between the criteria. The comparisons concern the relative importance
of the two criteria involved in determining suitability for the stated objective. Ratings are provided on a 9-point continu-
ous scale (Figure 2). For example, if one felt that proximity to roads was very strongly more important than slope gradient
in determining suitability for industrial siting, one would enter a 7 on this scale. If the inverse were the case (slope gradient
was very strongly more important than proximity to roads), one would enter 1/7.

1/9 1/7 1/5 1/3 1 3 5 7 9

extremely very strongly strongly moderately equally moderately strongly very strongly extremely

less important more important

Figure 2 The Continuous Rating Scale

In developing the weights, an individual or group compares every possible pairing and enters the ratings into a pairwise
comparison matrix (Figure 3). Since the matrix is symmetrical, only the lower triangular half actually needs to be filled in.
The remaining cells are then simply the reciprocals of the lower triangular half (for example, since the rating of slope gra-
dient relative to town proximity is 4, the rating of town proximity relative to slope gradient will be 1/4). Note that where
empirical evidence exists about the relative efficacy of a pair of factors, this evidence can also be used.

Rating of the Row Factor Relative to the Column Factor

Road Town Slope Small Holder Distance from
Proximity Proximity Gradient Settlement Park

Road Proximity 1

Town Proximity 1/3 1

Slope Gradient 1 4 1

Small Holder Set. 1/7 2 1/7 1

Distance from Park 1/2 2 1/2 4 1

Figure 3 An example of a pairwise comparison matrix for assessing the com-

parative importance of five factors to industrial development suitability.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 137

The procedure then requires that the principal eigenvector of the pairwise comparison matrix be computed to produce a
best fit set of weights (Figure 4). If no procedure is available to do this, a good approximation to this result can be achieved
by calculating the weights with each column and then averaging over all columns. For example, if we take the first column
of figures, they sum to 2.98. Dividing each of the entries in the first column by 2.98 yields weights of 0.34, 0.11, 0.34, 0.05,
and 0.17 (compare to the values in Figure 4). Repeating this for each column and averaging the weights over the columns
usually gives a good approximation to the values calculated by the principal eigenvector. In the case of IDRISI, however,
a special module named WEIGHT has been developed to calculate the principal eigenvector directly. Note that these
weights will sum to one, as is required by the weighted linear combination procedure.

RoadProx 0.33

TownProx 0.08

Slope 0.34

SmalHold 0.07

ParkDist 0.18 Consistency Ratio 0.06

Figure 4 Weights derived by calculating the princi-

pal eigenvector of the pairwise comparison matrix.

Since the complete pairwise comparison matrix contains multiple paths by which the relative importance of criteria can be
assessed, it is also possible to determine the degree of consistency that has been used in developing the ratings. Saaty
(1977) indicates the procedure by which an index of consistency, known as a consistency ratio, can be produced (Figure 4).
The consistency ratio (CR) indicates the probability that the matrix ratings were randomly generated. Saaty indicates that
matrices with CR ratings greater than 0.10 should be re-evaluated. In addition to the overall consistency ratio, it is also
possible to analyze the matrix to determine where the inconsistencies arise. This has also been developed as part of the
WEIGHT module in IDRISI.

Evaluation
Once the criteria maps (factors and constraints) have been developed, an evaluation (or aggregation) stage is undertaken
to combine the information from the various factors and constraints. The MCE module offers three logics for the evalu-
ation/aggregation of multiple criteria: Boolean intersection, weighted linear combination (WLC), and the ordered
weighted average (OWA).

MCE and Boolean Intersection

The most simplistic type of aggregation is the Boolean intersection or logical AND. This method is used only when factor
maps have been strictly classified into Boolean suitable/unsuitable images with values 1 and 0. The evaluation is simply
the multiplication of all the images.

MCE and Weighted Linear Combination

The derivation of criterion (or factor) weights is described above. The weighted linear combination (WLC) aggregation
method multiplies each standardized factor map (i.e., each raster cell within each map) by its factor weight and then sums
the results. Since the set of factor weights for an evaluation must sum to one, the resulting suitability map will have the
same range of values as the standardized factor maps that were used. This result is then multiplied by each of the con-
straints in turn to "mask out" unsuitable areas. All these steps could be done using either a combination of SCALAR and
OVERLAY, or by using the Image Calculator. However, the module MCE is designed to facilitate the process.
The WLC option in the MCE module requires that you specify the number of criteria (both constraints and factors), their

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 138

names, and the weights to be applied to the factors. All factors must be standardized to a byte (0-255) range. (If you have
factors in real format, then use one of the options other than MCE mentioned above.) The output is a suitability map
masked by the specified constraints.

MCE and the Ordered Weighted Average

In its use and implementation, the ordered weighted average approach is not unlike WLC. The dialog box for the OWA
option is almost identical to that of WLC, with the exception that a second set of weights appears. This second set of
weights, the order weights, controls the manner in which the weighted factors are aggregated (Eastman and Jiang, 1996;
Yager, 1988). Indeed, WLC turns out to be just one variant of the OWA technique. To introduce the OWA technique, let's
first review WLC in terms of two new concepts: tradeoff and risk.
Tradeoff
Factor weights are weights that apply to specific factors, i.e., all the pixels of a particular factor image receive the same fac-
tor weight. They indicate the relative degree of importance each factor plays in determining the suitability for an objective.
In the case of WLC the weight given to each factor also determines how it will tradeoff relative to other factors. For
example, a factor with a high factor weight can tradeoff or compensate for poor scores on other factors, even if the
unweighted suitability score for that highly-weighted factor is not particularly good. In contrast, a factor with a high suit-
ability score but a small factor weight can only weakly compensate for poor scores on other factors. The factor weights
determine how factors tradeoff but, as described below, order weights determine the overall level of tradeoff allowed.
Risk
Boolean approaches are extreme functions that result either in very risk-averse solutions when the AND operator is used
or in risk-taking solutions when the OR operator is used.6 In the former, a high aggregate suitability score for a given
location (pixel) is only possible if all factors have high scores. In the latter, a high score in any factor will yield a high aggre-
gate score, even if all the other factors have very low scores. The AND operation may be usefully described as the mini-
mum, since the minimum score for any pixel determines the final aggregate score. Similarly, the OR operation may be
called the maximum, since the maximum score for any pixel determines the final aggregate score. The AND solution is
risk-averse because we can be sure that the score for every factor is at least as good as the final aggregate score. The OR
solution is risk-taking because the final aggregate score only tells us about the suitability score for the single most suitable
factor.
The WLC approach is an averaging technique that softens the hard decisions of the Boolean approach and avoids the
extremes. In fact, given a continuum of risk from minimum to maximum, WLC falls exactly in the middle; it is neither
risk-averse nor risk-taking.
Order Weights, Tradeoff and Risk
The use of order weights allows for aggregation solutions that fall anywhere along the risk continuum between AND and
OR. Order weights are quite different from factor weights. They do not apply to any specific factor. Rather, they are
applied on a pixel-by-pixel basis to factor scores as determined by their rank ordering across factors at each location
(pixel). Order weight 1 is assigned to the lowest-ranked factor for that pixel (i.e., the factor with the lowest score), order
weight 2 to the next higher-ranked factor for that pixel, and so forth. Thus, it is possible that a single order weight could
be applied to pixels from any of the various factors depending upon their relative rank order.
To examine how order weights alter MCE results by controlling levels of tradeoff and risk, let us consider the case where
factor weights are equal for three factors A, B, and C. (Holding factor weights equal will make clearer the effect of the
order weights.) Consider a single pixel with factor scores A= 187, B=174, and C=201. The factor weights for each of the

6. The logic of the Boolean AND and OR is implemented with fuzzy sets as the minimum and maximum. Thus, as we are considering continuous factor
scores rather than Boolean 0-1 images in this discussion, the logical AND is evaluated as the minimum value for a pixel across all factors and the logical
OR is evaluated as the maximum value for a pixel across all factors.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 139

factors is 0.33. When ranked from minimum value to maximum value, the order of these factors for this pixel is [B,A,C].
For this pixel, factor B will be assigned order weight 1, A order weight 2 and C order weight 3.
Below is a table with thirteen sets of order weights that have been applied to this set of factor scores [174,187,201]. Each
set yields a different MCE result even though the factor scores and the factor weights are the same in each case.

Order Weights Result

Min (1) (2) Max (3)

1.00 0.00 0.00 174

0.90 0.10 0.00 175

0.80 0.20 0.00 177

0.70 0.20 0.10 179

0.50 0.30 0.20 183

0.40 0.30 0.30 186

0.33 0.33 0.33 187

0.30 0.30 0.40 189

0.20 0.30 0.50 191

0.10 0.20 0.70 196

0.00 0.20 0.80 198

0.00 0.10 0.90 200

0.00 0.00 1.00 201

The first set of order weights in the table is [1, 0, 0]. The weight of factor B (the factor with the minimum value in the set
[B, A, C]) will receive all possible weight while factors A and C will be given no weight at all. Such a set of order weights
make irrelevant the factor weights. Indeed, the order weights have altered the evaluation such that no tradeoff is possible.
As can be seen in the table, this has the effect of applying a minimum operator to the factors, thus producing the tradi-
tional intersection operator (AND) of fuzzy sets.
Similarly, the last set of order weights [0, 0, 1] has the effect of a maximum operator, the traditional union operator (OR)
of fuzzy sets. Again, there is no tradeoff and the factor weights are not employed.
Another important example from the table is where the order weights are equal, [.33, .33, .33]. Here all ranked positions
get the same weight; this makes tradeoff fully possible and locates the analysis exactly midway between AND and OR.
Equal order weights produce the same result as WLC.
In all three cases, the order weights have determined not only the level of tradeoff but have situated the analysis on a con-
tinuum from (risk-averse, minimum, AND) to (risk-taking, maximum, OR).
As seen in the table, the order weights in the OWA option of MCE are not restricted to these three possibilities, but
instead can be assigned any combination of values that sum to 1.0. Any assignment of order weights results in a decision
rule that falls somewhere in a triangular decision strategy space that is defined by the dimensions of risk and tradeoff as
shown in Figure 5.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 140

 full
tradeoff

TRADEOFF
decision
strategy
space
no
tradeoff
risk-averse RISK risk-taking
(AND) (OR)

Figure 5

Whether most of the order weight is assigned to the left, right or center of the order weights determines the position in
the risk dimension. The logical AND operator is the most risk-averse combination and the logical OR is the most risk-
taking combination. When order weights are predominantly assigned to the lower-ranked factors, there is greater risk
aversion (more of an AND approach). When order weights are more dominant for the higher-ranked factors, there is
greater risk taking (more of an OR approach). As discussed above, equal order weights yield a solution at the middle of
the risk axis.
The degree of tradeoff is governed by the relative distribution of order weights between the ranked factors. Thus, if the
sum of the order weights is evenly spread between the factors, there is strong tradeoff, whereas if all the weight is assigned
to a single factor rank, there is no tradeoff. (It may be helpful to think of this in terms of a graph of the order weights,
with rank order on the X axis and the order weight value on the Y axis. If the graph has a sharp peak, there is little trad-
eoff. If the graph is relatively flat, there is strong tradeoff.)
Thus, as seen from the table, the order weights of [0.5 0.3 0.2] would indicate a strong (but not perfect) degree of risk
aversion (because weights are skewed to the risk-averse side of the risk axis) and some degree of tradeoff (because the
weights are spread out over all three ranks). Weights of [0 1 0], however, would imply neither risk aversion nor acceptance
(exactly in the middle of the risk axis), and no tradeoff (because all the weight is assigned to a single rank).
The OWA method is particularly interesting because it provides this continuum of aggregation procedures. At one
extreme (the logical AND), each criterion is considered necessary (but not sufficient on its own) for inclusion in the deci-
sion set. At the other extreme (the logical OR), each criterion is sufficient on its own to support inclusion in the decision
set without modification by other factors. The position of the weighted linear combination operator halfway between
these extremes is therefore not surprising. This operator considers criteria as neither necessary nor sufficient—strong
support for inclusion in the decision set by one criterion can be equally balanced by correspondingly low support by
another. It thus offers full tradeoff.

Using OWA
Given this introduction, it is worth considering how one would use the OWA option of MCE. Some guidelines are as fol-
lows:
1. Divide your criteria into three groups: hard constraints, factors that should not tradeoff, and factors that should trad-
eoff. For example, factors with monetary implications typically tradeoff, while those associated with some safety concern
typically do not.
2. If you find that you have factors that both tradeoff and do not tradeoff, separate their consideration into two stages of
analysis. In the first, aggregate the factors that tradeoff using the OWA option. You can govern the degree of tradeoff by

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 141

manipulating the order weights. Then use the result of the first stage as a new factor that is included in the analysis of
those that do not tradeoff.
3. If you run an analysis with absolutely no tradeoff, the factor weights have no real meaning and can be set to any value.

Completing the Evaluation

Once a suitability map has been prepared, it is common to decide, as a final step, which cells should belong to the set that
meets a particular land allocation area target (the decision set). For example, having developed a map of suitability for
industrial development, we may then wish to determine which areas constitute the best 5000 hectares that may be allo-
cated. Oddly, this is an area where most raster systems have difficulty achieving an exact solution. One solution would be
to use a choice function where that set of cells is chosen which maximizes the sum of suitabilities. However, the number
of combinations that would need to be evaluated is prohibitive in a raster GIS. As a result, we chose to use a simple choice
heuristic—to rank order the cells and choose as many of the highest ranks as will be required to meet the area target. In
IDRISI, a module named RANK is available that allows a rapid ranking of cells within an image. In addition, it allows the
use of a second image to resolve the ranks of ties. The ranked map can then be reclassified to extract the highest ranks to
meet the area goal.

Multi-Objective Decision Making in GIS

Multi-objective decisions are so common in environmental management that it is surprising that specific tools to address
them have not yet been further developed within GIS. The few examples one finds in the literature tend to concentrate on
the use of mathematical programming tools outside the GIS, or are restricted to cases of complementary objectives.

Complementary Objectives
As indicated earlier, the case of complementary objectives can be dealt with quite simply by means of a hierarchical exten-
sion of the multi-criteria evaluation process (e.g., Carver, 1991). Here a set of suitability maps, each derived in the context
of a specific objective, serve as the factors for a new evaluation in which the objectives are themselves weighted and com-
bined by linear summation. Since the logic which underlies this is multiple use, it also makes sense to multiply the result by
all constraints associated with the component objectives.

Conflicting Objectives
With conflicting objectives, land can be allocated to one objective but not more than one (although hybrid models might
combine complementary and conflicting objectives). As was indicated earlier, one possible solution lies with a prioritiza-
tion of objectives (Rosenthal, 1985). After the objectives have been ordered according to priority, the needs of higher pri-
ority objectives are satisfied (through rank ordering of cells and reclassification to meet areal goals) before those of lower
priority ones. This is done by successively satisfying the needs of higher priority objectives and then removing (as a new
constraint) areas taken by that objective from consideration by all remaining objectives. A prioritized solution is easily
achieved with the use of the RANK, RECLASS and OVERLAY modules in IDRISI. However, instances are rare where a
prioritized solution makes sense. More often a compromise solution is required.
As noted earlier, compromise solutions to the multi-objective problem have most commonly been approached through
the use of mathematical programming tools outside GIS (e.g., Diamond and Wright, 1988; Janssen and Rietveld, 1990;
Campbell, et. al., 1992). Mathematical programming solutions (such as linear or integer programming) can work quite well
in instances where only a small number of alternatives are being addressed. However, in the case of raster GIS, the mas-
sive data sets involved will typically exceed present-day computing power. In addition, the concepts and methodology of
linear and integer programming are not particularly approachable to a broad range of decision makers. As a result, we
have sought a solution to the problem of multi-objective land allocation under conditions of conflicting objectives such
that large raster datasets may be handled using procedures that have an immediate intuitive appeal.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 142

The procedure we have developed is an extension of the decision heuristic used for the allocation of land with single
objective problems. This is best illustrated by the diagram in Figure 6a. Each of the suitability maps may be thought of as
an axis in a multi-dimensional space. Here we consider only two objectives for purposes of simple explanation. However,
any number of objectives can be used.

255 255
conflict- Ideal point for -
non-conflict region desired by Objective 2
allocated to obj. 2 both

non-conflict
region
Objective 2

Objective 2
allocated
unsuitable to obj. 1
choices

Ideal point for

Objective 1
0 0
0 255 0 255
Objective 1 Objective 1

Figure 6a Figure 6b

Every raster cell in the image can be located within this decision space according to its suitability level on each of the
objectives. To find the best x hectares of land for Objective 1, we simply need to move a decision line down from the top
(i.e., far right) of the Objective 1 suitability axis until enough of the best raster cells are captured to meet our area target.
We can do the same with the Objective 2 suitability axis to capture the best y hectares of land for it. As can be seen in Fig-
ure 6a, this partitions the decision space into four regions—areas best for Objective 1 and not suitable for Objective 2,
areas best for Objective 2 and not suitable for Objective 1, areas not suitable for either, and areas judged best for both.
The latter represents areas of conflict.
To resolve these areas of conflict, a simple partitioning of the affected cells is used. As can be seen in Figure 6b, the deci-
sion space can also be partitioned into two further regions: those closer to the ideal point for Objective 1 and those closer
to that for Objective 2. The ideal point represents the best possible case—a cell that is maximally suited for one objective
and minimally suited for anything else. To resolve the conflict zone, the line that divides these two regions is overlaid onto
it and cells are then allocated to their closest ideal point. Since the conflict region will be divided between the objectives,
both objectives will be short on achieving their area goals. As a result, the process will be repeated with the decision lines
being lowered for both objectives to gain more territory. The process of resolving conflicts and lowering the decision lines
is iteratively repeated until the exact area targets are achieved.
It should be noted that a 45-degree line between a pair of objectives assumes that they are given equal weight in the reso-
lution of conflicts. However, unequal weighting can be given. Unequal weighting has the effect of changing the angle of
this dividing line. In fact, the tangent of that angle is equal to the ratio of the weights assigned to those objectives.
It should also be noted that just as it was necessary to standardize criteria for multi-criteria evaluation, it is also required
for multi-objective evaluation. The process involves a matching of the histograms for the two suitability maps. In cases
where the distributions are normal, conversion to standard scores (using the module named STANDARD) would seem
appropriate. However, in many cases, the distributions are not normal. In these cases, the matching of histograms is most
easily achieved by a non-parametric technique known as histogram equalization. This is a standard option in many image
processing systems such as IDRISI. However, it is also the case that the ranked suitability maps produced by the RANK
module are also histogram equalized (i.e., a histogram of a rank map is uniform). This is fortuitous since the logic outlined
in Figure 12-6a is best achieved by reclassification of ranked suitability maps.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 143

As a result of the above considerations, the module named MOLA (Multi-Objective Land Allocation) was developed to
undertake the compromise solution to the multi-objective problem. MOLA requires the names of the objectives and their
relative weights, the names of the ranked suitability maps for each, and the areas that should be allocated to each. It then
iteratively reclassifies the ranked suitability maps to perform a first stage allocation, checks for conflicts, and then allocates
conflicts based on a minimum-distance-to-ideal-point rule using the weighted ranks.

A Worked Example
To illustrate these multi-criteria/multi-objective procedures, we will consider the following example of developing a zon-
ing map to regulate expansion of the carpet industry (one of the largest and most rapidly growing industries in Nepal)
within agricultural areas of the Kathmandu Valley of Nepal. The problem is to zone 1500 hectares of current agricultural
land outside the ring road of Kathmandu for further expansion of the carpet industry. In addition, 6000 hectares will be
zoned for special protection of agriculture. The problem clearly falls into the realm of multi-objective/multi-criteria deci-
sion problems. In this case, we have two objectives: to protect lands that are best for agriculture, and at the same time find
other lands that are best suited for the carpet industry. Since land can be allocated to only one of these uses at any one
time, the objectives must be viewed as conflicting (i.e., they may potentially compete for the same lands). Furthermore,
the evaluation of each of these objectives can be seen to require multiple criteria.
In the illustration that follows, a solution to the multi-objective/multi-criteria problem is presented as developed with a
group of Nepalese government officials as part of an advanced seminar in GIS.7 While the scenario was developed purely
for the purpose of demonstrating the techniques used, and while the result does not represent an actual policy decision, it
is one that incorporates substantial field work and the perspectives of knowledgeable decision makers. The procedure fol-
lows a logic in which each of the two objectives is first dealt with as a separate multi-criteria evaluation problem. The
result consists of two separate suitability maps (one for each objective) which are then compared to arrive at a single solu-
tion that balances the needs of the two competing objectives.

1. Solving the Single Objective Multi-Criteria Evaluations

1.1 Establishing the Criteria: Factors and Constraints
The decision making group identified five factors as being relevant to the siting of the carpet industry: proximity to water
(for use in dyeing and the washing of carpets), proximity to roads (to minimize road construction costs), proximity to
power, proximity to the market, and slope gradient. For agriculture they identified three of the same factors: proximity to
water (for irrigation), proximity to market, and slope gradient, as well as a fourth factor, soil capability. In both cases, they
identified the same constraints: the allocation would be limited to areas outside the ring road surrounding Kathmandu,
land currently in some form of agricultural use, and slope gradients less than 100%. For factor images, distance to water,
road and power lines was calculated based on the physical distance, and the proximity to market was developed as a cost
distance surface (accounting for variable road class frictions).

1.2 Standardizing the Factors

Each of the constraints was developed as a Boolean map while the factors were standardized using the module FUZZY
so that the results represent fuzzy membership in the decision set. For example, for the carpet industry allocation, the
proximity to water factor map was standardized using a sigmoidal monitonically decreasing fuzzy membership function with
control points at 10 and 700 meters. Thus, areas less than 10 meters were assigned a set membership of 255 (on a scale
from 0-255), those between 10 and 700 meters were assigned a value which progressively decreased from 255 to 0 in the

7. The seminar was hosted by UNITAR at the International Center for Integrated Mountain Development (ICIMOD) in Nepal, September 28-October
2, 1992.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 144

manner of an s-shaped curve, and those beyond 700 meters to a river were considered to be too far away (i.e., they were
assigned a value of 0). Figure 7 illustrates the standardized results of all five factors and the constraints for the carpet
industry allocation.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 145

 Proximity to
Water Factor

Proximity to
Roads Factor

Slope Gradient
Factor

Proximity to
Power Factor

0 Factor Suitability Scale 255

Proximity to Mar-
ket Factor

Current
Landuse
Constraint

Ring Road
Constraint

Figure 7 Carpet Industry Factors and Constraints.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 146

1.3 Establishing the Factor Weights
The next stage was to establish a set of weights for each of the factors. In the nature of a focus group, the GIS analyst
worked with the decision makers as a group to fill out a pairwise comparison matrix. Each decision maker was asked in
turn to estimate a rating and then to indicate why he or she assigned the rating. The group would then be asked if they
agreed. Further discussion would ensue, often with suggestions for different ratings. Ultimately, if another person made a
strong case for a different rating that seemed to have broad support, the original person who provided the rating would be
asked if he/she were willing to change (the final decision would in fact rest with the original rater). Consensus was not dif-
ficult to achieve using this procedure. It has been found through repeated experimentation with this technique that the
only cases where strong disagreement arose were cases in which a new variable was eventually identified as needing to be
incorporated. This is perhaps the greatest value of the pairwise comparison technique—it is very effective in uncovering
overlooked criteria and reaching a consensus on weights through direct participation by decision makers.
Once the pairwise comparison matrices were filled, the WEIGHT module was used to identify inconsistencies and
develop the best fit weights. Figure 8 shows the factor weights evaluated for the suitability for carpet industry develop-
ment.

Factor Factor
Weight

Proximity to Water 0.51

Proximity to Roads 0.05

Proximity to Power 0.25

Accessibility to Market 0.16

Low Slopes 0.03

Figure 8

1.4 Undertaking the Multi-Criteria Evaluation

Once the weights were established, the module MCE (for Multi-Criteria Evaluation) was used to combine the factors and
constraints in the form of a weighted linear combination (WLC option). The procedure is optimized for speed and has
the effect of multiplying each factor by its weight, adding the results and then successively multiplying the result by each
of the constraints. Since the weights sum to 1.0, the resulting suitability maps have a range from 0-255. Figure 9 shows the
result of separate multi-criteria evaluations to derive suitability maps for the carpet and agricultural industries.

Figure 9 Composite Suitability images for Carpet Industry (left) and Agriculture (right).
Suitability scale corresponds to that in Figure 7.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 147

2. Solving the Multi-Objective Land Allocation Problem
Once the multi-criteria suitability maps have been created for each objective, the multi-objective decision problem can be
approached.

2.1 Standardizing the Single-Objective Suitability Maps

The first step was to use the RANK module to rank order the cells in each of the two suitability maps. This prepares the
data for use with the MOLA procedure and has the additional effect of standardizing the suitability maps using a non-
parametric histogram equalization technique. Ranks were developed in descending order (i.e., the best rank was 1). In
both cases tied ranks were resolved by examining the other suitability map and ranking in reverse order to the suitability
on that map. This preserves the basic logic of the uncorrelated ideal points for conflicting objectives that is used in the
resolution of conflicts.

2.2 Solving the Multi-Objective Problem

The second step was to submit the ranked suitability maps to the MOLA procedure. MOLA requires the names of the
objectives, the relative weight to assign to each, and the area to be allocated to each. The module then undertakes the iter-
ative procedure of allocating the best ranked cells to each objective according to the areal goals, looking for conflicts, and
resolving conflicts based on the weighed minimum-distance-to-ideal-point logic. Figure 10 shows the final result, achieved
after 6 iterations.

Figure 10 Final allocation to the carpet industry (red) and agriculture (green) objectives.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 148

The Multi-Criteria/Multi-Objective Decision Support
Wizard
The Decision Support Wizard (i.e., a set of linked dialogs) helps guide users through multi-criteria/multi-objective
resource allocation procedures like those illustrated above. The Wizard steps the user through each phase of building the
full model and records the decision rules in a file that can be saved and later modified. A special section of the Help Sys-
tem provides additional information for each Wizard screen. Novice users will find the Wizard helpful in organizing their
progress through the sequence of steps, while advanced users will appreciate the ability to save a full MCE/MOLA model
that can be altered and run repeatedly to produce alternative final allocations. The Wizard is launched from the Analysis/
Decision Support menu.

A Closing Comment
The decision support tools provided in IDRISI are still under active development. We therefore welcome written com-
ments and observations to further improve the modules and enhance their application in real-world situations.

References / Further Reading

Alonso, W., 1968. Predicting Best with Imperfect Data, Journal of the American Institute of Planners, 34: 248-255.
Carver, S.J., 1991. Integrating Multi-Criteria Evaluation with Geographical Information Systems, International Journal of
Geographical Information Systems 5(3): 321-339.
Campbell, J.C., Radke, J., Gless, J.T. and Wirtshafter, R.M., 1992. An Application of Linear Programming and Geographic
Information Systems: Cropland Allocation in Antigua, Environment and Planning A, 24: 535-549.
Diamond, J.T. and Wright, J.R., 1988. Design of an Integrated Spatial Information System for Multiobjective Land-Use
Planning, Environment and Planning B: Planning and Design, 15: 205-214.
Diamond, J.T. and Wright, J.R., 1989. Efficient Land Allocation, Journal of Urban Planning and Development, 115(2): 81-96.
Eastman, J.R., 1996. Uncertainty and Decision Risk in Multi-Criteria Evaluation: Implications for GIS Software Design,
Proceedings, UN University International Institute for Software Technology Expert Group Workshop on Software Technology for
Agenda'21: Decision Support Systems, Febuary 26-March 8.
Eastman, J.R., and Jiang, H., 1996. Fuzzy Measures in Multi-Criteria Evaluation, Proceedings, Second International Symposium
on Spatial Accuracy Assessment in Natural Resources and Environmental Studies, May 21-23, Fort Collins, Colorado, 527-534.
Eastman, J.R., Jin, W., Kyem, P.A.K., and Toledano, J., 1995. Raster Procedures for Multi-Criteria/Multi-Objective Deci-
sions, Photogrammetric Engineering and Remote Sensing, 61(5): 539-547.
Eastman, J.R., Kyem, P.A.K., and Toledano, J., 1993. A Procedure for Multi-Objective Decision Making in GIS Under
Conditions of Competing Objectives, Proceedings, EGIS'93, 438-447.
Eastman, J.R., Kyem, P.A.K., Toledano, J. and Jin, W., 1993. GIS and Decision Making, Explorations in Geographic Infor-
mation System Technology, 4, UNITAR, Geneva.
FAO, 1976. A Framework for Land Evaluation, Soils Bulletin 32. Food and Agricultural Organization of the United Nations,
Rome.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 149

Feiring, B.R., 1986. Linear Programming: An Introduction, Quantitative Applications in the Social Sciences, Vol. 60, Sage Publi-
cations, London.
Honea, R.B., Hake, K.A., and Durfee, R.C., 1991. Incorporating GISs into Decision Support Systems: Where Have We
Come From and Where Do We Need to Go? In: M. Heit abd A. Shortreid (eds.), GIS Applications in Natural Resources. GIS
World, Inc., Fort Collins, Colorado.
Ignizio, J.P., 1985. Introduction to Linear Goal Programming, Quantitative Applications in the Social Sciences, Vol. 56, Sage
Publications, London.
Janssen, R. and Rietveld, P., 1990. Multicriteria Analysis and Geographical Information Systems: An Application to Agri-
cultural Land Use in the Netherlands. In: H.J. Scholten and J.C.H. Stillwell, (eds.), Geographical Information Systems for Urban
and Regional Planning: 129-139. Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht, The Netherlands.
Rao, M., Sastry, S.V.C., Yadar, P.D., Kharod, K., Pathan, S.K., Dhinwa, P.S., Majumdar, K.L., Sampat Kumar, D., Patkar,
V.N. and Phatak, V.K., 1991. A Weighted Index Model for Urban Suitability Assessment—A GIS Approach. Bombay Metropoli-
tan Regional Development Authority, Bombay, India.
Rosenthal, R.E., 1985. Concepts, Theory and Techniques: Principals of Multiobjective Optimization. Decision Sciences,
16(2): 133-152.
Saaty, T.L., 1977. A Scaling Method for Priorities in Hierarchical Structures. J. Math. Psychology, 15: 234-281.
Voogd, H., 1983. Multicriteria Evaluation for Urban and Regional Planning. Pion, Ltd., London.
Wright, J., ReVelle, C. and Cohon, J., 1983. A Multiobjective Integer Programming Model for the Land Acquisition Prob-
lem. Regional Science and Urban Economics, 13: 31-53.
Zadeh, L.A., 1965. Fuzzy Sets. Information and Control, 8: 338-353.

Chapter 13 Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis 150

Decision Support: Uncertainty Management
Uncertainty is inevitable in the decision making process. In the GIS community, the issue of uncertainty has received a
considerable amount of interest (see Goodchild and Gopal, 1989), however, attention has focused particularly on mea-
surement error: the expression of error (Burrough, 1986; Lee et. al., 1987; Maling, 1989; Stoms, 1987), error assessment
(Congalton, 1991), error propagation (Burrough, 1986), and the reporting of data quality (Moellering et. al., 1988; Slo-
necker and Tosta, 1992). There has also been considerable interest in other forms of uncertainty such as that expressed by
fuzzy sets (e.g., Fisher, 1991). However, there has been less attention paid to how these uncertainties combine to affect the
decision process and decision risk.
As the field becomes more conversant in the understanding and handling of uncertainty and its relationship to decision
risk, it is inevitable that we will see a movement of GIS away from the hard decisions of traditional GIS (where it is
assumed that the database and models are perfect) to procedures dominated by soft decisions. Given a knowledge of
uncertainties in the database and uncertainties in the decision rule, it is possible to change the hard Boolean results of tra-
ditional GIS decisions into soft probabilistic results—to talk not of whether an area does or does not have a problem with
soil erosion, but of the likelihood that it has a problem with soil erosion; not of whether an area is suitable or not for land
allocation, but of the degree to which it is suitable. This would then allow a final hard decision to be developed based on
the level of risk one is willing to assume. Thus, for example, one might decide to send an agricultural extension team to
visit only those farms where the likelihood (or possibility) of a soil erosion problem exceeds 70%.
The movement to soft decision rules will require, in part, the development of uncertainty management capabilities in GIS.
It requires data structures to carry uncertainty information and a revision of existing routines to assess and propagate
error information. It also requires new procedures for analyzing different kinds of uncertainty and their effects on deci-
sion making. In IDRISI, a variety of procedures are available for this task.

A Typology of Uncertainty
Uncertainty includes any known or unknown error, ambiguity or variation in both the database and the decision rule.
Thus, uncertainty may arise from such elements as measurement error, inherent variability, instability, conceptual ambigu-
ity, over-abstraction, or simple ignorance of important model parameters.
Considering the decision making process as a set membership problem is a useful perspective from which to understand
the source and role of uncertainty in decision making. As previously defined, a decision frame contains all the alternatives (or
hypotheses) under consideration, and evidence is that information through which set membership of a location in the deci-
sion set (the set of chosen alternatives) can be evaluated. Thus, the decision making process contains three basic elements
within which uncertainty can occur—the evidence, the decision set, and the relation that associates the two.

Uncertainty in the Evidence

In examining evidence to decide which elements of the candidate set belong to the set of alternatives to be chosen (the
decision set), one evaluates the qualities and characteristics of those entities as represented in the database. However, there
is a significant concern here with measurement error and how it propagates through a decision rule. This kind of uncer-
tainty is usually represented by an RMS (root mean square) error in the case of quantitative data, or proportional error in
the case of qualitative data, and relies upon classical probability theory and statistical inference for its assessment and
propagation.

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 151

Uncertainty in the Relation
The second basic element of a decision is the specification of the relationship between the evidence and the decision set.
Uncertainty arises here from at least three sources.
1. The first is in cases where the definition of a criterion (as opposed to its measurement) is subject to uncertainty. Sets with
clearly defined attributes are known as crisp sets and are subject to the logic of classical sets. Thus, for example, the set of
areas that would be inundated by a rise in sea level is clearly defined. Disregarding measurement error, if an area is lower
than the projected level of the sea, it is unambiguously a member of the set. However, not all sets are so clearly defined.
Consider, for example, the set of areas with steep slopes. What constitutes a steep slope? If we specify that a slope is steep
if it has a gradient of 10% or more, does this mean that a slope of 9.99999% is not steep? Clearly there is no sharp bound-
ary here. Such sets are called fuzzy sets (Zadeh, 1965) and are typically defined by a set membership function, as will be
discussed further below. Although recognition of the concept of fuzzy sets is somewhat new in GIS, it is increasingly clear
that such sets are prevalent (if not dominant) in land allocation decisions.
2. The second case where uncertainty arises is in cases where the evidence does not directly and perfectly imply the deci-
sion set under consideration. In the examples of inundated lands or steep slopes, there is a direct relationship between the
evidence and the set under consideration. However, there are also cases where only indirect and imperfect evidence can
be cited. For example, we may have knowledge that water bodies absorb infrared radiation. Thus we might use the evi-
dence of low infrared reflectance in a remotely sensed image as a statement of the belief that the area is occupied by deep
open water. However, this is only a belief since other materials also absorb infrared radiation.
Statements of belief in the degree to which evidence implies set membership are very similar in character to fuzzy set
membership functions. However, they are not definitions of the set itself, but simply statements of the degree to which
the evidence suggests the presence of the set (however defined). Thus the logic of fuzzy sets is not appropriate here, but
rather, that of Bayes and Dempster-Shafer theory.
3. The third area where uncertainty can occur in specifying the relation between the evidence and the decision set is most
often called model specification error (Alonso, 1968). In some instances, decisions may be based on a single criterion, but
commonly several criteria are required to define the decision set. Thus, for example, one might define areas suitable for
development as being those on shallow slopes and near to roads. Two issues here would be of concern: are these criteria
adequate to define suitable areas, and have we properly aggregated the evidence from these criteria? If set membership
indicated by slopes is 0.6 and proximity to roads is 0.7, what is the membership in the decision set? Is it the 0.42 of prob-
abilities, the 0.6 of fuzzy sets, the 0.78 of Bayes, the 0.88 of Dempster-Shafer, or the 0.65 of linear combination? Further,
how well does this aggregated value truly predict the degree to which the alternative under consideration truly belongs to
the decision set? Clearly the construction of the decision rule can have an enormous impact on the set membership value
deduced.

Uncertainty in the Decision Set

The final area of concern with respect to uncertainty in the decision process concerns the final set deduced. As outlined
above, the process of developing the decision set consists of converting the evidence for each criterion into an elementary
set statement, and then aggregating those statements into a single outcome that incorporates all of the criteria considered.
Clearly, uncertainty here is some aggregate of the uncertainties which arose in acquiring the evidence and in specifying the
relationship between that evidence and the decision set. However, in the presence of uncertainty about the degree to
which any candidate belongs to the final set (as a result of the evidence gathered or its implications about set member-
ship), some further action is required in order to develop the final set—a threshold of uncertainty will need to be estab-
lished to determine which alternatives will be judged to belong to the decision set. To do so thus logically implies some
likelihood that the decision made will be wrong—a concept that can best be described as decision risk. For example, given a
group of locations for which the likelihood of being below a projected new sea level has been assessed, the final decision
about which locations will be assumed to ultimately flood will be solved by establishing a threshold of likelihood. Clearly
this threshold is best set in the context of decision risk.

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 152

In the remainder of this chapter, a set of tools in IDRISI will be explored for the management of uncertainty that arises in
the evidence (database uncertainty) and in specifying the relation between that evidence and the decision set (decision rule
uncertainty). In addition, in each of these two sections, consideration will be given to the problem of making a definitive
judgment in the context of uncertainty, and thus the accommodation of decision risk.

Database Uncertainty and Decision Risk

An assessment of measurement error and an analysis of its propagation through data models combining different data
layers is an essential aspect of uncertainty management. In this section, we examine procedures available in IDRISI for
error assessment and propagation, and very importantly, procedures for evaluating the effects of this error on the decision
process through a consideration of decision risk.

Error Assessment
The assessment of measurement error is normally achieved by selecting a sample of sites to visit on the ground, remeasur-
ing the attribute at those locations using some more accurate instrument, and then comparing the new measurements to
those in the data layer. To assist this procedure, IDRISI provides the SAMPLE and ERRMAT modules.
SAMPLE has the ability to lay out a sample of points (in vector format) according to a random, systematic or stratified
random scheme. The latter is usually preferred since it combines the best qualities of the other two—the unbiased charac-
ter of the random sampling scheme with the even geographic coverage of the systematic scheme.
The size of the sample (n) to be used is determined by multiplying an estimate of the standard error of the evaluation sta-
tistic being calculated by the square of the standard score (z) required for the desired level of confidence (e.g., 1.96 for
95% confidence), and dividing the result by the square of the desired confidence interval (e) (e.g., 0.01 for ±10%). For esti-
mates of the sample size required for estimating an RMS error, this formula simplifies to:
n = z2 s2 / 2e2 where s is the estimated RMS.
For estimates of the proportional error in categorical data, the formula becomes:
n = z2 pq / e2 where p is the estimated proportional error and q = (1-p).
Note that the term stratified in stratified random means that it is spatially stratified according to a systematic division of the
area into rectangular regions. In cases where some other stratification is desired, and/or where the region to be sampled is
not rectangular in shape, the following procedure can be used:
1. Determine the area of the stratum or irregular region using the AREA module and divide it by the area of the total
image. This will indicate the proportional area of the stratum or irregular region.
2. Divide the desired sample size by the proportional area. This will indicate a new (and larger) sample size that will be
required to ensure that the desired number of sample points will fall within the area of interest.
3. Run SAMPLE with the new sample size and use only those points that fall within the area of interest.
Once the ground truth has been undertaken at the sample points, the characteristic error can be assessed. In the case of
assessing quantitative data using RMS, the standard formula for RMS derived from a sample can be used:

Σ ( xi – t )
RMS = --------------------
n–1
where xi = a measurement
t = true value

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 153

However, in the case of qualitative data, an error matrix should be used to assess the relationship between mapped catego-
ries and true values. To facilitate this process, the ERRMAT module can be used. ERRMAT requires two input files: the
original categorical image (e.g., a landuse map) and a second image containing the true categories. This truth map is typi-
cally in the form of a map dominated by zeros (the background) with isolated cells indicating the positions of sample
points with their true values. Using these data, ERRMAT outputs an error matrix and summary statistics.
The error matrix produced by ERRMAT contains a tabulation of the number of sample points found in each possible
combination of true and mapped categories. Figure 1 illustrates the basic error matrix output. As can be seen, tabulations
along the diagonal represent cases where the mapped category matched the true value. Off-diagonal tabulations represent
errors and are tabulated as totals in the margins. The error marginals represent the proportional error by category, with
the total proportional error appearing in the bottom-right corner of the table. Proportional errors along the bottom of the
graph are called errors of omission while those along the right-hand edge are called errors of commission. The former represents
cases where sample points of a particular category were found to be mapped as something different, while the latter
includes cases where locations mapped as a particular category were found to be truly something else. Careful analysis of
these data allows not only an assessment of the amount of error, but also of where it occurs and how it might be reme-
died. For example, it is typical to look at errors of omission as a basis for judging the adequacy of the mapping, and the
errors of commission as a means of determining how to fix the map to increase the accuracy.

True

Conifers Mixed Deciduous Water Total error

Conifers 24 0 0 3 27 0.11

Mixed 3 36 16 0 55 0.35 errors of

Mapped Deciduous 0 0 28 0 28 0.00 commission

Water 2 0 0 14 16 0.12

Total 29 36 44 17 126

error 0.17 0.00 0.36 0.18 0.19

errors of omission

Figure 1 An Error Matrix

In addition to the basic error matrix, ERRMAT also reports the overall and per category Kappa Index of Agreement
(KIA) values. The Kappa Index of Agreement is similar to a proportional accuracy figure (and thus the complement of
proportional error), except that it adjusts for chance agreement.

Error Propagation
When uncertainty exists in data layers, that error will propagate through any analysis and combine with the error from
other sources. Specific formulas do exist for the expected error propagation arising from typical GIS mathematical opera-
tions (such as those involved with SCALAR and OVERLAY). Appendix 1 contains a representative set of such formulae.
In addition, IDRISI contains two modules that under certain circumstances will propagate error information automati-
cally using such procedures. The first is the MCE module described earlier in this chapter while the second is SURFACE.
If all of the input factors presented to MCE contain error (RMS) information in the value error field of their documenta-
tion files, MCE will determine the propagated output error and place it in the documentation file of the result. However,

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 154

bear in mind that it makes two large assumptions—first, that there is no correlation between the factors, and second, that
there is no uncertainty in the weights since that uncertainty has been resolved through deriving a consensus. If these
assumptions are not valid, a new assessment should be derived using a Monte Carlo procedure as described further below.
In the case of SURFACE, error information will also be propagated when deriving slopes from a digital elevation model
where the RMS error has been entered in the value error field of its documentation file.
Despite the availability of propagation formulas, it is generally difficult to apply this approach to error propagation
because:
1. propagation is strongly affected by intercorrelation between variables and the correlation may not always be known at
the outset;
2. only a limited number of formulas are currently available, and many GIS operations have unknown propagation charac-
teristics.
As a result, we have provided in IDRISI the tools for a more general approach called Monte Carlo Simulation.

Monte Carlo Simulation

In the analysis of propagation error through Monte Carlo Simulation, we simulate the effects of error in each of the data
layers to assess how it propagates through the analysis. In practice, the analysis is run twice—first in the normal fashion,
and then a second time using data layers containing the simulated error. By comparing the two results, the effects of the
error can be gauged—the only reason they differ is because of the error introduced. Typically, HISTO would be used to
examine the distribution of these errors as portrayed in a difference image produced with OVERLAY. With a normally
distributed result, the standard deviation of this difference image can be used as a good indicator of the final RMS.1
The tool that is used to introduce the simulated error is RANDOM. RANDOM creates images with random values
according to any of a rectilinear, normal or lognormal model. For normal and lognormal distribution, the RMS error can
be either one uniform value for the entire image, or be defined by an image that has spatially varied values. For categorical
data, the rectilinear model outputs integer values that can be used as category codes. For quantitative data, all models can
generate real numbers. For example, to add simulated error for a digital elevation model with an RMS error of 3 meters,
RANDOM would be used to generate a surface using a normal model with a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 3.
This image would then be added to the digital elevation model. Note that the result is not meant to have any specific claim
to reality—just that it contains error of the same nature as that believed to exist in the original.

Database Uncertainty and Decision Risk

Given an estimate of measurement error and an analysis of how it has propagated through the decision rule, the PCLASS
module can be used to determine a final decision in full recognition of the decision risk that these uncertainties present.
PCLASS evaluates the likelihood that the data value in any raster cell exceeds or is exceeded by a specified threshold.
PCLASS assumes a random model of measurement error, characterized by a Root Mean Square (RMS) error statement.
In the IDRISI system, the metadata for each raster image contains a field where error in the attribute values can be stated,
either as an RMS for quantitative data, or as a proportional error for quantitative data. PCLASS uses the RMS recorded
for a quantitative image to evaluate the probability that each value in the image lies either above or below a specified
threshold. It does so by measuring the area delineated by that threshold under a normal curve with a standard deviation
equal to the RMS (Figure 2). The result is a probability map as is illustrated in Figure 13-3, expressing the likelihood that

1. Monte Carlo Simulation relies upon the use of a very large set of simulations to derive its characterizations. In cases such as this where each cell pro-
vides a new simulation, the total composite of cells can provide such a large sample. Results are improved by repeated runs of such an analysis and an
averaging of results.

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 155

each area belongs to the decision set.

True
Value
Distribution of Threshold
f measurements about
the true value
Probability that the
value exceeds the
threshold

RMS

Figure 2

With PCLASS we have the soft equivalent of a hard RECLASS operation. For example, consider the case of finding areas
that will be inundated by a rise in sea level as a result of global warming. Traditionally, this would be evaluated by reclassi-
fying the heights in a digital elevation model into two groups—those below the projected sea level and those above. With
PCLASS, however, recognition is made of the inherent error in the measurement of heights so that the output map is not
a hard Boolean map of zeros and ones, but a soft probability map that ranges continuously from zero to one. Figure 3, for
example, illustrates the output from PCLASS after evaluating the probability that heights are less than a new projected sea
level of 1.9 meters above the current level in Boston Harbor in the USA. Given this continuous probability map, a final
decision can be made by reclassifying the probability map according to the level of decision risk one is willing to assume.
Figures 4 and 5, for example, show the difference between the original coastline and that associated with the new sea level
while accepting only a 5% chance of being wrong compared to that of accepting a 25% chance. Clearly, the Digital Eleva-
tion Model (DEM) used in this assessment is not very precise. However, this illustrates the fact that even poor data can be
used effectively if we know how poor they are.

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 156

.

Flood zone Flood zone at

25% risk

Figure 3 Probability of being Figure 4 Flood zone at 5% risk. Figure 5 Flood zone at 25% risk.
flooded.

Decision Rule Uncertainty

In the Typology of Uncertainty presented earlier, the second major element of uncertainty that was identified (after measure-
ment error) was that in specifying the relationship between the evidence and the final decision set—an aspect that can
broadly be termed decision rule uncertainty. This is an area where much further research is required. However, the IDRISI
system does include an extensive set of tools to facilitate the assessment and propagation (or aggregation in this context)
of this form of uncertainty.
All of these tools are concerned with the uncertainty inherent in establishing whether an entity belongs in the final deci-
sion set, and thus fall into a general category of uncertain set membership expression, known as a fuzzy measure. The term
fuzzy measure (not to be confused with the more specific instance of a fuzzy set) refers to any set function which is mono-
tonic with respect to set membership (Dubois and Prade, 1982). Notable examples of fuzzy measures include Bayesian
probabilities, the beliefs and plausibilities of Dempster-Shafer theory, and the possibilities of fuzzy sets.
A common trait of fuzzy measures is that they follow DeMorgan's Law in the construction of the intersection and union
operators (Bonissone and Decker, 1986), and thereby, the basic rules of uncertainty propagation in the aggregation of evi-
dence. DeMorgan's Law establishes a triangular relationship between the intersection, union and negation operators such
that:
T(a , b) = ~ S(~a , ~b)
where T = Intersection (AND)= T-Norm
and S =union (OR) = T-CoNorm
and ~ = Negation (NOT)
The intersection operators in this context are known as triangular norms, or simply T-Norms, while the union operators are
known as triangular co-norms, or T-CoNorms.
A T-Norm can be defined as (Yager, 1988):

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 157

 a mapping T: [0,1] * [0,1] -> [0,1] such that :
T(a,b) = T(b,a) (commutative)
T(a,b) >= T(c,d) if a >= c and b >= d (monotonic)
T(a,T(b,c)) = T(T(a,b),c) (associative)
T(1,a) = a
Some examples of T-Norms include:
min(a,b) (the intersection operator of fuzzy sets)
a*b (the intersection operator of probabilities)
1 - min(1,((1-a)p + (1-b)p )(1/p)) (for p≥1)
max(0,a+b-1)
Conversely, a T-CoNorm is defined as:
a mapping S: [0,1] * [0,1] -> [0,1] such that :
S(a,b) = S(b,a) (commutative)
S(a,b) ≥ S(c,d) if a ≥ c and b ≥ d (monotonic)
S(a,S(b,c)) = S(S(a,b),c) (associative)
S(0,a) = a
Some examples of T-CoNorms include:
max(a,b) (the union operator of fuzzy sets)
a + b - a*b (the union operator of probabilities)
p p (1/p)
min(1,(a + b ) ) (for p≥1)
min(1,a+b)
These examples show that a very wide range of operations are available for fuzzy measure aggregation, and therefore, cri-
teria aggregation in decision making processes. Among the different operators, the most extreme (in the sense that they
yield the most extreme numeric results upon aggregation) are the minimum T-Norm operator and the maximum T-
CoNorm operator. These operators also have special significance as they are the most commonly used aggregation oper-
ators for fuzzy sets. Furthermore, they have been shown by Yager (1988) to represent the extreme ends of a continuum of
related aggregation operators that can be produced through the operation of an ordered weighted average. As was indi-
cated in the chapter Decision Support: Decision Strategy Analysis, this continuum also includes the traditional
weighted linear combination operator that is commonly encountered in GIS. However, the important issue here is not
that a particular family of aggregation operators is correct or better than another, but simply that different expressions of
decision rule uncertainty require different aggregation procedures.
Currently, three major logics are in use for the expression of decision rule uncertainty, all of which are represented in the
IDRISI module set: fuzzy set theory, Bayesian statistics, and Dempster-Shafer theory. Each is distinct, and has its own
very different set of T-Norm/T-CoNorm operators. However, the context in which one uses one as opposed to another
is not always clear. In part, this results from the fact that decision rules may involve more than one form of uncertainty.
However, this also results from a lack of research within the GIS field on the context in which each should be used. That
said, here are some general guidelines that can be used:

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 158

- Decision problems that can be cast in the framework of suitability mapping can effectively be handled by the logic of
fuzzy sets. This procedure has been covered in detail under the section on Multi-Criteria Evaluation in the chapter Deci-
sion Support: Decision Strategy Analysis. For example, if we define suitability in terms of a set of continuous factors
(distance from roads, slope, etc.), the expression of suitability is continuous. There is no clear separation between areas
that are suitable and those that are not. Many (if not most) GIS resource allocation problems fall into this category, and
thus belong in the realm of fuzzy sets.
- The presence of fuzziness, in the sense of ambiguity, does not always imply that the problem lies in the realm of fuzzy
sets. For example, measurement uncertainty associated with a crisp set can lead to a set membership function that is
essentially identical in character to that of a fuzzy set. Rather, the distinguishing characteristic of a fuzzy set is that the set
is itself inherently ambiguous. For example, if one considers the case of deciding on whether an area will be flooded as the
result of the construction of a dam, some uncertainty will exist because of error in the elevation model. If one assumes a
random error model, and spatial independence of errors, then a graph of the probability of being inundated against
reported height in the database will assume an s-shaped cumulative normal curve, much like the typical membership func-
tion of a fuzzy set. However, the set itself is not ambiguous—it is crisp. It is the measure of elevation that is in doubt.
- The presence of fuzziness, in the sense of inconclusiveness, generally falls into the realm of Bayesian probability theory or
its variant known as Dempster-Shafer theory. The problem here is that of indirect evidence—that the evidence at hand
does not allow one to directly assess set membership, but rather to infer it with some degree of uncertainty. In their pro-
totypical form, however, both logics are concerned with the substantiation of crisp sets—it is the strength of the relation-
ship between the evidence and the decision set that is in doubt. A classic example here is the case of the supervised
classification procedure in the analysis of remotely sensed imagery. Using training site data, a Bayesian classifier (i.e., deci-
sion engine) establishes a statistical relationship between evidence and the decision set (in the form of a conditional prob-
ability density function). It is this established, but uncertain, relationship that allows one to infer the degree of
membership of a pixel in the decision set.
- Despite their common heritage, the aggregation of evidence using Bayes and Dempster-Shafer can yield remarkably dif-
ferent results. The primary difference between the two is characterized by the role of the absence of evidence. Bayes con-
siders the absence of evidence in support of a particular hypothesis to therefore constitute evidence in support of
alternative hypotheses, whereas Dempster-Shafer does not. Thus, despite the fact that both consider the hypotheses in the
decision frame to be exhaustive, Dempster-Shafer recognizes the concept of ignorance while Bayes does not. A further
difference is that the Bayesian approach combines evidence that is conditioned upon the hypothesis in the decision set
(i.e., it is based on training data), while Dempster-Shafer theory aggregates evidence derived from independent sources.
Despite these broad guidelines, the complete implementation of these logics is often difficult because their theoretical
development has been restricted to prototypical contexts. For example, fuzzy set theory expresses ambiguity in set mem-
bership in the form of a membership function. However, it does not address the issue of uncertainty in the form of the
membership function itself. How, for example, does one aggregate evidence in the context of indirect evidence and an
ambiguous decision set? Clearly there is much to be learned here. As a start, the following section begins to address the
issues for each of these major forms for the expression of uncertainty.

Fuzzy Sets
Fuzzy sets are sets (or classes) without sharp boundaries; that is, the transition between membership and nonmembership
of a location in the set is gradual (Zadeh, 1965; Schmucker, 1982). A fuzzy set is characterized by a fuzzy membership
grade (also called a possibility) that ranges from 0.0 to 1.0, indicating a continuous increase from nonmembership to com-
plete membership. For example, in evaluating whether a slope is steep, we may define a fuzzy membership function such
that a slope of 10% has a membership of 0, and a slope of 25% has a membership of 1.0. Between 10% and 25%, the
fuzzy membership of a slope gradually increases on the scale from 0 to 1 (Figure 6). This contrasts with the classic crisp set
which has distinct boundaries. However, a crisp set can also be seen as a special case of fuzzy set where fuzzy membership
changes instantaneously from 0 or 1.

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 159

 1.0

possibility
0.5 Fuzzy Set

Crisp Set
0.0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
slope gradient (%)

Figure 6 Fuzzy vs. Crisp Set Membership Functions

Fuzzy set theory provides a rich mathematical basis for understanding decision problems and for constructing decision
rules in criteria evaluation and combination. In use, the FUZZY module in IDRISI is designed for the construction of
Fuzzy set membership functions, while the OWA option of the MCE module offers a range of appropriate aggregation
operators. FUZZY offers four types of membership function:
1. Sigmoidal: The sigmoidal ("s-shaped") membership function is perhaps the most commonly used function in fuzzy set
theory. It is produced here using a cosine function as described in the on-line Help System. In use, FUZZY requires the
positions (along the X axis) of 4 inflection points governing the shape of the curve. These are indicated in Figure 7 as points
a, b, c and d, and represent the inflection points as the membership function rises above 0, approaches 1, falls below 1
again, and finally approaches 0. The right-most function of Figure 7 shows all four inflection points as distinct. However,
this same function can take different forms. Figure 7 shows all possibilities. Beginning at the left, the monotonically increasing
function shape rises from 0 to 1 then never falls. The previously mentioned concept of steep slopes is a good example
here where the first inflection point a would be 10%, and the second b would be 25%. Since it never falls again, inflection
points c and d would be given the same value as b (FUZZY understands this convention). However, the FUZZY interface
facilitates data input in this case by requesting values only for inflection points a and b. The second curve of Figure 7
shows a monotonically decreasing function that begins at 1 then falls and stays at 0. In this case where the membership func-
tion starts at 1 and falls to 0 but never rises, a and b would be given identical values to c (the point at which it begins to
fall), and d would be given the value of the point at which it reaches 0. The FUZZY interface only requires inflection
points c and d for this type of function. The last two functions shown are termed symmetric as they rise then fall again. In
the case where the function rises and then immediately falls (the third curve in Figure 7), points b and c take on the same
value. Finally, where it rises, stays at 1 for a while, and then falls, all four values are distinct. In both cases, the FUZZY
interface requires input of all four inflection points. Note that there is no requirement of geometric symmetry for sym-
metric functions, only that the curve rise then fall again. It is quite likely that the shape of the curve between a and b and
that between c and d would be different, as illustrated in the right-most curve of Figure 7.
b,c,d a,b,c b,c b c

a d a d a d
Figure 7 Sigmoidal Membership Function

2. J-Shaped: The J-Shaped function is also quite common, although in most cases it would seem that a sigmoidal function
would be better. Figure 8 shows the different possibilities of J-shaped functions and the positions of the inflection points.
It should be pointed out that with the J-shaped function, the function approaches 0 but only reaches it at infinity. Thus the inflection points a

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 160

and d indicate the points at which the function reaches 0.5 rather than 0.

b,c,d a,b,c b,c b c

a d a d a d

Figure 8 J-Shaped Membership Function

3. Linear: Figure 9 shows the linear function and its variants, along with the position of the inflection points. This func-
tion is used extensively in electronic devices advertising fuzzy set logic, in part because of its simplicity, but also in part
because of the need to monitor output from essentially linear sensors.

b,c,d a,b,c b,c b c

a d a d a d

Figure 9 Linear Membership Function

4. User-defined: When the relationship between the value and fuzzy membership does not follow any of the above three
functions, the user-defined function is most applicable. An unlimited number of control points may be used in this func-
tion to define the fuzzy membership curve. The fuzzy membership between any two control points is linearly interpo-
lated, as in Figure 10.

control points

Figure 10 User-Defined Membership Function

In Multi-Criteria Evaluation, fuzzy set membership is used in the standardization of criteria. Exactly which function
should be used will depend on the understanding of the relationship between the criterion and the decision set, and on
the availability of information to infer fuzzy membership. In most cases, either the sigmoidal or linear functions will be
sufficient.

Bayesian Probability Theory

When complete information is available or assumed, the primary tool for the evaluation of the relationship between the
indirect evidence and the decision set is Bayesian Probability theory. Bayesian Probability theory is an extension of Classi-
cal Probability theory which allows us to combine new evidence about an hypothesis along with prior knowledge to arrive at
an estimate of the likelihood that the hypothesis is true. The basis for this is Bayes' Theorem which states that (in the
notation of probability theory):

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 161

 p(e h) ⋅ p(h)
where: p ( h e ) = ----------------------------------------
Σi p ( e hi ) ⋅ p ( hi )
p(h|e) = the probability of the hypothesis being true given the evidence (posterior probability)
p(e|h) = the probability of finding that evidence given the hypothesis being true
p(h) = the probability of the hypothesis being true regardless of the evidence (prior probability)
For those unfamiliar with probability theory, this formula may seem intimidating. However, it is actually quite simple. The
simplest case is when we have only two hypotheses to choose from—an hypothesis h and its complement ~h (that h is not
true), the probabilities of which are represented by p(h) and p(~h), respectively. For example, is an area going to be flooded
or is it not? The first question to consider is whether we have any prior knowledge that leads us to the probability that one
or the other is true. This is called an a priori probability. If we do not, then the hypotheses are assumed to be equally proba-
ble.
The term p(e|h) expresses the probability that we would find the evidence we have if the hypothesis being evaluated were
true. It is known as a conditional probability, and is assessed on the basis of finding areas in which we know the hypothesis
to be true and gathering data to evaluate the probability that the evidence we have is consistent with this hypothesis. We
will refer to this as ground truth data even though it may be assessed on theoretical grounds or by means of a simulation.
The term p(h|e) is a posterior probability created after prior knowledge and evidence for the hypothesis are combined. By
incorporating extra information about the hypotheses, the probability for each hypothesis is modified to reflect the new
information. It is the assumption of Bayes' Theorem that complete information is achievable, and thus the only reason
that we do not have an accurate probability assessment is a lack of evidence. By adding more evidence to the prior knowl-
edge, theoretically one could reach a true probability assessment for all the hypotheses.

Dempster-Shafer Theory
Dempster-Shafer theory, an extension of Bayesian probability theory, allows for the expression of ignorance in uncer-
tainty management (Gordon and Shortliffe, 1985; Lee et al., 1987). The basic assumptions of Dempster-Shafer theory are
that ignorance exists in the body of knowledge, and that belief for a hypothesis is not necessarily the complement of belief
for its negation.
First, Dempster-Shafer theory defines hypotheses in a hierarchical structure (Figure 13-11) developed from a basic set of
hypotheses that form the frame of discernment.2 For example, if the frame of discernment includes three basic hypotheses:
{A, B, C}, the structure of hypotheses for which Dempster-Shafer will accept evidence includes all possible combinations,
[A], [B], [C], [A, B], [A, C], [B, C], and [A, B, C]. The first three are called singleton hypotheses as each contains only one
basic element. The rest are non-singleton hypotheses containing more than one basic element. Dempster-Shafer recog-
nizes these hierarchical combinations because it often happens that the evidence we have supports some combinations of
hypotheses without the ability to further distinguish the subsets. For example, we may wish to include classes of [decidu-
ous] and [conifer] in a landcover classification, and find that evidence from a black and white aerial photograph can distin-

2. The frame of discernment in Dempster-Shafer theory has essentially the same meaning as the term decision frame as used in this paper—i.e., the set of alter-
native hypotheses or classes that can be substantiated or assigned to entities. Dempster-Shafer considers these hypotheses to be exhaustive. Thus, state-
ments of support for any hierarchical combination of classes represents a degree of inability to commit to one of the singleton hypotheses in the frame
of discernment. However, in practice, Dempster-Shafer does treat these hierarchical combinations as additional hypotheses. In addition, in a GIS and
Remote Sensing context, there may be good reason to treat some unresolvable commitment to one of these hierarchical combinations as truly evidence
of an independent class/hypothesis to which entities might be assigned. For example, with a frame of discernment that includes [forest] and [wetland],
the presence of commitment to a [forest wetland] combination may in fact represent the presence of a "forested wetland" class that cannot be resolved
by attaining better evidence. As a result, we recognize here that the analyst may wish to consider the decision frame as containing all of the hierarchical
combinations, and not just the more limited set of singletons that forms the Dempster-Shafer frame of discernment. This does not violate the logic of
Dempster-Shafer, since we are simply making the post-analysis judgement that certain combinations represent new classes and thus may form a decision
set.

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 162

guish forest from non-forested areas, but not the type of forest. In this case we may use this evidence as support for the
hierarchical combination [deciduous, coniferous]. Clearly this represents a statement of uncertainty. However, it also pro-
vides valuable information that will be used to advantage by the Dempster-Shafer procedure in any statement of belief
about these hypotheses.

[A,B,C]

[A,B] [A,C] [B,C]

[A] [B] [C]

Figure 11 Hierarchical Structure of the Subsets in the Whole Set [A,B,C]

In expressing commitment to any of these hypotheses, Dempster-Shafer theory recognizes six important concepts: basic
probability assignment (BPA), ignorance, belief, disbelief, plausibility, and belief interval.
A basic probability assignment (BPA) represents the support that a piece of evidence provides for one of these hypothe-
ses and not its proper subsets. Thus a BPA for [A, B] represents that mass of support for [A,B], but not [A] or [B]—i.e.,
that degree of support for some indistinguishable combination of [A] and [B]. This is usually symbolized with the letter
"m" (for mass), e.g.,:
m(A,B) = basic probability assignment to [A, B]
The basic probability assignment for a given hypothesis may be derived from subjective judgment or empirical data. Since
a BPA is a fuzzy measure, the FUZZY module can also be used in IDRISI to develop a BPA from a given data set.
The sum of all BPAs will equal 1.0 at all times. Thus, the BPA for the ultimate superset ([A, B, C] in this example) will
equal the complement of the sum of all other BPAs. This quantity thus represents ignorance—the inability to commit to
any degree of differentiation between the elements in the frame of discernment.
Belief represents the total support for an hypothesis, and will be drawn from the BPAs for all subsets of that hypothesis,
i.e.,:
BEL ( X ) = Σm ( Y ) when Y ⊆ X
Thus the belief in [A, B] will be calculated as the sum of the BPAs for [A, B], [A], and [B]. In this example, belief repre-
sents the probability that an entity is A or B. Note that in the case of singleton hypotheses, the basic probability assign-
ment and belief are identical.
In contrast to belief, plausibility represents the degree to which an hypothesis cannot be disbelieved. Unlike the case in
Bayesian probability theory, disbelief is not automatically the complement of belief, but rather, represents the degree of
support for all hypotheses that do not intersect with that hypothesis. Thus:
PL ( X ) = 1 – BEL ( X ) where X = not X
thus PL ( X ) = Σm ( Y ) when Y ∩ X ≠ φ

Interpreting these constructs, we can say that while belief represents the degree of hard evidence in support of an hypoth-
esis, plausibility indicates the degree to which the conditions appear to be right for that hypothesis, even though hard evi-
dence is lacking. For each hypothesis, then, belief is the lower boundary of our commitment to that hypothesis, and
plausibility represents the upper boundary. The range between the two is called the belief interval, and represents the degree
of uncertainty in establishing the presence or absence of that hypothesis. As a result, areas with a high belief interval are
those in which new evidence will supply the greatest degree of information. Dempster-Shafer is thus very useful in estab-
lishing the value of information and in designing a data gathering strategy that is most effective in reducing uncertainty.

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 163

Compared with Bayesian probability theory, it is apparent that Dempster-Shafer theory is better able to handle uncertainty
that involves ignorance. In Bayesian probability theory only singleton hypotheses are recognized and are assumed to be
exhaustive (i.e., they must sum to 1.0). Thus, ignorance is not recognized, and a lack of evidence for a hypothesis therefore
constitutes evidence against that hypothesis. These requirements and assumptions are often not warranted in real-world
decision situations. For example, in establishing the habitat range for a particular bird species, evidence in the form of
reported sightings might be used. However, the absence of a sighting at a location does not necessarily imply that the spe-
cies was not present. It may simply indicate that there was no observer present, or that the observer failed to see a bird
that was present. In cases such as this, Dempster-Shafer theory is appropriate (Gordon and Shortliffe, 1985; Srinivasan
and Richards, 1990).
Dempster-Shafer Aggregation Operators
The full hierarchy of hypotheses and the BPAs associated with each represent a state of knowledge that can be added to at
any time. In aggregating probability statements from different sources of evidence, Dempster-Shafer employs the follow-
ing rule of combination:

Σm 1 ( X ) • m 2 ( Y ) when ( X ∩ Y ) = Z
m ( Z ) = ---------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------
1 – Σm 1 ( X ) • m 2 ( Y ) when ( X ∩ Y ) = φ

If Σm 1 ( X ) • m 2 ( Y ) = 0 for X ∩ Y = φ , then the equation becomes

m ( Z ) = Σm 1 ( X ) • m 2 ( Y ) for X ∩ Y = Z .

The final belief, plausibility, and belief interval for each of the hypotheses can then be calculated based on the basic prob-
ability assignment calculated using the above equations. Ignorance for the whole set can also be derived. In most cases,
after adding new evidence, the ignorance is reduced.
Working with Dempster-Shafer Theory: Belief
In IDRISI, the Belief module can be used to implement the Dempster-Shafer logic. Belief constructs and stores the cur-
rent state of knowledge for the full hierarchy of hypotheses formed from a frame of discernment. In addition, it has the
ability to aggregate new evidence with that knowledge to create a new state of knowledge, that may be queried in the form
of map output for the belief, plausibility or belief interval associated with any hypothesis.
Belief first requires that the basic elements in the frame of discernment be defined. As soon as the basic elements are
entered, all hypotheses in the hierarchical structure will be created in the hypothesis list. For each line of evidence entered,
basic probability assignment images (in the form of real number images with a 0 - 1 range) are required with an indication
of their supported hypothesis. The BUILD KNOWLEDGE BASE item in the ANALYSIS menu then incorporates this
new evidence by recalculating the state of knowledge using the Dempster-Shafer rule of combination, from which sum-
mary images in the form of belief, plausibility or belief interval statements for each hypothesis can be selected. All the
information entered can be saved in a knowledge base file for later use when more evidence is obtained.
The Dempster-Shafer rule of combination provides an important approach to aggregating indirect evidence and incom-
plete information. Consider, for example, the problem of estimating where an archaeological site of a particular culture
might be found. The decision frame includes two basic elements, [site] and [non-site].3 Four pieces of evidence are used:

3. The total number of hypotheses that Dempster-Shafer generates in the full hierarchy is 2n-1. Implicitly, there is an extra hypothesis that is the null set,
which is assumed by Dempster-Shafer to be automatically false. Thus in this example, the [non-site] hypothesis is not the null set, nor is it automatically
assumed by Dempster-Shafer. In this example it was entered as a positive hypothesis, and member of the frame of discernment.

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 164

the locations of known sites, the frequency of surface artifacts (such as pottery shards), proximity to permanent water,
and slopes. The first may be seen as direct evidence (at the exact positions of the sites themselves) for areas that have
known archaeological sites. However, what we are concerned about are the areas that do not have a site, for which the
known sites do not provide direct information. Therefore, the evidence is largely indirect. For areas that are close to the
existing sites, one could believe the likelihood for the presence of another site would be higher. Thus the FUZZY module
is used to transform a map of distance from known sites into an image of probability (a basic probability assignment
image in support of the [site] hypothesis). The frequency of surface artifacts is also used as evidence in support of the
[site] hypothesis. The distance from permanent water and slope images, however, have been used as disbelief images (see
note 1 under "Using Belief" below). They therefore have both been scaled to a 0-1 range using FUZZY to provide sup-
port for the [non-site] hypothesis. Figure 12 shows these basic probability assignment images.

Figure 12 Basic Probability Assignment Images used in Aggregating Evidence for Archaeological Sites.
From left to right, the BPA’s support the hypothesis [Site] based on distance from known sites, [Site] based
on frequency of surface artifacts, [Non-Site] based on distance from permanent water, and [Non-Site]
based on slope. In all cases, darker areas represent a higher BPA.

The module Belief combines information from all four sources and has been used to produce belief, plausibility and belief
interval images for the [site] hypothesis as illustrated in Figure 13. The belief interval image is particularly interesting in
that it shows us where we have substantial uncertainty. Further sampling of evidence in these areas might prove profitable
since the conditions support the plausibility of a site, even though concrete evidence is poor.

Using Belief
1. You may find it difficult to decide whether a particular piece of evidence should be used to support the belief of an
hypothesis or, alternatively, the complement of that image should be used to support its disbelief. The latter is actually a
statement in support of the plausibility of an hypothesis, but not its belief, and is very common in GIS. For example, in
the case above, proximity to permanent water was treated as a distance image in support of disbelief in the possibility of a
site. The reason for this is that if one were near to water there is no reason to believe that a site would or would not be
present, but if one were far from water, there is excellent reason to assume that a site could not have existed. In deciding
how to treat lines of evidence, consider carefully whether the data provide true evidence in support of an hypothesis, or
simply support for its plausibility (i.e., the inability to deny its possibility).
2. To enter a disbelief, indicate that the evidence supports the collection of all hypotheses that do not include the one of
concern. In the archaeology example, distance from water was entered as evidence for [non-site]. In a case with three

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 165

hypotheses [A, B, C], to indicate that a particular line of evidence supports the disbelief in A, you would indicate that it
provides support for [B, C].
3. For each line of evidence that is incorporated using Belief, make sure that you enter all of the hypotheses that a partic-
ular piece of evidence supports in one run. The reason for this is that Belief needs to undertake some internal calculations
related to ignorance, and thus it needs to know also about the hypotheses for which that evidence does not add support.
You only need to enter a basic probability assignment image if the evidence supports the hypothesis to some degree larger
than zero. For the hypotheses that the evidence does not support, the module assumes 0 probability.
4. For each line of evidence, the basic probability assignment images must be real number images with a range that does
not exceed 0-1.

Figure 13 Belief (left), Plausibility (middle) and Belief Interval (right) images for the pres-
ence of archaeological sites after Dempster-Shafer combination of evidence.

Decision Rule Uncertainty and Decision Risk

In the context of measurement error, it is a fairly straightforward matter to relate uncertainty to decision risk. In IDRISI,
the PCLASS module achieves this based on the logic of classical sets (as was discussed earlier). However, as we move
from the strong frequentist interpretation of probability associated with measurement error, to the more indirect relation-
ship of Bayesian and Dempster-Shafer beliefs, to the quite independently established concept of fuzzy sets, we move fur-
ther and further away from the ability to establish risk in any absolute sense (Eastman, 1996). Indeed, with a decision
based on fuzzy sets, we can establish that the inclusion of an alternative is less risky than another, but not what the actual
risk is. Thus, instead of calculating absolute risk, we need to be able to establish relative risk.
The concept of relative risk is one that is quite familiar. For example, in evaluating a group of candidates for employment,
we might examine a number of quantifiable criteria—grades, rating charts, years of experience, etc.,—that can permit the
candidates to be ranked. We then attempt to hire the best ranked individuals on the assumption that they will perform
well. However, there is no absolute scale by which to understand the likelihood that they will achieve the goals we set. In
a similar manner, the RANK module in IDRISI can be used to rank the suitabilities achieved through a multi-criteria
aggregation procedure. This result can then be divided by the maximum rank to produce an image of relative risk. This
result can then be thresholded to extract a specific percentage of the best (i.e., least risky) solutions available. The impor-
tance of this solution is that it can be applied to any decision surface regardless of the nature of the uncertainties involved.

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 166

A Closing Comment
The decision support tools provided in IDRISI are still under active development. We therefore welcome written com-
ments and observations to further improve the modules and enhance their application in real-world situations.

References / Further Reading

Alonso, W., 1968. Predicting Best with Imperfect Data, Journal of the American Institute of Planners, 34: 248-255.
Bonham-Carter, G.F., Agterberg, F.P. and Wright, D.F., 1988. Integration of Geological Datasets for Gold Exploration in
Nova Scotia, Photogrammetric Engineering and Remote Sensing, 54(11): 1585-1592.
Bonissone, P.P. and Decker, K., 1986. Selecting Uncertainty Calculi and Granularity: An Experiment in Trading-Off Pre-
cision and Complexity. In L.N. Kanal and J.F. Lemmer eds., Uncertainty in Artificial Intelligence, Elsevier Science, Holland.
Burrough, P.A., 1986. Principles of Geographical Information Systems for Land Resources Assessment, Clarendon Press, Oxford.
Congalton, R.G., 1991. A Review of Assessing the Accuracy of Classifications of Remotely Sensed Data, Remote Sensing
and the Environment, 37: 35-46.
Eastman, J.R., 1996. Uncertainty and Decision Risk in Multi-Criteria Evaluation: Implications for GIS Software Design,
Proceedings, UN University International Institute for Software Technology Expert Group Workshop on Software Technology for
Agenda'21: Decision Support Systems, Febuary 26-March 8.
Eastman, J.R., Kyem, P.A.K., Toledano, J. and Jin, W., 1993. GIS and Decision Making, Explorations in Geographic Infor-
mation System Technology, 4, UNITAR, Geneva.
Fisher, P.F., 1991. First Experiments in Viewshed Uncertainty: The Accuracy of the Viewshed Area, Photogrammetric Engi-
neering & Remote Sensing 57(10): 1321-1327.
Goodchild, M.F., and Gopal, S., eds., 1989. Accuracy of Spatial Databases. Taylor and Francis, London.
Gordon, J., and Shortliffe, E.H., 1985. A Method for Managing Evidential Reasoning in a Hierarchical Hypothesis Space,
Artificial Intelligence, 26: 323-357.
Honea, R.B., Hake, K.A., and Durfee, R.C., 1991. Incorporating GISs into Decision Support Systems: Where Have We
Come From and Where Do We Need to Go? In: M. Heit and A. Shortreid (eds.), GIS Applications in Natural Resources. GIS
World, Inc., Fort Collins, Colorado.
Klir, George J., 1989. Is There More to Uncertainty Than Some Probability Theorists Might Have Us Believe? International
Journal of General Systems, 15: 347-378.
Lee, N.S., Grize, Y.L. and Dehnad, K., 1987. Quantitative Models for Reasoning Under Uncertainty in Knowledge-Based
Expert Systems, International Journal of Intelligent Systems, 2: 15-38.
Maling, D.H., 1989. Measurement from Maps: Principles and Methods of Cartography, Pergamon Press, Oxford.
Moellering, H., 1988. Digital Cartographic Data Quality. The American Cartographer 15(1).
Schmucker, K.J., 1982. Fuzzy Sets, Natural Language Computations and Risk Analysis. Computer Science Press.
Slonecker, E.T. and Tosta, N., 1992. National Map Accuracy: Out of Sync, Out of Time. Geoinfo Systems, 2(1): 23-26.
Stoms, D., 1987. Reasoning with Uncertainty in Intelligent Geographic Information Systems. Proceedings, GIS '87, 692-
700.

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 167

Srinivasan, A. and Richards, J.A., 1990. Knowledge-Based Techniques for Multi-Source Classification. International Journal
of Remote Sensing, 11(3): 505-525.
Yager, R. 1988. On Ordered Weighted Averaging Aggregation Operators in Multicriteria Decision Making, IEEE Transac-
tions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics. 8(1): 183-190.
Zadeh, L.A., 1965. Fuzzy Sets. Information and Control, 8: 338-353.

Chapter 14 Decision Support: Uncertainty Management 168

Image Restoration
In the Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing chapter, image restoration is broken down into two
broad sub-areas: radiometric restoration and geometric restoration. Radiometric restoration is concerned with the fidelity
of the readings of electromagnetic energy by the sensor while geometric restoration is concerned with the spatial fidelity
of images. However, while the word restoration suggests a return to conditions that once existed, the reality is that image
restoration is concerned with establishing measurement conditions that probably never existed—the measurement of
radiometric characteristics under perfect and invariant conditions on an abstract geographic reference ellipsoid. Radio-
metric restoration is thus concerned with issues such as atmospheric haze, sensor calibration, topographic influences on
illumination, system noise, and so on. Geometric restorations are less of a burden to the general data user because most
geometric restorations are already completed by the imagery distributor. The most significant task the data user must
complete is georeferencing. All of these rectifications can be achieved using existing IDRISI modules.

Radiometric Restoration
Sensor Calibration
The detectors on sensors can vary between instruments (such as on successive satellites in a series, such as the NOAA
TIROS-N weather satellites) and within an instrument over time or over the face of the image if multiple detectors are
used (as is commonly the case). Sensor calibration is thus concerned with ensuring uniformity of output across the face of
the image, and across time.

Radiance Calibration
Pixel values in satellite imagery typically express the amount of radiant energy received at the sensor in the form of uncal-
ibrated relative values simply called Digital Numbers (DN). Sometimes these DN are referred to as the brightness values.
For many (perhaps most) applications in remote sensing (such as classification of a single-date image using supervised
classification), it is not necessary to convert these values. However, conversion of DN to absolute radiance values is a nec-
essary procedure for comparative analysis of several images taken by different sensors (for example, Landsat-2 versus
Landsat-5). Since each sensor has its own calibration parameters used in recording the DN values, the same DN values in
two images taken by two different sensors may actually represent two different radiance values.
Usually, detectors are calibrated so that there is a linear relationship between DN and spectral radiance. This linear func-
tion is typically described by three parameters: the range of DN values in the image, and the lowest (Lmin) and highest
(Lmax) radiances measured by a detector over the spectral bandwidth of the channel. Most commonly, the data are dis-
tributed in 8-bit format corresponding to 256 DN levels. Lmin is the spectral radiance corresponding to the minimum
DN value (usually 0). Lmax is the radiance corresponding to the maximum DN (usually 255). Not only each sensor, but
each band within the same sensor, has its own Lmin and Lmax. The information about sensor calibration parameters
(Lmin and Lmax) is usually supplied with the data or is available elsewhere.1 The equation2 relating DN in remotely
sensed data to radiance is:

1. The Landsat satellites calibration parameters can be found in: EOSAT Landsat Technical Notes No. 1, August 1986, or the Landsat Data User's
Handbook.

2. For an explanation of radiance computation from DN, you may wish to consult: Lillesand, T.M., R.W. Kiefer and J.W. Chipman, 2004. Remote
Sensing and Image Interpretation. Fifth Edition. John Wiley and Sons.

Chapter 15 Image Restoration 169

 Lmax – Lmin
L = ⎛⎝ -----------------------------------⎞⎠ DN + Lmin
255
where L is the radiance expressed in Wm-2 sr-1.
Alternatively, the calibration of the sensor may be expressed in the form of an offset and gain. In this case, radiance can
be calculated as:
L=Offset+(Gain*DN)
Note that it is also possible to convert between an Offset/Gain specification and Lmin/Lmax as follows:
Offset=Lmin
and
Lmax – Lmin
Gain = -----------------------------------
255
or alternatively:
Lmin=Offset
Lmax = (Gain *255) + Lmin

Either the CALIBRATE or RADIANCE modules in IDRISI can be used to convert raw DN values to calibrated radi-
ances. The RADIANCE module has the most extensive options. It contains a lookup table of Lmin and Lmax for both
the MSS and TM sensors on Landsat 1-5. For other satellite systems, it permits the user to enter system-specific Lmin/
Lmax, or Offset/Gain values. CALIBRATE is more specifically geared towards brightness level matching, but does allow
for adjustment to a specific offset and gain. In either case, special care must be taken that the calibration coefficients are
correctly matched to the output units desired. The most common expression of radiance is in mWcm-2sr-1 mm-1 (i.e.,
milliWatts per square centimeter per steradian per micron). However, it is also common to encounter Wm-2sr-1 mm-1
(i.e., watts per square meter per steradian per micron).

Band Striping
Striping or banding is systematic noise in an image that results from variation in the response of the individual detectors
used for a particular band. This usually happens when a detector goes out of adjustment and produces readings that are
consistently much higher or lower than the other detectors for the same band. In the case of MSS data, there are 6 detec-
tors per band which scan in a horizontal direction. If one of the detectors is miscalibrated, then horizontal banding occurs
repetitively on each 6th line. Similarly, in the case of TM data with 16 detectors per band, each 16th line in the image will
be affected. Multispectral SPOT data have a pushbroom scanner with 3000 detectors for each band, one detector for each
pixel in a row. Since detectors in a pushbroom scanner are arranged in a line perpendicular to the satellite orbit track, mis-
calibration in SPOT detectors produces vertical banding. Since the SPOT satellite has an individual detector for each col-
umn of data, there is no repetitive striping pattern in the image.
The procedure that corrects the values in the bad scan lines is called destriping. It involves the calculation of the mean (or
median) and standard deviation for the entire image and then for each detector separately. Some software packages offer
an option for applying a mask to the image to exclude certain areas from these calculations (for example, clouds and cloud
shadows should be excluded). Also, sometimes only a portion of the image, usually a homogeneous area such as a body of
water, is used for these calculations. Then, depending on the algorithm employed by a software system, one of the follow-
ing adjustments is usually made:
1. The output from each detector is scaled to match the mean and standard deviation of the entire image. In this case, the
value of each pixel in the image is altered.
2. The output from the problem detector is scaled to resemble the mean and standard deviation of the other detectors. In
this case, the values of the pixels in normal data lines are not altered.

Chapter 15 Image Restoration 170

The IDRISI module DESTRIPE employs the first method. Results of this transformation are shown in Figures 1 and 2.
If satellite data are acquired from a distributor already fully georeferenced, then radiometric correction via DESTRIPE is no longer possible.
In this case, we suggest a different methodology. One can run an Unstandardized Principal Components Analysis on the
collection of input bands. The last few components usually represent less than 1 percent of the total information available
and tend to hold information relevant to striping. If these components are removed completely and the rest of the com-
ponents re-assembled, the improvement can be dramatic as the striping effect can even disappear. To re-assemble compo-
nent images, it is necessary to save the table information reporting the eigenvectors for each component. In this table, the
rows are ordered according to the band number and the column eigenvectors reading from left to right represent the set
of transformation coefficients required to linearly transform the bands to produce the components. Similarly, each row
represents the coefficients of the reverse transformation from the components back to the original bands. Multiplying
each component image by its corresponding eigenvector element for a particular band and summing the weighted com-
ponents together reproduces the original band of information. If the noise components are simply dropped from the
equation, it is possible to compute the new bands, free of these effects. This can be achieved very quickly using the Image
Calculator in IDRISI.
The chapter on Fourier Analysis details how that technique may also be used to remove striping or noise from satellite
imagery.

Figure 1 Figure 2

Mosaicing
Mosaicing refers to the process of matching the radiometric characteristics of a set of images that fit together to produce
a larger composite. In IDRISI, the MOSAIC module facilitates this process. The basic logic is to equalize the means and
variances of recorded values across the set of images, based on an analysis of comparative values in overlap areas. The first
image specified acts as the master, to which all other images are adjusted.

Atmospheric Correction
The atmosphere can affect the nature of remotely sensed images in a number of ways. At the molecular level, atmospheric
gases cause Rayleigh scattering that progressively affects shorter wavelengths (causing, for example, the sky to appear
blue). Further, major atmospheric components such as oxygen, carbon dioxide, ozone and water vapor (particularly these
latter two) cause absorption of energy at selected wavelengths. Aerosol particulates (an aerosol is a gaseous suspension of
fine solid or liquid particles) are the primary determinant of haze, and introduce a largely non-selective (i.e., affecting all
wavelength equally) Mie scattering. Atmospheric effects can be substantial (see Figure 3). Thus remote sensing specialists
have worked towards the modeling and correction of these effects. IDRISI offers several approaches to atmospheric cor-
rection, with the most sophisticated being the module ATMOSC.

Chapter 15 Image Restoration 171

Dark Object Subtraction Model
The effect of haze is usually a relatively uniform elevation in spectral values in the visible bands of energy. One means of
reducing haze in imagery is to look for values in areas of known zero reflectance, such as deep water. Any value above
zero in these areas is likely to represent an overall increase in values across the image and can be subtracted easily from all
values in the individual band using SCALAR. However, ATMOSC also offers a Dark Object Subtraction model with the
added benefit that it compensates for variations in solar output according to the time of year and the solar elevation angle.
To do this, it requires the same estimate of the Dn of haze (e.g., the Dn of deep clear lakes), the date and time of the
image, the central wavelength of the image band, the sun elevation, and radiance conversion parameters. These additional
parameters are normally included with the documentation for remotely sensed images.

Cos(t) Model
One of the difficulties with atmospheric correction is that the data necessary for a full accommodation are often not avail-
able. The Cos(t) model was developed by Chavez (1996) as a technique for approximation that works well in these
instances. It is also available in the ATMOSC module and incorporates all of the elements of the Dark Object Subtraction
model (for haze removal) plus a procedure for estimating the effects of absorption by atmospheric gases and Rayleigh
scattering. It requires no additional parameters over the Dark Object Subtraction model and estimates these additional
elements based on the cosine of the solar zenith angle (90 - solar elevation).

Full Correction Model

The full model is the most demanding in terms of data requirements. In addition to the parameters required for the Dark
Object Subtraction and Cos(t) models, it requires an estimate of the optical thickness of the atmosphere (the Help System
for ATMOSC gives guidelines for this) and the spectral diffuse sky irradiance (the downwelling diffuse sky irradiance at
the wavelength in question arising from scattering—see Forster (1984) and Turner and Spencer (1972). In cases where
this is unknown, the default value of 0 can be used.

Apparent Reflectance Model

ATMOSC offers a fourth model known as the Apparent Reflectance Model. It is rarely used since it does very little
accommodation to atmospheric effect (it only accommodates the sun elevation, and thus the effective thickness of the
atmosphere). It is included, however, as a means of converting Dn into approximate reflectance values.

An Alternative Haze Removal Strategy

Another effective method for reducing haze involves the application of Principal Components Analysis. The PCA mod-
ule in IDRISI separates a collection of bands into statistically separate components. The method of removing a compo-
nent is described in the Noise Effects section (this chapter) for the removal of image striping. We suggest using this method
to reduce any other atmospheric effects as well. Figures 3 and 4 are Landsat TM Band 1 images before restoration and
after. The area is in north-central Vietnam at a time with such heavy amounts of haze relative to ground reflectance as to
make sensor banding also very apparent. Principal Components Analysis was applied on the seven original bands. The 6th
and 7th components, which comprised less than 0.002 percent of the total information carried across the bands, were
dropped when the components were reverse-transformed into the new band. (The reverse-transformation process is
detailed above in the section on Band Striping.) Notice that not only do the haze and banding disappear in the second

Chapter 15 Image Restoration 172

image, but also what appears to be clouds is greatly reduced.

Figure 3 Figure 4

Topographic Effects
Topographic effect3 is defined simply as the difference in radiance values from inclined surfaces compared to horizontal ones.
The interaction of the angle and azimuth of the sun's rays with slopes and aspects produce topographic effects resulting in
variable illumination. Images are often taken in the early morning hours or late afternoon, when the effect of sun angle on
slope illumination can be extreme. In mountainous environments, reflectances of slopes facing away from the sun are
considerably lower than the overall reflectance or mean of an image area. In extreme terrain conditions, some areas may
be shadowed to the extent that meaningful information is lost altogether.
Shadowing and scattering effects exaggerate the difference in reflectance information coming from similar earth materi-
als. The signature of the same landcover type on opposite facing slopes may not only have a different mean and variance,
but may even have non-overlapping reflectance ranges. In the classification process, the highly variable relationship
between slope, landcover, and sun angle can lead to a highly exaggerated number of reflectance groups that make final
interpretation of data layers more costly, difficult, and time consuming. Even when landcovers are not the same on oppo-
site sides of the mountain (which is often the case since slope and aspect help determine the cover type present), variable
illumination nonetheless makes it difficult to derive biomass indices or perform other comparisons between landcover
classes.
Several techniques for mitigating topographic effect have evolved in recent years. However, many tend to be only appro-
priate for the specific environment in which they were developed, or they require high-detail ancillary data that is often
unavailable. The three most accessible techniques used are band ratioing, partitioning an image into separate areas for
classification, and illumination modeling based on a DEM. More sophisticated techniques (which are not discussed here)
involve the modeling of such illumination effects as backscattering and indirect diffusion effects.

Band Ratioing
In band ratioing, one band image is divided by another.
BandA
------------------
BandB

The resulting output image is then linearly stretched back to the 0 to 255 value range, and used for image classification.
Band ratioing is based on the principle that terrain variations (in slope and aspect) cause variations in illumination that are

3. The Topographic Effects section is condensed from the "Mitigating Topographic Effects in Satellite Imagery" exercise in Schneider and Robbins,
1995. UNITAR Explorations in GIS Technology, Volume 5, GIS and Mountain Environments, UNITAR, Geneva, also available from the Clark Labs..

Chapter 15 Image Restoration 173

consistent across different wavelengths. Thus in an area with a uniform landcover, the relative reflectance of one band to
another will be the same regardless of slope and aspect variations. Band ratioing is the simplest technique to implement to
mitigate topographic effect. It will not be very effective, however, when the variance in signature ranges is highly com-
pressed. This commonly occurs in extreme shadowing conditions.

Image Partitioning
Image partitioning works from the simple assumption that since different areas within an image are affected differently by
illumination effects resulting from slope and aspect, these distinct areas should be classified separately. Using a digital ele-
vation model to produce mask images, the bands are subdivided according to different elevation, slope, and aspect catego-
ries. These sub-scenes are then classified separately and the results recombined after classification. Like band ratioing, the
technique is simple and intuitive, but is effective only under the right conditions. Such partitioning works best where land-
cover conditions are stratified environmentally. Otherwise there is the potential to create hundreds of meaningless clusters
when using an unsupervised classification or to misclassify pixels when applying supervised techniques.
The thresholds set for slope, aspect, and elevation are dependent upon the known sun angle and azimuth. Without solar
information, the significant thresholds of topographic effect may be imprecisely determined by analyzing the shadow
effect visually. The registration of the DEM to the satellite data must be as precise as possible, otherwise the inexact
nature of thresholds will further increase the possibility of less meaningful classifications.

Illumination Modeling
The analytical tools associated with most raster GIS software systems offer a very effective technique for modeling illumi-
nation effects. The steps, using IDRISI, are as follows:
1. Use HISTO to calculate the mean of the image band to be corrected.
2. Using a Digital Elevation Model (DEM) for the image area, use the HILLSHADE (SURFACE) module to create a map
of analytical hillshading. This will be the model of illumination effects for all bands and simply needs to be calibrated for
use.
3. Use REGRESS to calculate the linear relationship between the hillshading map and the image to be corrected. Use the
image as the dependent variable and the hillshading as the independent variable.
4. Use CALIBRATE to apply the offset (the intercept of the regression equation) and gain (the slope of the regression
equation) to the hillshading map. The result is a model of the terrain-induced illumination component.
5. Use Image Calculator to subtract the result of the previous step from the original image and then add the mean calcu-
lated in the first step. The result is a reasonable estimate of what the image would have looked like if the ground had been
flat.

Noise
Noise in images occurs because of any number of mechanical or electronic interferences in the sensing system that lead to
transmission errors. Noise either degrades the recorded signal or it virtually eliminates all radiometric information. Noise
can be systematic, such as the periodic malfunctioning of a detector, resulting in striping or banding in the imagery. Or it
can be more random in character, causing radiometric variations described as having a "salt-and-pepper" appearance. In
RADAR imagery, "speckle" occurs because the signal's interaction with certain object edges or buildings produces a
highly elevated recording, which when frequent, has a similar effect as "salt-and-pepper" noise.

Scan Line Drop Out

Scan line drop out occurs when temporary signal loss from specific detectors causes a complete loss of data for affected
lines. In IDRISI this problem can be solved by a sequence of steps. First, reclassify the affected band in RECLASS to cre-
ate a Boolean mask image in which the pixels where drop-lines are present have a value of 1 and the rest have a value of

Chapter 15 Image Restoration 174

zero. Then, for horizontal drop lines, run a user-defined 3 x 3 FILTER across the original band containing the following
kernel values:
0 0.5 0
0 0 0
0 0.5 0
This will have the effect of assigning to each pixel the average of the values in the scanlines above and below. If the drop
line is vertical, simply rotate the filter kernel values by 90 degrees. Then, use OVERLAY to multiply the mask and the fil-
tered image together. This creates a result in which filtered values only appear in those locations where scan lines were
lost. OVERLAY this result on the original band using the COVER operation, which will cause these values to be placed
only where the data were lost.

"Salt-and-Pepper" Noise
Random noise often produces values that are abnormally high or low relative to surrounding pixel values. Given the
assumption that noisy reflectance values show abrupt changes in reflectance from pixel to pixel, it is possible to use filter-
ing operations to replace these values with another value generated from the interpretation of surrounding pixels. FIL-
TER in IDRISI provides several options for this purpose. A 3 x 3 or 5 x 5 median filter commonly are applied. The noisy
pixels are replaced by the median value selected from the neighbors of the specified window. Because all pixels are pro-
cessed by median filtering, some detail and edges may be lost. This is especially problematic with RADAR imagery
because of the particularly high level of speckle that can occur. Therefore, we have included an Adaptive Box filter that is
an extension of the common Lee filter. The Adaptive Box filter determines locally within a specified window (3 x 3, 5 x 5,
or 7 x 7) the mean and the min/max value range based on a user-specified standard deviation. If the center window value
is outside the user-specified range, then it is assumed to be noise and the value is replaced by an average of the surround-
ing neighbors. You may choose the option of replacing the value with a zero. The filter also allows the user to specify a
minimum threshold variance in order to protect pixels in areas of very low variation. See the on-line Help System of the
FILTER module to learn more about this highly flexible approach.

Geometric Restoration
As stated in the chapter Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing, most elements of geometric restora-
tion associated with image capture are corrected by the distributors of the imagery, most importantly skew correction and
scanner distortion correction. Distributors also sell imagery already georeferenced. Georeferencing is not only a restoration tech-
nique but a method of reorienting the data to satisfy the specific desires and project requirements of the data user. As
such, it is particularly important that georeferenced imagery meets the data user's standards and registers well with other
data in the same projection and referencing system.
It is our experience that even if one's standards are not very stringent for the particular imaging task at hand, it is well
worth the time one takes to georeference the imagery oneself rather than having the distributor do so. This is true for a
number of reasons. First, certain radiometric corrections become more difficult (if not impossible) to perform if the data
are already georeferenced. Of particular concern is the ability to reduce the effects of banding, scan line drop, and topo-
graphic effects on illumination. If the geometric orientation of the effects is altered, then standard restoration techniques
are rendered useless. Given that the severity of these effects is not usually known prior to receiving the data, georeferenc-
ing the data oneself is important in maintaining control over the image restoration process.
Another reason to georeference imagery oneself is to gain more control over the spatial uncertainties produced by the
georeferencing process. Only then is it possible to know how many control points are used, where they are located, what
the quality of each is individually, and what the most satisfying combination of control points is to select. The RESAM-
PLE module in IDRISI provides the user with significant control over this process. The user may freely drop and add

Chapter 15 Image Restoration 175

points and evaluate the effects on the overall RMS error and the individual residuals of points as they are fitted to a new
equation. This interactive evaluation is especially important if significant rubbersheeting is required to warp the data to fit
the projection needs of one's area.
See the chapter on Georeferencing for a broader discussion of this issue. See also the exercise on Georeferencing in the
Tutorial for a worked example of how the RESAMPLE module is used in IDRISI to georegister a satellite image.

References
Chavez, P.S., (1996) "Image-Based Atmospheric Corrections - Revisited and Improved", Photogrammetric Engineering
and Remote Sensing, 62, 9, 1025-1036.
Forster, B.C., (1984) "Derivation of atmospheric correction procedures for Landsat MSS with particular reference to
urban data", International Journal of Remote Sensing, 5, 5, 799-817.
Lillesand, T.M. and R.W. Kiefer, (1994) Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation. Third Edition. John Wiley and Sons.
Turner, R.E., and Spencer, M.M., (1972) "Atmospheric Model for Correction of Spacecraft Data", Proceedings, Eighth
International Symposium on Remote Sensing of the Environment, Vol. II, 895-934.

Chapter 15 Image Restoration 176

Fourier Analysis
Fourier Analysis is a signal/image decomposition technique that attempts to describe the underlying structure of an image
as a combination of simpler elements. Specifically, it attempts to describe the signal/image as a composite of simple sine
waves. Thus the intent of Fourier Analysis is somewhat similar to that of Principal Components Analysis—to break the
image down into its structural components for the purpose of analyzing and modifying those components before even-
tual reconstruction into an enhanced form. While Fourier Analysis has application in a number of fields ranging from
optics to electronics, in the context of image processing, it is most often used for noise removal.

The Logic of Fourier Analysis

It is unfortunate that the mathematical treatment of Fourier Analysis makes it conceptually inaccessible to many. Since
there are ample treatments of Fourier Analysis from a mathematical perspective, the description offered here is intended
as a more conceptual treatment.
Any image can be conceptually understood as a complex wave form. For example, if one were to graph the grey levels
along any row or column, they would form the character of a complex wave. For a two dimensional image, the logical
extension of this would be a surface, like the surface of an ocean or lake. Imagine dropping a stone into a pool of water—
a simple sine wave pattern would be formed with a wave length dependent upon the size of the stone. Now imagine drop-
ping a whole group of stones of varying size and at varying locations. At some locations the waves would cancel each
other out while at other locations they would reinforce each other, leading to even higher amplitude waves. The surface
would thus exhibit a complex wave pattern that was ultimately created by a set of very simple wave forms. Figures 1 and 2
illustrate this effect. Figure 1 shows a series of sine waves of varying frequency, amplitude, and phase (these terms will be
explained below). Figure 2 shows the complex wave form that would result from the combination of these waves.

Figure 1 Figure 2

Fourier Analysis uses this logic in reverse. It starts with a complex wave form and assumes that this is the result of the
additive effects of simple sine waves of varying frequency, amplitude and phase. Frequency refers to the number of complete
wavelengths that occur over a specified distance. Figure 3 shows a series of sine waves that differ only in their frequency.
Amplitude refers to the height or strength of the wave. Figure 4 shows a series of sine waves that vary only in amplitude.
Finally, phase refers to the offset of the first wave crest from origin. Figure 5 shows a series of waves that vary only in
phase. In the decomposition of digital images, a finite set of waves are assumed, ranging from the lowest frequency wave
which completes a single wavelength over the extent of the image in X and Y, to one that completes 2 wavelengths over
that extent, to 3 wavelengths, and so on, up to the highest frequency wave with a wavelength equal to twice the pixel reso-
lution (known as the Nyquist frequency). The task of the Fourier Analysis process is then simply one of estimating the phase

Chapter 16 Fourier Analysis 177

and amplitudes of these waves.
1
1

0.5
0.5

0
0

-0.5
-0.5

-1
-1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Figure 3 Figure 4
1

0.5

-0.5

-1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Figure 5

How Fourier Analysis Works

The easiest way to understand how Fourier Analysis works is to use an analogy. In the presence of a sound (a complex
wave form), the string of a guitar (or any other stringed instrument) will vibrate, or resonate, if the sound contains the
same note (frequency). The strength of that sympathetic vibration will be a function of the amplitude of that note within
the original sound. In essence, this is how Fourier Analysis works—it "listens" for the degree of resonance of a set of spe-
cific frequencies with the sound (image) being analyzed. It is like placing a harp into the presence of a sound, and gauging
the degree to which each string resonates.
The process of testing for the presence of varying frequencies is achieved by multiplying the complex wave by the corre-
sponding amplitude of the sine wave being evaluated, and summing the results. The resulting sum is the resonance at that
frequency. The only problem, however, is phase. What if the wave in question is present, but our test wave is out of phase?
In the worst case they are exactly out of phase, so that the peaks in the test frequency are balanced by troughs in the com-
plex wave—the net effect is that they will cancel each other out, leading one to believe that the wave is not present at all.
The answer to the problem of phase is to test the complex wave against two versions of the same frequency wave, exactly
out of phase with each other. This can easily be done by testing both a sine wave and a cosine wave of the same frequency
(since sines and cosines are identical except for being exactly out of phase). In this way, if there is little resonance with the
sine wave because of a problem of phase, it is guaranteed to resonate with the cosine wave.1

1. The use of a sine/cosine pair is identical in concept to describing locations using a pair of coordinates—X and Y. In both cases, the reference pair are
known as basis vectors. In plane two-dimensional space, any location can be defined by its X and Y coordinates. Similarly, in the frequency domain, any
wave can be defined by its sine and cosine coordinates.

Chapter 16 Fourier Analysis 178

Interpreting the Mathematical Expression
Given the discussion above, the formula for the Fourier Series is not so difficult to understand. Considering the one-
dimensional case,
∞
the complex function over x can be described as the sum of sine and cosine components as follows:
f( x ) = a0 + ∑ ( ak cos ( kωx ) + bk sin ( kωx ) )
k=1

where f(x) is the value of the function at position x, ω is equal to 2π/T where T is the period (the length of the series), and
k is the harmonic.2 The coefficients a and b are determined by means of the Fourier Transform.
The Fourier Transform itself makes use of Euler's Formula:
– i2πux
e = cos 2πux – i sin 2πux

where i2 is -1, leading to the following formulation for the case of discrete data:
1 – ikωx
F ( u ) = ---- Σf ( x )e
N
and an inverse formula of:
ikωx
f ( x ) = ΣF ( u )e

It is not critical that these mathematical expressions be fully understood in order to make productive use of the Fourier
Transform. However, it can be appreciated from the above that:
1. these formulas express the forward and inverse transforms for one-dimensional data. Simple extensions make these
applicable to two-dimensional data.
2. the implementation of the Fourier Transform uses complex-valued inputs and outputs. A complex number is one with
both real and imaginary parts of the form a+bi, where i2 = -1. In the case considered here, for input into the FOURIER
module, the image grey-level values make up the real part, while the imaginary part is set to zero (this is done automati-
cally by IDRISI) since it doesn't exist. Thus the input to the Fourier Transform is a single image.
3. the resulting output of the forward transform thus consists of two images—a real and an imaginary part. The real part
expresses the cosine component of the Fourier series while the imaginary part expresses the sine component. These are
the amplitudes a and b of the cosine and sine components expressed in the first formula in this section. From these, the
amplitude and phase of the wave can be determined as follows:
2 2
Amplitude = a +b

Phase = tan–1 ( b ⁄ a )
Together, the real and imaginary parts express the frequency spectrum of an image. While both the amplitude and phase
can be readily calculated from these parts (Image Calculator can be used in IDRISI to do this), neither is commonly used.
More commonly, the power spectrum is calculated and the phase is ignored. The power spectrum is simply the square of
the amplitude. However, for purposes of visual examination, it is commonly expressed as a power spectrum image as fol-
lows:
2
PowerSpectrum = ln ( 1 + amplitude )

This is the formula used in IDRISI. Thus the forward transform produced by the FOURIER module yields three out-
puts—a real part image, an imaginary part image, and a power image. These are commonly referred to as frequency

2. The term "harmonic" used here refers to the relation of quantities whose reciprocals are in arithmetic progression (e.g., 1, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, etc.); or to
points, lines, functions, etc. involving such a relation.

Chapter 16 Fourier Analysis 179

domain images (as opposed to the original image which expresses the spatial domain).
The primary intent of the Fourier Transform is to examine the spectrum and modify its characteristics before recon-
structing the original by means of the inverse transform. Examination of the spectrum is done with the power image.
However, modifications are implemented on the real and imaginary parts. The FILTERFQ, DRAWFILT and
FREQDIST modules can be used to create a variety of filters to be applied to the real and imaginary parts of the fre-
quency domain.
The FOURIER module can also be used to compute the inverse transform. In this case, it is necessary to supply both the
real and imaginary parts of the frequency domain. The result is a real image—the imaginary part is assumed to be zero,
and is discarded.
The actual implementation of the Fourier Transform in IDRISI is by means of the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) procedure.
This algorithm is comparatively very fast, but requires that the image size (in X and Y) be a power of 2 (e.g., 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,
64, 128, etc.). In cases where the image is some other size, the edges can be padded with zeros to make the image con-
form to the proper dimensions. The ZEROPAD module facilitates this process in IDRISI.
Fourier Analysis assumes that the image itself is periodic to infinity. Thus it is assumed that the image repeats itself end-
lessly in X and Y. The effect is similar to bending the image in both X and Y such that the last column touches the first
and the last row touches the first. If the grey values at these extremes are quite different, their juxtaposition will lead to
spurious high frequency components in the transform. This can be mitigated by zero padding the edges. Zero padding is
therefore often quite desirable.

Using Fourier Analysis in IDRISI

Gathering together and extending the information above, the following procedures are typical of Fourier Analysis in
IDRISI.
1. Prepare the image for analysis. Both the rows and columns must be powers of 2. However, it is not necessary that they
be the same. Thus, for example, an original image of 200 columns and 500 rows would need to be padded out to be an
image of 256 columns and 512 rows. Use the ZEROPAD module in IDRISI to do this. If the original image already has
rows and columns that are a power of 2, this step can be omitted.
2. Run FOURIER with the forward transform using the image prepared in Step 1 as the input. The image can contain
byte, integer or real data—the data type is not important. FOURIER will produce three outputs—a real part image, an
imaginary part image, and a power spectrum image. The last of these is intended for visual analysis while the first two are
used for numeric analysis.
3. Examine the power spectrum image and design a filter (a topic covered at greater length in the next section). To create
the filter, use either the FREQDIST module (followed by either RECLASS or FUZZY), the FILTERFQ module, or the
DRAWFILT module.
4. Apply the filter to the real and imaginary part images created in Step 2. This is typically done through multiplication
using the OVERLAY module.
5. Run FOURIER again and use the modified real and imaginary parts as input to the inverse transform. The result is the
reconstructed image. Note that this output is always a real number image which may be converted to either byte or integer
form if desired (and the range of values permits). The original image that was submitted to the forward transform must
also be supplied. This image provides reference system information. If zero padding was added prior to the forward trans-
form, then that image (with the zero padding) should be given here as the original image.
6. If zero padding was added, use WINDOW to extract the image to a new file.

Chapter 16 Fourier Analysis 180

Interpreting Frequency Domain Images
When first encountered, frequency domain images appear very strange. Indeed it is hard to believe that they contain all
the information required to completely restore the full spatial domain image. However, the pixels in the real and imaginary
part images contain a complete record of the sine waves that will form the image when combined. In these images as well
as the power spectrum image, the position of each pixel in relation to the center cell indicates the frequency of the wave,
while the pixel value indicates the amplitude.
For purposes of visual analysis, the power spectrum image is always used since it contains a visually enhanced record of
the amplitude of the component waves.3 Within this image, each pixel represents a different wave frequency, with the sole
exception of the central pixel located at (columns/2) and ((rows/2) - 1). This pixel represents a frequency of 0—an
expression of the average grey level of the image, similar in concept to an intercept in regression analysis.
The pixels to the immediate right ((columns/2) + 1) and above (rows/2) represent the lowest frequency (longest wave-
length) waves in the decomposition, with a frequency of one complete wave over the entire extent of the image, i.e., a fre-
quency of (1/(nd)) where n=number of rows or columns, and d=pixel resolution. Thus with an image of 512 columns by
512 rows, and 30 meter cells, the pixel to the immediate right or above the center represents a frequency of (1/(nd))=(1/
(512*30))=1/15,360 meters. Similarly, the second-most pixel to the right or above the center represents a frequency of (2/
(nd))=(2/(512*30))=1/7,680 meters. Likewise, the third-most pixel to the right or above the center represents a frequency
of (3/(nd))=(3/(512*30))=1/5,120 meters. This logic continues to the right-most and top-most edges, which would have
a frequency of (255/(nd))=(255/(512*30))=1/60.24 meters. This latter value is only one short of the limiting frequency of
(256/(nd))=(256/(512*30))=1/60 meters. This limiting frequency is the Nyquist frequency, and represents the shortest
wavelength that can be described by pixels at a given resolution. In this example, the shortest wave repeats every 60
meters.
The upper-right quadrant describes waves with positive frequencies in X and Y. All other quadrants contain at least one
dimension that describes negative waves. For example, the lower-left quadrant describes frequencies that are negative in
both X and Y. Negative frequencies are a consequence of the fact that Fourier Analysis assumes that the information ana-
lyzed is infinitely periodic. This is achieved by imagining that the original image could be bent into a cylinder shape in
both X and Y so that the first and last columns adjoin one another and similarly that the top and last rows adjoin one
another. Note also that the upper-right and lower-left quadrants are mirror images of each other as are the upper-left and
lower-right quadrants. This symmetry arises from the fact that the input data are real number and not complex number
images.
Finally, note that the first column and the last row (and the last column and the first row) represent the amplitude and
power of waves at the Nyquist frequency for both positive and negative frequencies—i.e., using the example above, both
(256/(nd))=(256/(512*30))=1/60 meters and (-256/(nd))=(-256/(512*30))=-1/60 meters. The reason why these repre-
sent both the positive and negative frequencies relates to the cylindrical folding indicated above that is necessary to create
an infinitely periodic form.
Given the above logic to the structure of the amplitude and power spectrum images, several key points can be appreci-
ated:
1. Amplitude and power spectrum images have a character that is radial about the central point representing zero fre-
quency.
2. Noise elements are readily apparent as aberrant point or line features in the power spectrum. Linear noise elements will
appear at a 90 degree angle in the power spectrum image to their spatial domain direction, e.g., vertical striping in the orig-
inal image will produce horizontal elements in the power spectrum image.
3. These noise elements can be filtered out by reducing their amplitudes to 0 in the frequency domain and then doing the

3. The phase information is not important for visual analysis, and is lost in the production of the power spectrum image. However, all mathematical
manipulations are undertaken on the real and imaginary part images, which together contain complete amplitude and phase information.

Chapter 16 Fourier Analysis 181

inverse transform.

Frequency Domain Filter Design

Figure 6a shows an example of an image with severe horizontal banding, while Figure 6b shows its power spectrum cre-
ated with FOURIER. Figure 6c shows a notch filter created with FILTERFQ. Both the real and imaginary parts of the
frequency domain transform were then multiplied by this filter in order to block out these wavelengths (reduce their
amplitudes to 0). Finally, Figure 6d shows the result of applying the reverse transform on the modified real and imaginary
part images.

Figure 6 a-d: Application of the Fourier Transform to re-

move banding in an image. a: (upper left) shows the
original image with horizontal banding; b: (upper-mid-
dle) shows its power spectrum as created with the
FOURIER module. Note the vertical line at center as-
sociated with the horizontal banding in the original im-
age; c: (upper-right) shows a notch filter created with
FILTERFQ; d: (lower-left) shows the result of applying
the notch filter and subsequently applying the inverse
Fourier Transform.

IDRISI supplies a variety of facilities for developing frequency domain filters. One would most commonly use FIL-
TERFQ, which offers 26 filters, each of which can be controlled for the specific characteristics of the data being manipu-
lated as well as for the specific purpose of the filter. The next most commonly used module is DRAWFILT, an interactive
filter development tool in which one literally draws the areas (i.e., frequencies) to be removed. Finally, for even further
flexibility, IDRISI offers a module named FREQDIST. As the name suggests, this module creates a frequency distance
image (as measured from the center point of the power spectrum). This can then be used as the basic input to a variety of
filter shaping tools such as RECLASS or FUZZY. The frequency distance image can also be submitted to SURFACE to
create an aspect image which can then be shaped by RECLASS or FUZZY to create directional filters.
Regardless of how the filter is created, however, application of that filter is achieved the same way in all cases—by simple
multiplication using OVERLAY with both the real and imaginary part images. As it turns out, multiplication in the fre-
quency domain is the equivalent of convolution in the spatial domain.

Chapter 16 Fourier Analysis 182

References
Good references for frequency domain filtering include:
Gonzalez, R.C., and Woods, R.E., 1992. Digital Image Processing, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts.
Mather, P., 1987. Computer Processing of Remotely Sensed Images, John Wiley and Sons, New York.
Jensen, J.R., 1996. Introductory Digital Image Processing: A Remote Sensing Perspective, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ.

Chapter 16 Fourier Analysis 183

Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery

Introduction
Classification is the process of developing interpreted maps from remotely sensed images. As a consequence, classifica-
tion is perhaps the most important aspect of image processing to GIS. Traditionally, classification was achieved by visual
interpretation of features and the manual delineation of their boundaries. However, with the advent of computers and dig-
ital imagery, attention has focused on the use of computer-assisted interpretation. Although the human eye still brings a
superior set of capabilities to the classification process, the speed and consistency of digital procedures make them very
attractive. As a consequence, the majority of classification projects today make use of digital classification procedures,
guided by human interpretation.

Supervised Versus Unsupervised Classification

As indicated in the Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing chapter, there are two basic approaches
to the classification process: supervised and unsupervised classification. With supervised classification, one provides a sta-
tistical description of the manner in which expected landcover classes should appear in the imagery, and then a procedure
(known as a classifier) is used to evaluate the likelihood that each pixel belongs to one of these classes. With unsupervised
classification, a very different approach is used. Here another type of classifier is used to uncover commonly occurring
and distinctive reflectance patterns in the imagery, on the assumption that these represent major landcover classes. The
analyst then determines the identity of each class by a combination of experience and ground truth (i.e., visiting the study
area and observing the actual cover types).
In both of these cases, the process of classification can be seen as one of determining the set to which each pixel belongs.
In the case of supervised classification, the sets are known (or assumed to be known) before the process is begun. Classi-
fication is thus a decision making process based upon available information. With unsupervised classification, however,
the classes are unknown at the outset. Thus, the process is really one of segmentation rather than decision making per se.

Spectral Response Patterns versus Signatures

As explained in the Introduction to Remote Sensing and Image Processing chapter, each type of material interacts
with electromagnetic energy by either reflecting, absorbing or transmitting it, with the exact nature of that interaction
varying from one wavelength to the next—a pattern known as a Spectral Response Pattern (SRP). The basis for classification
is thus to find some area of the electromagnetic spectrum in which the nature of that interaction is distinctively different
from that of other materials that occur in the image. Many refer to this as a signature—a spectral response pattern that is
characteristic of that material. However, in practice, the determination of consistently distinctive signatures is difficult to
achieve for the following reasons:
- most vegetation types do not have consistent spectral response patterns—phenological changes throughout the growing
season can lead to highly variable signatures.
- changes in illumination (because of slope or the time of year) and moisture variations can also lead to significantly differ-
ent spectral response patterns.
- most landcover consist of mixtures of elementary features that are sensed as single pixels. For example, a row crop such
as maize actually contains a mixture of plant and soil as sensed by a satellite. Likewise, a pixel may contain a mixture of
conifers and deciduous species in a forest area.
- for a given sensor, there is no guarantee that the wavelengths in which it senses will be the same as those in which a
material is most distinctive. Currently, multispectral sensors examine several very important areas of the spectrum, partic-

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 184

ularly for the differentiation of vegetation. However, the usable areas not examined far outnumber those that are, and
many of the wavelengths that could potentially distinguish many rock types, for example, are not typically examined.
As a result of these problems, there has been a strong orientation within the remote sensing community to develop signa-
tures with reference to specific examples within the image to be classified rather than relying on the use of more general
libraries of characteristic spectral response patterns. These very specific examples are called training sites, named thus
because they are used to train the classifier on what to look for. By choosing examples from within the image itself (usu-
ally confirmed by a ground truth visit), one develops signatures that are specific to the wavelengths available. One also
avoids the problems of variations in both solar zenith angle and stage of the growing season. One can also choose exam-
ples that are characteristic of the various cover class mixtures that exist.
Despite this very pragmatic approach to the classification process, it remains very much a decision problem. We ask the
process to create a definitive classification in the presence of considerable variation. For example, despite differences in
growth stage, soil background and the presence of intercropping, we ask the process to distill all variations of maize crop-
ping into a single maize class.
Recently, however, interest has focused on relaxing this traditional approach in two areas, both strongly represented in
IDRISI. The first is the development of soft classifiers, while the second extends the logic of multispectral sensing to hyper-
spectral sensing.

Hard Versus Soft Classifiers

Traditional classifiers can be called hard classifiers since they yield a hard decision about the identity of each pixel. In con-
trast, soft classifiers express the degree to which a pixel belongs to each of the classes being considered. Thus, for example,
rather than deciding that a pixel is either deciduous or coniferous forest, it might indicate that its membership grade in the
deciduous class is 0.43 and coniferous is 0.57 (which a hard classifier would conclude is coniferous). One of the motiva-
tions for using a soft classifier is to determine the mixture of landcover classes present. If we could assume that these two
classes were the only ones present, it might be reasonable to conclude that the pixel contains 43% deciduous cover and
57% coniferous. Such a conclusion is known as sub-pixel classification.
A second motivation for the use of a soft classifier is to measure and report the strength of evidence in support of the
best conclusion that can be made. IDRISI introduces special soft classifiers that allow us to determine, for example, that
evidence for deciduous is present to a level of 0.26, for coniferous to 0.19 and some unknown type to 0.55. This would
immediately suggest that while the pixel has some similarities to our training sites for these two classes, it really belongs to
some type that we have not yet identified.
A third motivation for the use of soft classifiers concerns the use of GIS data layers and models to supplement the infor-
mation used to reach a final decision. For example, one might extract a mapping of the probability that each pixel belongs
to a residential landcover class from the spectral data. Then a GIS data layer of roads might be used to develop a mapping
of distance from roads, from which the probability of not being residential might be deduced (areas away from roads are
unlikely to be residential). These two lines of evidence can then be combined to produce a stronger statement of the
probability that this class exists. A final hard decision can subsequently be achieved by submitting the individual class
membership statements to an appropriate hardener—a decision procedure that chooses the most likely alternative.

Multispectral Versus Hyperspectral Classifiers

The second major new development in classifiers is the use of hyperspectral data. Most sensors today are termed multispectral
in that they sense electromagnetic energy in more than one area of the spectrum at once. Each of these areas is called a
band and is represented by a single monochrome image. For example, the Landsat Thematic Mapper (TM) sensor system
images seven simultaneous bands in the blue (Band 1), green (Band 2), red (Band 3), near infrared (Band 4), middle infra-
red (Bands 5 and 7) and thermal infrared (Band 6) wavelength areas. Hyperspectral sensors are really no different in con-
cept except that they image in many narrowly defined bands. For example, the AVIRIS experimental system developed by
the Jet Propulsion Laboratory (JPL) images in 224 bands over a somewhat similar wavelength range as the TM sensor.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 185

Similarly, the EOS-MODIS system, launched in December 1999, spreads 36 bands over essentially the same range as that
covered by the five bands on the corresponding AVHRR system of the NOAA series satellites.
It is tempting to think that more is better—i.e., that the greater number and higher spectral resolution of hyperspectral
bands would naturally lead to better classifications. However, this is not necessarily the case. Hyperspectral images are
most often highly correlated with other bands of similar wavelength. Thus one must process a substantially increased
amount of data (which does affect the level of sophistication of the classifier algorithm) without a corresponding gain of
information. The real benefit of hyperspectral imagery is gained from the ability to prospect for very narrow absorption
features (spectral regions exhibiting strong absorption from specific materials) at high resolution. This has achieved most
notable success in the context of geological applications. For example, recent extraterrestrial missions such as the NASA
Mars Surveyor, Galileo, and Cassini missions all carry hyperspectral sensors for the purpose of mineral mapping. The high
spectral resolution of these systems provides the ability to measure mineral absorption patterns with high precision, lead-
ing to the ability to map both the presence and abundance of surficial materials. Hyperspectral classification is still quite
new and effectively experimental in character. IDRISI includes a range of procedures for working with these data.

Overview of the Approach in this Chapter

In the sections that follow, we will cover the general logic and strategy to be used in working with the classification mod-
ules in the IDRISI system. Detailed notes on the use of each module can be found in the on-line Help System. Further-
more, examples in the form of exercises can be found in the Tutorial manual.

Supervised Classification
General Logic
There is a consistent logic to all of the supervised classification routines in IDRISI, regardless of whether they are hard or
soft classifiers. In addition, there is a basic sequence of operations that must be followed no matter which of the super-
vised classifiers is used. This sequence is described here. The Tutorial manual also contains worked examples of this pro-
cess.

1. Define Training Sites

The first step in undertaking a supervised classification is to define the areas that will be used as training sites for each
landcover class. This is usually done by using the on-screen digitizing feature as outlined in the Using IDRISI chapter.
You should choose a band with strong contrast (such as a near-infrared band) or a color composite for use in digitizing.
Then display that image on the screen (use autoscaling if necessary to gain good contrast) and use the on-screen digitizing
feature to create one or more vector files of training site polygons—vector outlines of the training site areas.1
Good training site locations are generally those with as pure a sample of the information class as possible. For example, if
you were choosing to define a site of deciduous forest, it would be important to choose an area that was not mixed with
conifers and that had little soil background or understory vegetation visible. When digitizing training sites you should also

1. IDRISI offers two procedures for the digitizing of training site polygons. With the default procedure, one digitizes a set of points that form the
boundary of the training site polygon. The second procedure creates the polygon by aggregating together all contiguous pixels surrounding a designated
point that fall within a specified tolerance of the spectral characteristics of the central pixel. This is called a flood polygon since it is analogous to the
concept of water flowing outward from the designated point. You will also note that with this option a maximum distance can be specified to limit how
far this growth procedure will spread. Note that the system also allows you to define training sites by means of a raster image. In some instances, it may
make sense to define these locations by direct reference to ground locations (such as by means of point locations gathered with a GPS). However, this
requires very exact prior georeferencing of the image, and a confidence that positional errors will not include unwanted pixels in the training sites. Some
georeferencing procedures also alter image characteristics which may be undesirable. It is for these reasons that classification is commonly undertaken
on ungeoreferenced imagery using on-screen digitizing of training sites. The final classified image is then georeferenced at a later stage.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 186

avoid including any pixels belonging to adjacent landcover. This will be easiest to achieve if you zoom in on the area
before digitizing that site.
In general, you should aim to digitize enough pixels so that there are at least 10 times as many pixels for each training class
as there are bands in the image to classify. Thus, for a Landsat TM image with seven bands, you should aim to have at least
70 pixels per training class (more than that is not difficult to achieve and is recommended—the more the better). If this is
difficult to achieve with a single site, simply digitize more than one training site for that class. The on-screen digitizing
facility requires that you give an integer identifier for each feature. Thus to digitize more than one training site for a land-
cover class, simply assign the same identifier to each example. It may be helpful to make a list of ID’s and their corre-
sponding information classes.
Finally, note that there is no requirement that all training sites be included in a single vector file created with the on-screen
digitizing feature. You can create a single vector file for each information class if you wish. This will simply require that
you undertake the signature development stage for each of these files. Alternatively, you can join these vector files into a
single vector file with CONCAT or rasterize all the vector files into a single raster image and develop the signatures from
that single vector file or raster image.

2. Extract Signatures
After the training site areas have been digitized, the next step will be to create statistical characterizations of each informa-
tional class. These are called signatures in IDRISI. This is usually achieved with the MAKESIG module.2 MAKESIG will
ask for the name of the vector or raster file that contains the training sites for one or more informational classes, and the
bands to be used in the development of signatures. It will then ask for a name for each of the included classes. These
names should be suitable as IDRISI file names since they will be used to create signatures files (.sig extension) for each
informational class. If you used more than one vector file to store your training site polygons, run MAKESIG for each of
these files. Your goal is to create a SIG file for every informational class.
SIG files contain a variety of information about the landcover classes they describe.3 These include the names of the
image bands from which the statistical characterization was taken, the minimum, maximum and mean values on each
band, and the full variance/covariance matrix associated with that multispectral image band set for that class. To examine
the contents of this file in detail, use SIGCOMP. Note also that the SEPSIG module can be used to assess the distinctive-
ness of your set of signatures.

3. Classify the Image

The third (and sometimes final) step is to classify the image. This can be done with any of the hard or soft classifiers
described below. Clearly there are many choices here. However, here are some tips:
- the parallelepiped procedure (the PIPED module) is included for pedagogic reasons only. Generally it should not be
used.
- when training sites are known to be strong (i.e., well-defined with a large sample size), the MAXLIKE procedure should
be used. However, if there are concerns about the quality of the training sites (particularly their uniformity), the MIND-
IST procedure with standardized distances should be used. The MINDIST module with the standardized distances
option is a very strong classifier and one that is less susceptible to training site problems than MAXLIKE.
- the Fisher Classifier can perform exceptionally well when there are not substantial areas of unknown classes and when
the training sites are strongly representative of their informational classes.

2. The FUZSIG module offers an interesting, but quite different logic for extracting signatures from impure training sites. This is discussed further in
the section on fuzzy signatures below. The ENDSIG module also creates signatures for use with the UNMIX classifier.

3. Each SIG file also has a corresponding SPF file that contains the actual pixel values used to create the SIG file. It is used only by HISTO in displaying
histograms of signatures.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 187

- for sub-pixel classification (i.e., analysis of mixture components), use one of the the UNMIX soft classifiers. The other
soft classifiers are primarily used as part of an In-Process Classification Assessment (IPCA) process (see the next stage).
They are also used in cases where GIS modeling is envisioned as a significant part of the classification process.
- KNN is a k-nearest neighbor classifier and KMEANS classifies according to the K-means clustering technique.
- IDRISI provides a variety of machine-learning classifiers for supervised classification. MLP undertakes the classification
of remotely sensed imagery through the artificial neural network multi-layer perceptron technique. SOM undertakes either
a supervised and unsupervised classification of remotely sensed imagery through the artificial neural network Self-Orga-
nizing Map technique. Fuzzy ARTMAP undertakes either a supervised and unsupervised classification of remotely sensed
imagery through the artificial neural network Fuzzy ARTMAP technique. And CTA undertakes the classification of
remotely sensed imagery through Classification Tree Analysis with automatic and manual pruning options.
- when a new area is first being considered for classification, consider using CLUSTER as a precursor to the selection of
training sites.

4. In-Process Classification Assessment (IPCA)

The key concern that an analyst faces in classification is the accuracy of the classification process. Traditionally this is
addressed through an accuracy assessment, as described in a later section below. However, with the soft classifiers in
IDRISI, an In-Process Classification Assessment (IPCA) procedure is feasible. As the name implies, this is an assessment that is
undertaken as part of an iterative process of classification improvement, and typically involves the comparison of a group
of classified results.
IPCA is very much an experimental procedure at this time, and requires knowledge of the soft classification procedures
that are discussed later in this chapter. However, the concept is quite simple. The process involves a comparison of the
results of a hard classifier and its corresponding soft classifier. For example, for the MINDIST hard classifier, the FUZ-
CLASS soft classifier (un-normalized option) would be used, whereas for the MAXLIKE hard classifier, the BELCLASS
soft classifier would be used. Each of these soft classifiers outputs a classification uncertainty image which expresses the
degree of difficulty the classifier has in determining a single class to assign to a pixel. Areas of high uncertainty are clearly
those that need work in terms of refining the classification.
There are two basic reasons for high uncertainty on the part of a classifier. The first is that the pixel contains a mixture of
more basic categories and thus cannot easily be assigned to just one interpretation. The other is that the pixel doesn't look
like any of the signatures provided.4
In the case where uncertainty is high because of the presence of a mixture of classes, two possibilities exist. Either the
training data are poor, and thus not adequately distinctive to separate these two classes, or the mixture class truly exists at
the resolution of the analysis. Significant mixtures should be examined carefully, preferably with a ground visit to resolve
the problem. Then consider either developing new training sites for the confused classes, or consider adding a new class,
with an appropriate training site, to represent the indistinguishable mixture.
Note that in cases where the ultimate classifier is MAXLIKE, the MAXSET classifier (as described in the section on
Unsupervised Classification below) can be used as a very efficient means of identifying mixtures in combination with the
classification uncertainty image from BELCLASS.
In cases where uncertainty is high because there is no strong match to any of the training sites provided, a ground truth
visit should be considered to determine the identity of the missed class. This class should then be added with an appropri-
ate training site.

4. This second possibility does not exist if one uses the BAYCLASS module or FUZCLASS with normalized output. Both of these soft classification
procedures assume that the classes considered are the only ones possible. It is for this reason that the BELCLASS procedure is recommended for com-
parison to MAXLIKE and the FUZCLASS with un-normalized output is recommended for comparison to MINDIST.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 188

Clearly the purpose of IPCA is to identify where problems in the classification process are occurring and to rectify them
through an iterative process. Progressive refining or redefining of training sites and subsequent reclassification of the
image would be followed by further assessment.

5. Generalization
The fifth stage is optional and frequently omitted. After classification, there may be many cases of isolated pixels that
belong to a class that differs from the majority that surround them. This may be an accurate description of reality, but for
mapping purposes, a very common post-processing operation is to generalize the image and remove these isolated pixels.
This is done by passing a mode filter over the result (using the FILTER module in IDRISI). The mode filter replaces each
pixel with the most frequently occurring class within a 3x3 window around each pixel. This effectively removes class
patches of one or a few pixels and replaces them with the most common neighboring class. Use this operation with
care—it is a generalization that truly alters the classified result.

6. Accuracy Assessment
The final stage of the classification process usually involves an accuracy assessment. Traditionally this is done by generat-
ing a random set of locations (using the stratified random option of the SAMPLE module in IDRISI) to visit on the
ground for verification of the true landcover type. A simple values file is then made to record the true landcover class (by
its integer index number) for each of these locations. This values file is then used with the vector file of point locations to
create a raster image of the true classes found at the locations examined. This raster image is then compared to the classi-
fied map using ERRMAT. ERRMAT tabulates the relationship between true landcover classes and the classes as mapped.
It also tabulates errors of omission and errors of commission as well as the overall proportional error.
The size of the sample (n) to be used in accuracy assessment can be estimated using the following formula:
n = z2 pq / e2
where
z is the standard score required for the desired level of confidence (e.g., 1.96 for 95% confidence, 2.58 for 99%,
etc.) in the assessment
e is the desired confidence interval (e.g., 0.01 for ±10%)
p is the a priori estimated proportional error, and
q=1-p

Hard Classifiers
The hard classifiers are so named because they all reach a hard (i.e., unequivocal) decision about the class to which each
pixel belongs. They are all based on a logic that describes the expected position of a class (based on training site data) in
what is known as band space, and then gauging the position of each pixel to be classified in the same band space relative to
these class positions. From this perspective, the easiest classifier to understand is the MINDIST procedure.

Minimum-Distance-to-Means
The MINDIST module implements a Minimum-Distance-to-Means classifier. Based on training site data, MINDIST charac-
terizes each class by its mean position on each band. For example, if only two bands were to be used, Figure 1 might char-

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 189

acterize the positions of a set of known classes as determined from the training site data.
255

Sand
Deciduous

Band 2
Conifer = Class Mean

Water Wet Soil

0 255
Figure 1 Band 1

Here each axis indicates reflectance on one of the bands. Thus, using the mean reflectance on these bands as X,Y coordi-
nates, the position of the mean can be placed in this band space. Similarly, the position of any unclassified pixel can also
be placed in this space by using its reflectance on the two bands as its coordinates.
To classify an unknown pixel, MINDIST then examines the distance from that pixel to each class and assigns it the iden-
tity of the nearest class. For example, the unclassified pixel shown in Figure 2 would be assigned the "sand" class since this
is the class mean to which it is closest.

255

Sand
Deciduous
Band 2

Unclassified pixel
Conifer

Water Wet Soil

0 255
Figure 2 Band 1

Despite the simplicity of this approach, it actually performs quite well. It is reasonably fast and can employ a maximum
distance threshold which allows for any pixels that are unlike any of the given classes to be left unclassified. However, the
approach does suffer from problems related to signature variability. By characterizing each class by its mean band reflec-
tances only, it has no knowledge of the fact that some classes are inherently more variable than others. This, in turn, can
lead to misclassification. For example, consider the case of a highly variable deciduous class and a very consistent sand
class in classifying the unclassified pixel in Figure 3.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 190

 255

Sand
Deciduous

Band 2
Unclassified pixel
Conifer

Water Wet Soil

0 255
Figure 3 Band 1

The circles in this figure illustrate the variability of each of these two classes. If we assume that these circles represent a
distance of two standard deviations from the mean, we can see that the pixel lies within the variability range of the decid-
uous category, and outside that of sand. However, we can also see that it is closer to the mean for sand. In this case, the
classifier would misclassify the pixel as sand when it should really be considered to be deciduous forest.
This problem of variability can be overcome if the concept of distance is changed to that of standard scores. This trans-
formation can be accomplished with the following equation:
standardized distance = ( original distance - mean ) / standard deviation
The MINDIST procedure in IDRISI offers this option of using standardized distances, which is highly recommended. In
the example above, the pixel would be correctly classified as deciduous since its standardized distance from the mean for
deciduous would be less than 2 (perhaps 1.95 in this illustration), while that for sand would be greater than 2 (probably
close to 4 in this illustration).
Our experience with MINDIST has been that it can perform very well when standardized distances are used. Indeed, it
often outperforms a maximum likelihood procedure whenever training sites have high variability.

Parallelepiped
The PIPED module implements the parallelepiped procedure for image classification. The parallelepiped procedure char-
acterizes each class by the range of expected values on each band. This range may be defined by the minimum and maxi-
mum values found in the training site data for that class, or (more typically) by some standardized range of deviations
from the mean (e.g., ± 2 standard deviations). With multispectral image data, these ranges form an enclosed box-like poly-
gon of expected values known as a parallelepiped. Unclassified pixels are then given the class of any parallelepiped box they
fall within. If a pixel does not fall within any box, it is left unassigned. Figure 4 illustrates this effect.

255

Sand
Deciduous
Band 2

Conifer

Water Wet Soil

0 255
Figure 4 Band 1

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 191

This classifier has the advantage of speed and the ability to take into account the differing variability of classes. In addi-
tion, the rectangular shape accommodates the fact that variability may be different along different bands. However, the
classifier generally performs rather poorly because of the potential for overlap of the parallelepipeds. For example, the
conifer and deciduous parallelepipeds overlap in this illustration, leaving a zone of ambiguity in the overlap area. Clearly,
any choice of a class for pixels falling within the overlap is arbitrary.
It may seem that the problem of overlapping parallelepipeds would be unlikely. However, they are extremely common
because of the fact that image data are often highly correlated between bands. This leads to a cigar-shaped distribution of
likely values for a given class that is very poorly approximated by a parallelepiped as shown in Figure 5.

255

Overlap Zone
Band 2

Non-Representative Zone

0 255
Figure 5 Band 1

Clearly the MINDIST procedure would not encounter this problem, since the line of separation between these classes
would fall in between these two distributions. However, in this context of correlation between bands (which is virtually
guaranteed), the parallelepiped procedure produces both zones of overlap and highly non-representative areas that really
should not be included in the class. In general, then, the parallelepiped procedure should be avoided, despite the fact that
it is the fastest of the supervised classifiers.5

Maximum Likelihood
To compensate for the main deficiencies of both the Parallelepiped and Minimim-Distance-to-Means procedures, the
Maximum Likelihood procedure, provided by the MAXLIKE module in IDRISI, is used. The Maximum Likelihood pro-
cedure is based on Bayesian probability theory. Using the information from a set of training sites, MAXLIKE uses the
mean and variance/covariance data of the signatures to estimate the posterior probability that a pixel belongs to each
class.
In many ways, the MAXLIKE procedure is similar to MINDIST with the standardized distance option. The difference is
that MAXLIKE accounts for intercorrelation between bands. By incorporating information about the covariance
between bands as well as their inherent variance, MAXLIKE produces what can be conceptualized as an elliptical zone of
characterization of the signature. In actuality, it calculates the posterior probability of belonging to each class, where the
probability is highest at the mean position of the class, and falls off in an elliptical pattern away from the mean, as shown
in Figure 6.

5. In the early days of image processing when computing resources were poor, this classifier was commonly used as a quick look classifier because of its
speed.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 192

 255

Deciduous Sand

Band 2
Conifer

Water Wet Soil

0 255
Figure 6 Band 1

Linear Discriminant Analysis (Fisher Classifier)

The final classifier to be discussed in this section is more difficult to describe graphically. The FISHER classifier conducts
a linear discriminant analysis of the training site data to form a set of linear functions that express the degree of support
for each class. The assigned class for each pixel is then that class which receives the highest support after evaluation of all
functions. These functions have a form similar to that of a multivariate linear regression equation, where the independent
variables are the image bands, and the dependent variable is the measure of support. In fact, the equations are calculated
such that they maximize the variance between classes and minimize the variance within classes. The number of equations
will be equal to the number of bands, each describing a hyperplane of support. The intersections of these planes then
form the boundaries between classes in band space.
Of the four hard supervised classifiers, MAXLIKE and FISHER are clearly the most powerful. They are also, not surpris-
ingly, the slowest to calculate. However, with high-quality (i.e., homogenous) training sites, they are both capable of pro-
ducing excellent results.
IDRISI provides a variety of machine-learning classifiers, some which provide both hard and soft classification outputs.
MLP undertakes the classification of remotely sensed imagery through the artificial neural network multi-layer perceptron
technique. SOM undertakes either a supervised and unsupervised classification of remotely sensed imagery through the
artificial neural network Self-Organizing Map technique. Fuzzy ARTMAP undertakes either a supervised and unsuper-
vised classification of remotely sensed imagery through the artificial neural network Fuzzy ARTMAP technique. And
CTA undertakes the classification of remotely sensed imagery through Classification Tree Analysis with automatic and
manual pruning optoins

Soft Classifiers
Unlike hard classifiers, soft classifiers defer making a definitive judgment about the class membership of any pixel in favor
of a group of statements about the degree of membership of that pixel in each of the possible classes. Like traditional
supervised classification procedures, each uses training site information for the purpose of classifying each image pixel.
However, unlike traditional hard classifiers, the output is not a single classified landcover map, but rather a set of images
(one per class) that express for each pixel the degree of membership in the class in question. In fact, each expresses the
degree to which each pixel belongs to the set identified by a signature according to one of the following set membership
metrics:
BAYCLASS based on Bayesian probability theory,
BELCLASS based on Dempster-Shafer theory,
MAHALCLASS based on Mahalanobis distance,
FUZCLASS based on Fuzzy Set theory, and

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 193

UNMIX based on the Linear Mixture model.
It is important to recognize that each of these falls into a general category of what are known as Fuzzy Measures (Dubois
and Prade, 1982) of which Fuzzy Sets is only one instance. Fuzziness can arise for many reasons and not just because a set
is itself fuzzy. For example, measurement error can lead to uncertainty about the class membership of a pixel even when
the classes (sets) are crisply defined. It is for this reason that we have adopted the term soft—it simply recognizes that the
class membership of a pixel is frequently uncertain for reasons that are varied in origin.

Image Group Files

Since the output of each of these soft classifiers is a set of images, each also outputs a raster image group file (.rgf). This
can be used with cursor inquiry to examine the set membership values for a pixel in each class simultaneously in either
numeric or graph form (see the on-line Help System section on Display). Note that the classification uncertainty image
described below is also included in each group file produced.

Classification Uncertainty
In addition to these set membership images, each of these soft classifiers outputs an image that expresses the degree of
classification uncertainty it has about the class membership of any pixel. Classification uncertainty measures the degree to
which no class clearly stands out above the others in the assessment of class membership of a pixel. In the case of BAY-
CLASS, BELCLASS and FUZCLASS, it is calculated as follows:
sum
max – ----------
n
ClassificationUncertainty = 1 – ----------------------------
1---
1–
n
where
max = the maximum set membership value for that pixel
sum = the sum of the set membership values for that pixel
n = the number of classes (signatures) considered
The logic of this measure is as follows:
- The numerator of the second term expresses the difference between the maximum set membership value and the total
dispersion of the set membership values over all classes.
- The denominator of the second term expresses the extreme case of the difference between a maximum set membership
value of 1 (and thus total commitment to a single class) and the total dispersion of that commitment over all classes.
- By taking the ratio of these two quantities, one develops a measure that expresses the degree of commitment to a spe-
cific class relative to the largest possible commitment that can be made. Classification uncertainty is thus the complement
of this ratio.
In spirit, the measure of uncertainty developed here is similar to the entropy measure used in Information Theory. How-
ever, it differs in that it is concerned not only with the degree of dispersion of set membership values between classes, but
also the total amount of commitment present. Following are some examples that can clarify this concept.
Examples
Assuming a case where three classes are being evaluated, consider those with the following allocations of set membership:
(0.0 0.0 0.0) Classification Uncertainty = 1.00
(0.0 0.0 0.1) Classification Uncertainty = 0.90
(0.1 0.1 0.1) Classification Uncertainty = 1.00

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 194

(0.3 0.3 0.3) Classification Uncertainty = 1.00
(0.6 0.3 0.0) Classification Uncertainty = 0.55
(0.6 0.3 0.1) Classification Uncertainty = 0.60
(0.9 0.1 0.0) Classification Uncertainty = 0.15
(0.9 0.05 0.05) Classification Uncertainty = 0.15
(1.0 0.0 0.0) Classification Uncertainty = 0.00
With UNMIX, however, classification uncertainty is measured as the residual error after calculation of the fractions of
constituent members. This will be discussed further below.

BAYCLASS and Bayesian Probability Theory

BAYCLASS is a direct extension of the MAXLIKE module. It outputs a separate image to express the posterior probabil-
ity of belonging to each considered class according to Bayes' Theorum:
p(e h) ⋅ p(h)
p ( h e ) = ------------------------------------------
∑ p ( e hi ) ⋅ p ( hi )
i

where :
p(h|e) = the probability of the hypothesis being true given the evidence (posterior probability)
p(e|h) = the probability of finding that evidence given the hypothesis being true
p(h) = the probability of the hypothesis being true regardless of the evidence (prior probability)
In this context, the variance/covariance matrix derived from training site data is that which allows one to assess the multi-
variate conditional probability p(e|h). This quantity is then modified by the prior probability of the hypothesis being true
and then normalized by the sum of such considerations over all classes. This latter step is important in that it makes the
assumption that the classes considered are the only classes that are possible as interpretations for the pixel under consid-
eration. Thus even weak support for a specific interpretation may appear to be strong if it is the strongest of the possible
choices given.
This posterior probability p(h|e) is the same quantity that MAXLIKE evaluates to determine the most likely class, and
indeed, if the output images of BAYCLASS were to be submitted directly to HARDEN, the result would be identical to
that of MAXLIKE. In essence, BAYCLASS is a confident classifier. It assumes that the only possible interpretation of a
pixel is one of those classes for which training site data have been provided. It therefore admits to no ignorance. As a
result, lack of evidence for an alternative hypothesis constitutes support for the hypotheses that remain. In this context, a
pixel for which reflectance data only very weakly support a particular class is treated as unequivocally belonging to that
class (p = 1.0) if no support exists for any other interpretation.
The prime motivation for the use of BAYCLASS is sub-pixel classification—i.e., to determine the extent to which mixed
pixels exist in the image and their relative proportions. It is also of interest to observe the underlying basis of the MAX-
LIKE procedure. However, for In-Process Classification Assessment (IPCA), the BELCLASS procedure is generally preferred
because of its explicit recognition that some degree of ignorance may surround the classification process.
In the context of mixture analysis, the probabilities of BAYCLASS are interpreted directly as statements of proportional
representation. Thus if a pixel has posterior probabilities of belonging to deciduous and conifer of 0.68 and 0.32 respec-
tively, this would be interpreted as evidence that the pixel contains 68% deciduous species and 32% conifers. Note, how-
ever, that this requires several important assumptions to be true. First, it requires that the classes for which training site
data have been provided are exhaustive (i.e., that there are no other possible interpretations for that pixel). Second, it
assumes that the conditional probability distributions p(e|h) do not overlap in the case of pure pixels. In practice, these
conditions may be difficult to meet.
In testing at Clark Labs, we have found that while BAYCLASS is effective in determining the constituent members of

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 195

mixed pixels, it is often not so effective in determining the correct proportions. Rather, we have found that procedures
based on the Linear Mixture model (UNMIX) perform considerably better in this respect. However, Linear Spectral
Unmixing has its own special limitations. Thus, we favor a hybrid approach using the better qualities of Bayesian decom-
position and Linear Spectral Unmixing, as will be discussed below.

BELCLASS and Dempster-Shafer Theory

BELCLASS is probably the most complex of the soft classifier group in its underlying theory. It is based on Dempster-
Shafer theory—a variant of Bayesian probability theory that explicitly recognizes the possibility of ignorance. Dempster-
Shafer theory is explained more fully in the Decision Support: Uncertainty Management chapter. However, a good
introduction can be provided by considering the output from BAYCLASS.
Consider a classification where training sites have been developed for the classes [conifer], [deciduous], [grass], [urban],
and [water]. If a pixel shows some degree of similarity to [conifer] and to no others, BAYCLASS will assign a value of 1.0
to that class and 0.0 to all others. In fact, it will do so even if the actual support for the [conifer] class is low, because
Bayesian probability theory does not recognize the concept of ignorance. It assumes that lack of evidence for a hypothesis
constitutes evidence against that hypothesis. Thus, in this example, the absence of evidence for any combination of [decid-
uous grass urban water] is therefore interpreted as evidence that it must be [conifer], no matter how weak the direct evi-
dence for [conifer] actually is (so long as it is greater than 0).
In contrast to this, Dempster-Shafer theory does not assume that it has full information, but accepts that the state of one's
knowledge may be incomplete. The absence of evidence about a hypothesis is treated as just that—lack of evidence.
Unlike Bayesian probability theory, it is not assumed that this, therefore, constitutes evidence against that hypothesis. As a
consequence, there can be a difference between one's belief in an hypothesis and one's attendant disbelief in that same
hypothesis!
In the language of Dempster-Shafer theory, the degree to which evidence provides concrete support for an hypothesis is
known as belief, and the degree to which the evidence does not refute that hypothesis is known as plausibility. The differ-
ence between these two is then known as a belief interval, which acts as a measure of uncertainty about a specific hypothesis.
Returning to the previous example, if the evidence supports [conifer] to the degree 0.3 and all other classes to the degree
0.0, Bayesian probability would assign a posterior probability of 1.0 to [conifer]. However, Dempster-Shafer theory would
assign a belief of 0.3 to [conifer] and a plausibility of 1.0, yielding a belief interval of 0.7. Furthermore, it would assign a
belief of 0.0 to all other classes and a plausibility of 0.7.
If a second piece of evidence were then to be considered, and it was found that this evidence supported [urban] to a
degree of 0.6 and gave no support to any other hypothesis, this would affect the hypothesis [conifer] by lowering its plau-
sibility to 0.4. At this point, then, belief in [conifer] is 0.3 and plausibility is 0.4. Thus our uncertainty about this class is
very low (0.1).
The combination of evidence is generally somewhat more complex than these contrived examples would suggest and uses
a logic known as Dempster's Rule. The Belief module in IDRISI implements this rule. However, BELCLASS is less con-
cerned with the combination of evidence than it is with decomposing the evidence to determine the degree of support
(expressed as belief or plausibility) for each of the classes for which training data have been supplied.6
In addition to the concepts of belief and plausibility, the logic of Dempster-Shafer theory can also express the degree to
which the state of one's knowledge does not distinguish between the hypotheses. This is known as ignorance.
Ignorance expresses the incompleteness of one's knowledge as a measure of the degree to which we cannot distinguish
between any of the hypotheses. Using the example above, ignorance thus expresses one's commitment to the indistin-
guishable set of all classes [conifer deciduous grass urban water]—the inability to tell to which class the pixel belongs.

6. The logic of the decomposition process is detailed in the module description for BELCLASS in the on-line Help System.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 196

In normal use, Dempster-Shafer theory requires that the hypotheses (classes) under consideration be mutually exclusive
and exhaustive. However, in developing BELCLASS, we felt that there was a strong case to be made for non-exhaustive
categories—that the pixel may indeed belong to some unknown class, for which a training site has not been provided. In
order to do this we need to add an additional category to every analysis called [other], and assign any incompleteness in
one's knowledge to the indistinguishable set of all possible classes (including this added one)—e.g., [conifer deciduous
grass urban water other]. This yields a result which is consistent with Dempster-Shafer theory, but which recognizes the
possibility that there may be classes present about which we have no knowledge.
Defining ignorance as a commitment to the indistinguishable set of all classes suggests that it may have some relationship
to the classification uncertainty image produced by BAYCLASS. The classification uncertainty image of BAYCLASS
expresses the uncertainty the classifier has in assigning class membership to a pixel. Uncertainty is highest whenever there
is no class that clearly stands out above the others in the assessment of class membership for a pixel. We have found that
in the context of BELCLASS, this measure of uncertainty is almost identical to that of Dempster-Shafer ignorance. As a
result, we have modified the output of the classification uncertainty image of BELCLASS slightly so that it outputs true
Dempster-Shafer ignorance.7
The operation of BELCLASS is essentially identical to that of BAYCLASS and thus also MAXLIKE. Two choices of out-
put are given: beliefs or plausibilities. In either case, a separate image of belief or plausibility is produced for each class. In
addition, a classification uncertainty image is produced which can be interpreted in the same manner as the classification
uncertainty image produced by all of the soft classifiers (but which is truly a measure of Dempster-Shafer ignorance).
The prime motivation for the use of BELCLASS is to check for the quality of one's training site data and the possible
presence of unknown classes during In-Process Classification Assessment. In cases where one believes that one or more
unknown classes exist (and thus that some portion of total ignorance arises because of this presence of an unknown
class), the BELCLASS routine should be used. BELCLASS does this by implicitly adding an [other] class to the set of
classes being considered. This is a theoretical concession to the mechanics of the BELCLASS process and will not be
directly encountered by the user.
Comparing the output of BELCLASS with BAYCLASS, you will notice a major difference. Looking at the images pro-
duced by BAYCLASS, it will appear as if your training sites are strong. BAYCLASS is a very confident classifier (perhaps
overly confident) since it assumes no ignorance. BELCLASS, however, appears to be a very reserved classifier. Here we
see a result in which all of the uncertainties in our information become apparent. It does not presume to have full infor-
mation, but explicitly recognizes the possibility that one or more unknown classes may exist.

BELCALC and MAXSET

In BELCLASS, concern is directed to the degree of membership that each pixel exhibits for each of the classes for which
training data have been provided. However, the logic of Dempster-Shafer theory recognizes a whole hierarchy of classes,
made up of the indistinguishable combinations of these basic classes. For example, given basic classes (called singletons) of
[conifer] [deciduous] [grass], Dempster-Shafer theory recognizes the existence of all of the following classes:8
[conifer]
[deciduous]
[grass]
[conifer deciduous]
[conifer grass]
[deciduous grass]

7. The filename for the classification uncertainty image in BELCLASS is composed by concatenating the prefix supplied by the user and the letter string
"clu".

8. Clearly these are sets of classes. However, since evidence may support one of these sets without further distinction about which members of the set
are supported, the set itself can be thought of as a class.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 197

 [conifer deciduous grass]
Dempster-Shafer theory also allows one to make two different kinds of assessments about each of these classes. The first
is clearly belief. The second is known as a Basic Probability Assignment (BPA). Both require further explanation.
When evidence provides some degree of commitment to one of these non-singleton classes and not to any of its constit-
uents separately, that expression of commitment is known as a Basic Probability Assignment (BPA). The BPA of a non-
singleton class thus represents the degree of support for the presence of one or more of its constituents, but without the
ability to tell which.
Given this understanding of a BPA, belief in a non-singleton class is then calculated as the sum of BPAs for that class and
all sub-classes. For example to calculate the belief in the class [conifer deciduous], you would add the BPAs for [conifer
deciduous], [conifer] and [deciduous]. Belief is thus a broader concept than a BPA. It represents the total commitment to
all members of a set combined.
In the context of remote sensing, these non-singleton classes are of interest in that they represent mixtures, and thus
might be used for a more detailed examination of sub-pixel classification. However, the sheer number of such classes
makes it impractical to have a software module that outputs all possible classes. For a set of n singleton classes, the total
number of classes in the entire hierarchy is (2n -1). Thus in a case where 16 landcover classes are under consideration,
65,535 classes are included in the full hierarchy—over two terabytes of output for a full Landsat scene!
As it turns out, however, only a small number of these non-singleton classes contain any significant information in a typi-
cal application. These can very effectively be determined by running the MAXSET module. MAXSET is a hard classifier
that assigns to each pixel the class with the greatest degree of commitment from the full Dempster-Shafer class hierarchy.
The significance of these mixtures can further be determined by running the AREA module on the MAXSET result.
Then BELCALC can be used to calculate the mixture BPA that underlies the MAXSET result.

Belief
Both BELCLASS and BELCALC deconstruct the evidence to infer belief and plausibility for each class. One of the moti-
vations for doing so is that it allows the user to combine ancillary information with that determined from the reflectance
data. New evidence can be combined with existing knowledge with the Belief module. Belief is described more fully in the
chapter on Decision Support: Uncertainty Management, and is used in exactly the same manner for the data
described here.

FUZCLASS and Fuzzy Set Theory

The third soft classifier in IDRISI is FUZCLASS. As the name suggests, this classifier is based on the underlying logic of
Fuzzy Sets. Just as BAYCLASS and BELCLASS are based on the fundamental logic of MAXLIKE, FUZCLASS is based
on the underlying logic of MINDIST—i.e., fuzzy set membership is determined from the distance of pixels from signa-
ture means as determined by MAKESIG.
There are two important parameters that need to be set when using FUZCLASS. The first is the z-score distance where
fuzzy membership becomes zero. The logic of this is as follows.
It is assumed that any pixel at the same location in band space as the class mean (as determined by running MAKESIG)
has a membership grade of 1.0. Then as we move away from this position, the fuzzy set membership grade progressively
decreases until it eventually reaches zero at the distance specified. This distance is specified as a standard score (z-score)
to facilitate its interpretation. Thus, specifying a distance of 1.96 would force 5% of the data cells to have a fuzzy member-
ship of 0, while 2.58 would force 1% to have a value of 0.
The second required parameter setting is whether or not the membership values should be normalized. Normalization
makes the assumption (like BAYCLASS) that the classes are exhaustive, and thus that the membership values for all
classes for a single pixel must sum to 1.0. This is strictly required to generate true fuzzy set membership grades. However,
as a counterpart to BELCLASS, the option is provided for the calculation of un-normalized values. As was suggested ear-

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 198

lier, this is particularly important in the context of In-Process Classification Assessment for evaluation of a MINDIST-
based classification.

UNMIX and the Linear Mixture Model

The Linear Mixture Model assumes that the mixture of materials within a pixel will lead to an aggregate signature that is
an area-weighted average of the signatures of the constituent classes. Thus if two parent materials (called end members in
the language of Linear Spectral Unmixing) had signatures of 24, 132, 86 and 56, 144, 98 on three bands, a 50/50 mixture
of the two should yield a signature of 40, 138, 92. Using this simple model, it is possible to estimate the proportions of
end member constituents within each pixel by solving a set of simultaneous equations. For example, if we were to encoun-
ter a pixel with the signature 32, 135, 89, and assumed that the pixel contained a mixture of the two end members men-
tioned we could set up the following set of equations to solve:

f1(24) + f2(56) = 32

f1(132) + f2(144) = 135

f1(86) + f2(98) = 89

where f1 and f2 represent the fractions (proportions) of the two end members. Such a system of simultaneous equations
can be solved using matrix algebra to yield a best fit estimate of f1 and f2 (0.75 and 0.25 in this example). In addition, the
sum of squared residuals between the fitted signature values and the actual values can be used as a measure of the uncer-
tainty in the fit.
The primary limitation of this approach is that the number of end members cannot exceed the number of bands. This can
be a severe limitation in the case of SPOT imagery, but of little consequence with hyperspectral imagery. IDRISI thus
offers three approaches (in UNMIX) to Linear Spectral Unmixing:
1. The standard linear spectral unmixing approach (as indicated above) for cases where sufficient bands are available.
2. A probability guided option for cases where insufficient bands exist. Although the total number of possible end mem-
bers may be large, the number that coexist within a single pixel is typically small (e.g., 2-3). This approach thus uses a first
stage based on the BAYCLASS module to determine the most likely constituents (up to the number of bands), with a sec-
ond stage linear spectral unmixing to determine their fractions. Experiments at Clark Labs have shown this to produce
excellent results.
3. An exhaustive search option for cases where insufficient bands exist. In this instance, one specifies the number of con-
stituents to consider (up to the total number of bands). It then tests all possible combinations of that many end members
and reports the fractions of that combination with the lowest sum of squared residuals. This approach is considerably
slower than the other options. In addition, experiments at Clark Labs have shown that this approach yields inferior results
to the probability guided procedure in cases where the end member signatures are drawn from training sites. Pure end
member signatures, created with ENDSIG, should be used.
End member signatures are specified using standard signature (.sig) files, created using either MAKESIG or ENDSIG.
The former is used in the case where end members are derived from training sites, while the latter is used in cases where
pure end member values are known (such as from a spectral library). Note that only the mean value on each band is used
from these signature files—variance/covariance data are ignored.

Accommodating Ambiguous (Fuzzy) Signatures in Supervised Classification

All of the discussions to this point have assumed that the signature data were gathered from pure examples of each class.
However, it sometimes happens that this is impossible. For example, it might be difficult to find a pure and uniform stand
of white pine forest, because differences in tree spacing permit differing levels of the understory material (perhaps a mix-
ture of soil, dead needles and ferns) to show through the canopy. From the perspective of a single pixel, therefore, there

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 199

are different grades of membership in the white pine class, ranging from 0.0, where no white pine trees are present within
the pixel to 1.0 where a dense closed canopy of white pine exists (such as a plantation). Thus, even though the white pine
set (class) is itself inherently crisp, our gathering of data by pixels that span several to many meters across forces our
detection of that set to be necessarily fuzzy in character.
Wang (1990) has cited examples of the above problem to postulate that the logic of class membership decision problems
in remote sensing is that of Fuzzy Sets. However, as indicated earlier in this chapter, while this problem truly belongs in
the realm of Fuzzy Measures, it is not strictly one of Fuzzy Sets in most cases. For example, the white pine class men-
tioned earlier is not a fuzzy set—it is unambiguous. It is only our difficulty in detecting it free of other cover types that
leads to ambiguity. The problem is thus one of imprecision that can best be handled by a Bayesian or Dempster-Shafer
procedure (which is, in fact, ultimately the procedure used by Wang, 1990).
As pointed out earlier, ambiguity can arise from a variety of sources, and not just fuzzy sets. However, the special case of
resolution and mixed pixels is one that is commonly encountered in the classification process. As a result, it is not unusual
that even the best signatures have some degree of inter-class mixing. In such cases, it is desirable to use a procedure for
signature development that can recognize this ambiguity. Wang (1990) has proposed an interesting procedure for signa-
ture development in this context that we have implemented in a module named FUZSIG. As the name suggests, the mod-
ule is a variant of MAKESIG for the special case of ambiguous (i.e., fuzzy) training site data. However, we use the
association with fuzzy in the more general sense of fuzzy measures. The logic of the procedure is built around the concept
of mixtures and should be restricted to instances where the source of the fuzziness is accommodated.
The use of FUZSIG requires that a specific sequence of operations be followed.

1. Define Training Sites

This stage proceeds much the same as usual: training sites are digitized using the on-screen digitizing facility. However,
there is no requirement that training sites be as homogeneous as possible—only that the relative proportions of cover
types within each training site pixel can be estimated.

2. Rasterize the Training Sites

Although this stage is not strictly necessary, it can make the next stage much easier if the training sites are collected into a
single raster image. This is done by running INITIAL to create a blank byte binary image (i.e., one initialized with zeros),
and then rasterizing the digitized polygons with RASTERVECTOR.

3. Create Fuzzy Partition Matrix in Database Workshop

The next step is to create a fuzzy partition matrix in Database Workshop. A fuzzy partition matrix indicates the membership
grades of each training site in each class. To do this, first set up a database with an integer identifier field and one field
(column) per information class in 4-byte real number format. Then put numeric identifiers in the ID field corresponding
to each of the training sites (or training site groups if more than one polygon is used per class). For N classes and M train-
ing sites, then, an N x M matrix is formed.
The next step is to fill out the fuzzy partition matrix with values to indicate the membership grades of each training site
(or training site group) in the candidate classes. This is best filled out by working across the columns of each row in turn.
Since each row represents a training site (or training site group), estimate the proportions of each class that occur within
the training site and enter that value (as a real number from 0.0 to 1.0). In this context, the numbers should add to 1.0
along each row, but typically will not along each column.
Once the fuzzy partition matrix is complete, use the Export as Values File option from the Database Workshop File menu
to create a series of values files, one for each class. Next create a series of raster images expressing the membership grades
for each class. To do so, in IDRISI use ASSIGN to assign each values file to the training site raster image created in the
previous step (this is the feature definition image for ASSIGN). Name the output image for each class using a name that
is a concatenation of the letters "fz" plus the name of the class. For example, if the class is named "conifer", the output

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 200

produced with the ASSIGN operation would be named "fzconifer." This "fz" prefix is a requirement for the next stage.

4. Extract Fuzzy Signatures

The next stage is to create the fuzzy signatures. This is done with the FUZSIG module. The operation of FUZSIG is
identical to MAKESIG. You will need to specify the name of the file that defines your signatures (if you followed the
steps above, this will be the image file you created in Step 2), the number of bands to use in the signature development,
the names of the bands and the names of the signatures to be created. It is very important, however, that the signature
names you specify coordinate with the names of the fuzzy membership grade images you created in Step 3. Continuing
with the previous example, if you specify a signature name of "conifer", it will expect to find an image named "fzconifer"
in your working directory. Similarly, a signature named "urban" would be associated with a fuzzy membership grade image
named "fzurban."
The output from FUZSIG is a set of signature files (.sig) of identical format to those output from MAKESIG. FUZSIG
gives each pixel a weight proportional to its membership grade in the determination of the mean, variance and covariance
of each band for each class (see Wang, 1990). Thus a pixel that is predominantly composed of conifers will have a large
weight in the determination of the conifer signature, but only a low weight in determining the signature for other constit-
uents.
Because these signature files are of identical format to those produced by MAKESIG, they can be used with any of the
classifiers supported by IDRISI, both hard and soft. However, there are some important points to note about these files:
- The minimum and maximum reflectances on each band cannot meaningfully be evaluated using the weighting proce-
dure of FUZSIG. As a consequence, the minimum and maximum value recorded are derived only from those pixels
where the membership grade for the signature of concern is greater than 0.5. This will typically produce a result that is
identical to the output of MAKESIG. However, it is recommended that if the PIPED classifier is to be used with these
signatures, the parallelepipeds should be defined by standard deviation units rather than the minimum and maximum data
values.
-Unlike MAKESIG, FUZSIG does not output a corresponding set of signature pixel files (.spf) to the signature files pro-
duced. However, since the signature files are simple ASCII text files, they can be examined in Edit. Their simple structure
is explained in the on-line Help System.

Hardeners
Once a soft classifier has been applied to a multispectral image set, the soft results can be re-evaluated to produce a hard
classification by using one of the following hardeners from the module HARDEN:

BAYCLASS
Using the results from BAYCLASS, this option determines the class possessing the maximum posterior probability for
each cell, given a set of probability images. Up to four levels of abstraction can be produced. The first is the most likely
class, just described. The second outputs the class of the second highest posterior probability, and so on, up to the fourth
highest probability.

BELCLASS
Using the results from BELCLASS, this option is essentially identical to the BAYCLASS hardener, except that it is
designed for use with Dempster-Shafer beliefs.

FUZCLASS
Using the results from FUZCLASS, this option is essentially identical to the BAYCLASS hardener, except that it is
designed for use with Fuzzy Sets.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 201

UNMIX
Using the results from UNMIX, this option is essentially identical to the BAYCLASS hardener, except that it is designed
for use with the mixture fractions produced by UNMIX.

MAHALCLASS
Using the results from MAHALCLASS, this option is essentially identical to the BAYCLASS hardener, except that it is
designed for use with the typicalities produced by MAHALCLASS.

Unsupervised Classification
General Logic
Unsupervised classification techniques share a common intent to uncover the major landcover classes that exist in the
image without prior knowledge of what they might be. Generically, such procedures fall into the realm of cluster analysis,
since they search for clusters of pixels with similar reflectance characteristics in a multi-band image. They are also all gen-
eralizations of landcover occurrence since they are concerned with uncovering the major landcover classes, and thus tend
to ignore those that have very low frequencies of occurrence. However, given these broad commonalities, there is little
else that they share in common. There are almost as many approaches to clustering as there are image processing systems
on the market. IDRISI is no exception. The primary unsupervised procedure IDRISI offers is unique (CLUSTER). How-
ever, IDRISI also offers a commonly used procedure (ISODATA) a variant on this (ISOCLUST). As implemented here,
ISOCLUST is really an iterative combination of unsupervised and supervised procedures, as is also the case with the third
procedure offered, MAXSET. IDRISI also has a true K-means clustering classifier. IDRISI offers additional supervised
modules that also have unsupervised capabilities: SOM and Fuzzy ARTMAP, act in this fashion.

CLUSTER
The CLUSTER module in IDRISI implements a special variant of a Histogram Peak cluster analysis technique (Richards,
1993). The procedure can best be understood from the perspective of a single band. If one had a single band of data, a
histogram of the reflectance values on that band would show a number of peaks and valleys. The peaks represent clusters
of more frequent values associated with commonly occurring cover types.
The CLUSTER procedure thus searches for peaks by looking for cases where the frequency is higher than that of its
immediate neighbors on either side. In the case of two bands, these peaks would be hills, while for three bands they would
be spheres, and so on. The concept can thus be extended to any number of bands. Once the peaks have been located,
each pixel in the image can then be assigned to its closest peak, with each such class being labeled as a cluster. It is the ana-
lyst's task to then identify the landcover class of each cluster by looking at the cluster image and comparing it to ground
features.
CLUSTER offers two levels of generalization. With the broad level of generalization, clusters must occur as distinct peaks
in the multi-dimensional histogram as outlined above. However, with the fine level of generalization, CLUSTER also rec-
ognizes shoulders in the curve as cluster peaks. Shoulders occur when two adjacent clusters overlap to a significant extent.
Peaks and shoulders are identified in the histogram shown in Figure 7.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 202

 Peaks Shoulder

Figure 7

The CLUSTER procedure in IDRISI has been modified and tailored to work with the special case of three bands as
described by an 8-bit color composite image created with the COMPOSITE module. The reason for doing so is based
largely on the fact that the procedure involved in creating an 8-bit color composite image is essentially the same as the
first stage of multi-dimensional histogram generation in the clustering algorithm. Since it is not uncommon to experiment
with various clusterings of a single multi-band image, speed is greatly enhanced by not repeating this histogram generation
step. While it may seem that the restriction of working with a three-band composite is limiting, bear in mind that the
underlying "bandness" of a multi-spectral image in the visible-through-middle infrared is rarely more than 2 or 3 (to con-
firm this, try running a Principal Components Analysis on a higher spectral resolution multi-band image set). In most
environments, creating composite images using the red and near infrared bands, along with a middle-infrared band (such
as Landsat Band 5) will essentially capture all of the information in the image.
Experience in using the CLUSTER routine has shown that it is fast and is capable of producing excellent results. How-
ever, we have learned that the following sequence of operations is particularly useful.
1. Run CLUSTER using the most informative bands available (generally, these include the red visible band, the near infra-
red band, and a middle infrared band—e.g., Landsat TM bands 3, 4 and 5 respectively). Use the linear stretch with satura-
tion option with 1% saturation the "fine generalization level" and " retain all clusters" options.
2. Display a histogram of this image. This histogram shows the frequency of pixels associated with each of the clusters
that can be located in the image. Many of these clusters have very small frequencies, and thus are somewhat insignificant.
Figure 8 presents an example of just such a histogram.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 203

 Figure 8

As can be seen, there are three clusters that dominate the image. Then there is a sharp break with a second group of
strong clusters through to Cluster 12. Then there is a third group that follows until Cluster 25, followed by a small group
of very insignificant clusters. Experience suggests then that a good generalization of the data would be to extract the first
12 clusters, with a more detailed analysis focusing on the first 25.
3. Once the number of clusters to be examined has been determined, run CLUSTER again, but this time choose the "fine
generalization" and set the "maximum number of clusters" to the number you determined (e.g., 12).
4. Display the resulting image with a qualitative color palette and then try to identify each of the clusters in turn. You can
use the interactive legend editing option to change the legend caption to record your interpretation. You may also wish to
change the color of that category to match a logical color scheme. Also, remember that you may highlight all pixels
belonging to a category by holding down the mouse button over a legend category color box.
5. At the end of the identification process, you may need to combine several categories. For example, the cluster analysis
may have uncovered several pavement categories, such as asphalt and concrete, that you may wish to merge into a single
category. The simplest way of doing this is to use Edit to create a values file containing the integer reassignments. This file
has two columns. The left column should record the original cluster number, while the right column should contain the
new category number to which it should be reassigned. After this file has been created, run ASSIGN to assign these new
category indices to the original cluster data.
The CLUSTER procedure in IDRISI is fast and remarkably effective in uncovering the basic landcover structure of the
image. It can also be used as a preliminary stage to a hybrid unsupervised/supervised process whereby the clusters are
used as the training sites to a second classification stage using the MAXLIKE classifier.9 This has the advantage of allow-
ing the use of a larger number of raw data bands, as well as providing a stronger classification stage of pixels to their most
similar cluster. In fact, it is this basic logic that underlies the ISOCLUST procedure described below.

ISOCLUST
The ISOCLUST module is an iterative self-organizing unsupervised classifier based on a concept similar to the well-
known ISODATA routine of Ball and Hall (1965) and cluster routines such as the H-means and K-means procedures.
The typical logic is as follows:

9. This is possible because MAKESIG can create signatures based on training sites defined by either a vector file or an image. In this case, the image
option is used.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 204

1. The user decides on the number of clusters to be uncovered. One is clearly blind in determining this. As a consequence,
a common approach is to ask for a large number and then aggregate clusters after interpretation. A more efficient
approach to this problem will be offered below, based on the specific implementation in IDRISI.
2. A set of N clusters is then arbitrarily located in band space. In some systems, these locations are randomly assigned. In
most, they are systematically placed within the region of high frequency reflectances.
3. Pixels are then assigned to their nearest cluster location.
4. After all pixels have been assigned, a new mean location is computed.
5. Steps 3 and 4 are iteratively repeated until no significant change in output is produced.
The implementation of this general logic in IDRISI is different in several respects.
- After entering the raw image bands to be used, you will be presented with a histogram of clusters that expresses the fre-
quency with which they occur in the image. You should examine this graph and look for significant breaks in the curve.
These represent major changes in the generality of the clusters. Specify the number of clusters to be created based on one
of these major breaks.
- The cluster seeding process is actually done with the CLUSTER module in IDRISI. CLUSTER is truly a clustering algo-
rithm (as opposed to a segmentation operation as is true of many so-called clustering routines). This leads to a far more
efficient and accurate placement of clusters than either random or systematic placement.
- The iterative process makes use of a full Maximum Likelihood procedure. In fact, you will notice it make iterative calls to
MAKESIG and MAXLIKE. This provides a very strong cluster assignment procedure.
- Because of the efficiency of the seeding step, very few iterations are required to produce a stable result. The default of 3
iterations works well in most instances.

ISODATA
The ISODATA module is a commonly used unsupervised technique that employs the so-called iterative self-organizing
data analysis algorithm to partition n-dimensional imagery into a number of clusters according to a specified value. In
general ISODATA begins by initializing a number of centroids using given parameters, then assigns each pixel to the clus-
ter whose centroid is the nearest. It then updates the cluster centroids, and splits and merges clusters whenever splitting
and merging criteria apply. ISODATA uses a Euclidean distance for calculating the distances between pixels and cluster
centroids. The performance of ISODATA depends on the initial estimation of the partition and the parameters specified.
See the classification chapter in: Richards, J.A., and X. Jia, 1999. Remote Sensing Digital Image Analysis (New York:
Springer), for more detail.

MAXSET
As previously described, MAXSET is a hard classifier that assigns to each pixel the class with the greatest degree of com-
mitment from the full Dempster-Shafer class hierarchy that describes all classes and their hierarchical combination.
Although it is run as if it were a supervised classifier (it requires training site data), ultimately it behaves as if it were an
unsupervised classifier in that it can assign a pixel to a class for which no exclusive training data have been supplied.
MAXSET is very similar in concept to the PIPED, MINDIST, and MAXLIKE classifiers in that it makes a hard determi-
nation of the most likely class to which each pixel belongs according to its own internal logic of operation. MAXSET is
different, however, in that it recognizes that the best assignment of a pixel might be to a class that is mixed rather than
unique. For example, it might determine that a pixel more likely belongs to a class of mixed conifers and deciduous forest
than it does to either conifers or deciduous exclusively. The logic that it uses in doing so is derived from Dempster-Shafer
theory, a special variant of Bayesian probability theory that is described more fully in the section on the BELCLASS soft
classifier above. Dempster-Shafer theory provides a logic for expressing one's belief in the degree to which an item

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 205

belongs to a particular set. MAXSET evaluates the degree of support for the membership of every pixel in the hierarchy
of sets which includes each of the basic classes plus all possible combinations of classes. Thus, for example, in a case with
basic landcover classes A, B and C, MAXSET would evaluate the degree of membership in each of the following classes:
[A]
[B]
[C]
[A,B]
[A,C]
[B,C]
[A,B,C]
The importance of the supersets (sets with combinations of classes) is that they represent indistinguishable combinations
of the basic classes. Thus when evidence supports the combination [A,B], it can be interpreted as support for A, or B, or
A and B, but that it is unable to determine which. The reasons for this are basically twofold. Either the evidence is incon-
clusive, or the indistinguishable superset really exists. Thus if MAXSET concludes that a pixel belongs to the indistin-
guishable superset [conifer, deciduous], it may be because the pixel truly belongs to a mixed forest class, or it may simply
mean that the training sites chosen for these two classes have not yielded unambiguous signatures.
MAXSET is an excellent starting point for In-Process Classification Assessment (as described above).

Segmentation Classification
IDRISI provides three modules for classification from image segments. Together they provide a hybrid methodology
between pixel-based and segment-based classification. The module SEGMENTATION creates an image of segments.
The module SEGTRAIN interactively develops training sites and signatures based on the segments from SEGMENTA-
TION. And the module SEGCLASS is a majority rule classifier based on the majority class within a segment. The major-
ity class within a segment is derived from a previously classified image, typically from a pixel-based classifier such as
MAXLIKE or MLP. SEGCLASS can improve the accuracy of the pixel-based classification and produce a smoother
map-like classification result while preserving the boundaries between segments.
Segmentation is a process by which pixels are grouped that share a homogeneous spectral similarity. The module SEG-
MENTATION groups adjacent pixels into image segments according to their spectral similarity. Specifically, SEGMEN-
TATION employs a watershed delineation approach to partition input imagery based on their variance. A derived
variance image is treated as a surface image allocating pixels to particular segments based on variance similarity. Across
space and over all input bands, a moving window assesses this similarity and segments are defined according to a stated
similarity threshold. The smaller the threshold, the more homogeneous the segments. A larger threshold will cause a more
heterogeneous and generalized segmentation result.
See the Help for SEGMENTATION for complete details on the algorithm.

Hyperspectral Remote Sensing

As indicated in the introduction to this chapter, IDRISI includes a set of routines for working with hyperspectral data.
The basic procedures are similar to those used with supervised classification of multispectral data. Signatures are devel-
oped for each landcover of interest, then the entire image is classified using information from those signatures. Details of
the process are given below.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 206

Importing Hyperspectral Data
IDRISI works with hyperspectral data as a series—i.e., as a collection of independent images that are associated through
either a raster image group file (.rgf) or a sensor band file (.sbf). Many hyperspectral images available today are distributed
in Band-Interleaved-by-Line (BIL) format. Thus you may need to use GENERICRASTER in the import/export module
group to convert these data to IDRISI format. In addition, if the data has come from a UNIX system in 16-bit format,
make sure you indicate this within the GENERICRASTER dialog box.

Hyperspectral Signature Development

The signature development stage uses the module HYPERSIG, which creates and displays hyperspectral signature files.
Two sources of information may be used with HYPERSIG for developing hyperspectral signatures: training sites (as
described in the supervised classification section above) or library spectral curve files.

Image-based Signature Development

IDRISI offers both a supervised and unsupervised procedure for image-based signature development. The former
approach is to use a procedure similar to that outlined in earlier sections for supervised classification where training sites
are delineated in the image and signatures are developed from their statistical characteristics. Because of the large number
of bands involved, both the signature development and classification stages make use of different procedures from those
used with multispectral data. In addition, there is a small variation to the delineation of training sites that needs to be
introduced. The steps are as follows:
1. Create a color composite using three of the hyperspectral bands and digitize the training sites.
2. Rasterize the vector file of training sites by using INITIAL to create a blank image and then using RASTERVECTOR
to rasterize the data.
3. Run HYPERSIG to create a hyperspectral signature file10 for each landcover class. Hyperspectral signature files have an
.hsg extension, and are similar in intent (but different in structure) to a multispectral signature file (.sig).
4. Run any of the HYPERSAM, HYPERMIN, HYPERUSP, HYPEROSP, HYPERUNMIX, or HYPERABSORB mod-
ules to classify the image.
The unsupervised procedure is somewhat experimental. HYPERAUTOSIG discovers signatures based on the concept of
signature power. Users wishing to experiment with this should consult the on-line Help System for specific details.

Library-based Signature Development

The second approach to classifying hyperspectral data relies upon the use of a library of spectral curves associated with
specific earth surface materials. These spectral curves11 are measured with very high precision in a lab setting. These
curves typically contain over a thousand readings spaced as finely as 0.01 micrometers over the visible, near and middle-
infrared ranges. Clearly there is a great deal of data here. However, there are a number of important issues to consider in
using these library curves.
Since the curves are developed in a lab setting, the measurements are taken without an intervening atmosphere. As a con-
sequence, measurements exist for areas in the spectrum where remote sensing has difficulty in obtaining useable imagery.
You may therefore find it necessary to remove those bands in which atmospheric attenuation is strong. A simple way to
gauge which bands have significant atmospheric attenuation is to run PROFILE and examine the standard deviation of
selected features over the set of hyperspectral images. Atmospheric absorption tends to cause a dramatic increase in the
variability of feature signatures. To eliminate these bands, edit the sensor band file, described below, to delete their entries

10. The contents of these files are also known as image spectra.

11. The contents of these files are also known as library spectra.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 207

and adjust the number of bands at the top of the file accordingly.
Even in bands without severe attenuation, atmospheric effects can cause substantial discrepancies between the spectral
curves measured in the lab and those determined from hyperspectral imagery. As a consequence, IDRISI assumes that if
you are working with spectral libraries, the imagery has already been atmospherically corrected. The SCREEN module
can be used to screen out bands in which atmospheric scattering has caused significant image degradation. The ATMOSC
module can then be used on the remaining bands to correct for atmospheric absorption and haze.
Library spectral curves are available from a number of research sites on the web, such as the United States Geological Sur-
vey (USGS) Spectroscopy Lab (http://speclab.cr.usgs.gov). These curve files will need to be edited to meet IDRISI spec-
ifications. The format used in IDRISI is virtually identical to that used by the USGS. It is an ASCII text file with an .isc
extension. File structure details may be found in the file formats section of the on-line Help System.
Spectral curve files are stored in a subdirectory of the IDRISI program directory named "waves" (e.g., c:\IDRISI
Taiga\waves) and a sample of library files has been included.
Spectral curve files do not apply to any specific sensor system. Rather, they are intended as a general reference from which
the expected reflectance for any sensor system can be derived in order to create a hyperspectral signature file. This is done
using the HYPERSIG module.
In order for HYPERSIG to create a hyperspectral signature from a library spectral curve file, it will need to access a file
that describes the sensor system being used. This is a sensor band file with an .sbf extension that is also located in the
"waves" subdirectory under the IDRISI program directory. The file must be in ASCII format and file structure details
may be found in the file formats section of the on-line Help System.
For comparison, a file for the AVIRIS system, June 1992, has been supplied as a sample (aviris92.sbf) in the "waves" sub-
directory of the IDRISI program directory (e.g., c:\IDRISI Taiga\waves\aviris92.sbf).
Once the hyperspectral signatures have been created for each of the landcover classes, classification of the imagery can
proceed with either the HYPERSAM or HYPERMIN modules.

PROFILE
The PROFILE module offers an additional tool for exploring hyperspectral data. A profile generated over a hyperspectral
series will graphically (or numerically) show how the reflectance at a location changes from one band to the next across
the whole series. Thus the result is a spectral response pattern for the particular locations identified.
PROFILE requires a raster image of the sample spots to be profiled. Up to 15 profiles can be generated simultaneously,12
corresponding to sample sites with index values 1-15. A sample site can consist of one or many pixels located in either a
contiguous grouping or in several disconnected groups.
The second piece of information that PROFILE will require is the name of a file that contains the names of the IDRISI
image files that comprise the hyperspectral series. You have two choices here. You may use either an image group file
(.rgf) or a sensor band file (.sbf), since both contain this information. In either case, you will need to have created one of
these before running PROFILE. You may wish to choose the sensor band file option, since it can be used with other
operations as well (such as HYPERSIG).

Hyperspectral Image Classification

IDRISI offers a range of procedures for the classification of hyperspectral imagery. All but one (HYPERABSORB) work
best with signatures developed from training sites, and can be divided into hard and soft classifier types.

12. The display can become quite difficult to read whenever more than just a few profiles are generated at the same time. Under normal use, you may
wish to limit the profiling to no more than 5 sites.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 208

Hard Hyperspectral Classifiers
HYPERSAM
HYPERSAM is an implementation of the Spectral Angle Mapper algorithm for hyperspectral image classification (Kruse
et al., 1993). The Spectral Angle Mapper algorithm is a minimum-angle procedure that is specifically designed for use with
spectral curve library data (although it can also be used with image-based signatures).
The reflectance information recorded in a spectral curve file (.isc) is measured in a laboratory under constant viewing
conditions. However, the data in a hyperspectral image contains additional variations that exist because of variations in
illumination. For example, solar elevation varies with the time of year and topographic variations lead to variations in
aspect relative to the sun. As a consequence, there can be significant differences between the spectral response patterns as
recorded by the sensor system and those measured in the lab. The Spectral Angle Mapper algorithm is based on the
assumption that variations in illumination conditions will lead to a set of signatures that fall along a line connected to the
origin of the band space as illustrated in Figure 9.

255

Band 2

The effect of varying illumination on a cover class

0
Figure 9 Band 1 255

Thus, in the presence of significant illumination variations, it would be anticipated that a traditional distance-based classi-
fier would have some difficulty in identifying the feature in all cases. The Spectral Angle Mapper thus uses a minimum-
angle approach. In essence, it treats each signature as a vector. Then by comparing the angle formed by an unknown pixel,
the origin, and a class mean, and comparing that to all other classes, the class that will be assigned to the unknown pixel is
that with the minimum angle, as illustrated in Figure 10.

255
Class 2 Signature

Band 2
Unknown Pixel

β α Class 1 Signature

0
Figure 10 Band 1 255

In the above figure, the unknown pixel would be assigned to Class 1 since the angle it subtends with the unknown pixel
(α) is smaller than that with Class 2 (β).
HYPERMIN
HYPERMIN is a minimum-distance classifier for hyperspectral data that is specifically intended for use with image-based
signatures developed from training sites. It uses a logic that is identical to that of the multispectral hard classifier MIND-
IST using standardized distances.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 209

Soft Hyperspectral Classifiers
HYPERUNMIX
HYPERUNMIX uses the same approach as the Linear Spectral Unmixing option of UNMIX, except that it uses hyper-
spectral signature files.
HYPEROSP
HYPEROSP uses a procedure known as Orthogonal Subspace Projection. It is closely related to HYPERUNMIX in that
it is based on the logic of Linear Spectral Unmixing. However, it attempts to improve the signal-to-noise ratio for a spe-
cific cover type by explicitly removing the contaminating effects of mixture elements. The result is an image that expresses
the degree of support for the presence of the signature in question. Note that this measure is not a fraction per se, but
simply a measure of support.
HYPERUSP
HYPERUSP is an unsupervised soft classifier based on the logic of HYPERAUTOSIG for the development of signa-
tures (clusters), and HYPERUNMIX for the soft classification.

Hyperspectral Classifiers for use with Library Spectra

IDRISI offers a single classifier specifically designed for use with library spectra (HYPERABSORB). It is similar in basic
operation to the TRICORDER (now renamed TETRACORDER) algorithm developed by the USGS.
HYPERABSORB
HYPERABSORB specifically looks for the presence of absorption features associated with specific materials. It follows a
logic that has proven to be particularly useful in mineral mapping in arid and extraterrestrial environments. The basic
principle is as follows. Particular materials cause distinctive absorption patterns in library spectra. Familiar examples
include the massive absorption in the red and blue wavelengths due to the presence of chlorophyll, and the distinctive
water absorption features in the middle infrared. However, many minerals exhibit very specific and narrow absorption
features related to the movement of electrons in crystal lattices and vibrational effects of molecules. HYPERABSORB
measures the degree of absorption evident in pixels as compared to a library spectrum through a process of continuum
removal and depth analysis. The on-line Help System gives specific details of the process. However, the basic concept is to
co-register the pixel spectrum and the library spectrum by calculating the convex hull over each. This is a polyline drawn
over the top of the curve such that no points in the original spectrum lie above the polyline, and in which no concave sec-
tions (valleys) occur within the polyline. Using segments of this polyline as a datum, absorption depth is measured for
intermediate points. The correlation between absorption depths in the pixel spectrum and the library spectrum then gives
a measure of fit, while the volume of the absorption area relative to that in the library spectrum gives a measure of abun-
dance.
The analysis of hyperspectral images is still very much in a developmental stage. We welcome comments on experiences in
using any of these procedures and suggestions for improvement.

References and Further Reading

Ball, G.H., and D.J. Hall, 1965. A Novel Method of Data Analysis and Pattern Classification, Stanford Research Institute, Menlo
Park, California.
Clark, R.N., A.J. Gallagher, and G.A. Swayze, 1990, Material absorption band depth mapping of imaging spectrometer
data using a complete band shape least-squares fit with library reference spectra, Proceedings of the Second Airborne Vis-
ible/Infrared Imaging Spectrometer (AVIRIS) Workshop. JPL Publication 90-54, 176-186.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 210

Clark, R.N., G.A. Swayze, A. Gallagher, N. Gorelick, and F. Kruse, 1991, Mapping with imaging spectrometer data using
the complete band shape least-squares algorithm simultaneously fit to multiple spectral features from multiple materials,
Proceedings of the Third Airborne Visible/Infrared Imaging Spectrometer (AVIRIS) Workshop, JPL Publication 91-28, 2-3.
Eastman, J.R., Kyem, P.A.K., Toledano, J., and Jin, W., 1993. GIS and Decision Making, UNITAR, Geneva.
Kruse, F.A., Lefkoff, A.B., Boardman, J.W., Heidebrecht, K.B., Shapiro, A.T., Barloon, P.J., and Goetz, A.F.H., 1993. The
Spectral Image Processing System (SIPS)—Interactive Visualization and Analysis of Imaging Spectrometer Data, Remote
Sensing of the Environment, 44: 145-163.
Harsanyi, J. C. and Chang, C.-I., 1994. Hyperspectral image classification and dimensionality reduction: An orthogonal
subspace projection approach. IEEE Transactions on Geoscience and Remote Sensing, 32(4), pp.779-785.
Richards, J.A., 1993. Remote Sensing Digital Image Analysis: An Introduction, Second Edition, Springer-Verlag, Berlin.
Settle J.J. and N.A. Drake, 1993, Linear mixing and the estimation of ground proportions, International Journal of Remote
Sensing, 14(6), pp. 1159-1177.
Shimabukuro Y.E. and J.A. Smith, 1991, The least-squares mixing models to generate fraction images derived from
remote sensing multispectral data, IEEE Transactions on Geoscience and Remote Sensing, 29(1), pp.16-20.
Sohn, Y. and R.M. McCoy, 1997, Mapping desert shrub rangeland using spectra unmixing and modeling spectral mixtures
with TM data, Photogrammetric Engineering and Remote Sensing, 63(6) pp.707-716.
Wang, F., 1990. Fuzzy Supervised Classification of Remote Sensing Images, IEEE Transactions on Geoscience and Remote Sens-
ing, 28(2): 194-201.

Chapter 17 Classification of Remotely Sensed Imagery 211

Vegetation Indices
by Amadou Thiam and J. Ronald Eastman

Introduction
Analysis of vegetation and detection of changes in vegetation patterns are keys to natural resource assessment and moni-
toring. Thus it comes as no surprise that the detection and quantitative assessment of green vegetation is one of the major
applications of remote sensing for environmental resource management and decision making.
Healthy canopies of green vegetation have a very distinctive interaction with energy in the visible and near infrared
regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. In the visible regions, plant pigments (most notably chlorophyll) cause strong
absorption of energy, primarily for the purpose of photosynthesis. This absorption peaks in the red and blue areas of the
visible spectrum, thus leading to the characteristic green appearance of most leaves. In the near infrared, however, a very
different interaction occurs. Energy in this region is not used in photosynthesis, and it is strongly scattered by the internal
structure of most leaves, leading to a very high apparent reflectance in the near infrared. It is this strong contrast, then,
most particularly between the amount of reflected energy in the red and near infrared regions of the electromagnetic spec-
trum, that has been the focus of a large variety of attempts to develop quantitative indices of vegetation condition using
remotely sensed imagery.
The aim of this chapter is to present a set of vegetation index (VI) models designed to provide a quantitative assessment
of green vegetation biomass. The proposed VIs are applicable to both low and high spatial resolution satellite images,
such as NOAA AVHRR, Landsat TM and MSS, SPOT HRV/XS, and any others similar to these that sense in the red and
near infrared regions. They have been used in a variety of contexts to assess green biomass and have also been used as a
proxy to overall environmental change, especially in the context of drought (Kogan, 1990; Tripathy et al., 1996; Liu and
Kogan, 1996) and land degradation risk assessment. As a consequence, special interest has been focused on the assess-
ment of green biomass in arid environments where soil background becomes a significant component of the signal
detected.
This chapter reviews the character of over 20 VIs that are provided by the TASSCAP and VEGINDEX modules in the
IDRISI system software. They are provided to facilitate the use of these procedures and to further the debate concerning
this very important environmental index. We welcome both your comments on the VIs currently included in IDISI as
well as your suggestions for future additions to the set.

Classification of Vegetation Indices

Jackson and Huete (1991) classify VIs into two groups: slope-based and distance-based VIs. To appreciate this distinction, it is
necessary to consider the position of vegetation pixels in a two-dimensional graph (or bi-spectral plot) of red versus infrared
reflectance. The slope-based VIs are simple arithmetic combinations that focus on the contrast between the spectral
response patterns of vegetation in the red and near infrared portions of the electromagnetic spectrum. They are so named
because any particular value of the index can be produced by a set of red/infrared reflectance values that form a line ema-
nating from the origin of a bi-spectral plot. Thus different levels of the index can be envisioned as producing a spectrum
of such lines that differ in their slope. Figure 1a, for example, shows a spectrum of Normalized Difference Vegetation
Index (the most commonly used of this group) lines ranging from -0.75 fanning clockwise to +0.75 (assuming infrared as
the X axis and red as the Y axis), with NDVI values of 0 forming the diagonal line.

Chapter 18 Vegetation Indices 212

 ine
il l
so
slope

intercept
a b
Figure 1

In contrast to the slope-based group, the distance-based group measures the degree of vegetation present by gauging the
difference of any pixel's reflectance from the reflectance of bare soil. A key concept here is that a plot of the positions of
bare soil pixels of varying moisture levels in a bi-spectral plot will tend to form a line (known as a soil line). As vegetation
canopy cover increases, this soil background will become progressively obscured, with vegetated pixels showing a ten-
dency towards increasing perpendicular distance from this soil line (Figure 1b). All of the members of this group (such as
the Perpendicular Vegetation Index—PVI) thus require that the slope and intercept of the soil line be defined for the
image being analyzed.
To these two groups of vegetation indices, a third group can be added called orthogonal transformation VIs. Orthogonal indi-
ces undertake a transformation of the available spectral bands to form a new set of uncorrelated bands within which a
green vegetation index band can be defined. The Tasseled Cap transformation is perhaps the most well-known of this
group.
A Special Note About Measurement Scales: IDRISI differs from most other GIS and image processing software in
that it supports real number images. Thus the descriptions that follow describe these vegetation indices without rescaling
to suit more limited data types. However, in most implementations, a subsequent rescaling is required to make the index
suitable for expression in an integer form (e.g., a rescaling of values from a -1.0 to +1.0 real number range to a 0-255 8-bit
integer range). In IDRISI, this is not required, and thus the indices are produced and described in their purest form.

The Slope-Based VIs

Slope-based VIs are combinations of the visible red and the near infrared bands and are widely used to generate vegeta-
tion indices. The values indicate both the status and abundance of green vegetation cover and biomass. The slope-based
VIs include the RATIO, NDVI, RVI, NRVI, TVI, CTVI, and TTVI. The module VEGINDEX in IDRISI may be used
to generate an image for each of these VIs.
The Ratio Vegetation Index (RATIO) was proposed by Rouse, et al. (1974) to separate green vegetation from soil back-
ground using Landsat MSS imagery. The RATIO VI is produced by simply dividing the reflectance values contained in
the near infrared band by those contained in the red band, i.e.:
NIR
RATIO = ------------
RED
The result clearly captures the contrast between the red and infrared bands for vegetated pixels, with high index values
being produced by combinations of low red (because of absorption by chlorophyll) and high infrared (as a result of leaf
structure) reflectance. In addition, because the index is constructed as a ratio, problems of variable illumination as a result
of topography are minimized. However, the index is susceptible to division by zero errors and the resulting measurement
scale is not linear. As a result, RATIO VI images do not have normal distributions (Figure 18-2), making it difficult to

Chapter 18 Vegetation Indices 213

apply some statistical procedures.

Figure 2 Histogram of a RATIO VI Image

The Normalized Difference Vegetation Index (NDVI) was also introduced by Rouse et al. (1974) in order to produce
a spectral VI that separates green vegetation from its background soil brightness using Landsat MSS digital data. It is
expressed as the difference between the near infrared and red bands normalized by the sum of those bands, i.e.:
NIR – RED
NDVI = ------------------------------
NIR + RED
This is the most commonly used VI as it retains the ability to minimize topographic effects while producing a linear mea-
surement scale. In addition, division by zero errors are significantly reduced. Furthermore, the measurement scale has the
desirable property of ranging from -1 to 1 with 0 representing the approximate value of no vegetation. Thus negative val-
ues represent non-vegetated surfaces.
The Transformed Vegetation Index (TVI) (Deering et al., 1975) modifies the NDVI by adding a constant of 0.50 to all
its values and taking the square root of the results. The constant 0.50 is introduced in order to avoid operating with nega-
tive NDVI values. The calculation of the square root is intended to correct NDVI values that approximate a Poisson dis-
tribution and introduce a normal distribution. With these two elements, the TVI takes the form:
NIR – RED-⎞
⎛ -----------------------------
TVI = + 0.5
⎝ NIR + RED⎠
However, the use of TVI requires that the minimum input NDVI values be greater than -0.5 to avoid aborting the opera-
tion. Negative values still will remain if values less than -0.5 are found in the NDVI. Moreover, there is no technical differ-
ence between NDVI and TVI in terms of image output or active vegetation detection.
The Corrected Transformed Vegetation Index (CTVI) proposed by Perry and Lautenschlager (1984) aims at correct-
ing the TVI. Clearly adding a constant of 0.50 to all NDVI values does not always eliminate all negative values as NDVI
values may have the range -1 to +1. Values that are lower than -0.50 will leave small negative values after the addition
operation. Thus, the CTVI is intended to resolve this situation by dividing (NDVI + 0.50) by its absolute value
ABS(NDVI + 0.50) and multiplying the result by the square root of the absolute value (SQRT[ABS(NDVI + 0.50)]). This
suppresses the negative NDVI. The equation is written:
NDVI + 0.5
CTVI = ----------------------------------------------- × ABS ( NDVI + 0.5 )
ABS ( NDVI + 0.5 )
Given that the correction is applied in a uniform manner, the output image using CTVI should have no difference with
the initial NDVI image or the TVI whenever TVI properly carries out the square root operation. The correction is
intended to eliminate negative values and generate a VI image that is similar to, if not better than, the NDVI. However,
Thiam (1997) indicates that the resulting image of the CTVI can be very "noisy" due to an overestimation of the green-
ness. He suggests ignoring the first term of the CTVI equation in order to obtain better results. This is done by simply
taking the square root of the absolute values of the NDVI in the original TVI expression to have a new VI called Thiam’s
Transformed Vegetation Index (TTVI).
TTVI = ABS ( NDVI + 0.5 )

Chapter 18 Vegetation Indices 214

The simple Ratio Vegetation Index (RVI) was suggested by Richardson and Wiegand (1977) as graphically having the
same strengths and weaknesses as the TVI (see above) while being computationally simpler. RVI is clearly the reverse of
the standard simple ratio (RATIO) as shown by its expression:
RED
RVI = ------------
NIR
The Normalized Ratio Vegetation Index (NRVI) is a modification of the RVI by Baret and Guyot (1991) whereby the
result of RVI - 1 is normalized over RVI + 1.
RVI – 1
NRVI = --------------------
RVI + 1
This normalization is similar in effect to that of the NDVI, i.e., it reduces topographic, illumination and atmospheric
effects and it creates a statistically desirable normal distribution.

The Distance-Based VIs

This group of vegetation indices is derived from the Perpendicular Vegetation Index (PVI) discussed in detail below. The
main objective of these VIs is to cancel the effect of soil brightness in cases where vegetation is sparse and pixels contain
a mixture of green vegetation and soil background. This is particularly important in arid and semi-arid environments.
The procedure is based on the soil line concept as outlined earlier. The soil line represents a description of the typical sig-
natures of soils in a red/near infrared bi-spectral plot. It is obtained through linear regression of the near infrared band
against the red band for a sample of bare soil pixels. Pixels falling near the soil line are assumed to be soils while those far
away are assumed to be vegetation. Distance-based VIs using the soil line require the slope (b) and intercept (a) of the line
as inputs to the calculation. Unfortunately, there has been a remarkable inconsistency in the logic with which this soil line
has been developed for specific VIs. One group requires the red band as the independent variable and the other requires
the near infrared band as the independent variable for the regression. The on-line Help System for VEGINDEX should
be consulted for each VI in the Distance-based group to indicate which of these two approaches should be used.
Figure 3 shows the soil line and its parameters as calculated for a set of soil pixels using the REGRESS module in IDRISI.
The procedure requires that you identify a set of bare soil pixels as a Boolean mask (1=soil / 0=other). REGRESS is then
used to regress the red band against the near infrared band (or vice versa, depending upon the index), using this mask to
define the pixels from which the slope and intercept should be defined. A worked example of this procedure can be found
in the Tutorial in the Vegetation Analysis in Arid Environments exercise.

Figure 3

Chapter 18 Vegetation Indices 215

The Perpendicular Vegetation Index (PVI) suggested by Richardson and Wiegand (1977) is the parent index from
which this entire group is derived. The PVI uses the perpendicular distance from each pixel coordinate (e.g., Rp5,Rp7) to
the soil line as shown in Figure 4.

PVI<0
water
PVI=0
soil line

red band
Rgg5,Rgg7
PVI>0
Rp5,Rp7 vegetation

near infrared band

Figure 4 The Perpendicular Vegetation Index (from Richardson and Wiegand, 1977)

To derive this perpendicular distance, four steps are required:

1) Determine the equation of the soil line by regressing bare soil reflectance values for red (dependent variable) versus
infrared (independent variable).1 This equation will be in the form:
Rg5 = a0 + a1Rg7
where Rg5 is a Y position on the soil line
Rg7 is the corresponding X coordinate
a1 is the slope of the soil line
a0 is the Y-intercept of the soil line
2) Determine the equation of the line that is perpendicular to the soil line. This equation will have the form:
Rp5 = b0 + b1Rp7
where b0 = Rp5-b1Rp7
where
Rp5 = red reflectance
Rp7 = infrared reflectance
and
b1 = -1/a1
where
a1 = the slope of the soil line

1. Check the Help System for each VI to determine which band should be used as the dependent and independent variables. In this example, for the
PVI, red is dependent and infrared is independent.

Chapter 18 Vegetation Indices 216

3) Find the intersection of these two lines (i.e., the coordinate Rgg5,Rgg7).
b a –b a
1 0 0 1
Rgg5 = ---------------------------
-
b1 – a1

a –b
0 0
Rgg7 = ----------------
b1 – a1
4) Find the distance between the intersection (Rgg5,Rgg7) and the pixel coordinate (Rp5,Rp7) using the Pythagorean
Theorum.
2 2
PVI = ( Rgg5 – Rp5 ) + ( Rgg7 – Rp7 )

Attempts to improve the performance of the PVI have yielded three others suggested by Perry and Lautenschlager
(1984), Walther and Shabaani (1991), and Qi, et al. (1994). In order to avoid confusion, the derived PVIs are indexed 1 to
3 (PVI1, PVI2, PVI3).
PVI1 was developed by Perry and Lautenschlager (1984) who argued that the original PVI equation is computationally
intensive and does not discriminate between pixels that fall to the right or left side of the soil line (i.e., water from vegeta-
tion). Given the spectral response pattern of vegetation in which the infrared reflectance is higher than the red reflec-
tance, all vegetation pixels will fall to the right of the soil line (e.g., pixel 2 in Figure 18-5). In some cases, a pixel
representing non-vegetation (e.g., water) may be equally far from the soil line, but lies to the left of that line (e.g., pixel 1 in
Figure 5). In the case of PVI, that water pixel will be assigned a high vegetation index value. PVI1 assigns negative values
to those pixels lying to the left of the soil line.

soil line

1 d2
red d1
2

infrared

Figure 5 Distance from the Soil Line

The equation is written:

( bNIR – RED + a )
PVI1 = -----------------------------------------------
2
b +1

where
NIR = reflectance in the near infrared band
RED = reflectance in the visible red band
a = intercept of the soil line
b = slope of the soil line
PVI2 (Walther and Shabaani, 1991; Bannari, et al., 1996) weights the red band with the intercept of the soil line and is

Chapter 18 Vegetation Indices 217

written2:

NIR − a ∗ Red + b
PVI 2 =
1+ a 2

where
NIR = reflectance in the near infrared band
RED = reflectance in the visible red band
a = slope of the soil line
b = intercept of the soil line
PVI3, presented by Qi, et al (1994), is written:
PVI3 = apNIR - bpRED
where
pNIR = reflectance in the near infrared band
pRED = reflectance in the visible red band
a = intercept of the soil line
b = slope of the soil line
Difference Vegetation Index (DVI) is also suggested by Richardson and Wiegand (1977) as an easier vegetation index
calculation algorithm. The particularity of the DVI is that it weights the near infrared band by the slope of the soil line. It
is written:
DVI = g MSS7 - MSS5
where
g = the slope of the soil line
MSS7 = reflectance in the near infrared 2 band
MSS5 = reflectance in the visible red band
Similar to the PVI1, with the DVI, a value of zero indicates bare soil, values less than zero indicate water, and those
greater than zero indicate vegetation.
The Ashburn Vegetation Index (AVI) (Ashburn, 1978) is presented as a measure of green growing vegetation. The val-
ues in MSS7 are multiplied by 2 in order to scale the 6-bit data values of this channel to match with the 8-bit values of
MSS5. The equation is written:
AVI = 2.0MSS7 - MSS5
This scaling factor would not apply wherever both bands are 7-bit or 8-bit and the equation is rewritten as a simple sub-
traction.
The Soil-Adjusted Vegetation Index (SAVI) is proposed by Huete (1988). It is intended to minimize the effects of soil

2. In Bannari, et al. (1996), a is used to designate the slope and b is used to designate the intercept. More commonly in linear regression, a is the inter-
cept and b the slope of the fitted line. This has been corrected here.

Chapter 18 Vegetation Indices 218

background on the vegetation signal by incorporating a constant soil adjustment factor L into the denominator of the
NDVI equation. L varies with the reflectance characteristics of the soil (e.g., color and brightness). Huete (1988) provides
a graph from which the values of L can be extracted (Figure 6). The L factor chosen depends on the density of the vege-
tation one wishes to analyze. For very low vegetation, Huete et al., (1988) suggest using an L factor of 1.0, for intermedi-
ate 0.5 and for high densities 0.25. Walther and Shabaani (1991) suggest that the best L value to select is where the
difference between SAVI values for dark and light soil is minimal. For L = 0, SAVI equals NDVI. For L = 100, SAVI
approximates PVI.

Figure 6 Influence of light and dark soil on the SAVI values of cotton as a function of the shifted correc
factor L (from Huete, 1988).

The equation is written:

ρ nir – ρ red
SAVI = ---------------------------------------- ⋅ ( 1 + L )
( ρ nir + ρ red + L )

where
ρnir = near infrared band (expressed as reflectances)
ρred = visible red band (expressed as reflectances)
L = soil adjustment factor
The Transformed Soil-Adjusted Vegetation Index (TSAVI1) was defined by Baret, et al. (1989) who argued that the
SAVI concept is exact only if the constants of the soil line are a=1 and b=0 (note the reversal of these common symbols).
Because this is not generally the case, they transformed SAVI. By taking into consideration the PVI concept, they pro-
posed a first modification of TSAVI designated as TSAVI1. The transformed expression is written:

a ( NIR − a * Red − b)
TSAVI1 =
(Red + a ∗ NIR − a ∗ b)

where
NIR = reflectance in the near infrared band (expressed as reflectances)
RED = reflectance in the visible red band (expressed as reflectances)
a = slope of the soil line

Chapter 18 Vegetation Indices 219

 b = intercept of the soil line
With some resistance to high soil moisture, TSAVI1 could be a very good candidate for use in semi-arid regions. TSAVI1
was specifically designed for semi-arid regions and does not work well in areas with heavy vegetation.
TSAVI was readjusted a second time by Baret, et al (1991) with an additive correction factor of 0.08 to minimize the
effects of the background soil brightness. The new version is named TSAVI2 and is given by:
a ( NIR – aRED – b )
TSAVI 2 = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
RED + aNIR – ab + 0.08 ( 1 + a )

The Modified Soil-Adjusted Vegetation Indices (MSAVI1 and MSAVI2) suggested by Qi, et al. (1994) are based on a
modification of the L factor of the SAVI. Both are intended to better correct the soil background brightness in different
vegetation cover conditions.
With MSAVI1, L is selected as an empirical function due to the fact that L decreases with decreasing vegetation cover as
is the case in semi-arid lands (Qi, et al., 1994). In order to cancel or minimize the effect of the soil brightness, L is set to
be the product of NDVI and WDVI (described below). Therefore, it uses the opposite trends of NDVI and WDVI. The
full expression of MSAVI1 is written:
NIR – RED
MSAVI1 = ---------------------------------------- ⋅ ( 1 + L )
NIR + RED + L
where
NIR = reflectance in the near infrared band (expressed as reflectances)
RED = reflectance in the visible red band (expressed as reflectances)
L = 1 - 2 γ NDVI * WDVI
where
NDVI = Normalized Difference Vegetation Index
WDVI = Weighted Difference Vegetation Index
γ = slope of the background soil line
2 = used to increase the L dynamic range
range of L = 0 to 1
The second modified SAVI, MSAVI2, uses an inductive L factor to:
1. remove the soil "noise" that was not canceled out by the product of NDVI by WDVI, and
2. correct values greater than 1 that MSAVI1 may have due to the low negative value of NDVI*WDVI. Thus, its use is
limited for high vegetation density areas.
The general expression of MSAVI2 is:

2
2ρ nir + 1 – ( 2ρ nir + 1 ) – 8 ( ρ nir – ρ red )
MSAVI 2 = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
where
ρnir = reflectance of the near infrared band (expressed as reflectances)
ρred = reflectance of the red band (expressed as reflectances)

Chapter 18 Vegetation Indices 220

The Weighted Difference Vegetation Index (WDVI) has been attributed to Richardson and Wiegand (1977), and Cle-
vers (1978) by Kerr and Pichon (1996), writing the expression as:
WDVI = ρ n - γρ r
where
ρn = reflectance of near infrared band
ρr = reflectance of visible red band
γ = slope of the soil line
Although simple, WDVI is as efficient as most of the slope-based VIs. The effect of weighting the red band with the
slope of the soil line is the maximization of the vegetation signal in the near infrared band and the minimization of the
effect of soil brightness.

The Orthogonal Transformations

The derivation of vegetation indices has also been approached through orthogonal transformation techniques such as the
PCA, the GVI of the Kauth-Thomas Tasseled Cap Transformation and the MGVI of the Wheeler-Misra orthogonal
transformation. The link between these three techniques is that they all express green vegetation through the develop-
ment of their second component.
Principal Components Analysis (PCA) is an orthogonal transformation of n-dimensional image data that produces a
new set of images (components) that are uncorrelated with one another and ordered with respect to the amount of varia-
tion (information) they represent from the original image set. PCA is typically used to uncover the underlying dimension-
ality of multi-variate data by removing redundancy (evident in inter-correlation of image pixel values), with specific
applications in GIS and image processing ranging from data compression to time series analysis. In the context of
remotely sensed images, the first component typically represents albedo (in which the soil background is represented)
while the second component most often represents variation in vegetative cover. For example, component 2 generally has
positive loadings on the near infrared bands and negative loadings on the visible bands. As a result, the green vegetation
pattern is highlighted in this component (Singh and Harrison, 1985; Fung and LeDrew, 1987; Thiam, 1997). This is illus-
trated in Table 1 corresponding to the factor loadings of a 1990 MSS image of southern Mauritania.
Table 1 Factor loadings of the 1990 PCA

Comp1 Comp2 Comp3 Comp4

MSS1 0.86 -0.46 -0.22 0.01

MSS2 0.91 -0.36 0.19 -0.08

MSS3 0.95 0.25 0.09 0.14

MSS4 0.75 0.65 -0.08 -0.09

The Green Vegetation Index (GVI) of the Tasseled Cap is the second of the four new bands that Kauth and Thomas
(1976) extracted from raw MSS images. The GVI provides global coefficients that are used to weight the original MSS
digital counts to generate the new transformed bands. The TASSCAP module in IDRISI is specifically provided to calcu-
late the Tasseled Cap bands from Landsat MSS or TM images. The output from TASSCAP corresponding to GVI is
xxgreen (xx = the two character prefix entered by the user) by default. The expression of the green vegetation index band,

Chapter 18 Vegetation Indices 221

GVI, is written as follows for MSS or TM data:
GVI = [(-0.386MSS4)+(-0.562MSS5)+(0.600MSS6)+(0.491MSS7)]
GVI = [(-0.2848TM1)+(-0.2435TM2)+(-0.5436TM3)+(0.7243TM4)+(0.0840TM5)+(-0.1800TM7)]
The negative weights of the GVI on the visible bands tend to minimize the effects of the background soil, while its posi-
tive weights on the near infrared bands emphasize the green vegetation signal.
Misra's Green Vegetation Index (MGVI) is the equivalent of the Tasseled Cap GVI and is proposed by Wheeler et al.
(1976) and Misra, et al. (1977) as a spectral vegetation index. It is the second of the four new bands produced from an
application of the Principal Components Analysis to MSS digital counts. The algebraic expression of the MGVI is:
MGVI = -0.386MSS4 - 0.530MSS5 + 0.535MSS6 + 0.532MSS7
The principle of the MGVI is to weight the original digital counts by some global coefficients provided by Wheeler and
Misra in order to generate a second Principal Component. However, the use of these global coefficients may not yield the
same result as a directly calculated second Principal Component, as they may be site specific. The coefficients correspond
to the eigenvectors that are produced with a Principal Components Analysis. The eigenvectors indicate the direction of
the principal axes (Mather, 1987). They are combined with the original spectral values to regenerate Principal Compo-
nents. For example PCA1 is produced by combining the original reflectances with the eigenvectors (column values) asso-
ciated with component 1. Likewise, component 2 (MGVI) is produced by combining the original digital counts with the
eigenvectors associated with component 2 as highlighted in Table 2.
Table 2 Eigenvectors of the 1990 PCA

Comp1 Comp2 Comp3 Comp4

eigvec.1 0.49 -0.51 -0.70 0.08

eigvec.2 0.52 -0.40 0.60 -0.45

eigvec.3 0.55 0.28 0.27 0.74

eigvec.4 0.43 0.71 -0.27 -0.49

The PCA module in IDRISI generates eigenvectors as well as factor loadings with the component images. A site-specific
MGVI image can then be produced with Image Calculator by using the appropriate eigenvector values. The following
equation would be used to produce the MGVI image for the example shown in Table 18-2:
MGVI90 = (-0.507MSS4) + (- 0.400MSS5) + (0.275MSS6) + (0.712MSS7)

Summary
The use of any of these transformations depends on the objective of the investigation and the general geographic charac-
teristics of the application area. In theory, any of them can be applied to any geographic area, regardless of their sensitivity
to various environmental components that might limit their effectiveness. In this respect, one might consider applying the
slope-based indices as they are simple to use and yield numerical results that are easy to interpret. However, including the
well known NDVI, they all have the major weakness of not being able to minimize the effects of the soil background.
This means that a certain proportion of their values, negative or positive, represents the background soil brightness. The
effect of the background soil is a major limiting factor to certain statistical analyses geared towards the quantitative assess-
ment of above-ground green biomass.

Chapter 18 Vegetation Indices 222

Although they produce indices whose extremes may be much lower and greater than those of the more familiar NDVI,
the distance-based VIs have the advantage of minimizing the effects of the background soil brightness. This minimization
is performed by combining the input bands with the slope and intercept of the soil line obtained through a linear regres-
sion between bare soil sample reflectance values extracted from the red and near infrared bands. This represents an
important quantitative and qualitative improvement of the significance of the indices for all types of applications, particu-
larly for those dealing with arid and semi-arid environments. To take advantage of these, however, you do need to be able
to identify bare soil pixels in the image.
The orthogonal VIs, namely the Tasseled Cap, Principal Components Analysis and the Wheeler-Misra transformation
(MGVI), proceed by a decorrelation of the original bands through orthogonalization in order to extract new bands. By
this process, they produce a green band that is somehow free of soil background effects, since almost all soil characteris-
tics are ascribed to another new band called brightness.
Despite the large number of vegetation indices currently in use, it is clear that much needs to be learned about the appli-
cation of these procedures in different environments. It is in this spirit that the VEGINDEX and TASSCAP modules
have been created. However, it has also become clear that remote sensing offers a significant opportunity for studying and
monitoring vegetation and vegetation dynamics.

References
Ashburn, P., 1978. The vegetative index number and crop identification, The LACIE Symposium Proceedings of the Technical
Session, 843-850.
Bannari, A., Huete, A. R., Morin, D., and Zagolski, 1996. Effets de la Couleur et de la Brillance du Sol Sur les Indices de
Végétation, International Journal of Remote Sensing, 17(10): 1885-1906.
Baret, F., Guyot, G., and Major, D., 1989. TSAVI: A Vegetation Index Which Minimizes Soil Brightness Effects on LAI
and APAR Estimation, 12th Canadian Symposium on Remote Sensing and IGARSS’90, Vancouver, Canada, 4.
Baret, F., and Guyot, G., 1991. Potentials and Limits of Vegetation Indices for LAI and APAR Assessment, Remote Sensing
and the Environment, 35: 161-173.
Deering, D. W., Rouse, J. W., Haas, R. H., and Schell, J. A., 1975. Measuring “Forage Production” of Grazing Units From
Landsat MSS Data, Proceedings of the 10th International Symposium on Remote Sensing of Environment, II, 1169-1178.
Fung, T., and LeDrew, E., 1988. The Determination of Optimal Threshold Levels for Change Detection Using Various
Accuracy Indices, Photogrammetric Engineering and Remote Sensing, 54(10): 1449-1454.
Huete, A. R., 1988. A Soil-Adjusted Vegetation Index (SAVI), Remote Sensing and the Environment, 25: 53-70.
Jackson, R. D., 1983. Spectral Indices in n-Space, Remote Sensing and the Environment, 13: 409-421.
Kauth, R. J., and Thomas, G. S., 1976. The Tasseled Cap - A Graphic Description of the Spectral Temporal Development
of Agricultural Crops As Seen By Landsat. Proceedings of the Symposium on Machine Processing of Remotely Sensed Data, Perdue
University, West Lafayette, Indiana, 41-51.
Kogan, F. N., 1990. Remote Sensing of Weather Impacts on Vegetation in Nonhomogeneous Areas, International Journal of
Remote Sensing, 11(8): 1405-1419.
Liu, W. T., and Kogan, F. N., 1996. Monitoring Regional Drought Using the Vegetation Condition Index, International Jour-
nal of Remote Sensing 17(14): 2761-2782.
Misra, P. N., and Wheeler, S.G., 1977. Landsat Data From Agricultural Sites - Crop Signature Analysis, Proceedings of the
11th International Symposium on Remote Sensing of the Environment, ERIM.

Chapter 18 Vegetation Indices 223

Misra, P. N., Wheeler, S. G., and Oliver, R. E., 1977. Kauth-Thomas Brightness and Greenness Axes, IBM personal com-
munication, Contract NAS-9-14350, RES 23-46.
Perry, C. Jr., and Lautenschlager, L. F., 1984. Functional Equivalence of Spectral Vegetation Indices, Remote Sensing and the
Environment 14: 169-182.
Qi, J., Chehbouni A., Huete, A. R., Kerr, Y. H., and Sorooshian, S., 1994. A Modified Soil Adjusted Vegetation Index.
Remote Sensing and the Environment, 48: 119-126.
Richardson, A. J., and Wiegand, C. L., 1977. Distinguishing Vegetation From Soil Background Information, Photogramnetric
Engineering and Remote Sensing, 43(12): 1541-1552.
Rouse, J. W. Jr., Haas, R., H., Schell, J. A., and Deering, D.W., 1973. Monitoring Vegetation Systems in the Great Plains
with ERTS, Earth Resources Technology Satellite-1 Symposium, Goddard Space Flight Center, Washington D.C., 309-317.
Rouse, J. W. Jr., Haas, R., H., Deering, D. W., Schell, J. A., and Harlan, J. C., 1974. Monitoring the Vernal Advancement and
Retrogradation (Green Wave Effect)of Natural Vegetation. NASA/GSFC Type III Final Report, Greenbelt, MD., 371.
Singh, A., and Harrison, A., 1985. Standardized Principal Components, International Journal of Remote Sensing, 6(6): 883-896.
Thiam, A.K. 1997. Geographic Information Systems and Remote Sensing Methods for Assessing and Monitoring Land Degradation in the
Sahel: The Case of Southern Mauritania. Doctoral Dissertation, Clark University, Worcester Massachusetts.
Tripathy, G. K., Ghosh, T. K., and Shah, S. D., 1996. Monitoring of Desertification Process in Karnataka State of India
Using Multi-Temporal Remote Sensing and Ancillary Information Using GIS, International Journal of Remote Sensing, 17(12):
2243-2257.

Chapter 18 Vegetation Indices 224

RADAR Imaging and Analysis
The term RADAR is an acronym for Radio Detection And Ranging. RADAR imaging uses radio waves to detect surface
characteristics. There are a number of RADAR Sensing instruments that provide a range of data products to the user
community. These include: ERS (European Remote Sensing Satellite), JERS (Japanese Earth Resource Satellite) and the
Canadian RADARSAT. RADARSAT is a commercial system (unlike the other systems which are largely scientific mis-
sions) intended to provide data for a wide range of uses.
Optical multispectral remote sensing systems like Landsat and SPOT gather data as reflected electromagnetic energy. The
source of the energy for these sensors is the sun. Unlike these passive optical systems, RADAR systems such as RADAR-
SAT are active sensing systems, meaning that they provide the energy that is then measured as it returns to the sensor.
RADAR systems use energy transmitted at microwave frequencies that are not detectable by the human eye. Most
RADAR systems operate at one single frequency. RADARSAT, for example, operates at what is known as C-band fre-
quency1 (5.3 Ghz frequency or 5.6 cm wavelength) and thus acquires single band data. The sensing instrument used on
RADARSAT is known as Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR). This instrument uses the motion of the satellite and doppler
frequency shift to electronically synthesize the large antennae required for the acquisition of high resolution RADAR
imagery. The sensor sends a microwave energy pulse to the earth and measures the time it takes for that pulse to return
after interaction with the earth's surface.

The Nature of RADAR Data: Advantages and

Disadvantages
Since RADARSAT-SAR uses microwave energy, it is able to penetrate atmospheric barriers that often hinder optical
imaging. SAR can "see" through clouds, rain, haze and dust and can operate in darkness, making data capture possible in
any atmospheric conditions. Because microwave energy can penetrate the land surface to appreciable depths, it is useful in
arid environments. Additionally, microwave energy is most appropriate for studying subsurface conditions and properties
which are relevant to resource prospecting and archaeological explorations. The data gathered by this sensor is of the
form known as HH (horizontal transmit, horizontal receive)2 polarized data. The signal sent to the earth surface has a
horizontal orientation (or polarization) and is captured using the same polarization. Variations in the return beam, termed
backscatter, result from varying surface roughness, topography and surface moisture conditions. These characteristics of
the RADAR signal can be exploited to infer the structural and textural characteristics of the target objects, unlike the sim-
ple reflection signal of optical sensing. RADARSAT-SAR collects data in a variety of beam modes allowing a choice of
incidence angles and resolutions (from 20m up to 100m). Since the instrument can be navigated to view the same location
from different beam positions, it can acquire data in stereo pairs that can be used for a large number of terrain and topo-
graphic analysis needs.
There are, however, some problems that are unique to RADAR imaging. Most, if not all, RADAR images have a speckled
or grainy appearance. This is the result of a combination of multiple scattering within a given pixel. In RADAR terms, a
large number of surface materials exhibit diffuse reflectance patterns. Farmlands, wet soils and forest canopies, for exam-
ple, show high signal returns, while surfaces like roads, pavements and smooth water surfaces show specular reflectance
patterns with low signal returns. A mixture of different cover types generates a complex image surface. The data are thus
inherently “noisy” and require substantial preprocessing before use in a given analysis task. In mountainous terrain, shad-

1. Other RADAR frequencies include X - band 12.5-8.0 Ghz (2.4 - 3.75 cm), L - band : 2.0-1.0 Ghz (15-30 cm) and P-band 1.0-0.3 Ghz (30-100 cm). The frequency of the
C-band is 8.0-4.0 Ghz (3.75-7.5 cm).

2. Other options are vertical transmit, vertical receive (VV), horizontal transmit, vertical receive (HV) and vertical transmit, horizontal receive (VH).

Chapter 19 RADAR Imaging and Analysis 225

owing or relief displacement occurs because the reflected RADAR pulse from the top of a mountain ridge reaches the
antenna before the pulse from the base or lee side of the feature does. This is known as the layover effect and is significant in
areas of steep slopes. If the slopes facing the antenna are less steep, the pulse reaches the base before the top. This leads
to slopes appearing compressed on the imagery—an effect known as foreshortening. In urban areas, double reflectance from
corner reflectors like buildings causes imagery to have a bright, sparkled appearance. Mixed with reflectance from trees and
road surfaces, the urban scene makes filtering operations rather challenging. If a bright target dominates a given area, it
may skew the distribution of the data values. It must be noted, however, that the RADAR's advantages, including its ability
for all-weather imaging, far outweigh its disadvantages.

Using RADAR Data in IDRISI

The module named RADARSAT can be used to import RADARSAT data into IDRISI. Furthermore, the generic data
import tools of IDRISI can be used to import most other formats. Since each scene is a single band, it can be best viewed
using a grey scale palette. The RADAR palette in IDRISI can be used to view RADAR imagery including those scenes
that have data distributions that exemplify negatively skewed histograms. An alternative method is to generate a histo-
gram, estimate the range within which a majority of the data values fall, and STRETCH the image to that level. This
works very well for visual analysis of the data. (See the Image Exploration exercise in the Tutorial manual.)
Currently, the use of RADAR data in environmental analysis and resource management is still in an early stage and is quite
limited compared to the widespread use of more traditional image data (e.g., MSS, TM, aerial photography). More sophis-
ticated tools for interpretation of RADAR data are likely to evolve in coming years. Some useful techniques for working
with RADAR data (e.g., spatial filter kernels) have been reported in the literature.
In order to facilitate processing and interpretation of RADAR data, IDRISI offers a texture analysis module (TEXTURE)
and several options in the FILTER module, including the Adaptive Box Filter. These filtering procedures can be used to
minimize some of the speckled "noise" effects in RADAR imagery (although they cannot be completely eliminated) and
also provide a quantitative interpretation of RADAR imaged surfaces. The Adaptive Box filter, which is an adaptation of
the Lee filter, is highly recommended by Eliason and McEwen (1990) for reducing speckled effects (Figure 1). One must
experiment with various filter kernel sizes and threshold options in order to achieve good results. Different filters may
work better for different scenes, depending on the mixtures of land surface cover types in the imagery.

Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3

One other method suggested for further reducing speckled effects is multi-look processing (Lillesand and Kiefer, 1987). This
simply involves averaging (with OVERLAY or Image Calculator) scenes from the same area, acquired at different inci-
dence angles, to produce a smoother image.

Chapter 19 RADAR Imaging and Analysis 226

Quick-look images can be generated using the MEAN filter in IDRISI (Figure 2) to enhance some of the features in
image scenes in order to select sites for detailed analysis. The Sobel Edge Detector, the High Pass and the Laplacian Edge
Enhancement filters are useful in detecting edges and linear features in imagery. Fault lines, surface drainage patterns,
folds, roads and land/water boundaries are useful in various geological, resource management and a variety of environ-
mental and planning applications. Note also that user-defined filters may be tailored to fit specific needs using both the 3
x 3 kernel and the variable size kernel in IDRISI's FILTER module. See the module description of FILTER in the on-line
Help System for a detailed explanation of these filtering techniques.
As already mentioned, the RADAR backscatter signal is composed of the various diffuse and specular responses of scene
elements to the sent RADAR pulse. The compound pattern of the varying surface responses can be exploited in order to
determine the textural characteristics of the land surface. These characteristics can be derived using the TEXTURE mod-
ule in IDRISI. TEXTURE includes three categories of analysis. The first uses variability in a moving window to assess
several different measures, including entropy. The second estimates the fractal dimension of the image surface. The third
provides directional edge enhancement filters to enhance edge patterns in different directions. For example, Figure 3
shows a fractal surface derived using the TEXTURE module. Each of the surfaces derived from TEXTURE can be used
as input in a classification scheme for RADAR imagery. Thus, instead of using spectral responses, one utilizes scene tex-
tural characteristics in classification.
The 24-day repeat cycle of RADARSAT can be exploited in the monitoring of surface phenomena that exhibit temporal
variability, as each time step has a different RADAR backscatter signal. Using the COMPOSITE routine in IDRISI, multi-
date RADAR imagery can be combined to produce a false color composite (very much like multispectral single scene
data) that shows the temporal transitions in given earth surface components like crops or different vegetation types or
surface cover types.
It is anticipated that as RADAR data becomes more widely used, there will be accompanying developments in software to
exploit the unique character of RADAR imagery.

References
Eliason, E. M., and McEwen, A. S., 1990. Adaptive Box Filters for Removal of Random Noise from Digital Images, Photo-
grammetric Engineering and Remote Sensing, 56(4): 453-458.
Lillesand, T., Kiefer, R. W., and J.W. Chipman, 2004. Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation, John Wiley and Sons, New
York.
RADARSAT International, 1995. RADARSAT Guide to Products and Services, RADARSAT International, Richmond, B.C.,
Canada.

Chapter 19 RADAR Imaging and Analysis 227

Change Analysis
This chapter gives a brief overview of the special procedures available for change analysis in IDRISI.
Change implies not only a difference in land surface characteristics between two dates, but also that the difference is
uncharacteristic of the normal variation that might be found from one time period to the next. Indeed, the word typically
implies some permanence in the changed characteristic. Time series analysis concerns the examination of change over a
sequence of images (rather than just two). It is used here to refer not only to the perception of trends in change but also
to the description of characteristic values and the abstraction of anomalies. For example, an examination of deforestation
between two dates would constitute an analysis of change while the search for evidence of global warming over the past
half century would constitute time series analysis. It might seem then that the difference between change and time series
analysis rests with whether the analysis concerns pairwise comparisons between images or multiple comparisons. The ana-
lytical approaches between the two are, however, often remarkably different.
With remotely sensed and GIS images our analysis of change can be concerned with two basic types of data -- qualitative
and quantitative. Qualitative data represent differences in kind while quantitative data represent differences in degree.
Thus, for example, a land use map contains qualitative data while a digital elevation model (a map of topographic relief)
contains quantitative data. With change and time series analysis, techniques will tend to differ depending upon whether
the data are qualitative or quantitative in nature. Additionally they will vary according to whether pairwise (simple change)
or multiple (time series) comparisons are being made. Accordingly, the discussion that follows is organized on this basis.
The techniques for the analysis of change are broken down into two broad categories for this chapter. The first of these
contains techniques that are designed for comparisons between pairs of images; the second consists of methods for pre-
dictive modeling and assessment of models. In this chapter we will cover pairwise comparison of quantitative data. A spe-
cial facility in IDRISI, Land Change Modeler (LCM) is used for the pairwise comparison of qualitative data and is
discussed at length in the Land Change Modeler chapter. Also, for many change analysis is synonymous with time series
analysis, particularly techniques that are concerned with the analysis of trends and anomalies across multiple images (i.e., a
time series). A special facility in IDRISI, the Earth Trends Modeler (ETM) is used for this purpose and is covered in
depth in the Earth Trends Modeler chapter.

Pairwise Comparisons
With pairwise comparisons we can break down the techniques according to whether they are suitable for quantitative or
qualitative data. Quantitative data has values that indicate an amount or measurement, such as NDVI, rainfall or reflec-
tance. Qualitative data has values that indicate different categories, such as census tract ID’s or landuse classes.

Quantitative Data
Image Differencing
With quantitative data, the simplest form of change analysis is image differencing. In IDRISI, this can be achieved with the
OVERLAY module through a simple subtraction of one image from the other. However, a second stage of analysis is
often required since the difference image will typically contain a wide range of values. Both steps are included in the mod-
ule IMAGEDIFF, which produces several common image difference products: a simple difference image (later - earlier),
a percentage change image (later-earlier/earlier), a standardized difference image (Z-scores), or a classified standardized
difference image (z-scores divided into 6 classes). Mask images that limit the study area may also be specified.
Care must be taken in choosing a threshold to distinguish true change from natural variability in any of these difference

Chapter 20 Change Analysis 228

images. There are no firm guidelines for this operation. A commonly used value for the threshold is 1 standard deviation
(STD) (i.e., all areas within 1 STD are considered non-change areas and those beyond 1 STD in either the positive or neg-
ative direction are considered change areas), but this should be used with caution. Higher values may be more appropriate
and in some cases natural breaks in a histogram of the simple difference or percentage change images may be more sensi-
ble as a basis for choosing the threshold values.

Image Ratioing
While image differencing looks at the absolute difference between images, image ratioing looks at the relative difference.
Again, this could be achieved with OVERLAY using the ratio option. However, because the resulting scale of relative
change is not symmetric about 1 (the no change value), it is recommended that a logarithmic transformation be under-
taken before thresholding the image. The module IMAGERATIO offers both a simple ratio and a log ratio result.

Regression Differencing
A third form of differencing is called regression differencing. This technique should be used whenever it is suspected that the
measuring instrument (e.g., a satellite sensor) has changed its output characteristics between the two dates being com-
pared. Here the earlier image is used as the independent variable and the later image as the dependent variable in a linear
regression. The intercept and slope of this regression expresses the offset and gain required to adjust the earlier image to
have comparable measurement characteristics to the later. In effect, we create a predicted later image in which the values
are what we would expect if there were no change other than the offset and gain caused by the changes in the sensor. The
equation is:
predicted later image = (earlier image * gain) + offset
With the sensor differences accounted for, the predicted later image and the actual later image may then be analyzed for
change. Note that this technique requires that the overall numeric characteristics of the two images be equal except for
sensor changes. The technique may not be valid if the two images represent conditions that are overall very different
between the two dates.
The module CALIBRATE automates the image adjustment process. The input image (the one to calibrate) is used as the
independent variable and the reference image is used as the dependent variable in the regression. The output image is
adjusted to the characteristics of the reference image and thus can be used in a standard comparison operation (such as
IMAGEDIFF or IMAGERATIO) with any image also based on this reference, including the reference image itself.
Note that CALIBRATE also offers options to adjust an image by entering offset and gain values or by entering mean and
standard deviation values.

Change Vector Analysis

Occasionally, one needs to undertake pairwise comparisons on multi-dimensional images. For example, one might wish to
undertake a change analysis between two dates of satellite imagery where each is represented by several spectral bands. To
do so, change vector analysis can be used. With change vector analysis, difference images are created for each of the corre-
sponding bands. These difference images are then squared and added. The square root of the result represents the magni-
tude of the change vector. All these operations can be carried out with the Image Calculator, or a combination of
TRANSFORM and OVERLAY. The resulting image values are in the same units as the input images (e.g., dn).
When only two bands (for each of the two dates) are involved, it is also possible to create a direction image (indicating the
direction of change in band space). The module CVA calculates both magnitude and direction images for 2-band image
pairs. Figure 1 illustrates these calculations. The magnitude image is in the same units as the input bands and is the dis-
tance between the Date 1 and Date 2 positions. The direction image is in azimuths measured clockwise from a vertical line

Chapter 20 Change Analysis 229

extending up from the Date 2 position.

Band 2
Band 2 magnitude
. Date1
0
direction
. Date1

.
Date2
270 .
Date2
90

Band 1 180 Band 1

Figure 1

Qualitative Data
Crosstabulation / Crossclassification
With qualitative data, CROSSTAB should be used for change analysis between image pairs and there are several types of
output that can be useful. The crosstabulation table shows the frequencies with which classes have remained the same
(frequencies along the diagonal) or have changed (off-diagonal frequencies). The Kappa Index of Agreement (KIA) indi-
cates the degree of agreement between the two maps, both in an overall sense and on a per-category basis. Finally, the
crossclassification image can readily be reclassified into either a change image or an agreement image. Note that the
numeric values of data classes must be identical on both maps for the output from CROSSTAB to be meaningful.

Predictive Change Modeling

In some cases, knowing the changes that have occurred in the past may help predict future changes. A suite of modules in
IDRISI has been developed to provide the basic tools for predictive landcover change modeling. These tools include
Land Change Modeler and GEOMOD. Land Change Modeler is covered extensively in the next chapter, but briefly, it is
used to assess historical land cover data and to use that assessment to predict future scenarios. It does this by assessing
past land transition information and incorporating environmental variable maps that might drive or explain change to cre-
ate future scenarios and layers of transition potential maps. Although the underlying logic is different, GEOMOD is sim-
ilar in that it can simulate the transition from one land use state to another, however, Land Change Modeler can act upon
many transitions at once.

GEOMOD
GEOMOD is a landuse change simulation model that predicts the transition from one landuse state to another landuse
state, i.e., the location of grid cells that change over time from one state to another. GEOMOD simulates the change
between exactly two categories, state 1 and state 2. For example, GEOMOD could be used to predict areas likely to
change from forest (state 1) to non-forest (state 2) over a given time. The simulation can occur either forward or back-
ward in time. The simulation is based on:
-specification of the beginning time, ending time and time step for the simulation,
-an image showing the location of landuse states 1 and 2 at the beginning time,
-an optional mask image distinguishing between areas in and out of the study region,

Chapter 20 Change Analysis 230

-an optional image of stratification that shows the study area divided into regions, where each region is a stratum,
-a decision whether to constrain the simulated change to the border between state 1 and state 2,
-a map of suitability for the transition to landuse state 2,
-the anticipated quantity of landuse states 1 and 2 at the ending time.
An additional option allows for the creation of an image of environmental impact for each time step of the simulated land
change. GEOMOD can also generate a map of cumulative impact for the entire duration of the simulation. These maps
of impact show the magnitude of change to an environmental resource at the locations of simulated landuse change. For
example, these maps could show carbon emissions that result from the conversion from forest to non-forest.
A full discussion of GEOMOD along with an extensive white paper can be found in the Help.

Markov Chain Analysis

Other techniques for predictive modeling are provided in IDRISI that are primarily based on Markov Chain Analysis and
Cellular Automata.
A Markovian process is one in which the state of a system at time 2 can be predicted by the state of the system at time 1
given a matrix of transition probabilities from each cover class to every other cover class. The MARKOV module can be
used to create such a transition probability matrix. As input, it takes two landcover maps. It then produces the following
outputs:
- A transition probability matrix. This is automatically displayed, as well as saved. Transition probabilities express the like-
lihood that a pixel of a given class will change to any other class (or stay the same) in the next time period.
- A transition areas matrix. This expresses the total area (in cells) expected to change in the next time period.
- A set of conditional probability images—one for each landcover class. These maps express the probability that each
pixel will belong to the designated class in the next time period. They are called conditional probability maps since this
probability is conditional on their current state.
STCHOICE is a stochastic choice decision module. Given the set of conditional probability images produced by MAR-
KOV, STCHOICE can be used to produce any number of potential realizations of the projected changes embodied in the
conditional probability maps. If you try this, however, you will find the results to be disappointing. The output from
MARKOV has only very limited spatial knowledge. To improve the spatial sense of these conditional probability images
(or in fact, any statistic), use DISAGGREGATE. Given an image of the likely internal spatial pattern of an areal statistic,
DISAGGREGATE redistributes the statistic such that it follows the suggested pattern, but maintains the overall area
total. NORMALIZE can then be used to ensure that probabilities add to 1.0 at each pixel (this may need to be applied
iteratively with DISAGGREGATE).

Cellular Automata
One of the basic spatial elements that underlies the dynamics of many change events is proximity: areas will have a higher
tendency to change to a class when they are near existing areas of the same class (i.e., an expansion phenomenon). These
can be very effectively modeled using cellular automata. A cellular automaton is a cellular entity that independently varies
its state based on its previous state and that of its immediate neighbors according to a specific rule. Clearly there is a sim-
ilarity here to a Markovian process. The only difference is application of a transition rule that depends not only upon the
previous state, but also upon the state of the local neighborhood.
Many cellular automata transition rules can be implemented through a combination of FILTER and RECLASS. Take, for
example, the case of Conway's Game of Life. In this hypothetical illustration, the automata live or die according to the fol-
lowing criteria:

Chapter 20 Change Analysis 231

- An empty cell becomes alive if there are three living automata in the 3x3 neighborhood (known as the Moore neighbor-
hood) surrounding the cell.
- The cell will stay alive so long as there are 2 or 3 living neighbors. Fewer than that, it dies from loneliness; more than that
it does from competition for resources.
This can be implemented using the following kernel with the FILTER module:
1 1 1
1 10 1
1 1 1

followed by the following RECLASS rule:

0-2 = 0
3-4 = 1
4 - 11 = 0
12 - 13 = 1
14 - 18 = 0

The critical element of this rule is the use of the 10 multiplier in the central cell. As a result of the filter step, you know
that the central cell is occupied if the result is 10 or greater. The CELLATOM module can be used to implement this kind
of Cellular Automaton rule. However, a cellular automaton procedure very specific to the context of predictive landcover
change modeling is implemented with the CA_MARKOV module.
CA_MARKOV takes as input the name of the landcover map from which changes should be projected, the transition
areas file produced by MARKOV from analysis of that image and an earlier one, and a collection (.rgf) of suitability
images that express the suitability of a pixel for each of the landcover types under consideration. It then begins an iterative
process of reallocating landcover until it meets the area totals predicted by the MARKOV module. The logic it uses is this:
- The total number of iterations is based on the number of time steps set by the user. For example, if the projection is for
10 years into the future, the user might choose to complete the model in 10 steps.
- Within each iteration, every landcover class will typically lose some of its land to one or more of the other classes (and it
may also gain land from others). Thus within the consideration of each host within each iteration, claimant classes select
land from the host based on the suitability map for the claimant class. Since there will commonly be competition for spe-
cific land parcels, this process of land allocation is undertaken using a multi-objective allocation procedure (the MOLA
module).
- The Cellular Automaton component arises in part from the iterative process of land allocation, and in part from a filter-
ing stage with each iteration that reduces the suitability of land away from existing areas of that type. By default, the mod-
ule uses a 5x5 mean filter to achieve this contiguity constraint. By filtering a Boolean mask of the class being considered,
the mean filter yields a value of 1 when it is entirely within the existing class and 0 when it is entirely outside it. However,
when it crosses the boundary, it will yield values that quickly transition from 1 to 0. This result is then multiplied by the
suitability image for that class, thereby progressively downweighting the suitabilities as one moves away from existing
instances of that class. Note that it is possible to apply a different filter by specifying an alternative filter file (.fil). Also
note that class masks are defined at each step to incorporate new areas of growth.

Chapter 20 Change Analysis 232

The net result of this iterative process is that landcover changes develop as a growth process in areas of high suitability
proximate to existing areas. CA_MARKOV is computationally intensive—a typical run might involve several thousand
GIS operations. Thus you should start the run when you can leave your computer for 15-30 minutes.

Model Validation
An important stage in the development of any predictive change model is validation. Typically, one gauges one's under-
standing of the process, and the power of the model, by using it to predict some period of time when the landcover con-
ditions are known. This is then used as a test for validation. IDRISI supplies a pair of modules to assist in the validation
process.
The first is called VALIDATE, and provides a comparative analysis on the basis of the Kappa Index of Agreement.
Kappa is essentially a statement of proportional accuracy, adjusted for chance agreement. However, unlike the traditional
Kappa statistic, VALIDATE breaks the validation down into several components, each with a special form of Kappa or
associated statistic (based on the work of Pontius (2000)):
· Kappa for no information = Kno
· Kappa for location = Klocation
· Kappa for quantity = Kquantity
· Kappa standard = Kstandard
· Value of Perfect Information of Location = VPIL
· Value of Perfect Information of Quantity = VPIQ
With such a breakdown, for example, it is possible to assess the success with which one is able to specify the location of
change versus the quantity of change.
The other validation procedure is the ROC (Relative Operating Characteristic). It is used to compare any statement about
the probability of an occurrence against a Boolean map which shows the actual occurrences. It can be useful, for example,
in validating modifications to the conditional probability maps output from MARKOV. Note that LOGISTICREG incor-
porates ROC directly in its output.

References:
Pontius Jr., R.G., 2000. Quantification error versus location error in comparison of categorical maps. Photogrammetric
Engineering and Remote Sensing. 66(8) pp. 1011-1016.

Chapter 20 Change Analysis 233

The Land Change Modeler for Ecological
Sustainability

Introduction
The Land Change Modeler (LCM) for Ecological Sustainability is an integrated software environment for Commissioned
by the Andes Center for Biodiversity Conservation of Conservation International (our inspiration for the Andes Edition
name), LCM is the first extensive vertical application developed by Clark Labs. (IDRISI is a horizontal application – a
software product meant to fulfill many applications. In contrast, a vertical application is directed towards a specific appli-
cation.) The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability is oriented to the pressing problem of accelerated land
conversion and the very specific analytical needs of biodiversity conservation.

Hate to Read the Documentation? A Power-User Alternative

Experienced users of GIS can probably figure out most of what LCM does on their own. However, there are some critical
issues that expert and novice users alike need to know. Look for and pay careful attention to special sections titled “Critical
Things to Know!”

Critical Things to Know about LCM in General

1. The current version of LCM is experimental and intended for evaluation and comment only. Most of the procedures
incorporated are new and have not been widely tested. As a result, we offer these tools in the spirit of scientific explora-
tion and invite constructive commentaries about how they can be extended or improved.
2. Change analysis and prediction in LCM are organized around transition sub-models. A transition sub-model can consist
of a single landcover transition or a group of transitions that are thought to have the same underlying driver variables.
3. All selected transition sub-models must be modeled before change prediction can be undertaken.
4. LCM incorporates the option of dynamic landcover variables and dynamic road development.
5. All files used by LCM must be contained within the Working Folder or one of the project Resource Folders. DO NOT
USE THE BROWSE BUTTON to select files.

Accessing LCM and its Functions: Recommendations

LCM is accessed from the Modeling menu and opens as a special dialog attached to the left-hand side of IDRISI’s work-
space. It is generally recommended that serious users of this application consider the use of an Ultra-Wide XGA (1920 x
1200) screen or a dual-monitor setup. However, for users with lower resolution devices, LCM can be minimized to the left
margin by clicking on the “-“ symbol on its banner (and similarly, the “+” symbol to re-expand it).

Tabs and Panels

LCM is organized around a set of five major task areas expressed as tabs for:
Analyzing past landcover change

Modeling the potential for land transitions

Predicting the course of change into the future

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 234

 Assessing its implications for biodiversity, and

Evaluating planning interventions for maintaining ecological sustainability.

Within each tab, a series of tasks/analytical stages are presented as a series of drop-down panels. You can have as many
drop-down panels open as you wish – they are presented this way simply to accommodate varying screen resolutions.
The first three of the five tabs of LCM are intended for the integrated analysis of landcover change and its projection into
the future. As a result access to almost all panels on these tabs requires the specification of a minimal set of project
parameters located on the first panel of the first tab.
Note that the panels on the first three tabs are generally organized around a sequential set of operations that should be
followed one after the other.

A Recommendation
We strongly recommend that you complete the tutorial exercises for LCM. This is the fastest way of learning the full scope
of the system.

The Change Analysis Tab

The Change Analysis tab provides a set of tools for the rapid assessment of change, allowing one to generate one-click
evaluations of gains and losses, net change, persistence and specific transitions both in map and graphical form.

Critical Things to Know!

1. The LCM Project Parameters panel must be filled out (with the exception of the palette, optional elevation model and
basis roads layer) before the majority of the panels on the first three tabs become active. landcover maps must use 0 for
background areas and should normally contain the year date (2 or 4 digit) as part of their name.
2. The Ignore Transitions checkbox on the Change Maps panel provides an important means of ignoring small and insig-
nificant transitions and affects not only the change maps produced, but also the default transition sub-models that appear
in the Transition Potentials tab.
3. The project name specified is used as a prefix for a range of important operational files. DO NOT DELETE any files
that begin with the project name prefix.

The LCM Project Parameters Panel

This panel allows you to specify the essential files associated with the landcover change analysis of a specific study area, as
well as a project name and (optionally) a preferred landcover palette. Note that some aspects of LCM can be used without
specifying these files, most notably the species modeling and biodiversity modeling tools on the Implications tab. How-
ever, they are required for most elements of LCM.
For the change and prediction analyses, a minimum requirement is the specification of two landcover maps that can be
used as the basis of understanding the nature of change in the study region and the means of establishing samples of tran-
sitions that should be modeled. Optional inputs include an elevation model and basis roads layer that are used in dynamic
road development.

Notes
1. The landcover maps must be byte or integer images with identical legends.

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 235

2. Background areas must be coded with 0 and must be identical on both maps.

The Change Analysis Panel

The Change Analysis panel provides a rapid quantitative assessment of change by graphing gains and losses by landcover
category. A second option, net change, shows the result of taking the earlier landcover areas, adding the gains and then
subtracting the losses. The third option is to examine the contributions to changes experienced by a single landcover.

Notes
1. Changing the units on this panel causes the units on the Change Maps panel to also change.

The Change Maps Panel

This panel provides the ability to create a variety of change maps.

Notes
1. The Ignore Transitions checkbox is very important – please read the entire text of this note. This checkbox is used to fil-
ter out minor transitions that may be the result of map errors or may be considered to be insignificant for the purpose of
the study. This checkbox affects not only the maps produced from this panel, but also the transitions that are automati-
cally included for analysis on the Transition Potentials tab. This is the quickest and most effective way of narrowing down
the transitions to those that are essential for understanding and modeling change.
2. Specifying an output name is optional. If one is not specified, a temporary filename is used.
3. The Map Exchanges option is designed for the examination of exchanges such as those between agriculture and sec-
ondary forest in areas of swidden agriculture.
4. Changing the measurement units on this panel also changes the units on the Change Analysis panel.
5. Note that an All option is provided in the drop-down lists of landcover categories. Thus choosing to map the changes
from All to a specific category maps any change that ended up in the designated category, differentiated by the start cate-
gory.

The Spatial Trend of Change Panel

In landscapes dominated by human intervention, patterns of change can be complex, and thus very difficult to decipher.
To facilitate interpretation in these contexts, a spatial trend analysis tool has been provided. This is a best fit polynomial
trend surface to the pattern of change. The default is a 3rd order surface which is good for a very broad overview. Trends
up to 9th order can be calculated. However, note that the time needed to calculate the surface increases substantially as the
order is increased.

Notes
1. The intention of this module is to provide a means of generalizing about the pattern of change. The numeric values do
not have any special significance. The surface is created by coding areas of change with 1 and areas of no change with 0
and treating them as if they were quantitative values.
2. The analytical work done by this option is achieved by a call to the TREND module. For details on how it works, please
refer to the on-line Help System for TREND.

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 236

The Transition Potentials Tab
The Transition Potentials tab allows one to group transitions into a set of sub-models and to explore the potential power
of explanatory variables. Variables can be added to the model either as static or dynamic components. Static variables
express aspects of basic suitability for the transition under consideration, and are unchanging over time. Dynamic vari-
ables are time-dependent drivers such as proximity to existing development or infrastructure and are recalculated over
time during the course of a prediction.
Once model variables have been selected, each transition is modeled using either Logistic Regression or IDRISI’s exten-
sively enhanced Multi-Layer Perceptron (MLP) neural network. After a detailed assessment of empirical modeling tools
(such as Weights-of-Evidence, Empirical Probabilities, Empirical Likelihoods, etc.), it was found that these two
approaches offer the strongest capabilities, particularly the MLP. The MLP neural network has been extensively enhanced
to offer an automatic mode that requires no user intervention. The result in either case is a transition potential map for
each transition – an expression of time-specific potential for change.

Critical Things to Know!

1. Change prediction in LCM is based on a series of empirically evaluated sub-models.
2. By default, each transition is considered to be a separate sub-model, but multiple transitions can be grouped into a sin-
gle sub-model if it is considered that they all result from the same underlying driving forces. To group transitions into a
higher-order sub-model, simply assign them the same sub-model name. Note that this option is only available if the multi-
layer perceptron modeling option is used.
3. The Sub-Model to be Evaluated drop-down combo box is what determines which transition will be modeled from the
Run Transition Sub-Model panel.
4. In general, the multi-layer perceptron performs the best in modeling transitions. Note that for both options, categorical
variables must either be converted into a set of Boolean (dummy) variables, or transformed using the Evidence Likeli-
hood transformation option (highly recommended).

The Transition Sub-Models: Status Panel

The table on this panel lists all transitions that exist between the two landcover maps. The included field will be listed as No
for any transitions that were filtered out using an area threshold on the Change Analysis tab. You can reinstate any transi-
tion that has been excluded by clicking onto the included field entry, which will cause it to change to Yes. Similarly you can
deselect any included transition.
By default, it is assumed that each transition will be modeled separately as the basis for prediction. LCM creates names for
each of these sub-models. These names can be changed to any name of convenience. If you wish to model several transi-
tions together, merely give them a common sub-model name. Note, however, that:
- Modeling multiple transitions together is only available using the Multi-Layer Perceptron (MLP) option. Logistic Regres-
sion requires that they be modeled separately.
- Transitions should be grouped only if you believe that the underlying driving forces of change are the same.
- In general, as the number of transitions that are grouped together increases, the task becomes a more and more difficult
one for MLP to solve. This can easily be gauged from the validation accuracy report that the MLP provides.
Finally note that the Sub-Model to be Evaluated drop-down combo-box is the manner in which you indicate which tran-
sition will be modeled in any specific run of logistic regression or the MLP.

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 237

The Variable Transformation Utility Panel
The Variable Transformation Utility Panel provides a selection of optional commonly used transformations. These are
particularly critical if the Logistic Regression modeling option is chosen since it requires that the variables be linearly
related to the potential for transition. The MLP option does not require the variables to be linearly related, but transfor-
mation can sometimes make the task easier for it to solve in cases of strong non-linearities, thus yielding a higher accuracy.
In general, the transformations are self-evident, but two require special mention.
- The natural log transformation is commonly effective in linearizing distance decay variables (e.g., proximity to roads).
- The evidence likelihood transformation is a very effective means of incorporating categorical variables into the analysis. For
both the logistic regression and MLP options, variables must either be converted into a set of Boolean (dummy) variables,
or transformed using the evidence likelihood transformation option (highly recommended). For more information on this
option, see Note 1 in the section titled How It Works in this chapter.

The Test and Selection of Site and Driver Variables Panel

This is an optional panel that provides a quick test of the potential explanatory power of a variable – simply specify the
variable of interest and click the Test Explanatory Power button. Both quantitative and qualitative variables can be tested
(note, however, that qualitative variables need either to be broken out to a set of separate Boolean layers or transformed
with the Evidence Likelihood transformation tool before use). In general, we have found the variables that have a Cra-
mer’s V of about 0.15 or higher are useful while those with values of 0.4 or higher are good. For details, see Note 2 in the
section titled How It Works in this chapter.
For convenience, an Add to Model button is provided. This simply inserts the tested variable into the sub-model structure
grid.

The Transition Sub-Model Structure Panel

The Transition Sub-Model Structure panel provides a table for specifying:
- The explanatory variables to be evaluated. They can be added by means of the Test and Selection of Site and Driver
Variables panel, or directly entered.
- Whether each variable is static or dynamic. Static variables are site variables that do not change over time, such as slope,
element, etc. Dynamic variables are those that do change over time, such as proximity to development or proximity to
roads (assuming dynamic road growth).
- If the variable is dynamic, whether the basis is a landcover category (such as proximity to urban) or a roads category
(such as proximity to secondary roads).
- If the variable is dynamic, whether the operation is a DISTANCE calculation or a MACRO. The former is the most
common and will calculate distance from the designated landcover or road categories. The MACRO option leaves open
an infinite set of possibilities. If MACRO is selected, LCM will search for an IDRISI macro file (a text file with an “.iml”
extension) that contains the complete sequence of operations to update the dynamic variable at that stage. The macro file
must have the same name as the original dynamic variable, but with an “.iml” extension. LCM will pass four parameters to
the macro (%1, %2, %3 and %4) as follows:
The filename of the current state of the dynamic variable.
The filename of the updated dynamic variable that must be created.
The name of the final output landcover image from the complete run.
The name of the final output roads image from the complete run.
In most cases, only parameters %1 and %2 will be needed. Note that for the MACRO option, the basis type must be spec-

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 238

ified as Other.
When a variable is designated as dynamic and the basis layer type is selected as either roads or landuse, a dialog will pop
up for specifying the relevant landcover category or road categories from which distance should be calculated in the
change prediction stage. If a roads layer was not specified in the LCM Project Parameters tab, you will be able to specify
this layer in the dialog and it will update the basis roads layer field in the LCM Project Parameters tab.
Note that:
- Only one landcover category can be specified as the basis for calculating a dynamic landcover distance relationship. The
land cover list is taken from the input land cover image.
- Dynamic road development recognizes three categories: primary, secondary and tertiary. These must be given identifiers
of 1, 2 and 3 in your roads layer. You may then select any combination of categories for road building (e.g., all three, just
tertiary, etc.)

The Run Transition Sub-Model Panel

The Run Transition Sub-Model panel is the where the actual modeling of transition sub-models is implemented. The spe-
cific sub-model that will be implemented is that specified in the Sub-Model to be Evaluated drop-down combo box in the
Transition Sub-Models: Status panel.
Two methodologies are provided for modeling: a Multi-Layer Perceptron (MLP) and Logistic Regression. In general, we
strongly recommend the former which is why it is the default choice. In either case, when the Run Sub-Model button is
clicked, samples are extracted from the two landcover maps provided of areas that underwent the transitions being mod-
eled as well as the areas that were eligible to change, but did not. Then, in both cases, a modeling dialog will be launched
automatically, as described below:

Multi-Layer Perceptron
Initially the dialog for the Multi-Layer Perceptron neural network may seem daunting, but most of the parameters pre-
sented do not need to be modified (or in fact understood) to make productive use of this very powerful technique.
As launched by LCM, the Multi-Layer Perceptron starts training on the samples it has been provided of pixels that have
and have not experienced the transitions being modeled. At this point, the MLP is operating in automatic mode whereby it
makes its own decisions about the parameters to be used and how they should be changed to better model the data. In
most cases, you can let it run in this mode until it completes its training. However, you are also free to stop its training
operation, modify parameters and start it training again. Ultimately, after training has been completed, you will need to
click the Classify button to complete the process of transition potential modeling. When it is finished, LCM will display
each of the transition potential models. For more information about LCM’s specific use of the MLP, see Note 3 in the sec-
tion titled How It Works in this chapter. For detailed information on the MLP parameters, see the on-line Help System
for MLP.
Note some specific tips on using MLP in this context:
- The critical factor in the use of the MLP is the learning rate. What you ideally want to achieve is a smooth descent of the
RMS error curve. If it is flat over a large number of iterations (more than 2000), stop the training (by clicking the Stop
button) and halve the start and end learning rates. Continue to do this as necessary until the error curve descends.
- If the RMS error curve has descended and flattens out over a large number of iterations (>1000), stop the training and
proceed to the Classify button. If, however, you experience a slow but progressive increase in accuracy and decrease in the
RMS errors, let the MLP run until the end of its iterations. If it reaches the end of its iterations and it still appears to be
learning (the accuracy is increasing and the RMS is dropping), re-run it with a larger number of iterations (e.g., an addi-
tional 25%).
- In general, manipulating the learning rate alone will yield better than 90-95% of the best solution. In general, we do not

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 239

recommend modifying the momentum factor and have not found that adding a second hidden layer has been helpful.
Two parameters have sometimes been helpful in achieving the best solution. The first is the Sigmoid Constant: a value
greater than 1 (generally not more than 10) will make the decision boundary between good and bad locations less steep.
The second is the number of hidden layer nodes. With a small number relative to the number of input layers, the hidden
layers act like canonical components, expressing the common underlying themes in the explanatory variables. With large
numbers relative to the number of explanatory variables, the nodes capture very specific characteristics. In general, we
have found that the default algorithm performs well, but do not hesitate to experiment. The accuracy rate of classifying
the validation pixels is a good gauge.
- The linear activation level options of MLP are not recommended for this application.

Logistic Regression
In contrast to the MLP, logistic regression can only model a single transition at a time. Thus it launches in a mode that is
ready to model the specific transition indicated in the drop-down combo box in the Transition Sub-Models: Status panel.

The Change Prediction Tab

The Change Prediction tab provides the controls for a dynamic landcover change prediction process. After specifying the
end date, the quantity of change in each transition can either be modeled through a Markov Chain analysis or by specify-
ing the transition probability matrix from an external (e.g., econometric) model. Two basic models of change are provided:
a hard prediction model and a soft prediction model. The hard prediction model is based on a competitive land allocation
model similar to a multi-objective decision process. The soft prediction yields a map of vulnerability to change for the
selected set of transitions. In general, we prefer the results of the soft prediction for habitat and biodiversity assessment.
The hard prediction yields only a single realization while the soft prediction is a comprehensive assessment of change
potential.
In setting up the change prediction analysis, the user can specify the number of dynamic reassessment stages during which
dynamic variables are updated. This also includes the optional dynamic growth (intensification) of the road network. At
each stage, the system also checks for the presence of planning interventions (see below), including incentives and con-
straints and major infrastructure improvements.

Critical Things to Know!

1. The Change Prediction tab uses information from several other tabs. Of critical importance, all included transitions in
the Transition Potentials tab must have been already modeled using either MLP or logistic regression.
2. The options to include infrastructural changes or incentives and constraints require that the appropriate panels be filled
on the Planning tab.

The Change Demand Modeling Panel

The default procedure for determining the amount of change that will occur to some point in the future is by means of a
Markov Chain. A Markovian process is one in which the state of a system can be determined by knowing its previous state
and the probability of transitioning from each state to each other state. To determine this, LCM makes a call to IDRISI’s
MARKOV module at the time a prediction is run. Using the earlier and later landcover maps along with the date specified,
MARKOV figures out exactly how much land would be expected to transition from the later date to the prediction date
based on a projection of the transition potentials into the future. Note that this is not a simple linear extrapolation since
the transition potentials change over time as the various transitions in effect reach an equilibrium state.
To use the default Markov transition probabilities, first enter the end prediction date. Then select to view the resulting
Markov matrix. This matrix can be edited and saved but all rows must sum to one. If you do edit the default matrix, you

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 240

can always elect to restore the original matrix. The default Markov matrix that is saved to a file is a concatenation of the
project name, the year and the keyword “transition_ probabilities,” and has a “.txt” extension. For example, if the project
is named CT and the year of prediction is 2006, the file will be named “CT_2006_transition_probabilities.txt.”
The alternative to determining the demand for change by Markovian projection is to specify a transition probability file
from some other projection tool, such as an econometric model. The format for this file is as follows:
- It must be an ASCII text file with a “.txt” extension.
- It must be a square matrix where the numbers of rows and columns are each the same as the number of landcover
classes associated with your landcover maps.
- The rows represent the landcover classes on the earlier landcover map where the first class occupies the first row. The
columns represent the classes on the later map.
- All rows must sum to 1.0.
Finally note that regardless of how the transition probability matrix was created, the option exists to edit its values by
clicking on the designated button.
If you choose to enter transition probabilities by means of an external model, note that LCM will indicate that you need to
import the file. Click on the Import button and it will then display the contents of the file in a separate grid so that you
can be sure that it is correct. If so, click on the OK to Import button. It will then indicate that the default matrix has been
altered. At any time you can choose to reconstruct the original matrix or re-enter your external model as necessary.

The Dynamic Road Development Panel

This panel sets the parameters for dynamic road development. Dynamic road development is a procedure that tries to
predict how roads will develop in the future. It is very experimental and we welcome your suggestions for improvements
or extensions of its capabilities1.
Three levels of roads are recognized: primary, secondary and tertiary, which must be coded with integer values 1, 2 and 3,
respectively. Primary roads can only grow by extending their endpoints (if endpoints exist within the map). Secondary
roads can grow as new branches off of primary roads, and they can extend themselves. In a similar manner, tertiary roads
can grow as new branches off of secondary roads, and they can extend themselves.

Growth Pattern Options

Five options are provided according to the manner in which new road end-points and new road routes are generated:
Road Growth Parameters
The critical control parameters for dynamic road development are road spacing and road length. The former dictates
the frequency with which roads are generated along a route of superior class. Specifically it is the minimum distance that
must separate roads along a route of superior class. The latter dictates the maximum length a road class will grow in each
dynamic stage. The actual length of any new segment will fall randomly within that range.
Mode of End-Point Generation
Within the limits of the controlling parameters, new road end-points can be generated either randomly or by means of a
procedure that looks for the location of highest transition potential, but with a stochastic perturbation. Rather than pick-
ing the location with the absolute highest transition potential within the growth length parameter, a small random pertur-
bation is added to the transition potentials such that there is a large chance it will pick a location very similar to the highest

1. Dynamic road development in IDRISI was inspired by the pioneering work of the DINAMICA team. See Soares-Filho, B.S.; Assunção, R.M.; Pan-
tuzzo, A. Modeling the spatial transition probabilities of landscape dynamics in an Amazonian colonization frontier. BioScience, v. 51, p.1039-1046, 2001.

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 241

transition potential and an increasingly less likely chance of taking one that is quite different.
Note that if the stochastic highest transition potential option is used, a grid showing the selected transitions will be
enabled. You should select the transitions which are relevant for road growth and exclude those that are not. For example,
your model might include transitions related to declines in agriculture as well as urbanization. Clearly declines in agricul-
ture would not be a basis for road growth.
Mode of Route Generation
Once a new endpoint for a road has been generated, two options are provided for how the route is selected in joining up
that location to the existing road network. The default option is the minimum gradient route. This route is a balance
between trying to achieve a short route and the need to avoid steep slopes as much as possible. Alternatively, the highest
transition potential route balances the need for a short route with the desire to link up as many areas of high transition
potential as possible (on the assumption that these are areas that will have a high likelihood of needing a road connection
in the future).
Note that if the highest transition potential route option is used, a grid showing the selected transitions will be enabled.
You should select the transitions which are relevant for road growth and exclude those that are not. These are the same
transitions that would be relevant for end point generation (see above).
Skip Factor
In our experience, we have found that it is sometimes more efficient to not build roads at every stage, but build them only
after several stages have passed. The skip factor is how this is set. A skip factor of 1 means that roads will be dynamically
built at every stage. A skip factor of 2 indicates that they should be built only every second stage, and so on.
Output Roads Layer
The name of the output roads layer will be used for the final output at the end of the prediction. For intermediate stages,
this name will be used as a prefix with a suffix that indicates the stage number. These intermediate images are saved and
are also used for the construction of movie loops. If you do not wish to keep the intermediates, you will need to delete
them by hand. Note that this name should be different from that used for the landcover prediction.

The Change Allocation Panel

The Change Allocation Panel parameterizes and initiates the actual prediction process. The following parameters need to
be set:

The Prediction Date

This is set using the Change Demand Modeling panel (see above).

Dynamic Variable Recalculation Stages

Given the prediction date and the date of the later landcover image, the number of recalculation stages dictates the fre-
quency with which dynamic elements are recalculated. At each recalculation stage:
- Dynamic landcover variables are recalculated. A dynamic variable is one which varies in character with time. For exam-
ple, one of the variables associated with a specific transition might be distance from deforested areas. As time progresses,
the extent of this deforested area will increase, thereby changing this distance variable. All explanatory variables that are
indicated as being dynamic are recalculated at each stage.
- Dynamic road building is undertaken (unless a skip factor has been specified). Dynamic road building is a predictive
modeling of the development of roads over time.
- Infrastructural changes are reviewed and incorporated as necessary. These are specified on the Planning tab.

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 242

- Incentives and constraints are applied to the solution. These are also specified on the Planning tab

Hard Versus Soft Prediction

LCM offers two modes of change prediction: hard and soft. A hard prediction is a commitment to a specific scenario. The
result is a landcover map with the same categories as the inputs. In contrast, the soft output is a continuous mapping of
vulnerability to change. It doesn’t say what will change, but rather, the degree to which the areas have the right conditions
to precipitate change.
If the soft prediction checkbox is checked, the system will produce both hard and soft outputs. In addition, when checked,
a grid will open up listing all included transitions in your model. Here you can select which transitions you wish to include
in your portrait of vulnerability. As a default, all are selected, in which case you are modeling the vulnerability to any kind
of change. More typically, you will select only certain transitions to include. For example, if your interest is in forests, you
might include all transitions that relate to the loss of forest cover.
A second issue that needs to be set for the soft prediction is the aggregation type. The soft prediction is based on the cur-
rent state (during the prediction) of transition potentials for each of the selected transitions. These are then aggregated to
produce the soft output for each stage. Two aggregation options are provided: maximum and logical OR. The former
characterizes a pixel by the maximum transition probability that exists at that location for the included transitions. The
second calculates the logical OR of these transition potentials. This latter option treats a location as being more vulnerable
if it is wanted by several transitions at the same time. For example, if a certain pixel is evaluated as 0.6 as it’s potential to
transition to one cover type and 0.7 to another cover type, the former option would calculate its vulnerability to change as
0.7 while the latter would evaluate it at 0.88. It is left to the user to decide which is the more appropriate in the context of
the study being undertaken.

Display Options
LCM provides several options for display of the prediction. One is to display the intermediate stage images (as opposed to
only the final prediction). This option should be used with care as Windows display memory can be rapidly exhausted,
putting the entire Windows system into an unstable state. The limits here will depend, in part, on how much RAM is
installed on your system.
A second option for display is to create an AVI video file. In IDRISI, this file can be played in IDRISI’s Media Viewer – a
utility provided under the Display menu. It can also be played with programs such as Microsoft Media Player and can be
inserted into a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation. For long sequences, a frame rate of 0.25 generally works well, but
slower rates may be more appropriate for slower sequences.
For more information about how the hard allocation procedure is undertaken, see the section titled How It Works in this
chapter.

The Validation Panel

The Validation panel allows you to determine the quality of the predicted land use map in relation to a map of reality. It
does this by running a 3-way crosstabulation between the later landcover map, the prediction map, and a map of reality.
The output will illustrate the accuracy of the model results where:

A | B | B = Hits (green) – Model predicted change and it changed

A | A | B = Misses (red) – Model predicted persistence and it changed
A | B | A = False Alarms (yellow) – Model predicted change and it persisted

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 243

The Implications Tab
In assessing the impact of change for ecological sustainability, a wide range of tools is provided, including those for spe-
cies-specific habitat assessment, habitat change analysis, gap analysis, landscape pattern analysis and biodiversity analysis.

Critical Things to Know!

1. The Habitat Assessment panel ideally uses a habitat suitability map that has a 0-1 range, and which can be created with
the Habitat Suitability / Species Distribution panel. It is strongly recommended that you read the section about it below.
2. The categories of habitat and potential corridor are completely open in terms of their definition.
3. Depending upon the input data, the Biodiversity Analysis panel may generate a very large number of intermediate data
files that you may wish to be automatically deleted upon completion of the analysis.

The Habitat Assessment Panel

The Habitat Assessment panel allows one to assess the status of habitat on an animal species-specific basis2. Based on any
of the existing or predicted landcover maps and an optional map of species-specific habitat suitability (see below), the
habitat assessment tool develops a map with five categories: primary habitat, secondary habitat, primary potential corri-
dor, secondary potential corridor and unsuitable. Important parameters that control this process include home range
sizes, buffers based on sensitivity to humans and the ability to cross gaps within home ranges and during dispersal. The
resulting map can be used to estimate maximum populations and serves as a primary resource in the planning for corri-
dors.
Any of three analyses can be run: an assessment of the earlier landcover map, the later landcover map or the current pre-
diction. Important terms and parameters that need to be specified include:

Habitat and Potential Corridor

The habitat assessment map produced by this analysis includes five categories of habitat status. Below they are indicated
with a possible interpretation. However, they can be interpreted in any way that seems appropriate to the study under con-
sideration.
Primary Habitat. This is habitat that meets all the necessary life needs in terms of home range size, access to summer
and winter forage, etc. Issues other than minimum area and required buffer size are specified by a minimum suitability on
a habitat suitability map (see below).
Secondary Habitat. This includes areas which have the designated habitat cover types, but which are missing one or
more requirements (such as area or minimum suitability level) to serve as primary habitat. Secondary habitat areas provide
areas of forage and safe haven for dispersing animals as they move to new areas of primary habitat.
Primary Potential Corridor. Areas of primary potential corridor are non-habitat areas that are reasonably safe to tra-
verse, such as at night.
Secondary Potential Corridor. There are areas that are known to be traversed by the species in question, but which con-
stitute much riskier cover types.
Unsuitable. These are areas that are not suited for habitat or corridors.

2. The habitat assessment procedure introduced here was inspired by the work of the Bow Corridor Ecosystem Advisory Group (BCEAG) in the devel-
opment of a corridor strategy for the Southern Canmore Region of Alberta, Canada. For more information, please refer to http://www.stratalink.com/
corridors/wildlife_corridors_report.htm.

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 244

Include as Potential Habitat
The grid lists each of the landcover types included in the study. Select all cover types associated with habitat for the spe-
cies in question.

Gap Distance Within Range

This column is concerned with gaps within the home range of the species of concern. Gap distances do not need to be
specified by cover types included as potential habitat components.

Gap Distance Outside Range

This column is concerned with gaps that the animal is capable of crossing when dispersing. This parameter is important in
determining which areas can serve as potential corridors. In addition, this parameter effectively establishes the maximum
length of the corridor.

Minimum Core Area

This constitutes, in the case of primary habitat, the minimum home range area of the species involved, exclusive of any
buffers (hence the use of the term core). For secondary habitat areas, the core area is more likely related to forage abun-
dance.

Minimum Edge Buffer

This is the size of buffer needed as distance from human activity. For potential corridor areas, this therefore constitutes
half the necessary corridor width.

Minimum Habitat Suitability

The inclusion of a habitat suitability model is optional but strongly recommended. For each of the main habitat/corridor
categories, a minimum suitability can be specified for inclusion in that category. A general strategy for development of this
layer is as follows:
1. Develop separate suitability maps for each of the primary and secondary habitat and potential corridor categories. The
Habitat Suitability / Species Distribution panel provides a variety of tools for empirically developing this. However, the
multi-criteria evaluation (MCE) option will most often be the tool of choice since the suitability mapping will be based on
published reports of species/landscape associations.
2. Rescale the range of the primary habitat suitability map to a range of 0.75-1.0 using the STRETCH module. Then
rescale the secondary habitat map to a 0.5-0.75 range; the primary potential corridor map to a 0.25 – 0.5 range and the
secondary potential corridor map to a 0 – 0.25 range. Combine these four maps using the cover option in OVERLAY. The
result will be a single map layer that ranges in value from 0.0-1.0. The default thresholds in LCM are set for 0.75, 0.5 and
0.25 in the decision for allocating land to the basic categories (before consideration of minimum area, gap crossing and
buffer considerations). All areas with a value of 0 are by definition unsuitable.
In practice, the user is free to establish whatever thresholds are meaningful and logical in the context of their study.

The Habitat Change / Gap Analysis Panel

This panel is used for two kinds of analyses: an analysis of change in habitat status (created by means of two runs of the
Habitat Assessment panel) and Gap Analysis by comparing the results of one run of the Habitat Assessment panel and a
protection layer map.
In the case of habitat change, a graph is produced of gains and losses that can be altered with one of net change.
With gap analysis, the protection map can be either a simple Boolean image showing areas that are protected or not, or a

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 245

multi-level integer map showing various protection levels. The result is simply a crosstabulation of habitat categories and
protection levels.

The Landscape Pattern and Change Process Analysis Panel

This panel permits analyses of landscape pattern or process of any of the earlier or later landcover maps, or the current
prediction. Options include:

Normalized Entropy
This measure is Shannon’s Entropy measure normalized by the maximum entropy for the number of landcover classes
involved. Another common term for this measure is Diversity. It is calculated over the local neighborhood of each pixel,
defined as either a 3x3, 5x5 or 7x7 neighborhood. The formula is as follows:
E = -Σ(p*ln(p)) / ln(n)
where p is the proportion of each class within the neighborhood, ln is the natural logarithm3 and n is the number of
classes. The result is an index that ranges from 0-1 where 0 indicates a case where the landcover is uniform within the
neighborhood and 1 indicates maximum diversity possible of landcovers within the neighborhood.

Relative Richness
This is another measure of diversity of cover classes, measured as:
R = n/nmax*100
where n is the number of different classes present in the neighborhood and nmax is maximum number of classes possible.

Edge Density
Edge Density is a simple measure of fragmentation. Edge density is tabulated as the number of adjacent pairs of pixels
within the neighborhood that are different from each other relative to the maximum number of different pairs possible.

Patch Area
Patch Area groups adjacent pixels of similar landcover category into patches, calculates their areas, and outputs an image
where each pixel expresses the area of the patch to which it belongs.

Patch Compactness
Patch Compactness groups adjacent pixels of similar landcover category into patches, calculates their compactness, and
outputs an image where each pixel expresses the compactness of the patch to which it belongs. Compactness is calculated
as:
C = SQRT(Ap/Ac)
where SQRT is the square root function, Ap is the area of the patch being calculated, and Ac is the area of a circle having
the same perimeter as that of the patch being calculated.

Change Process
The Change Process option compares the earlier and later landcover maps and measures the nature of the change under-
way within each landcover class. It does this by using a decision tree procedure that compares the number of landcover
patches present within each class between the two time periods to changes in their areas and perimeters.4 The output is in

3. Log base 2 is more commonly used in communications theory, but the difference is immaterial with this normalized procedure.

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 246

the form of a map where each landcover class is assigned the category of change that it is experiencing. The interpretation
of the categories is as follows:
Deformation: the shape is changing.
Shift: the position is changing.
Perforation: the number of patches is constant but the area is decreasing.
Shrinkage: the area and perimeter are decreasing but the number of patches is constant.
Enlargement: the number of patches is constant but the area is increasing.
Attrition: the number of patches and the area are decreasing.
Aggregation: the number of patches is decreasing but area is constant or increasing.
Creation: the number of patches and area are increasing.
Dissection: the number of patches is increasing and the area is decreasing.
Fragmentation: the number of patches is increasing and area is strongly decreasing.
Note, however, that while the output is in the form of a map, it is not spatially explicit – i.e., the process attributed to a
landcover category is uniform over the entire study area.

The Species Range Polygon Refinement Panel

This panel allows for the refinement of range polygon maps of species distributions developed by experts who draw the
ranges onto map bases. This information is exceptionally valuable, but subject to error as a result of imprecision in the
base maps, projection and geodetic datum errors, and limited geographical extent of expertise (i.e., the expert delineates
only in the areas where she or he has expertise). This procedure is very experimental, but had shown considerable prom-
ise. Comments are invited on its utility and how it can be improved.

General Logic
The underlying principle of the refinement process is to uncover the common environmental logic of the areas delineated
by the range polygon. It does this by creating clusters of environmental conditions according to a set of environmental
variables that the user believes can characterize the niche of the species. It then compares these clusters with the range
polygon to determine the proportional inclusion of clusters within the range polygon. Clusters that fall wholly or largely
within the polygon are assumed to describe essential components of that niche. Those that fall mostly or wholly outside
are assumed to be unlikely components. The polygon is thus refined by removing areas that fall below a designated confi-
dence. In addition, another option is provided to simply output a confidence map that can be used in conjunction with
the original range polygon by the Weighted Mahalanobis Typicality procedure in the Habitat Suitability / Species Distribu-
tion panel. This is the default option and the one we generally recommend.

Environmental Variables and Cluster Development

The critical component of this analysis is the production of environmental clusters. For this you will need to supply a set
of environmental variables that can describe basic environmental conditions. Because of the clustering technique used,
this is limited to a maximum of seven variables5. To stay within this limit, we strongly recommend the use of Principal
Components Analysis as a way of reducing a larger set of variables to a smaller set of highly informative components.
That said, you should avoid the inclusion of components with very low explanatory power.

4. This is an implementation of the procedure outlined in Bogaert, J., Ceulemans, R., and Salvador-Van Eysenrode, D. (2004) “Decision tree algorithm
for detection of spatial processes in landscape transformation.” Environmental Management, 33, 1, 62-73.

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 247

What variables should be used? This should be decided in the context of the species being modeled. However, generally
you would include variables that relate to the seasonal and interannual availability of energy and water. Commonly used
factors include elevation and slope (because of their relationship to temperature and soil moisture), the first and second
principal components of mean monthly Normalized Difference Vegetation Index (NDVI) imagery (as a statement of
realized long term and seasonal growing conditions), the long term coefficient of variability in NDVI (as a statement of
interannual variability), and the first two components of mean monthly precipitation and temperature.

Output Options
Four output options are provided:
1. Presence. This is a refined range polygon where areas that are poorly associated with the core environmental character-
istics of the original range polygon are removed.
2. Presence/Pseudo-Absence. The output is the same as the above except that areas that are extremely unlikely to be asso-
ciated with the core environmental characteristics of the original range polygon are treated as absence while only those
that have a close association are considered as presence.
3. Confidence. This is the default option and the one we generally recommend. Each pixel within the original polygon is
assigned a confidence value from 0-1 based on how well it fits the general nature of a coherent pattern of environmental
conditions (as will be explained further below).
4. Thresholded Confidence. This option is the same as the above, except that areas that fall below a minimum specified
confidence are forced to have a confidence of zero.

Thresholds
For all options except the Confidence output, an upper and/or lower threshold will need to be selected to establish areas
of presence or absence. The default thresholds will serve as a general guideline of the values that would be used. In gen-
eral, for presence, you are looking for a value that separates a clear group of clusters that strongly overlap the range poly-
gon, while for absence you want to isolate clusters that have very little or no presence in the polygon. In many instances,
this is very hard to do, which is why we recommend the use of the Confidence option coupled with the Weighted Mahala-
nobis Typicality procedure in the Habitat Suitability / Species Distribution panel. Using this option, no decision needs to
be made.

Background Mask
The background mask option is quite important to the use of this procedure. If you are modeling a land species and are
working in an area with significant ocean areas, you should provide a mask image to remove these from the calculations of
proportional areas. The mask should have 1’s over land areas and 0’s over water areas. For marine species, clearly the
opposite applies.

A Note About the Presence / Absence Option

The presence/absence option is provided to allow the use of modeling procedures that require absence data (such as
logistic regression). However, bear in mind that the absences are really pseudo-absences. To account for sampling issues,
the absence pixels are chosen as a random sample of those that meet the lower threshold criterion such that the number
matches (given some variance associated with the random selection process) the number of presence pixels.

5. We tested several clustering procedures including K-Means, Fuzzy ARTMAP and SOM. However, the Histogram Peak technique provided by the
CLUSTER module in IDRISI was so much superior to the others that we decided to use it despite the limitation on the number of independent vari-
ables that could be used.

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 248

The Habitat Suitability / Species Distribution Panel
This panel provides a set of tools for developing habitat suitability and species distribution maps. The specific options
available depend upon the nature of the training data, if any, that will be used: presence only, presence/absence, abun-
dance or none (see below). In all cases, you will need to specify a set of environmental variables that define the species
habitat or niche.

Environmental Variables: Habitat Suitability Mapping

For habitat suitability mapping, the variables used likely relate to habitat landcover types, proximity to summer and winter
foraging areas, proximity to human disturbance and so on. All variables specified must be continuous variables unless the
multi-criteria evaluation (MCE) option is used. For all but the MCE option, categorical variables should be converted to a
series of Boolean layers (also known as dummy variables). For the instance where MCE is used, an assignment procedure is
provided that will allow you to assign suitabilities to categorical variable classes. Also with the MCE option, you will be
able to add Boolean constraints separately in the special dialog that will be launched.

Environmental Variables: Species Distribution Modeling

The variables that should be used for species distribution modeling should be decided in the context of the species being
modeled. Generally you would include variables that relate to the seasonal and interannual availability of energy and water.
Commonly used factors include elevation and slope (because of their relationship to temperature and soil moisture), the
first and second principal components of mean monthly Normalized Difference Vegetation Index (NDVI) imagery (as a
statement of realized long term and seasonal growing conditions), the long term coefficient of variability in NDVI (as a
statement of interannual variability), and the first two components of mean monthly precipitation and temperature.

No Training Data – MCE

The Multi-Criteria Evaluation option is designed for cases where training data are not available but where studies are
available to guide the development of a suitability or distribution map by means of a multi-criteria evaluation. After the
environmental variables and output filename have been entered, clicking on the Run button will launch a special dialog
that combines the features of the FUZZY and MCE modules of IDRISI.
The first and very important stage in the analysis is to convert each of the environmental variables to factors. The differ-
ence between the two is that a variable is unscaled with respect to the model while a factor is scaled to a specific numeric
range using a scaling procedure that is directly related to the expression of suitability. For example, if one were modeling a
species that is sensitive to humans, a distance from human settlement layer might be used. Suitability would clearly be
worst within and immediately next to areas of human occupation. As you move farther away, the land is becoming
increasingly better up to a limit. It might be that once one reaches a distance of 2 kilometers, being further is now irrele-
vant – it is far enough away. In this case maximum suitability (on the basis of this variable alone) will have been reached.
Thus we should rescale the variable such that suitability is 0 at the edge of human occupation and increases in value until
it reaches its maximum at 2 km, and remains at that value for all greater distances. In the transition of multi-criteria evalu-
ation, this process is known as standardization, but in reality one is recasting the data into an expression of membership in
the fuzzy set of suitable lands.
Two options are provided for standardization: a call to the FUZZY module in IDRISI or a call to the ASSIGN module.
The former is designed for the standardization of continuous variables such as in the example above while the latter is
intended for the standardization of categorical variables. Note that in contrast to the standardization used in IDRISI’s
multi-objective decision making procedure, standardization here uses a 0.0-1.0 scaling range.
MCE General Procedure
Your general procedure will be as follows:
Highlight each variable in turn in the upper-left grid. Note that it shows you the minimum and maximum values.

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 249

 Select the standardization option and indicate the factor output filename. Then click the “Add to Model” button
and the factor will be created and added as a factor in the factor grid.

Assign a weight to each factor. Factor weights can be any numeric value that is convenient for expressing the rel-
ative importance of each to the final suitability map. The weights will automatically be normalized to a 0.0-1.0
range before use.

Add any constraints necessary. Contraints are Boolean images which exclude areas from consideration. They
should have 0’s in constrained areas and 1’s otherwise.

Choose an aggregation option (see below) and then click OK to create the suitability map.

Note that factors can also be added or removed directly from the factors grid. However, be sure that any directly added
factors have a 0.0-1.0 numeric range.
Standardization Options
The FUZZY Option
With the FUZZY option, you need to indicate the nature of the relationship between the variable and suitability. The
graph will illustrate each case along with the general positions of the control points for linking the curve to your variable.
The graph will also indicate the nature of the various shape options. For further information, please refer to the on-line
Help System on the FUZZY module.
The ASSIGN Option
With the ASSIGN option, you will be provided with a grid in which you must indicate the identifiers of classes in the left-
hand column and the suitabilities that should be assigned in the right-hand column (on a 0.0-1.0 range). Any classes that
are not included in this grid will automatically be assigned a value of 0.
Aggregation Options
The aggregation options dictate how the factors will be combined to create a single suitability map. The default is
weighted linear combination (WLC) which is appropriate when you wish the factors to trade-off (i.e., to allow poor quali-
ties to be compensated by good qualities). The Minimum operator allows no trade-off and characterizes each location by
its worst quality. This is clearly the most conservative operator. The Maximum operator also allows no trade-off, but char-
acterizes locations by their best quality.
If you find that you have some factors that should trade-off and others that should not, process the group that do trade-
off first. Then combine that result with the others that do not trade-off using either the Minimum or Maximum operator.

Presence Data
Presence data is probably the most common form of training data for species modeling – it records where the species has
been observed, but not where it has been observed to be absent. Two procedures are available for dealing with these data.
Mahalanobis Typicality
The Mahalanobis Typicality option assumes that the underlying species distribution is normal with respect to environ-
mental gradients. However, our tests have shown that it performs reasonably even with mildly skewed data. The output is
in the form of typicality probabilities – an expression of how typical the pixel is of examples it was trained on. Thus a
value of 1.0 would indicate a location that is identical to the mean of environmental conditions that were evident in the
training data. However, be careful about the interpretation of low typicalities. Since typicalities express the full range of
variability, a low typicality may be unusual, but still legitimately a location that is part of the species’ range. If you are look-
ing for a threshold for when to consider an area as being unlikely to be part of its range, it is likely to be a very low value
(e.g., 0.001). As an illustration of this concept, consider the case of a blue lobster. Blue lobsters are very rare, but they are

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 250

still lobsters! See the on-line Help System for MAHALCLASS for further information.
Weighted Mahalanobis Typicality (Recommended)
This option requires both a training site file and a confidence (weight) file. It was intended that this option would be used
with the confidence output of the Species Range Polygon Refinement panel. A confidence/weight image contains values
from 0.0-1.0 that express the degree of confidence that the pixel is truly a member of the species’ range. IDRISI uses this
file along with a corresponding training file and submits them to the FUZSIG module for developing the signature statis-
tics that are needed by MAHALCLASS. FUZSIG creates a weighted multivariate mean and variance/covariance matrix
based on the confidence weights. Our experience with this procedure has been excellent and we strongly recommend it.

Presence / Absence Data

With presence/absence data, a range of techniques opens up. These include:
Mahalanobis Typicality
Please see the entry under Presence Data above for information about this option.
Weighted Mahalanobis Typicality
Please see the entry under Presence Data above for information about this option.
Multi-Layer Perceptron
This option will launch the MLP module with the selected environmental variables loaded. Please refer to the on-line
Help System for MLP regarding this option.
Logistic Regression
This option will launch the LOGISTICREG module with the selected environmental variables loaded. Please refer to the
on-line Help System for LOGISTICREG regarding this option.

Abundance Option
With abundance data, the MULTIREG (multiple regression) option is launched with the selected environmental variables
loaded. Please refer to the on-line Help System for MULTIREG regarding this option.

A Note About Input Data

The input to this procedure can be vector, raster, XY-Text or XY-CSV. XY-Text is a text file format suitable for presence
point data, where each location is referenced by an X and Y coordinate separated by one or more spaces or tabs. XY-CSV
(comma separated values) is similar except that the X and Y pair are separated by a comma. For all other tabular formats,
we recommend that you load the data into Database Workshop and output the data as a vector file. Database Workshop
can accept a wide range of formats (including DBF, MDB, XLS and CSV) and allows you to sort and subset before out-
putting to a vector or raster layer.

The Biodiversity Analysis Panel

The Biodiversity Analysis panel provides the ability to produce a spatially explicit mapping of:
Alpha Diversity: the total number of considered species at each location.

Gamma Diversity: the total number of considered species over a large region.

Beta Diversity: the ratio of Gamma to average Alpha Diversity over a large region, and thus a measure of the
turnover of species. There are many measures of beta diversity that have been proposed. The measure used here

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 251

 is the original Whittaker’s beta diversity.

Sorensen Dissimilarity: a measure of species compositional dissimilarity.

Range Restriction: a continuous measure of vulnerability that can also be interpreted as a measure of endemism.

Input Data
In all cases, the input for this analysis is in the form of species range polygons. Three input formats are supported. The
first is a vector composite polygon where all species polygons are contained within the same vector file. The second is a
vector group file that lists the names of a set of vector files that contain the range polygons for a single species6. The third
is a raster group file that lists a set of raster files that contain the rasterized range polygons of a single species.
With the exception of Alpha Diversity, the data must ultimately be converted to a raster form for analysis. Thus if a vector
group file is supplied, each file is rasterized (using the spatial characteristics of the reference file) and a raster group file is
created with the same name as the vector group file. If a vector composite file is used, it is first broken out into a set of
separate vector files along with a vector group file of the same name as the vector composite file. These vector files are
then in turn rasterized.

An Important Note
Because of the potentially large number of files that may be generated by this analysis, the option is provided to delete
generated intermediate layers. However, if you intend on running further analyses with the same data, it is recommended
that you do not choose this option until the last run and that subsequent analyses be run from the raster group file.

Regional Definition
All measures except Alpha Diversity and the Range Restriction Index require the definition of a region over which the
index is calculated. Three options are provided. The vector and raster region polygon options will yield a mapping where
all pixels within a region (such as an ecoregion) will have the same index value. The focal zone option, however, is quite
different and can produce a different value at each pixel location.
The focal zone option calculates values by comparing the species composition in each pixel to those in a circular zone sur-
rounding it. To use the focal zone option, you must set the focal zone diameter (e.g., 50 km). This focal zone is moved
successively over every pixel in the image. As a consequence, the analysis does take considerable time to complete. Conti-
nental scale analyses at a moderate resolution (e.g., 1 km) are probably best set up at the end of the day so that they can
run overnight.

Alpha Diversity
Alpha Diversity is computed simply as the richness of species at each location – i.e., it is the total number of species found
at each location.

Gamma Diversity
Gamma Diversity is calculated as the richness of species over a region. Thus the value recorded at any pixel represents the
richness within the region to which it belongs and not the richness at that particular spot.

Beta Diversity
Beta Diversity is calculated as gamma diversity divided by the average alpha diversity within each region. This formulation
is the original one developed by Whittaker (1972)7.

6. Vector group files have the same format as raster group files. At this time, vector group files are only used for the biodiversity analyses in LCM.

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 252

Sorensen Dissimilarity
Sorensen’s Dissimilarity is measured as 1 minus Sorensen’s Index, where Sorensen’s Index is computed as the number of
species that are common between the pixel and the region to which it belongs divided by the average alpha within the
region.

Range Restriction
The Range Restriction Index is based on a comparison of the area over which the species is found relative to the entire
study region. It is intended for continental or global scale analyses and should include a mask file to mask out water areas
for land species or vice versa for marine species. The index ranges from 0-1 with high values indicating that the majority
of species present at that location have restricted ranges. Note that the index is continuous and does not rely on a thresh-
old area to define range restriction. For more information on the Range Restriction Index, see the section titled How it
Works in this chapter.

The Planning Tab

The Planning tab offers an initial set of interventions that will inevitably grow with future versions. The current version
offers:
- Constraints and incentives. This provides the ability to assess the impacts of existing and proposed reserved areas, along
with tools such as tax incentives, for redirecting the course of change. These interventions are integrated with the change
prediction process.
- Infrastructure modifications. This panel provides the ability to specify a set of major infrastructure changes by indicating
the names of existing infrastructure layers and the dates they become effective. In addition, new infrastructural compo-
nents can be developed by specifying the end-points and allowing the system to develop the least-cost engineering routes.
- Corridor development. The corridor planning tool develops biological corridors based on species suitability models,
weighted development suitability, weighted conservation value and protected lands. Target corridor width and the number
of branches can also be specified.

The Constraints and Incentives Panel

The Constraints and Incentives panel allows you to specify an incentive/constraint map for each of the transitions in the
model. Constraints and incentives are handled in a unified fashion. Values of 0 on the map are treated as absolute con-
straints while values of 1 are unconstrained and consequently have no impact. Values less than 1 but above 0 act as disin-
centives while values greater than 1 act as incentives.
The way the constraints and incentives feature works is that the transition potentials associated with each transition are
multiplied by the incentives/constraints map.

Important Note
Use incentives and disincentives with care. Small changes can have huge impacts. In normal use, you will have areas of
absolute constraints (0), areas where normal transition potentials apply (1) and a few areas that may be slightly above or
below 1 (e.g., 0.9 to 1.1).

7. Whittaker, R.H. (1972) “Evolution and measurement of species diversity”, Taxon, 21, 213-251.

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 253

The Planned Infrastructure Changes Panel
This panel allows you to enter the names of major road developments and the year they become effective. The Change
Allocation panel of the Change Prediction tab checks this list with each stage of the prediction and adds each new road
when the date of the active stage is equal to or greater than the infrastructure date.

The Corridor Planning Panel

This panel is used to build biological corridors. The primary inputs are Boolean maps of the two terminal regions and a
habitat suitability map. Optional inputs include a development suitability map, a conservation value map and a protected
lands map. The habitat and development suitability maps, as well as the conservation value map should all be measures on
a 0.0-1.0 scale. The protected lands map is one where all non-zero values are treated as protected.
If either of the development suitability maps or conservation value maps is included, a weight needs to be specified. Hab-
itat always has a weight of 1 and the weights of the other two can be from 0.0 to 1.0.
The final parameters that need to be specified are the ideal corridor width and the number of branches. Note that there is
no guarantee that the target width will be achieved – it may simply not be available. The first branch is by definition the
best route. Successive branches are of lower quality. See the section titled How it Works in this chapter on how the corri-
dors are built.

The Marxan Panel

Two Marxan panels within Land Change Modeler Planning tab are meant to interface with the Marxan software. Marxan
is freeware developed at The University of Queensland intended for conservation planning. Marxan provides techniques
for reserve system design and performance as well as tools for developing multi-use zoning plans for natural resource
management. Marxan can be used to identify areas that meet biodiversity targets, taking into account minimum costs.
Marxan is not provided with IDIRISI but can be downloaded for free from The University of Queensland website at:
http://www.uq.edu.au/marxan.

How it Works
1: The Evidence Likelihood Transformation Utility
The Evidence Likelihood transformation requires two inputs:
1. A Boolean map of areas that have gone through the transition being modeled (this can easily be created from the
Change Analysis tab).
2. A categorical variable or a continuous variable that has been binned into classes (such as with the STRETCH module).
The procedure looks at the relative frequency of pixels belonging to the different categories of that variable within areas
of change. In effect, it asks the question of each category of the variable, “How likely is it that you would have a value like
this if you were an area that would experience change?”

2: Explanatory Variable Test Procedure

The explanatory variable test procedure is based on a contingency table analysis. For qualitative variables, it uses the native
categories of the variable to test association with the distribution of landcovers in the later landcover map. Quantitative
variables are binned to 256 categories in order to conduct this test. This is a quick but imprecise fishing tool. The quantita-
tive measure of association used is Cramer’s V. A high Cramer’s V indicates that the potential explanatory value of the vari-
able is good, but does not guarantee a strong performance since it cannot account for the mathematical requirements of

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 254

the modeling approach used and the complexity of the relationship. However, it is a good indication that a variable can be
discarded if the Cramer’s V is low. The p value expresses the probability that the Cramer’s V is not significantly different
from 0. Note that this assumes that all pixels are independently sampled and have no spatial dependence in their values.
Thus a low value of p is not a good indicator of a variable’s worth, but a high value is a sure sign that it can be rejected.

3: Use of the Multi-Layer Perceptron (MLP) for Transition Potentials

When calculating transition potentials, LCM launches MLP in a special automatic training mode. Automatic mode monitors
and modifies the start and end learning rate of a dynamic learning procedure. The dynamic learning procedure starts with
an initial learning rate and reduces it progressively over the iterations until the end learning rate is reached when the max-
imum number of iterations is reached. If significant oscillations in the RMS error are detected after the first 100 iterations,
the learning rates (start and end) are reduced by half and the process is started again.
All other parameters of the MLP are used by LCM at their normal default values. However, LCM does apply special mod-
ifications to the outputs. Since specific transitions are being modeled, LCM masks out of the transition potentials all cases
that do not match the from case of any specific transition. For example, if the transition being modeled is from forest to
agriculture, values will only exist in pixels that were forest to start with.

4: LCM’s Hard Prediction Procedure

The hard prediction procedure used by LCM is based on IDRISI’s multi-objective land allocation (MOLA) module.
IDRISI looks through all transitions and creates a list of host classes (classes that will lose some amount of land) and a list
of claimant classes (classes that will acquire land) for each host. The quantities are determined from a run of the MAR-
KOV module. A multi-objective allocation is then run to allocate land for all claimants of a host class. The results of the
reallocation of each host class are then overlaid to produce the result.
The module that performs this work is CHGALLOC, which is an internal module that does not exist in the menu system.
When running, it will report the number of passes which is identical to the number of host classes.

5: LCM’s Soft Prediction Procedure

Soft prediction is simply an aggregation of the transition potentials of all selected transitions. Two aggregations are pro-
vided – the maximum transition potential and the logical OR of transition potentials. The latter is the default and assumes
that if a location has the potential to transition because of more than one claimant class, it is even more likely to change
than if a single claimant wants it.

6: Calculation of the Range Restriction Index

The formula for the Range Restriction Index is as follows:

2
n ⎛ ⎛ range _ area ⎞⎞
∑ ⎜ 1 − ⎜⎜
⎜ ⎟⎟ ⎟⎟
i =1 ⎝ ⎝ total _ area ⎠⎠
RRI =
Alpha _ Diversity

where alpha diversity is expressed as richness (the number of species) and the total area is the total area of the image
minus any masked areas.

7: How Biological Corridors are Built

LCM builds corridors using a cost distance procedure. The first step involves an aggregation of the various suitability/
value maps. In general the effect is such that conservation value increases suitability for the corridor while development

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 255

value decreases it (although only in unprotected lands).
Once an aggregate suitability map has been created, the suitabilities are converted to frictions and a cost distance is calcu-
lated from one of the terminal regions. A least-cost path is then run from the other terminal region back to the first. After
this, a second cost distance is run from the least-cost path, after which it determines the mean relationship between cost
distance and spatial distance to determine a cost threshold to use in constructing the corridor.
If additional branches need to be built, the suitability of already selected corridor areas is reduced to zero and the process
is repeated.

References
Eastman, J. R., L. Solorzano and M. Van Fossen. "Transition Potential Modeling for Land-Cover Change." In GIS, Spatial
Analysis and Modeling, edited by David J. Maguire, Michael Batty and Michael F. Goodchild, 357-385. Redlands, CA:
ESRI Press, 2005.

Chapter 21 The Land Change Modeler for Ecological Sustainability 256

The Earth Trends Modeler

Introduction
Environmental image series provide a critically important resource for understanding both the dynamics and evolution of
environmental phenomena. As a consequence, Earth Trends Modeler (ETM) is focused on the analysis of trends and
dynamic characteristics of these phenomena as evident in time series images. Further, the system is highly interactive, with
the process of exploration largely being an active process. The trends and dynamics emphasized include:
-- Interannual trends – trends that persist over several years or longer that may be indicative of major environmental
changes. ETM provides tools for determining the presence of trends that are both linear and monotonic (non-linear) as
well as their significance. In addition, trend analysis tools are provided that are resistant to the presence of outliers in short
time series.
-- Seasonal trends – trends in the character of the annual seasonal progression. This is a revolutionary new analytical pro-
cedure developed for ETM. The axis of the earth leads to substantial annual variation in solar energy, leading to major
seasonal cycles. However, traditional multi-year trend analysis procedures consider seasonality to be a contaminant and
thus intentionally reject it. This new procedure specifically seeks trends in seasonality and displays it in a dramatic manner.
-- Cyclical components – ETM offers a completely new procedure for examining cyclical components in image time
series. Marrying the elements of Fourier Analysis and Principal Components Analysis, ETM provides a unique form of
Spatial-Temporal Spectral Analysis, called Fourier PCA, that discovers not simply cycles in isolation, but patterns of cycles
that occur together. A final stage of correlation analysis also shows when these patterns were most prevalent.
-- Irregular but recurrent patterns in space/time -- ETM offers a variety of tools for the analysis of recurrent patterns in
space/time including a unique form of Wavelet Analysis and both standardized and unstandardized Principal Compo-
nents Analysis (also known as Empirical Orthogonal Functional Analysis).
-- Teleconnections – ETM offers cutting-edge tools for the analysis of climate teleconnections.
-- Sub-annual variability – Short-term variability and motion over space and time are among the most difficult phenomena
to detect and understand.

A Recommendation
We strongly recommend that you complete the tutorial exercises for ETM. This is the fastest way to learn the full scope of
the system.

Accessing ETM and its Functions / Display Recommendations

ETM can be accessed from an icon on the main toolbar , from the Shortcut utility or from the Modeling menu (under
the Environmental/Simulation Models submenu). Like Land Change Modeler (LCM), ETM opens in a special interface
docked to the left side of IDRISI’s workspace. We strongly recommend your use of a widescreen monitor (e.g., 1920 x
1200) or a dual monitor setup. However, for those with lower resolution monitors, ETM can be minimized against the left
hand edge to make more space by clicking on the “-“ symbol on its banner (and similarly, the “+” symbol to re-expand it).

Hate to Read the Documentation? A Power-User Alternative

Experienced users of GIS can probably figure out most aspects of the use of ETM on their own. However, there are
some critical issues that expert and novice users alike need to know. Look for and pay careful attention to special sections
entitled “Critical Things to Know!”

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 257

Critical Things to Know! – ETM in General
1. Image time series are handled in a new way with the IDRISI 16.0 Taiga Edition. A time series now consists of a pair of
files. Image series consist of a raster group file (RGF) that contains a list of the images in their correct time sequence and a
time series documentation file (TSF) that describes the nature of the series. As a first step, create the RGF. This can be
done in IDRISI Explorer by right-clicking within the empty space of the Files tab and selecting the Create option from
the context menu. An RGF may also be created with Collection Editor, located under the File menu, or by creating it
directly using the Edit module, located under the Data Entry menu. Then create the TSF metadata file. This can be done
from the Project panel on the Explore tab of ETM or by selecting the Create TSF option located under the IDRISI File
menu.
2. ETM also recognizes Index series. Index series are one-dimensional time series such as the Southern Oscillation Index.
Index series also consist of a pair of files – an attribute values file (AVL) to hold the data and a TSF metadata file. The
AVL files are typically created with the Edit module. For time series applications, the file consists of two columns – an ID
column and a section column with the data. Columns should be separated by either one or more spaces or a tab. In this
version, the ID column is ignored. The easiest way to create an AVL is to create the two columns in a spreadsheet such as
Excel and then paste the columns into the Edit module of IDRISI (pasting from Excel sometimes takes time, but just wait
and it will work). Save the file as an attribute values file from Edit (it knows how to document it correctly).
3. All time series are registered in ETM as part of an ETM project. ETM project files are saved as text files with an “.etm”
extension. ETM projects differ from IDRISI projects, which are simply a list of folders. Any series you register with ETM
will need to be located in either the IDRISI project Working Folder or one of the IDRISI project Resource Folders. We
recommend that you put all series in Resource Folders. When you browse for and select a series outside of your IDRISI
project, ETM automatically adds the folder to your project as a Resource Folder.
4. It is recommended that you start a project with an empty Working Folder and add series from Resource Folders. For
example, let’s say you’re going to be looking at relationships between sea surface temperature (in a series named “SST”)
and the temperature of the lower troposphere1 (in a series named “TLT”). Let’s imagine your Working Folder is named
“d:\analysis,” your SST series is contained in a Resource Folder named “d:\sst” and the TLT series is contained in a
Resource Folder named “d:\analysis\tlt.” When analyses are run, ETM will put the results into a set of special subfolders
of the Working Folder that bear the same name as the series. For example, all trend analyses for the SST series will go into
a folder that ETM will automatically create called “d:\analysis\sst\trend.” Similarly, PCA, Fourier PCA and EOT results
will go into a subfolder named “d:\analysis\sst\components” and so on. Note that in the case of your TLT series, a
folder with the same name as the series already exists, so it will place the results there (i.e., “d:\analysis\tlt\trend”, etc.).
5. Do not manually delete any folders or files related to your series. Use the Advanced Management option within the
Project panel in the Explore tab to do this. Otherwise, your project may become corrupted (you can recover from this,
but it will take time).
6. Most operations have an automatic naming convention based on a user-defined prefix and a default suffix. In addition,
ETM will, in these instances, supply a default prefix which is the series name. It is safe to accept this default name. For
example, if you run a Theil-Sen trend analysis on a series named SST, it will automatically supply the prefix “sst” and the
resulting analysis will be named “sst_ts_slope.” In cases where you want to use a different name so as not to overwrite a
previous analysis (e.g., with the Linear Modeling panel), we recommend that you add additional characters to the end of
the recommended prefix (although you can specify a completely new prefix if you like).
7. ETM keeps track of all your analyses so that you can re-examine and explore the results at any time using the respective
panels within the Explore tab. If a series is not listed in one of these panels, it means that there are no analyses of that type
that have been created yet for that series.

1. The troposphere is the portion of the atmosphere in which weather events (e.g., rain storms) occur. It extends to approximately the cruising altitude
of large aircraft.

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 258

8. When selecting a series, ETM will display the names of all series types that apply. Thus if both index and image series
are shown in the list, either can be selected.
9. Try to keep your series names short (long analysis chains can lead to very long names after all the suffixes have been
added). Also, it’s tempting to create projects that contain every series you’ve ever analyzed. Resist this temptation – the
IDRISI project structure can become quite complex, slowing down IDRISI Explorer as well as the Pick List. In addition,
if anything goes wrong, there’s a lot to reconstruct. It’s better to have many ETM projects.
10. Several analytical components require an adjustment for the area each pixel occupies. If the reference system is LAT-
LONG, an automatic adjustment is made. Otherwise, it assumes that all image series are on an equal area projection. If
this is not correct, project your series images with the PROJECT module. This can be automated for the whole series by
using Macro Modeler and the dynagroup option.

Tabs and Panels

ETM is organized around three tabs:
Explore
Analysis
Preprocess
Within each tab is a series of drop-down panels for tasks/analytical stages. You can have as many drop-down panels open
as you wish – they are presented this way simply to accommodate varying screen resolutions.

The Explore Tab

Working with time series is a highly interactive process in ETM. You will find that your need to explore series is not just a
starting point, but a continuous process of discovery and validation. All panels on the Explore tab relate to this activity
with one exception – the Project panel in which you add or remove series from your project and specify various masks
and palettes you prefer to use in the display of series.

Critical Things to Know!

1. ETM gives you the option of specifying a default mask file for each image series in the Project panel grid. Like all mask
files in IDRISI, a value of 1 means a pixel contains data to be processed and a 0 means a pixel should be ignored. If you
enter a mask filename in the Project panel grid, it will display as the default mask in those ETM panels containing a mask
option. Note however that any mask may be specified, whether or not it was included in the ETM project.
2. The Explore Space / Time Dynamics panel allows you to examine both image series and index series. The latter are dis-
played as graphs, but the former are displayed as space-time cubes. To create a space-time cube, display the first image in
the series (from IDRISI Explorer or DISPLAY Launcher). Then use one of the instant stretch options on Composer to
stretch the first image. ETM will stretch all other images in the series the same way when constructing the cube. Generally,
the middle stretch button should be used if the image has both negative and positive values and the left stretch button
should be used otherwise. After you create the cube once, you will never need to create it again (unless you decide to use
another stretch option, in which case, you must repeat the sequence above).
3. The remaining panels are only of use (and will only show series options) after running one or more of the analyses on
the Analysis tab.
4. If you use the automatic vector overlay option from the Advanced Management feature of the Project panel, make sure
that the reference system of this overlay is identical to that of all series.

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 259

The Project Panel
The Project panel allows you to set up, modify or recall an existing project. A project consists of one or more time series
and associated palettes, mask files and analyses. An ETM project is recorded in a file with a “.etm” extension which is in
text format and can be edited (although we recommend using the Advanced Management feature of the Project panel for
this). This ETM project file is stored in the current Working Folder. As stated earlier, we recommend that new projects be
created in an empty Working Folder.
ETM uses a project concept similar to that of the Land Change Modeler. However, with ETM, the concept is taken even
further. Each series is given a special Resource Folder of the same name in a subfolder of the Working Folder, regardless
of where the series is actually located. The subfolders have names such as:
-- “trend” to hold trend analysis results
-- “sta” to hold seasonal trend analysis results
-- “components” to hold the results from PCA/EOF and EOT
-- “fourier” to hold the results from Fourier PCA
-- “linear_models” to hold linear modeling results
Thus if your Working Folder is named “d:\time_series” and you have an image series named “ndvi8203” (somewhere in
your IDRISI project), then as you create analyses, you can expect to see folders being created automatically such as
“d:\time_series\ndvi8203\trend” and “d:\time_series\ndvi8203\components,” etc.
Use the Add and Remove buttons on the Project panel to add or remove series and specify optional default masks and
palettes. For more detailed management tasks such as renaming or deleting series and analyses, click on the Advanced
Management button to launch a subpanel. Note that you also can specify a vector file in the Advanced Management sub-
panel that should be overlaid on all displayed results.

The Explore Space / Time Dynamics Panel

This panel allows you to visually explore both index and image series. Both are available in the drop-down list. If you
choose an index series, it will be displayed as a graph. Selecting an image series reveals a special four-dimensional2 graphic
display that will simply be referred to as the cube. The first time you examine an image series with this feature, you will
need to create the special files required for the cube. You may encounter these if you explore a folder that contains a series
– there are three of them and they have file extensions of “.bsq”, “.bil” and “.bip”.3 If you copy a series to another folder,
you may wish to copy these as well to avoid having to recreate them.
An important issue in creating a visualization cube is the contrast stretch. ETM bases the stretch of all images in the series
on the display minimum and display maximum settings of the first image in the series. A recommended procedure is to
display the first image of the series (either from IDRISI Explorer or DISPLAY Launcher) and then use one of the instant
stretch options at the bottom of Composer to stretch it and maximize the contrast4. Then when you click the Create/rec-
reate visualization button, the same display parameters will be used for all other images in the series.
There are three display modes for the image series: cube, plane and sphere. The plane mode is probably the least useful,
but it accurately describes the nature of the data – in reality, the viewer is cycling through three planes of the space-time

2. The dimensions are 1: X, 2: Y, 3: data value, 4: time.

3. These files contain the three planes of the visualization cube. BSQ = band sequential, containing a single image for each time slice. BIL = band inter-
leaved by line, containing an X/time slice for position in Y. BIP = band interleaved by pixel, containing a Y/time slice for each X position.

4. Use the middle instant stretch option on Composer for series that should be symmetric about 0 (i.e., they contain both negative and positive values)
and the left-most instant stretch option otherwise.

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 260

continuum. The cube mode places these planes on the outer faces of the cube. The sphere mode is self-evident – it is a
three-dimensional version superimposed on a sphere.
The cube can be manipulated in various ways. Grabbing it with the mouse allows you to move it spatially, while the zoom
in/out buttons control the detail. A right click on the cube launches a context menu of options that are optimized for spe-
cific views. The Reset button changes back to the default view.
Depending upon whether Time, X or Y is selected, the Play/Pause button will animate the series over that dimension
(this is best appreciated in the Plane view). When the Play/Pause button is in the Pause position, use the left or right
arrow keys on the keyboard to move from frame to frame. When it is in the Play position, animation is automatic accord-
ing to the frame rate specified by the up/down selector in the dialog.
The Display icon for the cube allows you to look at any specific view in full resolution. When Time is selected, you are
selecting a specific image out of the series. When you right-click within the panel and select either the Orient to X or Ori-
ent to Y options from the context menu, the resulting image is known as a Hovmoller5 or space-time plot. A particularly
useful view is the Orient to Y view while the Y dimension is set to 0 (the equator). In this view, moving events (such as sea
surface temperature or pressure) associated with the El Nino phenomenon will be seen as diagonal features in the
graphic.

The Explore PCA / EOT / Fourier PCA / Wavelets Panel

With the exception of the Wavelets option, this panel is used to view previously run series decomposition analyses. You
must merely indicate which type of analysis to view/explore.

PCA
Principal Components Analysis (also known as Empirical Orthogonal Function analysis) decomposes an image series into
a set of underlying components, ordered by the amount of variance they explain in the original series. For each compo-
nent, a pair of outputs is provided – a component image showing the spatial pattern of the component and a loading
graph that shows the degree to which that pattern is present over time6. Please see the explanatory discussion of PCA in
the Analysis Tab section below.
All series for which a PCA analysis has been run will be listed in the series drop-down selector. Select a series and then the
adjacent drop-down will list specific analyses. After you select the specific analysis, the component loading of the first
component view will appear as a graph. To view the associated component image, click the Display icon at the upper right
of the form. If your component image has both positive and negative values, it is recommended that you use the symmet-
ric instant stretch option on Composer (the middle button) to achieve a proper visual interpretation of the component.

EOT
An Empirical Orthogonal Teleconnection analysis also produces a series of components that consist of a pair of outputs.
The graph is the EOT itself while the image indicates the partial correlation of the series with that EOT with the effects
of other EOTs removed. Please see the explanatory discussion of EOT in the Analysis Tab section below.
All series for which an EOT analysis has been run will be listed in the series drop-down selector. Select a series and then
the adjacent drop-down will list specific analyses. After you select the specific analysis, the first EOT will appear as a
graph. To view the associated partial correlation image, click the Display icon at the upper right of the form. If your com-
ponent image has both positive and negative values (which is very likely), it is recommended that you use the symmetric
instant stretch option on Composer (the middle button) to achieve a proper visual interpretation of the partial correlation

5. Named after the climatologist who is widely attributed to have first proposed the utility of this view.

6. Empirical Orthogonal Function (EOF) analysis produces the exact same output, with the exact same interpretation, as PCA. However in EOF, the
graph is called the component and the image is called the loading map.

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 261

image.

Fourier PCA
Fourier PCA also produces a series of components, but in this case with an image and several possibilities of associated
graphs. The default graph is a pseudo-periodogram where the X axis indicates frequencies ranging from the lowest fre-
quency of one sine wave over the whole series to the highest with n/2 sine waves over the whole series (where n is the
total number of images in the series). The Y axis indicates the amplitude loading of the wave. The associated component
image is that which has this combination of waves present (the degree to which waves are present is represented by their
amplitude loading). In the upper-right corner of the pseudo-periodogram is a drop-down list where you can choose to
focus on just the inter-annual frequencies (those wavelengths that are longer than a year) or the sub-annual frequencies. In
addition, there is a temporal loading option. The temporal loading indicates the correlation between the Fourier PCA
component image and each of the original images in the series. Please see the explanatory discussion of Fourier PCA in
the Analysis tab section below.
All series for which a Fourier PCA analysis has been run will be listed in the series drop-down selector. Select a series and
then the adjacent drop-down will list specific analyses. After you select the specific analysis, a periodogram of the first
Fourier component will appear as a graph. To view the associated component image, click the Display icon at the upper
right of the form. If your component image has both positive and negative values, it is recommended that you use the
symmetric instant stretch option on Composer (the middle button) to achieve a proper visual interpretation of the com-
ponent.

Wavelets
The wavelet view requires special explanation. Wavelets are used for multiple purposes. A common application is data
compression. However, the application here is the search for patterns of anomalous events over time. One such pattern
would be a perfect cycle, for which Fourier Analysis is a good detection tool. A perfect cycle is one which oscillates in a
consistent manner over time, such as a sine wave. However, not all oscillations are perfect, nor are they necessarily sine
waves or continuous over time.
A wavelet is a little wave, or perhaps better stated, a briefly appearing wave. Wavelets can be of any form. For example,
one could use a sine wave as a wavelet. In practice, there are a variety of wavelets that are used for special reasons. In
ETM, we have introduced an Inverse Haar wavelet that leads to a very simple form of interpretation in the context of
image time series.
The Inverse Haar wavelet looks like this:

+1

0 0

-1

The graph represents a series of weights over four adjacent samples for a single pixel in time. However, since the weight
of 0 applies to all time samples before the first and after the fourth, it’s probably simpler to think of it as applying to a pair
of adjacent samples over time as follows:

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 262

 +1
1 month

1 month
-1

Applying the wavelet filter to any pixel allows us to determine the degree to which the wavelet is present at any moment in
time. Let’s assume that for a particular pixel, we have the following values over a sequence of seven months:

5 7 15 12 8 9 3

Moving the filter to the first two positions, we multiply the 5 by -1 and the 7 by +1. Then we add the results which yields
+2. Now the filter is slid one time sample to the right. We multiply the 7 by -1 and the 15 by +1 which when added
together yields +8. In essence, we’re saying that the wavelet is present four times as strongly at this second position. Now
move it to the right one more time step. Here we see something different. We multiply the 15 by -1 and the 12 by +1
yielding -3 after summation of the results. This implies that the wavelet is present in its opposite orientation with an
amplitude of 3.
Why is this of interest? If you look at the nature of the mathematical operations undertaken at each time step, it equates to
calculating the rate of change from one point of time to the next. The result of the Inverse Haar filter for the first two
dates indicates that the rate of change is +2, i.e., a gain of two units. The filter thus results in an expression of monthly
gains and losses.
In the next step, we increase the width of the filter to span over four months:

+1
2 months

2 months
-1
Applying this filter, we will first average over the months spanned by each of the two month filter sections. Thus applying
this to the first four months in the series, the 5 and the 7 are averaged to become 6 and the 15 and 12 are averaged to
become 13.5. Then multiplying the 6 by -1 and adding it to 1 times 13.5 yields a result of +7.5. This indicates that there
was a gain of 7.5 units between the first 2 month period and the second 2 month period. Then the filter is slid just one
month. The next calculation is thus on the months with values of 7, 15, 12 and 8, yielding a result of -1. Sliding this filter
only a single month produces what is known as a Maximal Overlap Discrete Wavelet Transform (MODWT). The use of a
MODWT filter has advantages in that it can handle any length of series (and not just those that have lengths that are a

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 263

power of 2) and it significantly reduces artifacts that can be introduced by the shape of the filter7.
Repeating this process of increasing the number of months in each half of the Haar filter by one (thus the third filtering
would calculate the gain between successive groups of three months) produces what is known as a multi-resolution analy-
sis (often abbreviated MRA). With each level, we are changing to a progressively coarser time scale with two fewer sam-
ples at each scale (because we have no neighbors for the calculation of the first and last samples at each scale). If we array
the results of our analysis in a graphic form, it forms a pyramid, with the top of the period corresponding to the coarsest
scale where we are calculating the gain between the first half of the series and the last half.

In this example, we see time along the X axis and scale (expressed as the number of months in each half of the Haar filter)
along the Y axis. In ETM, you can move the mouse over the diagram and it will tell you the date, the scale and the value
of the wavelet transform that the color represents.
The importance of using the Inverse Haar filter is that the values it calculates have a very simple interpretation – they are
simply gains in the original units. Thus in the example above based on an analysis of sea surface temperatures in the Lab-
rador sea, the value represents a loss of 0.89 degrees Celsius (because the gain is -0.89). Notice the intense cooling that
took place in 1989. At the 1 month scale, the cooling took place over only a few months (looking horizontally), but look-
ing vertically, we see that its impact lasted for approximately 6 years (72 months). Many of the warmings and coolings are
evident at both the finest and coarsest scales. They thus have a tree-like appearance in the wavelet diagram. However, not
all do. In the middle of the diagram, we see evidence of warming that does not manifest itself at finer scales. This repre-
sents a very gradual warming that is lost in the higher variability that occurs at finer scales.

The Explore Temporal Profiles Panel

The temporal profiling panel allows you to examine the values from an image series for a defined region of interest. The
region of interest can be defined as a circular sample region or by means of a vector feature (typically a polygon). ETM
will then graph the summary values of all pixels in the sample region over time. The mean, median, minimum, maximum,
range, sum or standard deviation summary values may be graphed. In addition, trend lines can be added.

7. See Chapter 5 on the Maximal Overlap Discrete Wavelet Transform in Wavelet in Percival, D.B., and Walden, A.T., (2000) Wavelet Methods for Time Series
Analysis (Cambridge University Press).

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 264

Note that any profile can be saved as an index series. This can be very useful when used with the Linear Modeling tool.
For example, if you have a series on precipitation anomalies and you create a profile for a region of interest, as long as the
length of the series is the same, the saved profile could be used as the independent variable with a sea surface temperature
series as the dependent variable to locate areas of the ocean with a similar pattern of temperature anomalies over time.

The Explore Series Relationships Panel

The Explore Series Relationships panel stores icons of linear modeling analyses already run. Select the series from the
drop-down list. Only series for which linear models have been run will be listed.
Clicking on the icon will display one or more analyses, depending upon which outputs were requested when the original
analysis was run. Note that only those images most typically viewed are displayed. For example, when the slope and inter-
cept option is chosen, only the slope image is displayed. To view other images related to your analysis, use IDRISI
Explorer or DISPLAY Launcher to locate them within your project and subsequently view them.

The Explore Trends Panel

The Explore Trends panel is used to explore two kinds of trends – interannual trends and seasonal trends. The interan-
nual trends subpanel is similar to the Explore Series panel in that it displays icons for previously run analyses. Clicking an
icon will redisplay that analysis.
The Seasonal Trends sub-panel needs more explanation. If you have not already done so, read the section on the Seasonal
Trend Analysis Panel in the Analysis Tab below. The drop-down box lists all series for which an STA analysis has been
undertaken. Clicking the Display icon will display the Phases and Amplitude images. Generally, the Amplitudes images
ontain the most information.
On either the Amplitudes or Phases images, colors other than neutral gray represent trends in the seasonal curve.
Although a legend could technically be created for these images, they are meaningless because they represent trends in
selected parameters that describe the shape of these curves. Thus this panel provides an interactive interpretation device
that allows you to look at the shape of the curve and how it is changing over time.
Adjacent areas that have the same color on these images will be those that are going through similar changes in either the
Amplitudes or Phases of their seasonal curves. You can draw an interactive interpretation of the trend by defining a sam-
ple region and selecting a trend element to graph (fitted curves is the default)8. The sampled region can be defined either
as a circular region or by selecting a vector feature. For the fitted or observed curves, the green curve shows the modeled
trend for the start of the series and the red curve shows it for the end of the series. For all other options, a graph of the
parameter along with the Theil-Sen median slope is presented.
A common application of STA is the examination of trends in vegetation phenology using remotely sensed vegetation
index image series. As a result, an optional Green up/down output is available. Green up refers to the time of maximum
greening while green down refers to the time of maximum loss of green (chlorophyll) in vegetation. The default is set at the
point where the amount of greening exceeds 40% of the full trajectory from minimum green to maximum green. This can
be changed to any other value desired. If selected, this output will show the date and time this threshold is passed and the
net change in green up or green down over the length of the series.

8. The number of different trend elements selected affects the speed with which ETM can calculate the necessary information. Therefore, by default,
only the information necessary for the fitted curves is extracted for the sample region. You can select additional elements by using the checkboxes pro-
vided. The one you will most typically want is the observed curve information.

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 265

The Analysis Tab
The Analysis tab is the heart of ETM. Each of the panels is devoted to an analytical process that yields results that can be
viewed and reviewed from the panels on the Explore tab.

Critical Things to Know!

1. In general, it is important to consider whether the procedure to be used should be deseasoned or not. For example, the
trend analysis procedures on the Series Trend Analysis panel and Linear Models should normally be applied only to
deseasoned series. The STA procedure cannot and Fourier PCA should not be applied to deseasoned series. EOT and PCA
are normally applied to deseasoned data, but there is nothing to prevent them from being used with data containing sea-
sonality.
2. If there are areas of no data or background values that apply to all images in a series, the analysis will run faster if you
specify a mask image.

The Series Trend Analysis Panel

The Series Trend Analysis panel is used to search for the presence of long-term trends. On the Explore tab, these are
referred to as interannual trends, but in reality, this name would only be correct if the series covered more than one year.
ETM offers five types of trend analysis and one form of trend significance testing as follows:

Linearity
This procedure maps out the coefficient of determination (r2) from a linear regression between the values of each pixel
over time and a perfectly linear series. The result is a mapping of the degree to which a linear trend is present.

Linear Correlation
This maps out the Pearson Product-Moment linear correlation between the values of each pixel over time and a perfectly
linear series. This is a commonly used form of trend analysis, but it is sensitive to noise in short series.

Linear Trend (OLS)

This is the slope coefficient of an Ordinary Least Squares regression between the values of each pixel over time and a per-
fectly linear series. The result is an expression of the rate of change per time step. Thus, if your data are monthly, it
expresses the rate of change per month.

Median Trend (Theil-Sen)

This is a robust non-parametric trend operator that is highly recommended for assessing the rate of change in short or
noisy series9. It is calculated by determining the slope between every pairwise combination and then finding the median
value. For example, with a 20 year sequence of monthly data, a total of 28,680 slopes would be evaluated at every pixel. It
thus takes a lot longer to calculate than the trend procedures indicated above. For long series, the result is often identical
to the Linear Trend (OLS) output. However, for short or very noisy series, the result can be quite different and is more
reliable. An interesting feature of the Median Trend is its breakdown bound. The breakdown bound for a robust statistic is
the number of wild values that can occur within a series before it will be affected. For the Median Trend, the breakdown
bound is approximately 29%. Thus the trends expressed in the image must have persisted for more than 29% of the

9. See HOAGLIN, D.C., MOSTELLER, F., and TUKEY, J.W., 2000, Understanding Robust and Exploratory Data Analysis, Wiley Classics Library Edition, (New
York: Wiley).

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 266

length of the series (in time steps).

Monotonic Trend (Mann-Kendall)

This is a non-linear trend indicator that measures the degree to which a trend is consistently increasing or decreasing. It
has a range from -1 to +1. A value of +1 indicates a trend that continuously increases and never decreases. The opposite
is true when it has a value of -1. A value of 0 indicates no consistent trend. It is calculated in a similar fashion to the
Median Trend. All pairwise combinations of values over time are evaluated at each pixel and a tally is made of the number
that are increasing or are decreasing with time. The Mann-Kendall statistic is simply the relative frequency of increases
minus the relative frequency of decreases10.

Mann-Kendall Significance
This option produces a pair of images – a significance image expressed as Z scores and a second image that expresses the
probability that the observed trend could have occurred by chance. Strictly speaking, this option is expressing the signifi-
cance of a Mann-Kendall trend. However, it is commonly used as a trend test for the Theil-Sen median slope operator as
well.

The STA (Seasonal Trend Analysis) Panel

Seasonal trend analysis (STA) is a new analytical technique developed by Clark Labs11. It uses two stages of time series
analysis to map out trends in the shape of the seasonal curve. It can be used with any series that exhibits seasonality.
In the first stage, each year of data is submitted to a harmonic regression to yield the following shape parameters:
-- An annual mean image (sometimes called Amplitude 0).
-- An image expressing the amplitude of the annual cycle (a sine wave with one cycle over the year), known as Amplitude
1.
-- An image expressing the phase angle of the annual cycle (an indication of where on a sine curve the beginning of the
series is located). This is known as Phase 1.
-- An image expressing the amplitude of a semi-annual cycle (a sine wave with two cycles over the year), known as Ampli-
tude 2.
-- An image expressing the phase angle of a semi-annual cycle (an indication of where on a sine curve the beginning of the
series is located). This is known as Phase 2.
These five parameters can describe an exceptionally large family of curves. By using only two harmonics and the mean,
high frequency noise and variability are rejected.
The first stage results in five images per year – one for each of the five shape parameters. Then in the second stage of the
analysis, a Theil-Sen median trend is run on each of the shape parameters over the total number of years in the series.
Since the median trend has a breakdown bound of 29% of the length of the series, interannual trends shorter than this
length are also rejected. Thus the result of the two stages yields a focus on long-term trends in the seasonal curve while
rejecting both high frequency noise and low frequency variability.
To visualize the results of this analysis, two forms of color composite are created – an Amplitudes image and a Phases

10. With a Mann-Kendall statistic, the data series is the dependent variable and time is the independent variable. When the independent variable is some-
thing other than time, the statistic is known as Kendall’s Tau. In that case, one looks at whether the two variables are both increasing or both decreasing
(known as a concordance) or whether one is increasing while the other is decreasing (a discordance) between every pairwise combination of observa-
tions. Tau is then the relative frequency of concordances minus the relative frequency of discordances.

11. See Eastman et al., (in press) “Seasonal Trend Analysis of Image Time Series,” International Journal of Remote Sensing.

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 267

image. Each is formed by assigning selected shape parameters trend images to the red, green and blue primary colors. The
Amplitudes image assigns RGB to Amplitude 0, Amplitude 1 and Amplitude 2 respectively. The Phases image assigns
RGB to Amplitude 0, Phase 1 and Phase 2 respectively.
The interpretation of these trend maps in terms of the seasonal curves is very difficult. As a result, ETM has a special
exploration tool that allows you to visualize the curves as well as the nature of the trend. Please see the section on the
Explore Trends panel above for more explanation. We also recommend that you complete the tutorial on STA to achieve
a full appreciation for this tool.

The PCA (Principal Components Analysis) / EOF Panel

Principal Components Analysis (PCA) is also known as Empirical Orthogonal Function (EOF) Analysis. It is a very pow-
erful technique for the analysis of variability over space and time. The images in a time series highly correlate with one
another from one moment of time to the next. PCA transforms the series into a set of components that are orthogonal (i.e.,
independent of each other) in both time and space. They are also ordered in terms of the amount of variance that they
explain from the series. In theory, one can produce as many components as there are images in the original series. How-
ever, in practice, almost all the variance can be explained by only a small number of components, with the remainder
expressing noise and high frequency variations.
The easiest way to understand PCA is to think about the time series of values for a single pixel across time as a vector. If
you imagine that each date represents a dimension then the series can be completely described by a single point in that
space. For example, image three months (January, February, March) with mean air temperature values of 15, 18, 22, then
this point would be located at position 15 on the January axis, 18 on the February axis and 22 on the March axis. The vec-
tor is then formed by joining this point with the origin of the space. Typically, of course, we need hundreds of dimensions
to describe real-life series. However, this is difficult to visualize, so we will use the example of three.
The image is made up of many pixels, so we will in fact have a space occupied by many vectors (as in the figure below).
The correlation between any pair of vectors is inversely proportional to the angle between them (in fact, the cosine of that
angle is equal to the correlation coefficient). The first component is the average vector (i.e., a vector that is as close as pos-
sible to the entire collection of vectors). It is known as an eigenvector (meaning characteristic vector) and its length is know as
the eigenvalue, which expresses the amount of variance it explains. The cosine of the angle between this eigenvector and
each pixel vector indicates its loading on the component – i.e., the pixel vector’s correlation with the eigenvector.

After the first component has been calculated, its effects are removed from the pixel vector field12. The new vectors thus
express the residuals after removing the effects of the first component. Then the process is repeated to extract the second

12. Although the actual calculation of components is not done this way, this step is equivalent to calculating the partial correlations between each pair of
pixel vectors, while removing the effects of the component.

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 268

component, and so on. Since each successive component is calculated on residuals, they will all thus be independent of
each other. Ultimately it is possible to extract as many components as there are pixel vectors. Note that if one were to cal-
culate PCA this way, the components would be graphs (an expression of the vector recast back onto a time dimension)
and the loadings would be images.
Efficient computation of PCA is actually done with matrix algebra and starts with a matrix of intercorrelations. While the
correlations could be between the pixels as illustrated here, it is in fact more efficient with geographical data to start with
the correlations between the images. The end result will be identical, but the number of calculations are fewer (e.g., a few
hundred images as opposed to thousands to millions of pixels). In this case, the components will be images and the load-
ings will be graphs. You may encounter this difference in approach in various scientific communities. For example, the cli-
matological community uses pixel vectors while the geographical community uses image vectors. The end result is
identical, it is simply the terminology that is different. Thus what one group calls a component the other calls the load-
ings, and vice versa.
Strictly speaking, the procedure outlined here is a standardized PCA since correlations express the covariance between vari-
ables standardized by their variances. It is also possible to calculate PCA’s by using the variance/covariance matrix as the
starting point rather than the correlation matrix, in which case it is called an unstandardized PCA. The difference is subtle
but important. With a standardized PCA, all the variables are put on an equal footing since their variances are effectively
equalized. With unstandardized PCA, variables will have weight proportional to their variance. For image time series anal-
ysis, we have generally found that standardized PCA gives the most easily interpreted results. Therefore, this is the default
mode in ETM.
In interpreting components, you should always consider the components and their loadings together. The component
shows you a pattern of variability while the loading tells you when it is prevalent. Note that negative loadings imply that
the pattern is present, but as the inverse of what is seen. If the data haven’t been deseasoned, the first component is essen-
tially an average. Don’t be surprised to see that all the loadings are very high for the first component (unless you are work-
ing with anomalies). This simply says that the biggest source of variability is geography!
PCA has many uses, but in image time series analysis, it is primarily an exploration tool. It is remarkably effective in orga-
nizing the underlying sources of variability in the data. However, components aren’t always pure. If at any level in the anal-
ysis there are two or more sources of variability that have roughly equal weight, then PCA will tend to produce mixed
components. The usual solution to this is known as rotation of the axes. There are a number of procedures for doing this
that require scientific judgment. In ETM, we have elected to go a simpler route, know as Empirical Orthogonal Telecon-
nections (EOT). EOT produces a result similar to an oblique component rotation.
Finally, a word about masks. ETM provides the ability to specify a mask. This image should have 1’s in pixels that should
be included in the calculation and 0’s otherwise. However, this only affects the calculation of the components. When the
component images are produced, the transformation is applied to all pixels. You can decide for yourself if you wish to
apply the mask to the outputs (simply multiply the components by the mask). Also, if you have background areas in your
images (such an ocean areas in a series of vegetation index imagery) you don’t need to include a mask image if these back-
ground areas are consistent over the series and they all have an identical value (e.g., 0 or -999 or whatever). If they are con-
sistent, they contribute no variance. However, they do affect the correlation between images and thus can actually have a
beneficial effect. The presence of substantial unmasked background areas will effectively privilege a rotation of the axes
such that geography dominants the first component. This is typically very desirable.
Note that the results from the PCA tool can be viewed on the Explore tab.

The EOT (Empirical Orthogonal Teleconnections) Panel

The name EOT13 comes from its original area of application – the study of climate teleconnections. However, the tech-
nique has general utility in the exploration of image time series. It is a brute force technique that is simple to understand
and produces results that are essentially identical to those one would expect from an obliquely rotated PCA. The EOT’s
are thus orthogonal in time but not necessarily in space.

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 269

In the default standardized implementation, pixels are treated as vectors over time. Each pixel is examined to determine
the degree to which its profile over time can explain the variability of all other pixels over time. It does this by calculating
the coefficient of determination (i.e., the squared correlation) between that pixel’s profile and each of the other profiles.
Thus with n pixels, n-1 correlation analyses are run. The n-1 coefficients of determination are then summed. This process
is then repeated over all pixels in turn resulting in n(n-1) correlation analyses. At the end of this process, the pixel with the
highest sum of r2 becomes the location of the first EOT. The profile for this pixel over time is thus the first EOT and the
values are in the same units as the original data.
After the first EOT is found, a residual series is created, removing the effect of that EOT. Then the process is repeated all
over again to find the next EOT. However, the values of the next EOT are now taken from the residual series. The units
are still the same, but they represent anomalies from the first EOT. Then a residual series is taken from the residuals and
the process is repeated again. Once all of the requested EOT’s have been calculated (as temporal profiles) the full set is
used as independent variables in a multiple regression with the original series to get a set of partial correlation images for
the spatial pattern associated with each EOT.
Some important notes about the EOT procedure:
1. As a brute force technique, EOT’s can take a considerable amount of time to calculate. If you take the case of a global
series with a resolution of 1 degree, there are 64,800 pixels. If you calculate 10 EOT’s, it requires almost 42 billion correla-
tion analyses! Depending upon the resolution of your series, an analysis commonly takes hours (in fact, we commonly run
them overnight).
2. Given the large amount of spatial dependence in geographic data, we generally recommend that you sample the data
rather than calculate every pixel. A sampling rate of 1 means that you want to compute the EOT’s using every pixel. A
sampling rate of 2 implies that they will be calculated by looking at every second pixel along every second row, and so on.
We recommend using an odd number as the sampling rate so that the EOT location corresponds to a specific pixel.
3. EOT also creates a vector point file showing the specific locations of each EOT. It will bear the same prefix as the
other outputs for the analysis and can be found in the “components” sub-folder of your series.
An unstandardized variant of EOT is also provided. In this case, the coefficient of determination is weighted by the vari-
ance of each pixel profile during calculation. The difference between standardized and unstandardized EOT’s is the same
as it applies to PCA – the standardized version preferences the quality of the relationship expressed by the EOT (by giv-
ing equal weight to all pixels in its calculations) while unstandardized EOT is preferencing relationships with magnitude.
A second variant of EOT is provided that we call a Cross-EOT (Van den Dool, 2007 refers to it as EOT2). With a regular
EOT we are looking for locations in a series that have good explanatory power in describing variance in other locations
within the same series. With Cross-EOT we are looking for locations in one series that can best describe variance in
another series. Thus, for example, you could examine a sea surface temperature series to find locations that can explain
temperature anomalies on land. The only requirement is that the two series have the same length and nature (e.g., if one is
monthly and has 300 images, the other must also be monthly with 300 images). Some important points with Cross-EOT:
1. BE VERY CAREFUL ABOUT SPURIOUS CORRELATIONS!!!!!! If you look at every location in one series and
compare it to every location in the other, the likelihood that you will find some location that explains some part of the
sequence in the other series is very high. Thus it is possible to create Cross-EOT’s that are absolutely meaningless. This is
a problem shared with similar techniques such as Canonical Correlation Analysis, for which a recommended practice is
prefiltering the data to focus on the major elements of variability in the series. The Inverse PCA denoising filter on the
Preprocessing tab can be used for this.
2. Cross-EOT produces one set of EOT graphs, but two sets of images – one for each of the two series involved.

13. Van den Dool, H. M., Saha, S., Johansson, A., (2000) Empirical orthogonal teleconnections. Journal of Climate, 13:1421-1435; Van den Dool, H.,
(2007) Empirical Methods in Short-Term Climate Prediction. Oxford University Press, New York. Note that we STRONGLY recommend this book. It is
exceptionally well written and provides many useful insights into image time series analysis.

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 270

Note that the results of EOT can be explored on the Explore tab. Also note that the EOT’s are automatically added as
index series to your project.

The Fourier PCA Spectral Analysis Panel

This is an experimental module that was designed as a way of organizing the output of the TFA (Time Series Fourier
Analysis) module. TFA decomposes a series into a set of sine waves with frequencies ranging from 1 wave over the entire
series to n/2 complete waves over the series. This produces a large number of amplitude and phase images. Without hav-
ing prior interest in specific waves, this can be a daunting image set to examine. With Fourier PCA, the amplitude images
from TFA (which is called automatically by ETM) are fed into an unstandardized PCA. The components from that analy-
sis thus indicate commonly occurring patterns of waveforms.
The loadings in Fourier PCA express the relative strength with which different frequencies are present. Thus the X-axis
represents frequency indicated by the number of the harmonic (i.e., a value of 2 represents two complete waves over the
entire series). This is similar in spirit to a Periodogram, but since the Y axis doesn’t represent amplitude directly, we call it
a Pseudo-Periodogram.
Because it is often difficult to understand the implication of these wave patterns, an additional analysis is added at the end.
Each component is correlated against every one of the original images in the series. This generates a temporal “loading”
that expresses when the pattern was present. However, it is not a true loading as in a PCA, so it is also best described as a
Pseudo-Loading.
Some important notes about Fourier PCA:
1. Phase information is not used in the analysis. Thus waves that occur at different times will be lumped together. This
implies that the pseudo-loading is limited in its ability to fully represent the timing of a pattern. Similarly, this implies that
the series may never at any one time look like the pattern portrayed. The tutorial will help clarify this.
2. Since phase information is discarded, it is theoretically possible to detect moving phenomena. We have experimentally
proved this and have been successful in detecting ocean eddies with this tool.
3. If any pair of amplitude images is perfectly, or nearly perfectly, correlated, a singular matrix is encountered and compu-
tation is not possible.
4. If you have background areas, apply a mask to remove them from consideration. This can reduce the likelihood of a
singular matrix.
5. The cutoff frequency allows you to exclude high frequency waves from the analysis. The cutoff number refers to the
harmonic.
Note that the results of Fourier PCA can be viewed on the Explore tab. Also note that this is an experimental procedure
and you are cautioned to use it at your own risk. We welcome constructive feedback.

The Linear Modeling Panel

The Linear Modeling tool allows you to examine relationships between series. At this time, the dependent series is always
an image series while the dependent series can be either image or index series (but not mixed). It uses standard multiple
regression analysis to produce its outputs and is thus subject to all of the normal caveats about regression than can be
found in a standard text on multivariate statistical regression.
One of the primary uses of the Linear Modeling tool is to map the areas impacted by a particular phenomenon such as a
climate teleconnection like El Nino. If you’re trying to sort out the pattern of several teleconnections, analyze them simul-
taneously and select the partial correlation option. This will produce a partial correlation image for each relationship with
the effects of the others removed.
Note that series relationships can be analyzed at different lags. Lag 0 implies that the dependent and independent series

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 271

are being compared at corresponding time steps. A negative lag shifts an independent variable to an earlier time. If you
think of an event, such as the December peak of El Nino, then if your independent variable is an index to El Nino (such
as the Southern Oscillation Index) you would be looking at the relationship before the main event. You would do this if, for
example, you were looking for leading indicators of El Nino in your dependent series. Commonly, a negative lag is a called
a lead and a positive lag is simply called a lag.
The results of a Linear Modeling analysis can always be re-examined by going to the Explore Series Relationships panel
on the first tab. Also, when the Linear Modeling tool finishes, it will show you one result as a signal that it has finished.
However, in cases where you’ve selected multiple outputs (such as with partial correlation) you will need to go to the
Explore Series Relationships panel to see the full set of pertinent main results. Also, as noted in the section on the
Explore Series Relationships panel, some outputs (like intercept images) are not displayed by the analysis icons and will
need to be displayed from IDRISI Explorer.

The Preprocess Tab

The Missing Data Interpolation Panel
Earth observation imagery commonly has missing data – in fact, a lot of missing data. The most common reason is
because of clouds, although transmission dropouts and gaps between scans are also a source. However, many of the ana-
lytical procedures provided by ETM are sensitive to the presence of missing data. The Missing Data Interpolation panel
offers a few utilities to alleviate this situation.
Missing data are identified as those that do not fall within a valid range as specified by indicating the minimum and maxi-
mum allowable values. For all options, you can elect to create a Boolean image that defines pixels that still have one or
more missing values over the series. This is a good way to check on your progress. The options provided for interpolation
include:

Harmonic Interpolation
This option is closely based on the procedure known as HANTS (Harmonic Analysis of Time Series) by Roerink, et al.,
(2000)14. The procedure is best for filling missing data in mid-latitude areas. It is not suitable for high-latitude or desert
regions with long periods of uniform response (e.g., snow cover) or for tropical rainforest regions where seasonality is
questionable or extremely subtle.
The basic logic of the procedure is as follows. In mid-latitude areas, the seasonal curve is very well described by the addi-
tive combination of a small set of sine waves. This can be modeled by using either Fourier Analysis or Harmonic Regres-
sion. As in the HANTS procedure, Harmonic Regression is used because it can accommodate missing data and does not
require that the data be at a consistent interval, i.e.,
n=2
⎧ 2πnt 2πnt ⎫
y = α 0 + ∑ ⎨an sin( ) + bn cos( )⎬ + e
n =1 ⎩ T T ⎭
where y is the series value, t is time, T is the length of the series, n is the number of harmonics to be used in the regression,
e is an error term and α0 is the mean of the series. The Julian dates associated with each step in the series cycle (contained
in the .tsf file) provides the time information needed for the regression.
For each missing value in the series the harmonic regression uses a sliding window of one year, centered on the missing
date. The series type will therefore dictate how many data values are used in the regression. The number of harmonics will

14. Roerink, G.J., Menenti, M., and Verhoef, W., (2000) “Reconstructing cloudfree NDVI composites using Fourier analysis of time series”, International
Journal of Remote Sensing, 21, 9, 1911-1917.

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 272

dictate the minimum number of valid data values that must exist. For example, with the default of 2 harmonics (an annual
and a semi-annual cycle), a minimum of 5 valid dates must exist in the window. The general formula is 2n+1, where n is
the number of harmonics. You may specify a higher minimum, however. The more data that go into the regression, the
better the fit. You can also specify the maximum gap that can be bridged over.
In addition to the usual designation of missing values, the harmonic interpolation procedure also allow you to designate
an error tolerance. After an initial fit at a location, if there is a valid value at that location and it falls outside the tolerance
specified, it is considered to be noise and the pixel is replaced with the interpolated value. If you do not wish to use this
feature, simply specify an impossibly high tolerance.
Finally, note that like the original HANTS procedure, you can elect to replace every value with its interpolated estimate.
This is essentially a smoothing option.

Linear Temporal Interpolation

This is perhaps the simplest of the procedures offered. When a pixel will missing data is encountered, it looks at the image
before and the image after that date. If they both have good values, it replaced the missing pixel with the average of the
dates before and after.

Spatial Interpolation
With spatial interpolation, ETM looks at the 3 by 3 neighborhood surrounding a missing pixel and replaces it with the
median value. This will only fill in the pixel if the majority of the neighboring pixels have valid data.

Climatology (temporal median)

Data sets that express the long term average of a parameter over its cycle are often referred to as a climatology. In the con-
text of missing data interpolation, it refers to replacing a missing value with the long term median value for that period in
the cycle. It should be used only as a method of last resort as it will detract from evidence of trends.
Note that a best practices procedure has not been established for missing data interpolation. However, a general proce-
dure that works well is to use one or more successive calls to the linear temporal and spatial interpolation procedures fol-
lowed by a final step of climatology.

The Denoise Panel

The Denoise Panel offers several utilities for the removal of noise in image series. Options include:

Temporal Filter
The Temporal Filter option smoothes over time. It does so using a symmetric moving filter window. Filter lengths can be
both odd and even numbered except in the case of either a Gaussian filter or a Maximum filter (both of which must be
odd). In the case of even filters, the first and last images have a half weight each in the filtering operation. Sub-options
include:
--Mean filter – the resulting pixel values are the simple averages of all time periods within the moving temporal window.
--Gaussian weighted mean – the resulting pixel values are the weighted averages of all time periods within the moving
temporal window, where the weights follow a Gaussian distribution. This tends to produce a smoother series, but will typ-
ically need a wider filter window than the simple mean filter.
--Maximum value – the resulting pixel values represent the maximum value that occurs over the temporal filter window.
--Cumulative sum – the resulting pixel values represent the sum of the pixel being operated upon and all previous values
that occurs within the length of the temporal filter window.

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 273

--Cumulative mean – the resulting pixel values represent the average of the pixel being operated upon and all previous val-
ues that occurs within the length of the temporal filter window.

Maximum Value Composite

Maximum value compositing is commonly used for NDVI vegetation index imagery. The logic is that the presence of
clouds (even partially transparent ones) will always lead to a lower NDVI value. Thus choosing the maximum value for the
time period being considered can safely be assumed to have been least affected by clouds. Note however that this logic is
not necessarily applicable to other image types.
The tools necessary to create a maximum value composite exist within the Generate/Edit Series panel. Thus you are
directed to use that option. Its entry is included in the Denoise panel simply to make users aware that this option exists.

Inverse PCA
Unstandardized Principal Components Analysis provides a linear transformation of a set of components in which the
early components describe highly prevalent and coherent sources of variability in the series. On the other hand, the later
components will contain minor sources and incoherent sources of variability such as noise. Thus an effective means of
denoising data is to reverse the transformation while leaving out these noisy elements. How many should you leave out?
There is no easy answer here without looking at the components quite carefully. However, most of the coherent variability
in a series is contained within a surprisingly few components – e.g., the first 20 or so. For filtering for the purpose of using
a Cross-EOT, some would recommend even a heavier filtering, using only perhaps the first five components in re-con-
structing the series. Note that in using this option, ETM automatically computes both the forward and inverse transfor-
mations.

Inverse Fourier
The logic here is similar to Inverse PCA. From a forward breakdown of an image series into a set of amplitude and phase
images, it is possible to reconstruct it using an inverse transformation. The higher-numbered harmonics represent increas-
ingly high-frequency elements such as noise. A value that commonly works well is to include all the interannual cycles, the
annual cycle and the semi-annual cycle. The cutoff frequency is thus going to depend of the length of the series. If, for
example you have 25 years of monthly data, interannual cycles would be the harmonics less than 25, the annual cycle
would be harmonic 25 and the semi-annual cycle would be harmonic 50. Therefore the number of harmonics to use
would be 50.

The Deseason Panel

It is common that you will wish to remove seasonality from your series. For example, the trend measures on the Trend
panel are intended to be used with deseasoned data. Three options are provided:

Anomalies
This is the most commonly used form of deseasoning. As a first step, ETM creates what is known as a climatology from the
series as a whole. For example, if the data are monthly, then it creates an average January, an average February, and so on.
It then goes through the series and subtracts the long term average from each month. For example, the January 1998
anomaly image would be equal to January 1998 minus the long term average of all Januaries.

Standardized Anomalies
This is a variant of regular anomalies. In calculation of the climatology (the long-term means), it also calculates the standard
deviation of values for each member of the climatology. Then when the anomaly images are created (by subtracting the
long term mean) the result is divided by the standard deviation to create a standardized anomaly (a z-score). In this new
system, a value of 0 would mean that it has a value equal to the long term mean, a value of +1 would mean that it is 1 stan-
dard deviation of the long term mean, and so on.

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 274

Temporal Filter
This option is identical to the use of temporal filtering for denoising. However, the implication is that the filter length will
be long enough that it will filter out seasonality as well as noise. ETM will suggest a filter length for each option.

The Generate / Edit Series Panel

This panel offers a number of helpful utilities for generating new series or editing existing ones. Note that procedures
which generate new series will ask you to select a series that can be used as a template regarding all series parameters such
as the number of images, the interval type (e.g., monthly), start and end date, etc.

Linear Index Series

Generates an index series with a perfectly linear sequence with values that start from the specified start value and increase
by the specified increment with each time step. A series of this type may be useful as an independent variable representing
a trend in Linear Modeling.

Sin Index Series

Generates an index series with the specified number of sine waves over the entire series. The series starts at the phase
angle specified. A series of this type may be useful as an independent variable in Linear Modeling (typically paired with a
Cosine series).

Cos Index Series

Generates an index series with the specified number of cosine waves over the entire series. The series starts at the phase
angle specified. A series of this type may be useful as an independent variable in Linear Modeling (typically paired with a
Sine series).

Lagged Series
Generates a lagged version of the input series. Specifying a lag other than 0 will start the series with the position indicated,
starting the count from 0. For example, for a monthly series that starts in January, specifying a lag of 3 will have the series
start from April and end with the normal end of the series. To pair an unlagged series of the same length, use the Truncated
Series option and remove from the end of the series the same number of images as specified for the lag. Note – for nega-
tive lags truncate from the end of the series.

Truncated Series
Generates a truncated version of the input series – i.e., a shortened series by removing images either from the end or the
beginning.

Supplemented Series
This is used to add additional data on either the beginning or the end of a series. Note that the series to be added (even if
it contains only one image) must be correctly documented (in its .tsf file) with regards to the start and end dates of the
series, series type, etc.

Skip Factor Series

A skip factor series is used to extract all members of a specific position in a cycle. For example, given a monthly series that
starts in January, using a start position of 1, a take factor of 1, and a skip factor of 11 will produce a new series consisting of all
January images. Note that the start and take factors must add up to the number of items in a full cycle. Thus, for example,
using a start factor of 6, a take factor of 3 and a skip factor of 9 will yield a series consisting of the summer months (JJA)
of each year.

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 275

Rename Series Images
This utility renames the images within a series and not the series itself. To be consistent with operating system file order-
ing, the new names will be composed of the prefix, followed by the cycle number (e.g., year), followed by the position
(e.g., month). This option is great for renaming series that do not sort properly by the operating system or that are consec-
utively numbered without reference to the cycle or position.

Aggregate Series
This option aggregates series to a coarser or similar temporal resolution. Depending upon the nature of the series, one or
several conversion options may be available (a small number do not have any conversion options because of peculiarities
in their nature). For cases where a mean is used and values must be taken from more than one input image, a weighted
mean is used.

The Detrend Prewhiten Panel

This panel contains several utilities for removing trends and handling serial correlation (correlation between successive
values over time).

Detrend (linear)
This option removes the presence of a linear trend in the series. It does this by extracting the residuals from a linear
regression between the series (the dependent variable) and time (the independent variable).

Detrend (difference series)

This option creates a new series where values express the difference between values of the original series and the value in
the previous time step of that series. If the series is first order autoregressive (i.e., the correlation between values and
immediately preceding values accounts for all successive correlations), this procedure will remove serial correlation.

Trend preserving prewhitening

Prewhitining refers to the removal of serial correlation in the error (noise) component of a series. The procedure per-
formed here assumes that the series can be described as:

where a is an intercept, b is the trend slope, t is time, Xt is a lag-1 red noise process, ρ is the serial correlation and e is a
white noise error term. The trend preserving prewhitening in ETM uses the procedure described by Wang and Swail
(2001) 15to remove the red noise component yielding a new series (Wt) that can be described by:

15. Wang, X.L., and V.R. Swail, 2001. Changes of extreme wave heights in northern hemisphere oceans and related atmospheric circulation regimes, Jour-
nal of Climate, 14, 2204-2221.

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 276

An iterative procedure is used to estimate the true serial correlation ρ and the trend-preserving prewhitened series is cal-
culated as:

This prewhitened series has the same trend as the original series, but with no serial correlation (Wang and Swail (2001).
Note that this prewhitening method decreases the sample size by one which is recovered using the Prais-Winsten trans-
formation (Kimenta, 2004)16.

Durbin Watson
The Durbin Watson option computes the Durbin Watson statistic of serial correlation over time for each pixel. For index
series, a tabulation is made of the slope and intercept of the best fit linear trend, along with the Durban Watson statistic.
Its value always lies between 0 and 4. A value of 2 indicates no serial autocorrelation. A Durbin-Watson statistic less than
2 indicates evidence of a positive serial correlation and a statistic greater than 2 indicates evidence of a negative serial
autocorrelation. Critical values for the Durbin Watson statistic can be found in standard statistical texts.

Cochrane-Orcutt
The Cochrane-Orcutt transformation17 transforms the dependent variable and each of the independent variables in order
to remove serial correlation. It estimates the first order serial correlation ρ by calculating the correlation between the
residuals and the residuals at lag 1. The transformation of both the dependent and independent variables is calculated as:

As with Prewhiten, the Prais-Winsten transformation (Kmenta, 2004) is used to estimate the initial value of the trans-
formed variables. Note that it is assumed that all variables have been deseasoned such that the expected intercept is 0. In
this case, the transformed intercept is also 0. Therefore the intercept term drops out of the transformation and the user
can use the transformed dependent and independent variables with the Linear Modeling tool to complete the analysis.

16. Kimenta, J. 2004. Elements of Econometrics, The University of Michigan Press.

17. Cochrane D, Orcutt GH (1949) Application of Least Squares Regression to Relationships Containing Auto-correlated Error Terms. J Amer Statisti-
cal Assoc 44:32-61

Chapter 22 The Earth Trends Modeler 277

Anisotropic Cost Analysis
Cost surface modeling is now a familiar feature of many raster geographic information systems. In developing a cost sur-
face, one accounts for the cost of moving through space, where costs are a function of both the standard (or base) costs
associated with movement, and also of frictions and forces that impede or facilitate that movement.

Isotropic Costs
Isotropic cost surface modeling is accomplished in IDRISI with the COST module. Given input images of a set of fea-
tures from which cost distances should be calculated and the frictions that affect movement, COST outputs a cost surface
that expresses costs of movement in terms of distance equivalents. Thus, for example, if a cell contains a value of 100, it
simply expresses that the cost of moving from the nearest starting feature (target) to that point is the equivalent of moving
over 100 cells at the base cost. It could equally arise from traveling over 100 cells with a relative friction (i.e., relative to the
friction associated with the base cost) of 1, or 50 cells with frictions of 2, or 1 cell with a relative friction of 100.

Anisotropic Costs
With the COST module, frictions have identical effect in any direction. It doesn't matter how you move through a cell—
its friction will be the same. We can call such a friction isotropic since it is equal in all directions. However, it is not very dif-
ficult to imagine anisotropic frictions—frictional elements that have different effects in different directions. Take, for exam-
ple, the case of slopes. If we imagine the costs of walking (perhaps in calories per hour at normal walking speed), then
slopes will affect that cost differently in different directions. Traveling upslope will cause that friction to act full-force;
traveling perpendicularly across the slope will have no effect at all; and traveling downslope will act as a force that reduces
the cost. Traditional cost analysis cannot accommodate such an effect.

Anisotropic Cost Modules in IDRISI

In IDRISI, four modules are supplied for the modeling of anisotropic costs. Anisotropic cost analysis is still a very new
area of analysis, and we therefore encourage users to send information, in writing, on their applications and experiences
using these modules.
At the core of the set are two different modules for the analysis of anisotropic costs, VARCOST and DISPERSE, and two
support modules for the modeling of forces and frictions that affect those costs, RESULTANT and DECOMP.
VARCOST models the effects of anisotropic frictions on the movement of phenomena that have their own motive force.
The example just given of walking in the presence of slopes is an excellent example, and one that is perfectly modeled by
VARCOST. DISPERSE, on the other hand, models the movement of phenomena that have no motive force of their own,
but which are acted upon by anisotropic forces to disperse them over time. A good example of this would be a point-
source pollution problem such as a chemical spill on land. Upon absorption into the soil, the contaminant would move
preferentially with ground water under the force of gravity according to the hydraulic gradient. The resulting pattern of
movement would look plume-like because of the decreasing probability of movement as one moved in a direction away
from the maximum gradient (slope). DISPERSE and VARCOST are thus quite similar in concept, except in the nature of
how forces and frictions change in response to changes in the direction of movement. This we call the anisotropic func-

Chapter 23 Anisotropic Cost Analysis 278

tion, as will be discussed below. However, to understand such functions, it is useful to review the distinction between
forces and frictions in the modeling of costs.

Forces and Frictions

In cost modeling, forces and frictions are not inherently different. In all of the cost modeling procedures—COST,
VARCOST and DISPERSE—frictions are expressed as relative frictions using the base cost as a reference. Thus, for
example, if it takes 350 calories to walk along flat ground, and 700 calories to walk across more rugged terrain at equal
speed, we would indicate that rugged terrain has a friction of 2. However, if we were to walk down a slope such that our
energy expended was only 175 calories, then we would express that as a friction of 0.5. But what are frictions less than 1?
They are, in fact, forces. To retain consistency, all relative frictions in IDRISI are expressed as values greater than 1 and
relative forces are expressed as values less than 1. Thus, if we were concerned with wind forces and we had a base force of
10 km/hour, a wind of 30 km/hour would be specified as a relative force of 0.33.
With anisotropic cost modeling, a single image cannot describe the nature of forces and frictions acting differently in dif-
ferent directions. Rather, a pair of images is required—one describing the magnitude of forces and frictions, expressed as
relative quantities exactly as indicated above, and the other describing the direction of those forces and frictions,
expressed as azimuths.1 These magnitude/direction image pairs thus describe a field of force/friction vectors which,
along with the anisotropic function discussed below, can be used to determine the force or friction in any direction at any
point. The term force/friction image pair refers to a magnitude image and its corresponding direction image for either forces
(used with DISPERSE) or frictions (used with VARCOST).
It is important to understand the nature of the direction images required for both VARCOST and DISPERSE. With
VARCOST, the friction direction image must represent the direction of movement that would incur the greatest cost to
movement. For example, if you are modeling the movement of a person walking across a landscape and the frictions
encountered are due to slopes (going uphill is difficult, going downhill is easy), then the values in the friction direction
image should be azimuths from north that point uphill.
With DISPERSE, the force direction image must represent the direction in which the force acts most strongly. For exam-
ple, if you are modeling the dispersion of a liquid spill over a landscape (flowing easily downhill, flowing with great diffi-
culty uphill), then the values in the force direction image should be azimuths from north that point downhill.
In the use of VARCOST and DISPERSE, a single anisotropic force/friction vector image pair is specified. Since analyses
may involve a number of different forces acting simultaneously, a pair of modules has been supplied to allow the combi-
nation of forces or frictions. The first of these is RESULTANT. RESULTANT takes the information from two force/
friction image pairs to produce a new force/friction image pair expressing the resultant vector produced by their com-
bined action. Thus, RESULTANT can be used to successively combine forces and frictions to produce a single magni-
tude/direction image pair to be used as input to VARCOST or DISPERSE.
The second module that can be used to manipulate force/friction image pairs is DECOMP. DECOMP can decompose a
force/friction image pair into its X and Y component images (i.e., the force/friction in X and the force/friction in Y). It
can also recompose X and Y force/friction components into magnitude and direction image pairs. Thus DECOMP could
be used to duplicate the action of RESULTANT.2 However, a quite different and important use of DECOMP is with the
interpolation of force/friction vectors. If one takes the example of winds, it is not possible to interpolate the data at point
locations to produce an image, since routines such as TREND and INTERPOL cannot tell that the difference between
355 and 0 degrees is the same as between 0 and 5. However, if a raster image pair of the point force/friction data is con-

1. Azimuths express directions in degrees, clockwise from north. In IDRISI, it is also permissible to express an azimuth with the value of -1 to indicate
that no direction is defined.

2. To undertake a process similar to RESULTANT, DECOMP is used to decompose all force/friction image pairs acting upon an area into their X and
Y components. These X and Y component images are then added to yield a resulting X and Y pair. The recomposition option of DECOMP is then
used with these to produce a resultant magnitude/direction image pair.

Chapter 23 Anisotropic Cost Analysis 279

structed and then decomposed into X and Y components (using DECOMP), these component images can be interpo-
lated (e.g., with TREND) and then recomposed into a force/friction pair using DECOMP.

Anisotropic Functions
With force/friction image pairs, one has an indication of both the magnitude and direction with which forces and fric-
tions act. However, what is the interpretation of direction? If a force is said to act at 45° (northeast), does this mean it acts
fully at 45° and not at all at 44°? The answer to this is not easily determined and it ultimately depends upon the applica-
tion. If one takes the earlier example of walking against slopes of varying degrees, the force/friction image describes only
the direction and magnitude of the steepest descending slope. If one faced directly into the slope one would feel the full
force of the friction (i.e., effective friction = stated friction). Facing directly away from the slope (i.e., pointing
downslope), the friction would be transformed into a force to the fullest possible extent (i.e., effective friction = 1/(stated
friction)). Between the two, intermediate values would occur. Moving progressively in a direction farther away from the
maximum friction, the friction would progressively decrease until one reached 90°. At 90°, the effect of the slope would
be neutralized (effective friction = 1). Then as one moves past 90° towards the opposite direction, frictions would
become forces progressively increasing to the extreme at 180°.
This variation in the effective friction/force as a function of direction is here called the anisotropic function. With
VARCOST, the following default function is used:
effective_friction = stated_frictionf
where f = coskα
and k = a user-defined coefficient
and α = difference angle.
The difference angle in this formula measures the angle between the direction being considered and the direction from
which frictions are acting (or equivalently, the direction to which forces are acting). Figure 1 indicates the nature of this func-
tion for various exponents (k) for difference angles from 0 to 90°.
1.0

k=1
function value

k=2
0.5

k=10

k=100

0.0
0 30 60 90
difference angle
Figure 1

You will note in Figure 1 that the exponent k makes the function increasingly direction-specific. At its limit, an extremely
high exponent would have the effect of causing the friction to act fully at 0°, to become a fully acting force at 180°, and to

Chapter 23 Anisotropic Cost Analysis 280

be neutralized at all other angles. The default anisotropic function returns negative values for all difference angles from
90° to 270° regardless of the exponent used (i.e., negative cosine values, when raised to odd or even exponents, return neg-
ative values for the function). Hence, these angles always yield effective friction values that are less than one (i.e., act as
forces).
We have not presumed that this function will be appropriate in all circumstances. As a result, we have provided the option
of entering a user-defined function. The procedure for doing so is quite simple—VARCOST has the ability to read a data
file of function values for difference angles from 0-360° in increments of 0.05°. The format for this file is indicated in the
VARCOST module description in the on-line Help System. The important thing to remember, however, is that with
VARCOST, the values of that function represent an exponent as follows:
effective_friction = stated_frictionf
where f = a user-defined function.
With DISPERSE, the same general logic applies to its operation except that the anisotropic function is different:
effective_friction = stated_friction * f
where f = 1/coskα
and k = a user-defined coefficient
and α = difference angle.
The effect of this function is to modify frictions such that they have full effect at an angle of 0° with progressive increases
in friction until they reach infinity at 90°. The function is designed so that effective frictions remain at infinity for all dif-
ference angles greater than 90°. Figure 2 shows the values returned by the default functions of f, illustrating this difference
between the functions of VARCOST and DISPERSE.

0 infinity
VARCOST DISPERSE
90 90

-1 180 0 1 infinity 180 0 1

-90 -90
0 infinity
Figure 2 Friction Force

Like VARCOST, DISPERSE also allows the entry of a user-defined function. The procedure is identical, allowing for the
reading of a data file containing function values for difference angles from 0-360° in increments of 0.05°. The format for
this file is indicated in the DISPERSE module description in the on-line Help System. Unlike VARCOST, however, the
values of that function represent a multiplier (rather than an exponent) as follows:
effective_friction = stated_friction * f
where f = a user-defined function.

Chapter 23 Anisotropic Cost Analysis 281

Applications of VARCOST and DISPERSE
VARCOST and DISPERSE have proven useful in a variety of circumstances. VARCOST is a direct extension of the logic
of the COST module (i.e., as a means of gauging the effects of frictions and forces on the costs of movement through
space, with the special additional capability to moderate frictional effects with varying directions of movement through
cells). One might use VARCOST, for example, along with ALLOCATE, to assign villages to rural health centers where
the costs of travel on foot are accommodated given landuse types (an isotropic friction) and slopes (an anisotropic fric-
tion).
DISPERSE is useful in cases where the phenomenon under study has no motive force of its own, but moves due to
forces that act upon it. Potential applications might include point source pollution studies, forest and rangeland fire mod-
eling, and possibly oil spill monitoring and projection.
We encourage users to share with us their experiences using these modules and how they might be changed or augmented
to facilitate such studies. We would also welcome the submission of user-defined anisotropic functions that meet the
needs of special applications and might be useful to a broader user group.

Chapter 23 Anisotropic Cost Analysis 282

Surface Interpolation

Introduction
In GIS, we often want to combine information from several layers in analyses. If we only know the values of a selection of
points and these sample points do not coincide between the layers, then such analyses would be impossible. Even if the
sample points do coincide, we often want to describe a process for all the locations within a study area, not just for
selected points. In addition, we need full surfaces because many processes modeled in GIS act continuously over a sur-
face, with the value at one location being dependent upon neighboring values.
Any GIS layer, whether raster or vector, that describes all locations in a study area might be called a surface. However, in
surface analysis, we are particularly interested in those surfaces where the attributes are quantitative and vary continuously
over space. A raster Digital Elevation Model (DEM), for instance, is such a surface. Other example surfaces might
describe NDVI, population density, or temperature. In these types of surfaces, each pixel may have a different value than
its neighbors.
A landcover map, however, would not be considered a surface by this definition. The values are qualitative, and they also
do not vary continuously over the map. Another example of an image that does not fit this particular surface definition
would be a population image where the population values are assigned uniformly to census units. In this case, the data are
quantitative, yet they do not vary continuously over space. Indeed, change in values is present only at the borders of the
census units.
No GIS surface layer can match reality at every scale. Thus the term model is often applied to surface images. The use of
this term indicates a distinction between the surface as represented digitally and the actual surface it describes. It also indi-
cates that different models may exist for the same phenomenon. The choice of which model to use depends upon many
things, including the application, accuracy requirements, and availability of data.
It is normally impossible to measure the value of an attribute for every pixel in an image. (An exception is a satellite image,
which measures average reflectance for every pixel.) More often, one needs to fill in the gaps between sample data points
to create a full surface. This process is called interpolation. IDRISI offers several options for interpolation which are dis-
cussed in this chapter. Further technical information about these modules may be found in the on-line Help System.

Surface Interpolation
The choice of interpolation technique depends on what type of surface model you hope to produce and what data are
available. In this section, the techniques available in IDRISI are organized according to input sample data type—points or
lines. A description of the algorithm used and the general characteristics of the techniques are given. For a more theoreti-
cal treatment of the characteristics of surface models produced by particular interpolation techniques, consult the refer-
ences provided at the end of this chapter.
Interpolation techniques may be described as global or local. A global interpolator derives the surface model by consider-
ing all the data points at once. The resulting surface gives a "best fit" for the entire sample data set, but may provide a very
poor fit in particular locations. A local interpolator, on the other hand, calculates new values for unknown pixels by using
the values of known pixels that are nearby. Interpolators may define "nearby" in various ways. Many allow the user to
determine how large an area or how many of the nearest sample data points should be considered in deriving interpolated
values.
Interpolation techniques are also classified as exact or inexact. An exact interpolation technique always retains the original

Chapter 24 Surface Interpolation 283

values of the sample data points in the resulting surface, while an inexact interpolator may assign new values to known
data points.

Interpolation From Point Data

Trend Surface Analysis
Trend surfaces are typically used to determine whether spatial trends exist in a data set, rather than to create a surface
model to be used in further analyses. Trend surfaces may also be used to describe and remove broad trends from data sets
so more local influences may be better understood. Because the resulting surface is an ideal mathematical model, it is very
smooth and is free from local detail.
In IDRISI, the module TREND is used to produce a trend surface image from sample data points. TREND is a global
interpolator since it calculates a surface that gives the best fit, overall, to the entire set of known data points. TREND is
also an inexact interpolator. The values at known data points may be modified to correspond to the best fit surface for the
entire data set.
TREND fits up to a 9th order polynomial surface model to the input point data set. To visualize how TREND works, we
will use an example of temperature data at several weather stations. The linear surface model is flat (i.e., a plane). Imagine
the temperature data as points floating above a table top. The height of each point above the table top depends on its tem-
perature. Now imagine a flat piece of paper positioned above the table. Without bending it at all, one adjusts the tilt and
height of the paper in such a way that the sum of the distances between it and every point are minimized. Some points
would fall above the plane of the paper and some below. Indeed, it is possible that no points would actually fall on the
paper itself. However, the overall separation between the model (the plane) and the sample data points is minimized.
Every pixel in the study area could then be assigned the temperature that corresponds to the height of the paper at that
pixel location.
One could use the same example to visualize the quadratic and cubic trend surface models. However, in these cases, you
would be allowed to bend the paper (but not crease it). The quadratic surface allows for broad bends in the paper while
the cubic allows even more complex bending.
TREND operates much like this analogy except a polynomial formula describing the ideal surface model replaces the
paper. This formula is used to derive values for all pixels in the image. In addition to the interpolated surface produced,
TREND reports (as a percentage) how well the chosen model fits the input points. TREND also reports the F-ratio and
degrees of freedom, which may be used to test if the modeled trend is significantly different from zero (i.e., no trend at
all).

Thiessen or Voronoi Tessellation

The term tessellation means to break an area into pieces or tiles. With a Thiessen tessellation, the study area is divided into
regions around the sample data points such that every pixel in the study area is assigned to (and takes on the value of) the
data point to which it is closest.
Because it produces a tiled rather than a continuous surface, this interpolation technique is seldom used to produce a sur-
face model. More commonly it is used to identify the zones of influence for a set of data points.
Suppose a set of new health centers were proposed for a rural area and its inhabitants needed to be assigned to their closest
facility. If Euclidean distance was used as the definition of closest, then THIESSEN would provide the desired result.
Zones of influence that are based on more complex variables than Euclidean distance may also be defined in IDRISI
using the COST and ALLOCATE modules in sequence. In the same example, if shortest travel time rather than shortest
euclidean distance defined closest, then COST would be used to develop a travel-time surface (incorporating information
about road types, paths, etc.) and ALLOCATE would be used to assign each pixel to its nearest facility in terms of short-
est travel time.

Chapter 24 Surface Interpolation 284

Distance-Weighted Average
The distance-weighted average preserves sample data values and is therefore an exact interpolation technique. In IDRISI,
it is available in the module INTERPOL.
The user may choose to use this technique either as a global or a local interpolator. In the global case, all sample data
points are used in calculating all the new interpolated values. In the local case, only the 4-8 sample points that are nearest
to the pixel to be interpolated are used in the calculation. The local option is generally recommended, unless data points
are very uniformly distributed and the user wants a smoother result.
With the local option, a circle defined by a search radius is drawn around each pixel to be interpolated. The search radius
is set to yield, on average, 6 control points within the circle. This is calculated by dividing the total study area by the num-
ber of points and determining a radius that would enclose, on average, 6 points. This calculation assumes an even distribu-
tion of points, however, so some flexibility is built in. If less than 4 control points are found in the calculated search area,
then the radius is expanded until at least 4 points are found. On the other hand, if more than 8 control points are found in
the calculated search area, then the radius is decreased until at most 8 control points are found. At least 4 points must be
available to interpolate any new value.
With either the global or local implementation, the user can define how the influence of a known point varies with dis-
tance to the unknown point. The idea is that the attribute of an interpolated pixel should be most similar to that of its
closest known data point, a bit less similar to that of its next closest known data point, and so on. Most commonly, the
function used is the inverse square of distance (1/d2, where d is distance).
For every pixel to be interpolated, the distance to every sample point to be used is determined and the inverse square of
the distance is computed. Each sample point attribute is multiplied by its respective inverse square distance term and all
these values are summed. This sum is then divided by the sum of the inverse square distance terms to produce the inter-
polated value.
The user may choose to use an exponent other than 2 in the function. Using an exponent greater than 2 causes the influ-
ence of the closest sample data points to have relatively more weight in deriving the new attribute. Using an exponent of 1
would cause the data points to have more equal influence on the new attribute value.
The distance-weighted average will produce a smooth surface in which the minimum and maximum values occur at sam-
ple data points. In areas far from data points, the surface will tend toward the local average value, where local is determined
by the search radius. The distribution of known data points greatly influences the utility of this interpolation technique. It
works best when sample data are many and are fairly evenly distributed.

Potential Model
INTERPOL also offers a second technique called a potential model. It is similar in operation to the distance-weighted
average. The difference is in the function that is employed. The calculation is the same as that described above except that
the sum of weighted attribute values is not divided by the sum of weights. This causes the values at sample points to often
be higher than the original value, especially when sample points are close together. The method is therefore an inexact
interpolator. The surface appears to have spikes at sample points and tends to approach zero away from sample points.
This type of interpolation method is based on the gravity model concept and was developed to model potential interaction
between masses measured at sample points. For example, the amount of interaction (e.g., in terms of commerce) between
the people of two villages is related to the number of people in each village and how close these villages are to each other.
More people who are closer together produce a greater total interaction. The interaction at a location far from any village
would tend to be zero. The potential model method is applied for different purposes than the other methods discussed in
this chapter. It would not be used to develop a surface model from elevation data, for example.

Triangulated Irregular Networks

A Triangulated Irregular Network, or TIN, is a vector data structure. The sample data points become the vertices of a set

Chapter 24 Surface Interpolation 285

of triangular facets that completely cover the study area. In IDRISI, the TIN is generated and then used to create a con-
tinuous raster surface model. The chapter Triangulated Irregular Networks and Surface Generation is devoted to
this set of procedures.

Kriging and Simulation

Continuous surfaces can also be derived from point data using geostatistical techniques. Various kriging options are
offered in IDRISI through three interfaces to the Gstat1 software package: Spatial Dependence Modeler, Model Fitting,
and Kriging and Simulation. Like the techniques offered in INTERPOL, kriging methods may be used either as global or
local interpolators. However, the local implementation is most often used. Kriging preserves sample data values and is
therefore an exact interpolator. Simulation does not preserve sample data values, making it an inexact interpolator.
The main difference between kriging methods and a simple distance-weighted average is that they allow the user great
flexibility in defining the model to be used in the interpolation for a particular data set. These customized models are bet-
ter able to account for changes in spatial dependence across the study area. Spatial dependence is simply the idea that
points that are closer together have more similar values than points that are further apart. Kriging recognizes that this ten-
dency to be similar to nearby points is not restricted to a Euclidean distance relationship and may exhibit many different
patterns.
The kriging procedure produces, in addition to the interpolated surface, a second image of variance. The variance image
provides, for each pixel, information about how well the interpolated value fits the overall model that was defined by the
user. The variance image may thereby be used as a diagnostic tool to refine the model. The goal is to develop a model with
an even distribution of variance that is as close as possible to zero.
Kriging produces a smooth surface. Simulation, on the other hand, incorporates per-pixel variability into the interpolation
and thereby produces a rough surface. Typically hundreds of such surfaces are generated and summarized for use in pro-
cess modeling.
The geostatistical tools provided through IDRISI's interfaces to Gstat are discussed in greater detail in the chapter Geo-
statistics.

Interpolation From Isoline Data

Sometimes surfaces are created from isoline data. An isoline is a line of equal value. Elevation contours are one example
of isolines. Isolines are rarely field measurements; they are more likely the result of digitizing paper maps. One must be
aware that the methods involved in creating the isolines may have already included some sort of interpolation. Subsequent
interpolation between isolines adds other types of error.

Linear Interpolation From Isolines

A linear interpolation between isolines is available in IDRISI through the INTERCON module. The isolines must first be
rasterized, with the attributes of the pixels representing isolines equal to the isoline value. It is also possible to add points
of known value prior to interpolation. It is perhaps more useful, however, to add in lines that define ridges, hill crests or
other such break features that are not described by the original isoline data set.
In the interpolation, four lines are drawn through a pixel to be interpolated, as shown in
Figure 1. The lines are extended until they intersect with a pixel of known value in each
direction. The slope along each of the four lines is calculated by using the attributes of
the intersected pixels and their X,Y coordinates. (Slope is simply the change in attribute
from one end of the line to the other, divided by the length of the line.) The line with the
greatest slope is chosen and is used to interpolate the unknown pixel value.2 The value at Figure 1

1. Gstat, © Edzer Pebesma, is licensed freeware available from GNU. See the on-line Help System for more details.

Chapter 24 Surface Interpolation 286

the location of the pixel to be interpolated is calculated based on the attribute values of the intersected pixels, the slope of
the line, and the X,Y position of the pixel to be interpolated. This process is carried out for all unknown pixels.
Choice of resolution when the isolines are rasterized is crucial. If the resolution is too coarse, more than one line may ras-
terize into a single pixel. In this case, only the latter value is retained and a poor interpolation will result. It is recom-
mended that one set the initial resolution to be equal or less than the distance between the closest isolines. A coarser
resolution surface can be generated after the initial interpolation using RESAMPLE or CONTRACT. Note that one can
easily produce a surface with more apparent detail than is actually present in the isoline data. Del Barrio et al (1992) pres-
ent a quantitative method for determining a resolution that captures the optimum information level achievable given the
characteristics of the input isoline data.
Linear interpolation from isolines may produce some obvious and undesirable artifacts in the resulting surface. A histo-
gram of a surface produced by this interpolation technique tends to show a "scalloped" shape, with histogram peaks at the
input isoline values. In addition, star-shaped artifacts may be present, particularly at peaks in the surface. These character-
istics can be mitigated to some degree (but not removed) by applying a mean filter (with the FILTER module). Finally, hill
tops and valley bottoms will be flat with the value of the enclosing contour. In many cases, if isoline data are available, the
constrained and optimized TIN method described below will produce a better surface model.
INTERCON is an exact interpolator, since isolines retain their values. It could also be termed a local interpolator, though
the isolines used to interpolate any particular pixel may be quite distant from that pixel.

Constrained Triangulated Irregular Networks

As discussed above, triangulated irregular networks may be generated from point data. In addition, the IDRISI TIN mod-
ule allows for input of isoline data for TIN creation. In doing so, the TIN can be constrained so no triangular facet edge
crosses an isoline. This forces the triangulation to preserve the character of the surface as defined by the isolines. A TIN
developed from isolines can also be optimized to better model features such as hill tops and valley bottoms. Once the
TIN is developed, it may be used to generate a raster surface model with the module TINSURF.
All the steps involved in this process are detailed in the chapter Triangulated Irregular Networks and Surface Gener-
ation.

Choosing a Surface Model

No single surface generation method is better than others in the abstract. The relative merit of any method depends upon
the characteristics of the input sample data and the context in which the surface model will be used. The precision of sam-
ple point measurements, as well as the frequency and distribution of sample points relative to the needed scale of varia-
tion, influence the choice of interpolation technique to apply to those data. In addition, the scale of the processes to be
modeled is key in guiding the creation of an interpolated surface model. Surface shape (e.g., convexity, concavity) and level
of local variation are often key aspects of process models, where the value or events in one pixel influence those of the
neighboring pixels. It is not unusual to develop several surface models and use each in turn to assess the sensitivity of an
analysis to the type of surface generation techniques used.

References / Further Reading

Blaszczynski, J., 1997. Landform Characterization With Geographic Information Systems, Photogrammetric Engineering and
Remote Sensing, 63(2): 183-191.

2. The line of greatest slope is used to avoid flat lines that result when a line intersects the same isoline on both ends. This is quite common with topo-
graphic maps and would lead to an abundance of flat areas in the interpolated surface.

Chapter 24 Surface Interpolation 287

Burrough, P., and McDonnell, R., 1998. Principles of Geographical Information Systems, 98-161, Oxford University Press, Lon-
don.
del Barrio, G., Bernardo, A., and Diez, C., 1992. The Choice of Cell Size in Digital Terrain Models: An Objective Method,
Conference on Methods of Hydrologic Comparison, Oxford, UK, September 29-October 20.
Desmet, J., 1997. Effects of Interpolation Errors on the Analysis of DEMs, Earth Surface Processes and Landforms, 22: 563-
580.
Lam, N., 1983. Spatial Interpolation Methods: A Review, The American Cartographer, 10(2): 129-149.

Chapter 24 Surface Interpolation 288

Triangulated Irregular Networks and Surface
Generation

Introduction
Triangulated Irregular Networks (TINs) are the most commonly-
used structure for modeling continuous surfaces using a vector
data model. They are also important to raster systems because
they may be used to generate raster surface models, such as
DEMs. With triangulation, data points with known attribute val-
ues (e.g., elevation) are used as the vertices (i.e., corner points) of
a generated set of triangles. The result is a triangular tessellation
of the entire area that falls within the outer boundary of the data
points (known as the convex hull). Figure 1 illustrates a triangula-
tion from a set of data points.
There are many different methods of triangulation. The Delaunay
triangulation process is most commonly used in TIN modeling
and is that which is used by IDRISI. A Delaunay triangulation is Figure 1 A set of data points (left) and a
defined by three criteria: 1) a circle passing through the three triangulation of those data points (right).
points of any triangle (i.e., its circumcircle) does not contain any
other data point in its interior, 2) no triangles overlap, and 3) there
are no gaps in the triangulated surface. Figure 2 shows examples
of Delaunay and non-Delaunay triangulations.
A natural result of the Delaunay triangulation process is that the
minimum angle in any triangle is maximized. This property is
used by the IDRISI algorithm in constructing the TIN. The num-
ber of triangles (Nt) that make up a Delaunay TIN is Nt=2(N-1)-
Nh, and the number of edges (Ne) is Ne=3(N-1)-Nh, where N is
the number of data points, and Nh is the number of points in the
convex hull.
IDRISI includes options for using either true point data or vertex
points extracted from isolines1 as input for TIN generation. The
TIN module also offers options to use non-constrained or con-
strained triangulation, to optimize the TIN by removing “tunnel”
and “bridge” edges, and to generate a raster surface from the TIN Figure 2 Delaunay triangulation (left)
by calling the module TINSURF. Modules are also available for and non-Delaunay triangulation (right).
preparing TIN input data. These are all discussed in detail below. The shaded triangle doesn’t meet the
empty circumcircle criterion.
In IDRISI, the TIN file structure consists of a vector line file
(containing the triangle edges) and an associated ASCII TIN file
(containing information indicating which points make up each tri-
angle). File structure details may be found in the on-line Help System.

1. In this chapter, the term isoline refers to any line representing a constant attribute value. Elevation contours are one example of isolines.

Chapter 25 Triangulated Irregular Networks and Surface Generation 289

Preparing TIN Input Data
Points
Normally there will be little data preparation necessary when point data is used to create a TIN. In some cases it may be
desirable to reduce the number of points to be used in the triangulation. For example, if the number and density of the
points exceeds the required accuracy of the TIN, the user may choose to remove points since fewer points will lead to
faster processing of the TIN. The module GENERALIZATION offers this point-thinning capability.
If point data are used as input to TIN generation, only the non-constrained triangulation option, described below, is avail-
able. If isoline data are used as input to TIN generation, both the non-constrained and constrained options are available
and a better TIN result can be expected. If a raster surface is the desired final output of input point data, the INTERPOL
module and the IDRISI interfaces to Gstat offer alternatives to TIN/TINSURF. (See the chapters Surface Analysis and
Geostatistics.)

Lines
When an isoline file is used as input to TIN, only the vertices2 that make up the lines are used in the triangulation. It may
be useful to examine the density of the vertices in the isoline file prior to generating the TIN. The module GENERAL-
IZATION may be used to extract the vertices of a line file to a vector point file for visualization.
It may be desirable to add points along the lines if points are so far apart they create long straight-line segments that result
in large TIN facets. Point thinning along lines is also sometimes desirable, particularly with isoline data that was digitized
in stream mode. In this case, the number of points in the lines may be much greater than that necessary for the desired
resolution of the TIN, and thus will only serve to slow down the TIN generation process. The module TINPREP per-
forms along-line point addition or thinning. Other line generalization options are also available in the GENERALIZA-
TION module.
If line data are used to create a TIN, both the non-constrained and the constrained triangulation options are available. The
differences between these options are described below. If a raster surface is the desired final output of input isoline data,
the module INTERCON offers an alternative to TIN/TINSURF. However, the latter normally produces a superior
result.

Command Summary
Following is a list and brief description of the modules mentioned in this section.
GENERALIZATION thins or "generalizes" point vector data, extracts the vertices (points) from a line vector to a point
vector file, and generalizes line vector data..
INTERPOL interpolates a raster surface from point data.
IDRISI interfaces to Gstat provide geostatistical tools that can be used to create a raster surface from point data.
TINPREP adds or thins vertices along vector lines.
INTERCON interpolates a raster surface from rasterized isoline data.
TIN creates a TIN from point or line vector data. TINSURF may be automatically called from the TIN dialog if a raster
surface output is desired.
TINSURF creates a raster surface from an extisting TIN.

2. In this context, the term "vertices" refers to all the points that make up a line, including the beginning and ending points.

Chapter 25 Triangulated Irregular Networks and Surface Generation 290

Non-Constrained and Constrained TINs
The non-constrained Delaunay triangulation is described in the Introduction section above and is implemented in the
IDRISI TIN module using an algorithm designed for speed of processing. First, the set of input points (or isoline verti-
ces) are divided into sections. Then each of the sections is triangulated. The resulting "mini-TINs" are then merged
together. A local optimization procedure is always implemented during the merging process to maximize the minimum
angles and thus satisfy Delaunay criteria for the triangulation.
A constrained Delaunay triangulation is an extension of the non-
constrained triangulation described above, with additional condi-
tions applied to the selection of triangle vertices. In IDRISI, the
constrained Delaunay triangulation uses isolines as non-crossing
break-line constraints to control the triangulation process. This
process ensures that triangle edges do not cross isolines and that
the resulting TIN model is consistent with the original isoline
data. Not all triangles will necessarily meet the Delaunay criteria
when the constrained triangulation is used.
In IDRISI, the constrained TIN is created in a two-step process.
First, a non-constrained triangulation is completed. Then triangle
edges are checked for isoline intersections. When such an inter- Figure 3 Unconstrained (left) and con-
section is encountered, a local optimization routine is again run strained (right) Delaunay triangulations.
until no isoline intersections remain. Solid lines represent isolines.
Figure 3 shows constrained and unconstrained TINs created
from the same set of isoline vertex data points.

Removing TIN “Bridge” and “Tunnel” Edges

Contour lines at the top of a hill are shown in Figure 4a. In Figure 4b, the highest contour is shown along with the result-
ing triangles created within it when a constrained TIN is generated. Because all three of the points for all of the triangles
have the same elevation, the top of the hill is perfectly flat in the TIN model. Our experience with actual terrain tells us
that the true surface is probably not flat, but rather rises above the TIN facets. The edges of the TIN facets that lie below
the true surface in this case are examples of what are called “tunnel edges”. These are identified in Figure 4b. A tunnel
edge is any triangle edge that lies below the true surface. Similarly, if the contours of Figure 4a represented a valley bottom
or depression, the TIN facets of 4b would describe a flat surface that is higher than the true surface. The edges of the
TIN facets that lie above the true surface would then be termed “bridge edges”.
Bridge and tunnel (B/T) edges are not restricted to hill tops and depression bottoms. They can also occur along slopes,
particularly where isolines are undulating, and along ridges or channels. Two such examples are shown in Figure 5.
To optimize a TIN, B/T edges may be removed. B/T edge removal could technically be performed on an unconstrained
TIN, but this is not recommended and is not allowed in IDRISI. An optimal TIN will be generated if isolines are used as
the original input for TIN generation, the constrained triangulation is used, and B/T edges are removed.
While many of the concepts of this section are illustrated with elevation data, the procedures are not limited to such data.

Chapter 25 Triangulated Irregular Networks and Surface Generation 291

 B/T Edges Critical Points Re-Triangulation

a b c d
Figure 4 a: Contours at the top of a hill; b: triangulation of highest contour,
with B/T edges identified; c: placement of critical points on B/T edges; d:
re-triangulation.

Tunnel Edges

Bridge Edge
110 m

100 m
500m 600m 600m 500m
a b
Figure 5 a: Contours at a stream; b: contours at a “saddle” feature. Con-
tours are shown with solid lines, constrained triangle edges with dashed
lines. B/T edges are shown in red.

Bridge and Tunnel Edge Removal and TIN Adjustment

The IDRISI TIN module includes an option to create a TIN with all B/T edges removed. This option is only available if
isoline data and the constrained triangulation option are used. First, a normal TIN is created from the vector input data.
Then, all of the B/T edges in the TIN are identified. In IDRISI, a B/T edge is defined as any triangle edge with endpoints
of the same attribute, where these endpoints are not neighboring points on an isoline.
New points, termed critical points, are created at the midpoints of the B/T edges (Figure 4c). The areas around the critical
points are then re-triangulated (Figure 4d). When a B/T edge is shared by two triangles, four new triangles result. When a
B/T edge is part of the TIN boundary, and is thus used by only one triangle, two new triangles result.
Once the critical points have been placed and the triangulation has been adjusted, the next step is to assign appropriate
attribute values (e.g., elevations) to these new points.

Attribute Interpolation for the Critical Points

In IDRISI, the recommended method for determining the attribute of a critical point uses a parabolic shape. The parab-
ola, as a second-order non-linear polynomial method, was chosen because it combines computational simplicity and a

Chapter 25 Triangulated Irregular Networks and Surface Generation 292

shape that is compatible with most topographic surfaces.3 Before describing the mathematical details and the algorithm of
the calculation of critical point values, we will use an illustration to think through the general logic.
General Logic
Let us assume that the contours of Figure 4a describe a hill and that the hilltop beyond the highest contour has a some-
what rounded peak. Given this, we could imagine fitting a parabolic surface (like an inverted, U-shaped bowl) to the top
of the hill. The particular parabolic surface we would choose would depend on the shape of the nearby terrain. If slopes
were gentle leading up to the highest contour, then we would choose a surface with gently sloping sides and a wide top.
But if slopes were quite steep, we would choose a surface with more vertical sides and a narrower top. Once a particular
surface was chosen, all critical points on the tunnel edges at the top of the hill could be projected onto the parabolic sur-
face. They could then each be assigned the elevation of the surface at their location.
The actual implementation of the interpolation differs from the general logic described above in that two-dimensional
parabolas are used rather than parabolic surfaces. Up to eight parabolas, corresponding to eight directions, are fit through
each critical point location. An attribute for the critical point is derived for each parabola, and the final attribute value
assigned to the point is their average. Details of the process are given below.
Calculating the Critical Point Attribute
A parabola is defined by the following equation:
(X-a)2 = 2p(Y-b)
Where the point (a,b) defines the center (top or bottom) point of the parabola and the parameter p defines the steepness
of the shape. When p is positive, the parabola is U-shaped. When p is negative, the parabola is inverted. The larger the
absolute value of p, the wider the parabola.
Figure 6 shows several parabolas and their equations.

y
2
( x-a) = 2p0(y-b)

y
(a,b)
2
( x-a) = 2p1(y-b)
2
( x-a) = 2p2(y-b)

2 2
( x-a) = 2p1(y-b) ( x-a) = 2p2(y-b)

x
o
(a,b)
2 x
( x-a) = 2p0(y-b) o

Figure 6 Example parabolas and their equations. On the left, p is negative. On the right, p is
positive.

To translate the general parabolic equation to the critical point attribute interpolation problem, we re-label the axes of Fig-
ure 6 from X,Y to S,H where S represents distance from the origin (o) and H represents the attribute value (e.g., elevation)
from the origin (o). (The origin is defined by the location and attribute of the original point as described below.) In the

3. Although the parabolic algorithm is recommended, linear and optimized linear options are also available as critical point interpolation methods in the
module TIN. In the example of the hilltop, a sharp peak would be modeled by the linear method in contrast to the rounded peak of the parabolic
method. The optimized linear method uses a linear interpolation unless slopes in all eight directions (see the discussion of the parabolic interpolation)
are zero, in which case it uses the parabolic.

Chapter 25 Triangulated Irregular Networks and Surface Generation 293

example of a critical point on a tunnel edge at the top of a hill, the plane of the parabola is a cross section of the hill.
To define a parabola for a critical point, three points with known coordinates and attributes that lie on that same parabola
must be found.4 Up to eight parabolas, each defined by three points, are developed for each critical point.
For each critical point, a search process is undertaken to find intersections with isolines in each of eight directions, as
shown in Figure 7a. If two intersections are found in each direction, then eight parabolas can be defined. Each is defined
by three points, with two points taken from one direction from the critical point and the other one taken from the oppo-
site direction. In Figure 7b, the intersection points for one search direction, points P0, P1 and P2, are used to define the
parabola shown in Figure 7c. The point that lies between two intersections from the critical point is always termed the orig-
inal point and is labeled P0. This point is set at S=0, so distances (S) to all other points are measured from this original
point. P1 lies between the critical point and the original point, and P2 lies on the opposite side of the critical point.

P0 H
critical
P1 point
Hp
critical point P1 P2

P2
P0

Sp S
a b c

Figure 7 a: Eight-direction search for isoline intersections for one critical point; b: intersection
points for one direction; c: parabola derived from intersection points. Attribute (hp) for the critical
point can be found, given the critical point’s distance (Sp)0 from P.

If three intersections are not found for a particular parabola (e.g., at the edge of a coverage), then it is undefined and the
number of parabolas used to interpolate the attribute value for that critical point will be fewer than eight.
For each defined parabola, the attribute value of any point on the parabola can be found by entering its distance from the
original point into the parabolic equation. The following equation can be used to calculate the attribute of a critical point
for one of its parabolas:5

2 2
( S point – S j )
H = ∑ hi ⋅ ∏ ------------------------------
( Si – Sj )
i=0 j = 0, j ≠ i

Where hi, i = 0, 1, 2 are attribute values of the three intersection points, P0, P1 and P2; Si, Sj, i, j=0,1,2 represent the dis-
tances from the original point to the intersection points, and Spoint represents the distance from the original point to the
critical point. According to the above definitions of the intersection points (Figure 22-6b), we know S0≡0, while S1=P1P0 ,
and S2=P2P0.

4. Any parabola can be defined once three points on it are known. Three equations (one for each point) can be written as below. For each, the distance
(S) from that point to the origin and the attribute (H) are known. The simultaneous equations can then be solved for a, b, and p.

(S0 - a)2 = 2p(H0 - b) (S1 - a)2 = 2p(H1 - b) (S2 - a)2 = 2p(H2 - b)

5. The equation incorporates the derivation of the parabolic parameters a, b, and p.

Chapter 25 Triangulated Irregular Networks and Surface Generation 294

For each parabola, the attribute value at the position of the critical point is calculated in this manner. The final attribute
value that is assigned to the critical point is the average of all valid interpolated values (invalid cases are discussed below).
Figure 8 shows several examples of cases in which B/T edges would be identified and a new value for the critical points
placed on their midpoints would be interpolated. In each figure, only one search direction is illustrated. Figures 8 a, b and
c are examples of cases where critical points occur along slopes while figures 8 d, e and f are cases where critical points
occur on hill tops. For cases in which the attribute value of the critical point is lower than those of the surrounding iso-
lines, the curves would be inverted.

h0 h0+Δh h0+2Δh h0 h0+Δh h0+2Δh h0 h0+Δh h0+2Δh

P0 P1 P2 P0 P1 P2 P0 P2
P1

H P2 H P2 H P2
h0+2Δh

P1 P1 P1
h0+Δh
P0 P0 P0
h0 S S S

a b c

h0 h0+Δh h0+Δh
h0 h0 h0+Δh

P0 P0 P1 P2 P0
P1 P2 P1 P2

H H H
h0+2Δh

P2 P1
h0+Δh P1 P2 P1 P2
P0 S P0 P0
h0 S S

d e f

Figure 8 Six examples of parabolic critical point interpolation. The upper part of each exam-
ple illustrates the map view of the isolines (dashed) and the intersection points (P0, P1 and
P2) for one search direction (dotted line) for a critical point. The lower part shows the parab-
ola for that set of intersection points. The attribute for the critical point (which is always
between P1 and P2) can be found by plotting the critical point on the parabolic curve at its
distance (S) from P0.

Invalid Cases
There are two extreme circumstances in which the parabolic interpolation procedure is invalid:

Chapter 25 Triangulated Irregular Networks and Surface Generation 295

1. If all three intersection points have the same attribute value, the three points are not used for interpolation. An interpo-
lated value for the critical point is therefore not calculated for this direction. The attribute value assigned would be an
average of the other interpolated values.
2. If the interpolated value is greater than (in the case of tunnel edges) or less than (in the case of bridge edges) the value
of the next expected contour, then the critical point is assigned the value of the next expected contour.6 The nature of
contour maps requires such a limitation.

Outputs of TIN
The outputs of the TIN module are a vector line file defining the triangle edges, an ASCII .TIN file containing the topo-
logical information for the triangulation and, if B/T edge removal was used, a point vector file of the critical points that
were added. All these pieces except for the triangle edge vector file, in addition to the original vector data file, are used by
the TINSURF module to create a raster surface from the TIN.

Generating a Raster Surface from a TIN

A raster surface may be generated from the TIN at the time the TIN is created or may be created from an existing TIN
file later. The TINSURF module creates the raster surface. Its dialog asks only for the TIN file as input. However, the
TIN file stores the name of the original vector file used to create the TIN as well as whether B/T edge removal was used.
If the TIN is the result of B/T edge removal, then TINSURF also requires the critical point vector file. Therefore you
should not delete, move or rename any of these files prior to creating the raster surface.
For each raster pixel in the output image, an attribute value is calculated. This calculation is based on the positions and
attributes of the three vertex points of the triangular facet within which the pixel center falls and the position of the pixel
center.7 The logic is as follows:

1. Solve the following set of simultaneous equations for A, B and C:

H1=Ax1+By1+C
H2=Ax2+By2+C
H3=Ax3+By3+C
Where H1,2,3 are the attribute values (e.g., elevations) of the three triangle facet vertices and (x,y)1,2,3 are their
reference system coordinates.
2. Given A, B and C, as derived above, solve the following for Hp:
Hp=Axp+Byp+C
Where Hp is the attribute of the pixel and (x,y)p is the reference system coordinate of the pixel center.
3. Assign the pixel the attribute value Hp.

6. The algorithm uses the local contour interval for each critical point, so isoline data with variable contour intervals do not pose a problem.

7. Each pixel center will fall in only one TIN facet, but a single facet may contain several pixel center points.

Chapter 25 Triangulated Irregular Networks and Surface Generation 296

The algorithm proceeds on a facet-by-facet basis, so the derivation of A, B, and C in step 1 is carried out only once for all
the pixels that fall within a single facet.

Raster Surface Optimization

For optimal generation of a raster surface from a TIN model, care should be taken in preparing the data used to create the
TIN. If isoline data is used, the isolines should not cross. The distribution of points in the input vector file should be eval-
uated visually and adjusted, if necessary, by thinning or adding points. If point attribute values are available at peaks and
valleys in the study area, adding these to the input data will reduce bridge and tunnel edge effects and will enhance the
quality of the resulting TIN and the subsequent raster surface.
A TIN will cover only the area inside the convex hull of the data points. This may present a problem if the original vector
data does not cover the entire study area. The areas outside the convex hull will not be covered by triangles in the TIN
and will be assigned a background value in the resulting raster surface. An option to add corner points is available on the
TIN dialog to help mitigate this problem for the corners of the image. However, there may still be areas outside the con-
vex hull even when corner points are added. If possible, it is recommended that the vector point or isoline data used to
create the TIN extend beyond the limits of the desired raster study area. Then specify the final raster bounding coordi-
nates in TINSURF. This will produce a TIN that covers the entire rectangular study area and a raster surface that contains
no background values.

Further Reading
Lee J., 1991. Comparison of Existing Methods for Building Triangular Irregular Network Models of Terrain From Grid
Digital Elevation Models, International Journal of Geographic Information Systems, 3: 267-285.
Tsai, V. J. D., 1993. Delaunay Triangulations in TIN Creation: an Overview and a Linear-time Algorithm, International Jour-
nal of Geographic Information Systems, 6: 501-512.
Zhu, H., Eastman, J. R., and Schneider, K., 1999. Constrained Delaunay Triangulation and TIN Optimization Using Con-
tour Data, Proceedings of the Thirteenth International Conference on Applied Geologic Remote Sensing, 2: 373-380, Vancouver, British
Columbia, Canada.

Chapter 25 Triangulated Irregular Networks and Surface Generation 297

Geostatistics

Introduction
Geostatistics provides tools for the exploration and statistical characterization of sample point data. It also provides a
number of techniques for interpolating surfaces from such data. Ordinary kriging is the most well-known of these. While
the techniques originated with scientists working in the mining industry, a broader audience has been found in those fields
in which both data values and their locations are considered analytically important.
Several interpolation techniques were introduced in the chapter Surface Interpolation. Geostatistical techniques are dis-
tinct from these in that they provide GIS analysts with the ability to incorporate information about patterns of spatial
continuity into the interpolation model as well as to produce surfaces that include elements of local variation. The meth-
ods allow for a high degree of user flexibility in detecting and defining structures that describe the nature of a data set.
Indeed, a set of structures can be nested, each describing a particular aspect of the data set.
With this flexibility, however, also comes some risk. From the same data set, it is possible to produce many surfaces—all
very different, and all seemingly reasonable representations of reality. The new user is encouraged to enter into geostatis-
tics deliberately and with some caution. An understanding of, and respect for, the underlying assumptions of these tech-
niques is essential if the results are to provide meaningful information to any analysis.
This chapter presents a very brief overview of the geostatistical capabilities offered through IDRISI interfaces to Gstat.1
For more complete and theoretical treatments of geostatistics, consult the references listed at the end of this chapter. The
Tutorial includes an extensive exercise illustrating the use of the geostatistical tools available in IDRISI.

Spatial Continuity
The underlying notion that fuels geostatistical methods is quite simple. For continuously varying phenomena (e.g., eleva-
tion, rainfall), locations that are close together in space are more likely to have similar values than those that are further
apart. This tendency to be most similar to one's nearest neighbors is quantified in geography through measures of spatial
autocorrelation and continuity. In geostatistics, the complement of continuity, variability, is more often the focus of analy-
sis.
The first task in using geostatistical techniques to create surfaces is to describe as completely as possible the nature of the
spatial variability present in the sample data. Spatial variability is assessed in terms of distance and direction. The analysis
is carried out on pairs of sample data points. Every data point is paired with every other data point. Each pair may be char-
acterized by its separation distance (the Euclidean distance between the two points) and its separation direction (the azimuth in
degrees of the direction from one point to the other).2 The sample data point set shown in Figure 1 would produce pairs
characterized as shown in Table 1.

1. IDRISI provides a graphical user interface to Gstat, a program for geostatistical modeling, prediction and simulation written by Edzer J. Pebesma
(Department of Physical Geography, Utrecht University). Gstat is freely available under the GNU General Public License from www.gstat.org. Clark
Labs' modifications of the Gstat code are available from the downloads section of the Clark Labs Web site at www.clarklabs.org.

2. The points in a pair are identified as the from point and the to point. No pair is repeated.

Chapter 26 Geostatistics 298

 A Separation Separation
Pair Distance Direction
B
AB 80 m 100
grid
C north AC 50 m 0

BC 85 m 235
Figure 1

Table 1

The distance measure is typically referred to in units of lags, where the length of a lag (i.e., the lag distance or lag interval)
is set by the user. In specifying a particular lag during the analysis, the user is limiting the pairs under consideration to
those that fall within the range of distances defined by the lag. If the lag were defined as 20 meters, for example, an analy-
sis of data at the third lag would include only those data pairs with separation distances of 40 to 60 meters.
Direction is measured in degrees, clockwise from grid north. As with distance, direction is typically specified as a range
rather than a single azimuth.
The h-scatterplot is used as a visualization technique for exploring the variability in the sample data pairs. In the h-scatter-
plot, the X axis represents the attribute at one point of the pair (the from point) and the Y axis represents that same attri-
bute at the other point of the pair (the to point). The h-scatterplot may be used to plot all of the pairs, but is more often
restricted to a selection of pairs based on a certain lag and/or direction. Figure 2 shows the spatial distribution of 250
rainfall sample points from a 1000 km2 area. These points were paired and data pairs that are within 1 lag (0-1 km) and for
all directions are plotted in the h-scatterplot shown in Figure 3.

Figure 2
Figure 3

Chapter 26 Geostatistics 299

The h-scatterplot is typically used to get a sense of what aspects of the data pair distribution are influencing the summary
of variability for a particular lag. H-scatterplots are interpreted by assessing the dispersion of the points. For example, if
the pairs were perfectly linearly correlated (i.e., no variability at this separation and direction), then all the points would fall
along a line. A very diffuse point pattern in the h-scatterplot indicates high variability for the given ranges of distance and
direction. The h-scatterplot is available through the Spatial Dependence Modeler interface.
The semivariogram is another tool for exploring and describing spatial variability and is also available through the Spatial
Dependence Modeler interface. The semivariogram summarizes the variability information of the h-scatterplots and may
be presented both as a surface graph and a directional graph. The surface graph shows the average variability in all direc-
tions at different lags. The center position in the graph, called the origin, represents zero lags. The lags increase from the
center toward the edges. The direction is represented in the surface graph with grid north directly up from the center
pixel, 90 degrees directly to the right, and so on.3 The magnitude of variability is represented by color using the default
IDRISI palette. Low values are shown in darker colors and higher values in brighter colors. When one moves the cursor
over the surface graph, its location, in terms of direction and distance from the origin, is shown at the bottom of the
graph.
A surface graph semivariogram of the same sample rainfall points from Figure 2 is shown in Figure 4. The lag distance is
set to 1 km. One can readily see that in the West-East direction, there is low variability among the pairs across all lags. It
appears that the direction of minimum variability (i.e., maximum continuity) is approximately 95 (and 275) degrees. We
would expect data points that are separated from each other in this direction to have attributes that are more similar than
data points separated by the same distance but in a different direction.
The other graphic form of the semivariogram is the directional graph, as shown in Figure 5. It is used to develop the
structures that describe the patterns of variability in the data. In the directional graph, a single summary point is plotted
for each lag. The X-axis shows the separation distance, labeled in reference units (e.g., km), while the Y-axis shows the
average variability for the sample data pairs that fall within each lag. All pairs may be considered regardless of direction (an
omnidirectional plot), or the plot may be restricted to pairs from a particular range of directions.

Variability
Min

Max

Figure 4

Figure 5

Usually one begins with plotting an omnidirectional semivariogram. From the omnidirectional graph, one may gain
insight into the overall variability of the data. The user then may create several plots, using different directions and lag dis-
tances, to gain a better understanding of the structure of the data set.

3. Note that some geostatistical software plot zero degrees to the right rather than the top of the surface graph.

Chapter 26 Geostatistics 300

The structure of the data may be described by four parameters: the sill, the range,
the nugget and anisotropy. The first three are labeled in Figure 6. In most cases
involving environmental data, spatial variability between sample pairs increases as sill
the separation distance increases. Eventually, the variability reaches a plateau

variance
where an increase in separation distance between pairs no longer increases the
variability between them, i.e., there is no spatial dependence at this and larger dis-
tances. The variance value at which the curve reaches the plateau is called the sill.
The total separation distance from the lowest variance to the sill is known as the
range
range. The range signifies the distance beyond which sample data should not be nugget
considered in the interpolation process when selecting points that define a local distance between pairs
neighborhood.
Figure 6
The nugget refers to the variance at a separation distance of zero, i.e., the Y-inter-
cept of the curve that is fit to the data. In theory, we would expect this to be zero.
However, noise or uncertainty in the sample data may produce variability that is not spatially dependent and this will result
in a non-zero value, or a nugget effect. A nugget structure increases the variability uniformly across the entire graph because
it is not related to distance or direction of separation.
The fourth parameter that defines the structure is the anisotropy of the data set. The transition of spatial continuity may
be equal in all directions, i.e., variation is dependent on the separation distance only. This is known as an isotropic model. A
model fit to any direction is good for all directions. In most environmental data sets, however, variability is not isotropic.
The data used in Figure 2, for example, exhibits a minimum direction of variability in the West-East direction. In any
other direction, variability increases more rapidly at the same separation distance. This type of data requires an anisotropic
model. Anisotropy is described by directional axes of minimum and maximum continuity. To determine the parameters to
be used, the user views directional semivariograms for multiple directions.
In kriging and simulation interpolation processes, structures that describe the pattern of spatial variability represented by
directional semivariograms are used to determine the influence of spatial dependence on neighborhoods of sample points
selected to predict unknown points. The structures influence how their attributes should be weighted when combined to
produce an interpolated value. Semivariograms, however, because they are based on the inherent incompleteness of sam-
ple data, need smoother curves that define the shape of the spatial variability across all separation distances. Using ancil-
lary information and the semivariograms, mathematical functions are combined to delineate a smooth curve of spatial
variability. At this stage, a nugget structure, and sills, ranges, and anisotropies of additional structures are defined for the
smooth curve. The Model Fitting interface offers several mathematical functions that may be used to design a curve for
the spatial variability. Those functions that do not plateau at large separation distances, such as the linear and the power
functions, are termed non-transitional. Those that do reach a plateau, such as the gaussian and exponential functions, are
called transitional functions.
Together, the nugget structure, and the sills, ranges, and anisotropies of additional structures mathematically define a
nested model of spatial variability. This is used when locally deriving weights for the attributes of sample data within the
neighborhood of a location to be interpolated. Using the Spatial Dependence Modeler interface, one unearths a pattern of
spatial variability through the plotting of many variograms until a representative semivariogram can be determined.
Through the Model Fitting interface, the user fits a mathematical curve described by sills, ranges, a nugget, anisotropy and
selected functions to the detected spatial variability. This curve is used to derive the weights applied to locally selected
samples during the interpolation by kriging or conditional simulation.
Semivariograms are statistical measures that assume the input sample data are normally distributed and that local neigh-
borhood means and standard deviations show no trends. Each sample data set must be assessed for conformity to these
assumptions. Transformations of the data, editing of the data set, and the selection of different statistical estimators of
spatial variability are all used to cope with data sets that diverge from the assumptions.
The ability to identify true spatial variability in a data set depends to a great extent on ancillary knowledge of the underly-
ing phenomenon measured. This detection process can also be improved with the inclusion of other attribute data. The

Chapter 26 Geostatistics 301

crossvariogram, like the semivariogram, plots variability along distances of joint datasets and uses one set of data to help
explain and improve the description of variability in another. For example, when interpolating a rainfall surface from point
rainfall data, incorporating a highly correlated variable such as elevation could help improve the estimation of rainfall. In
such a case where the correlation is known, sampled elevation data could be used to help in the prediction of a rainfall
surface, especially in those areas where rainfall sampling is sparse.
The semivariogram and another method, the robust estimator of the semivariogram, are the measures of variability that
are used for the final fitting of a variability model to be used with the data set. They are also the only estimators of vari-
ability used by IDRISI for kriging and simulation. However, other methods for detecting spatial contiguity are available
through the Spatial Dependence Modeler interface. These include the correlogram, the cross-correlogram, the covario-
gram, and the cross-covariogram.

Kriging and Conditional Simulation

The Kriging and Simulation interface utilizes the model developed in the Spatial Dependence Modeler and Model Fitting
interfaces to interpolate a surface. The model is used to derive spatial continuity information that will define how sample
data will be weighted when combined to produce values for unknown points. The weights associated with sample points
are determined by direction and distance to other known points, as well as the number and character of data points in a
user-defined local neighborhood.
With ordinary kriging, the variance of the errors of the fit of the model is minimized. Thus it is known as a Best Linear
Unbiased Estimator (B.L.U.E.).
By fitting a smooth model of spatial variability to the sample data and by minimizing the error of the fit to the sample
data, kriging tends to underestimate low values and overestimate large values. Kriging minimizes the error produced by
the differences in the fit of the spatial continuity to each local neighborhood. In so doing, it produces a smooth surface.
The surface shown in Figure 7 was produced using kriging with the
sample precipitation points shown in Figure 2.
The goal of kriging is to reduce the degree of variance error in the esti-
mation across the surface. The variance error is a measure of the accu-
racy of the fit of the model and neighborhood parameters to the sample
data, not the actual measured surface. One can only interpret this infor-
mation in terms of knowledge about how well the sample data repre-
sents the actual surface. The more uniform the fit of the spatial model,
the more likely it is good. The variance error is used to identify prob-
lems in the sample data, in the model parameters, and in the definition
of the local neighborhood. It is not a measure of surface accuracy.
In IDRISI, two tools are available to assess the fit of the model to the Figure 7
sample data. First, the cross-validation tool iteratively removes a sample
data point and interpolates a new value for the location. A table is produced to show the difference between the predicted
attributes and the known attributes at those locations. Second, a variance image is produced that shows the spatial varia-
tion of uncertainty as a result of the fitted model. The variance image provides information to assist in identifying the
problem areas where the relationship between the fitted model and the sample data points is poor.
Cokriging is an extension of kriging that uses a second set of points of different attributes to assist in the prediction pro-
cess. The two attributes must be highly correlated with each other to derive any benefit. The description of spatial vari-
ability of the added variable can be used in the interpolation process, particularly in areas where the original sample points
are sparse.

Chapter 26 Geostatistics 302

In conditional simulation, a non-spatially dependent element of variability is added to the model previously developed.
The variability of each interpolated point is used to randomly choose another estimate. The resulting surface maintains
the spatial variability as defined by the semivariogram model, but also represents pixel-by-pixel variability. The resulting
surface is not smooth. Typically many of these surfaces (perhaps hundreds) are produced, each representing one model of
reality. The surfaces differ from each other because of the random selection of estimates. Conditional simulation is best
suited for developing multiple representations of a surface that may serve as inputs to a Monte Carlo analysis of a process
model.

Summary
Geostatistics provides a large collection of tools for exploring and understanding the nature of a data set. Rather than sim-
ply seeking to produce a visually-pleasing interpolated surface, one engages in geostatistical analysis with the foremost
purpose of understanding why various methods produce particular and different results. Interpretation of the information
presented through the various techniques is dependent upon knowledge of other data characteristics and the actual sur-
face. While spatial variability measures themselves are relatively simple descriptive statistics, understanding how they may
be used with data sets that diverge from ideal assumptions requires practice and experience.

References / Further Reading

Geostatistical analysis is a well developed field and much literature is available. The brief list that follows should provide a
good introduction to geostatistical exploration for those who already have a good command of statistics.
Burrough, P., and McDonnell, R., 1998. Principles of Geographical Information Systems, 98-161, Oxford University Press,
Oxford.
Cressie, N., 1991. Statistics for Spatial Data, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York.
Cressie, N., and Hawkins, D., 1980. Robust Estimation of the Variogram, Journal International Association of Mathematical
Geology, 12:115-125.
Deutsch, C., and Journel, A., 1998. GSLIB Geostatistical Software Library and User's Guide, 2nd Edition, Oxford University
Press, Oxford.
Goovaerts, P., 1997. Geostatistics for Natural Resources Evaluation, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
Issaks, E., and Srivastava, R., 1989. Applied Geostatistics, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
Journel, A., and Huijbregts, C., 1978. Mining Geostatistics, Academic Press, New York.
Myers, J., 1997. Geostatistical Error Management: Quantifying Uncertainty for Environmental Sampling and Mapping, Van Nostrand
Reinhold, New York.
Pebesma, E., 1991-1998. Gstat, GNU Software Foundation.
Pebesma, E., and Wesseling, C., 1998. Gstat: A Program for Geostatistical Modelling, Prediction and Simulation, Comput-
ers and Geosciences, 24(1): 17-31.
Soares, A., Gómez-Hernandez, J., and Froidevaux, R., eds., 1997. geoENVI – Geostatistics for Environmental Applications, Klu-
wer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht, The Netherlands .
Solow, A., and Ratick, S., 1994. Conditional Simulation and the Value of Information, In: Geostatistics for the Next Century, R.
Simitrakopoulos (ed.), Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht, The Netherlands.

Chapter 26 Geostatistics 303

Appendix 1: Ellipsoid Parameters

ELLIPSOID NAME MAJOR SEMI-AXIS MINOR SEMI-AXIS

Airy 6377563.396 6356256.909

Modified Airy 6377340.189 6356034.448

Australian National 6378160.000 6356774.719

Average Terestrial System 1997 6378135 6356750.305

Bessel 1841 (Ethiopia, Indonesia, Japan, Korea) 6377397.155 6356078.963

Bessel 1841 (Namibia) 6377483.865 6356165.383

Bessel Modified 6377492.018 6356173.509

Clarke 1858 20926348 20855233

Clarke 1866 6378206.400 6356583.800

Clarke 1866 Michigan 20926631.531 20855688.674

Clarke 1880 6378249.145 6356514.870

Clarke 1880 Benoit 6378300.789 6356566.435

Clarke 1880 IGN 6378249.2 6356515

Clarke 1880 (SGA 1922) 6378249.2 6356514.997

Everest - India 1830 6377276.345 6356075.413

Everest - India 1956 6377301.24 6356100.23

Everest - Pakistan 6377309.61 6356108.57

Everest - Sabah and Sarawak 6377298.56 6356097.55

Everest - West Malaysia 1969 6377295.66 6356094.67

Everest - West Malaysia and Singapore 1948 6377304.063 6356103.039

Everest (1830 definition) 20922931.8 20853374.58

Everest 1830 (1962 definition) 6377301.243 6356100.23

Everest 1830 (1967 definition) 6377298.556 6356097.55

Everest 1830 (1975 definition) 6377299.151 6356098.145

Fischer 1960 6378166.000 6356784.280

Modified Fischer 1960 6378155.000 6356773.320

Fischer 1968 6378150.000 6356768.340

GEM 10C 6378137 6356752.314

GRS 1967 6378160 6356774.516

Appendix 1: Ellipsoid Parameters 304

 ELLIPSOID NAME MAJOR SEMI-AXIS MINOR SEMI-AXIS

GRS 1980 6378137.000 6356752.314

Helmert 1906 6378200.000 6356818.170

Hough 6378270.000 6356794.343

Indonesian 1974 6378160.00 6356774.50

International 1924 6378388.000 6356911.946

Krassovsky 1940 6378245.000 6356863.019

NWL 9D 6378145 6356759.769

OSU86F 6378136.2 6356751.517

OSU91A 6378136.3 6356751.617

Plessis 1817 6376523 6355862.933

SGS 85 6378136.000 6356751.300

South American 1969 6378160.000 6356774.719

Sphere 6371000 6371000

Struve 1860 6378298.3 6356657.143

War Office 6378300.583 6356752.27

WGS 60 6378165.000 6356783.290

WGS 66 6378145.000 6356759.770

WGS 72 6378135.000 6356750.520

WGS 84 6378137.000 6356752.314

Appendix 1: Ellipsoid Parameters 305

Appendix 2: Datum Parameters
The following table contains the constants required for the Molodensky Datum Transformation procedure. The ΔX, ΔY
and ΔZ values are the three values (in that order) that should be specified in the "Delta WGS84" field of the Reference
System Parameter File. These values represent the three-dimensional difference in position of the datum ellipsoid from
that of WGS84. The values listed here were taken from the European Petroleum Survey Group Database.

DATUM LOCATION ELLIPSOID DX DY DZ

ABIDJAN 1987 Cote D’Ivoire (Ivory Coast) Clarke 1880 -124.76 53 466.79

ADINDAN MEAN FOR Ethiopia, Sudan Clarke 1880 -166 -15 204

Burkina Faso -118 -14 218

Cameroon -134 -2 210

Ethiopia -165 -11 206

Mali -123 -20 220

Senegal -128 -18 224

Sudan -161 -14 205

AFGOOYE Somalia Krassovsky 1940 -43 -163 45

AIN EL ABD 1970 Bahrain Island International 1924 -150 -250 -1

Saudi Arabia -143 -236 7

AMERICAN SAMOA 1962 American Samoa Islands Clarke 1866 -115 118 426

AMERSFOORT Netherlands Bessel 1841 593.16 26.15 478.54

ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965 Cocos Islands Australian National -491 -22 435

ANTIGUA ISLAND ASTRO 1943 Antigua (Leeward Islands) Clarke 1880 -270 13 62

Appendix 2: Datum Parameters 306

 DATUM LOCATION ELLIPSOID DX DY DZ

ARC 1950 MEAN FOR Botswana, Lesotho, Malawi, Swa- Clarke 1880 -143 -90 -294
ziland, Zaire, Zambia, Zimbabwe

Botswana -138 -105 -289

Burundi -153 -5 -292

Lesotho -125 -108 -295

Malawi -161 -73 -317

Swaziland -134 -105 -295

Zaire -169 -19 -278

Zambia -147 -74 -283

Zimbabwe -142 -96 -293

ARC 1960 MEAN FOR Kenya, Tanzania Clarke 1880 -160 -6 -302

ASCENSION ISLAND 1958 Ascension Island International 1924 -205 107 53

ASTRO BEACON E 1945 Iwo Jima International 1924 145 75 -272

ASTRO DOS 71/4 St. Helena Island International 1924 -320 550 -494

ASTRO TERN ISLAND (FRIG) 1961 Tern Island International 1924 114 -116 -333

ASTRONOMICAL STATION 1952 Marcus Island International 1924 124 -234 -25

AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1966 Australia & Tasmania Australian National -133 -48 148

AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 Australia & Tasmania Australian National -134 -48 149

AYABELLE LIGHTHOUSE Djibouti Clarke 1880 -79 -129 145

BATAVIA Indonesia (Sumatra) Bessel 1841 -377 681 -50

BELLEVUE (IGN) Efate & Erromango Islands International 1924 -127 -769 472

BERMUDA 1957 Bermuda Clarke 1866 -73 213 296

BISSAU Guinea - Bissau International 1924 -173 253 27

BOGOTA OBSERVATORY Colombia International 1924 307 304 -318

BUKIT RIMPAH Indonesia (Bangka & Belitung Islands) Bessel 1841 -384 664 -48

CAMP AREA ASTRO Antarctica (McMurdo Camp Area) International 1924 -104 -129 239

CAMPO INCHAUSPE Argentina International 1924 -148 136 90

CANTON ASTRO 1966 Phoenix Islands International 1924 298 -304 -375

CAPE South Africa Clarke 1880 -136 -108 -292

CAPE CANAVERAL Bahamas, Florida Clarke 1866 -2 151 181

CARTHAGE Tunisia Clarke 1880 -263 6 431

CHATHAM ISLAND ASTRO 1971 New Zealand (Chatham Island) International 1924 175 -38 113

CHTRF95 Liechtenstein, Switzerland GRS1980 0 0 0

Appendix 2: Datum Parameters 307

 DATUM LOCATION ELLIPSOID DX DY DZ

CHUA ASTRO Paraguay International 1924 -134 229 -29

CORREGO ALEGRE Brazil International 1924 -206 172 -6

DABOLA Guinea Clarke 1880 -83 37 124

DECEPTION ISLAND Deception Island, Antarctica Clarke 1880 260 12 -147

DJAKARTA (BATAVIA) Indonesia (Sumatra) Bessel 1841 -377 681 -50

DOMINICA 1945 Dominica Clarke 1880 725 685 536

DOS 1968 New Georgia Islands (Gizo Island) International 1924 230 -199 -752

EASTER ISLAND 1967 Easter Island International 1924 211 147 111

EGYPT 1907 Egypt Helmert 1906 -130 110 -13

EST92 Estonia GRS80 0.055 -0.541 -0.185

ETRF89 Europe GRS80 0 0 0

EUROPEAN 1950 MEAN FOR Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Fin- International 1924 -87 -98 -121
land, France, West Germany, Gibraltar,
Greece, Italy, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Nor-
way, Portugal, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland

MEAN FOR Austria, Denmark, France, West -87 -96 -120

Germany, Netherlands, Switzerland

MEAN FOR Iraq, Israel, Jordan, Lebanon, -103 -106 -141

Kuwait, Saudi Arabia, Syria

Cyprus -104 -101 -140

Egypt -130 -117 -151

England, Channel Islands, Ireland, Scotland, -86 -96 -120

Shetland Islands

Finland, Norway -87 -95 -120

France -84 -97 -117

Greece -84 -95 -130

Iran -117 -132 -164

Italy (Sardinia) -97 -103 -120

Italy (Sicily) -97 -88 -135

Malta -107 -88 -149

Portugal, Spain -84 -107 -120

Tunisia -112 -77 -145

United Kingdom UKCS offshore east of 6 deg. -89.5 -93.8 -123.1

west

Appendix 2: Datum Parameters 308

 DATUM LOCATION ELLIPSOID DX DY DZ

EUROPEAN 1979 MEAN FOR Austria, Finland, Netherlands, International 1924 -86 -98 -119
Norway, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland

Fahud

FD58 Iran (Kangan district) Clarke 1880 -241.54 -163.64 396.06

FORT THOMAS 1955 Nevis, St. Kitts (Leeward Islands) Clarke 1880 -7 215 225

GAN 1970 Republic of Maldives International 1924 -133 -321 50

GEODETIC DATUM 1949 New Zealand International 1924 84 -22 209

GGRS87 Greece GRS 1980 -199.87 74.79 246.62

GRACIOSA BASE SW 1948 Azores (Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge, Ter- International 1924 -104 167 -38
ceira)

GRENADA 1953 Grenada Clarke 1880 72 213.7 93

GUAM 1963 Guam Clarke 1866 -100 -248 259

GUNUNG SEGARA Indonesia (Kalimantan) Bessel 1841 -403 684 41

GUX 1 ASTRO Guadalcanal Island International 1924 252 -209 -751

HERAT NORTH Afghanistan International 1924 -333 -222 114

HJORSEY 1955 Iceland International 1924 -73 46 -86

HONG KONG 1963 Hong Kong International 1924 -156 -271 -189

HU-TZU-SHAN Taiwan International 1924 -637 -549 -203

INDIAN Bangladesh Everest 1830 282 726 254

INDIAN India, Nepal Everest 1956 295 736 257

INDIAN Pakistan Everest 283 682 231

INDIAN 1954 Thailand Everest 1830 217 823 299

INDIAN 1960 Vietnam (near 16oN) Everest 1830 198 881 317

Con Son Island (Vietnam) 182 915 344

INDIAN 1975 Thailand Everest 1830 209 818 290

INDONESIAN 1974 Indonesia Indonesian 1974 -24 -15 5

IRELAND 1965 Ireland Modified Airy 506 -122 611

ISTS 061 ASTRO 1968 South Georgia Islands International 1924 -794 119 -298

ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969 Diego Garcia International 1924 208 -435 -229

JOHNSTON ISLAND 1961 Johnston Island International 1924 189 -79 -202

KANDAWALA Sri Lanka Everest 1830 -97 787 86

KERGUELEN ISLAND 1949 Kerguelen Island International 1924 145 -187 103

KERTAU 1948 West Malaysia & Singapore Everest 1948 -11 851 5

Appendix 2: Datum Parameters 309

 DATUM LOCATION ELLIPSOID DX DY DZ

KUSAIE ASTRO 1951 Caroline Islands, Federal States of Micronesia International 1924 647 1777 -1124

L. C. 5 ASTRO 1961 Cayman Brac Island Clarke 1866 42 124 147

LEIGON Ghana Clarke 1880 -130 29 364

LIBERIA 1964 Liberia Clarke 1880 -90 40 88

LUZON Philippines (Excluding Mindanao) Clarke 1866 -133 -77 -51

Philippines (Mindanao) -133 -79 -72

MAHE 1971 Mahe Island Clarke 1880 41 -220 -134

MASSAWA Ethiopia (Eritrea) Bessel 1841 639 405 60

MERCHICH Morocco Clarke 1880 31 146 47

MIDWAY ASTRO 1961 Midway Island International 1924 912 -58 1227

MINNA Cameroon Clarke 1880 -81 -84 115

Nigeria -92 -93 122

MONTSERRAT ISLAND ASTRO 1958 Montserrat (Leeward Islands) Clarke 1880 174 359 365

M'PORALOKO Gabon Clarke 1880 -74 -130 42

NAHRWAN Oman (Masirah Island) Clarke 1880 -247 -148 369

Saudi Arabia -243 -192 477

United Arab Emirates -249 -156 381

NAPARIMA BWI Trinidad & Tobago International 1924 -10 375 165

Appendix 2: Datum Parameters 310

 DATUM LOCATION ELLIPSOID DX DY DZ

NORTH AMERICAN 1927 MEAN FOR Antigua, Barbados, Barbuda, Clarke 1866 -3 142 183
Caicos Islands, Cuba, Dominican Republic,
Grand Cayman, Jamaica, Turks Islands

MEAN FOR Belize, Costa Rica, El Salvador, 0 125 194

Guatemala, Honduras, Nicaragua

MEAN FOR Canada -10 158 187

MEAN FOR Continental US (CONUS) -8 160 176

MEAN FOR CONUS (East of Mississippi -9 161 179

River) Including Louisiana, Missouri, Minne-
sota

MEAN FOR CONUS (West of Mississippi -8 159 175

River)

Alaska (Excluding Aleutian Islands) -5 135 172

Aleutian Islands (East of 180oW) -2 152 149

Aleutian Islands (West of 180oW) 2 204 105

Bahamas (Except San Salvador Island) -4 154 178

Bahamas (San Salvador Island) 1 140 165

Canada (Alberta, British Columbia) -7 162 188

Canada (Manitoba, Ontario) -9 157 184

Canada (New Brunswick, Newfoundland, Nova -22 160 190

Scotia, Quebec)

Canada (Northwest Territories, Saskat- che- 4 159 188

wan)

Canada (Yukon) -7 139 181

Canal Zone 0 125 201

Cuba -9 152 178

Greenland (Hayes Peninsula) 11 114 195

Mexico -12 130 190

NORTH AMERICAN 1983 Alaska (Excluding Aleutian Islands), Canada, GRS 80 0 0 0

Central America, CONUS, Mexico

Aleutian Islands -2 0 4

Hawaii 1 1 -1

NORTH SAHARA 1959 Algeria Clarke 1880 -186 -93 310

OBSERVATORIO METER- EO 1939 Azores (Corvo & Flores Islands) International 1924 -425 -169 81

OLD EGYPTIAN 1907 Egypt Helmert 1906 -130 110 -13

Appendix 2: Datum Parameters 311

 DATUM LOCATION ELLIPSOID DX DY DZ

OLD HAWAIIAN MEAN FOR Hawaii, Kauai, Maui, Oahu Clarke 1866 61 -285 -181

Hawaii 89 -279 -183

Kauai 45 -290 -172

Maui 65 -290 -190

Oahu 58 -283 -182

OMAN Oman Clarke 1880 -346 -1 224

ORD. SURVEY GREAT BRITIAN 1936 MEAN FOR England, Isle of Man, Scotland, Airy 375 -111 431
Shetland Islands, Wales

England 371 -112 434

England, Isle of Man, Wales 371 -111 434

Scotland, Shetland Islands 384 -111 425

Wales 370 -108 434

PICO DE LAS NIEVES Canary Islands International 1924 -307 -92 127

PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967 Pitcairn Island International 1924 185 165 42

POINT 58 MEAN FOR Burkina Faso & Niger Clarke 1880 -106 -129 165

POINTE NOIRE 1948 Congo Clarke 1880 -148 51 -291

PORTO SANTO 1936 Porto Santo, Madeira Islands International 1924 -499 -249 314

PROVISIONAL S. AMERICAN 1956 MEAN FOR Bolivia, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, International 1924 -288 175 -376
Guyana, Peru, Venezuela

Bolivia -270 188 -388

Chile (Northern, Near 19oS) -270 183 -390

Chile (Southern, Near 43oS) -305 243 -442

Colombia -282 169 -371

Ecuador -278 171 -367

Guyana -298 159 -369

Peru -279 175 -379

Venezuela -295 173 -371

PROVISIONAL S. CHILEAN 1963 Chile (South, Near 53oS) (Hito XVIII) International 1924 16 196 93

PUERTO RICO Puerto Rico, Virgin Islands Clarke 1866 11 72 -101

PULKOVO 1942 Russia Krassovsky 1940 28 -130 -95

QATAR NATIONAL Qatar International 1924 -128 -283 22

QORNOQ Greenland (South) International 1924 164 138 -189

Appendix 2: Datum Parameters 312

 DATUM LOCATION ELLIPSOID DX DY DZ

REUNION Mascarene Islands International 1924 94 -948 -1262

ROME 1940 Italy (Sardinia) International 1924 -225 -65 9

S-42 (PULKOVO 1942) Hungary Krassovsky 1940 28 -121 -77

SANTO (DOS) 1965 Espirito Santo Island International 1924 170 42 84

SAO BRAZ Azores (Sao Miguel, Santa Maria Islands) International 1924 -203 141 53

SAPPER HILL 1943 East Falkland Island International 1924 -355 21 72

SCHWARZECK Namibia Bessel 1841 616 97 -251

(Namibia)

SELVAGEM GRANDE 1938 Salvage Island International 1924 -289 -124 60

SGS 85 Soviet Geodetic System 1985 SGS 85 3 9 -9

S-JTSK Czechoslavakia (prior to 1 Jan. 1993) Bessel 1841 589 76 480

SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 MEAN FOR Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, South American -57 1 -41
Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana, Paraguay, Peru, 1969
Trinidad & Tobago, Venezuela

Argentina -62 -1 -37

Bolivia -61 2 -48

Brazil -60 -2 -41

Chile -75 -1 -44

Colombia -44 6 -36

Ecuador (Excluding Galapagos Islands) -48 3 -44

Ecuador (Baltra, Galapagos) -47 26 -42

Guyana -53 3 -47

Paraguay -61 2 -33

Peru -58 0 -44

Trinidad & Tobago -45 12 -33

Venezuela -45 8 -33

SOUTH ASIA Singapore Modified Fischer 7 -10 -26

1960

TANANARIVE OBSERVATORY 1925 Madagascar International 1924 -189 -242 -91

TIMBALAI 1948 Brunei, East Malaysia (Sabah, Sarawak) Everest (Sabah & -679 669 -48
Sarawak)

Appendix 2: Datum Parameters 313

 DATUM LOCATION ELLIPSOID DX DY DZ

TOKYO MEAN FOR Japan, Okinawa, South Korea Bessel 1841 -148 507 685

Japan -148 507 685

Okinawa -158 507 676

South Korea -146 507 687

TRISTAN ASTRO 1968 Tristan da Cunha International 1924 -632 438 -609

VOIROL 1960 Algeria Clarke 1880 -123 -206 219

VITI LEVU 1916 Fiji (Viti Levu Island) Clarke 1880 51 391 -36

WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960 Marshall Islands Hough 102 52 -38

WAKE ISLAND ASTRO 1952 Wake Atoll International 1924 276 -57 149

WGS 1972 Global Definition WGS 72 0 0 0

YACARE Uruguay International 1924 -155 171 37

ZANDERIJ Surinam International 1924 -265 120 -358

Appendix 2: Datum Parameters 314

Appendix 3: Supplied Reference System
Parameter Files

Geodetic (Latitude/Longitude)
A single REF file named LATLONG is supplied for geodetic coordinates. This file is based on the WGS84 datum. For
other datums, use the COPY function in IDRISI Explorer to copy this file to another name and then use Metadata in
IDRISI Explorer or Edit along with the data in Appendices 1 and 2 to enter the new datum information.

Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)

160 REF files are supplied for the UTM system—60 for the northern hemisphere using the WGS84 datum, 60 for the
southern hemisphere using the WGS84 datum, 20 for North America based on NAD27 and 20 for North America based
on NAD83. The northern WGS84 group has names ranging from UTM-01N to UTM-60N, while the southern WGS84
group has names ranging from UTM-01S to UTM-60S. The NAD27 group (covering zones 1-20) has names ranging
from US27TM01 to US27TM20 while those for NAD83 range from US83TM01 to US83TM20. Note that the North
American groups all use a North American mean value for the Molodensky constants.
For other datums, the module UTMREF may be used to create the reference system parameter file. In addition, several
very specific instances of the UTM system are available in the Miscellaneous group listed later in this appendix.

US State Plane Coordinate System 1927

REF files are supplied for all US State Plane Coordinate Systems based on the Transverse Mercator and Lambert Confor-
mal Conic projections for NAD27 and NAD83. The following table lists these files for the NAD27 datum. The Projection
column indicates the projection upon which the system is based (L=Lambert Conformal Conic / TM=Transverse Merca-
tor).

State File name Title Projection

Alabama SPC27AL1 Alabama State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27AL2 Alabama State Plane Coordinate Western Zone TM

Alaska SPC27AK0 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 10 TM

SPC27AK2 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 2 TM

SPC27AK3 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 3 TM

SPC27AK4 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 4 TM

SPC27AK5 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 5 TM

SPC27AK6 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 6 TM

Appendix 3: Supplied Reference System Parameter Files 315

 State File name Title Projection

SPC27AK7 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 7 TM

SPC27AK8 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 8 TM

SPC27AK9 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 9 TM

Arizona SPC27AZ1 Arizona State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27AZ2 Arizona State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone TM

SPC27AZ3 Arizona State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Arkansas SPC27AR1 Arkansas State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27AR2 Arkansas State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

California SPC27CA1 California State Plane Coordinate System Zone I L

SPC27CA2 California State Plane Coordinate System Zone II L

SPC27CA3 California State Plane Coordinate System Zone III L

SPC27CA4 California State Plane Coordinate System Zone IV L

SPC27CA5 California State Plane Coordinate System Zone V L

SPC27CA6 California State Plane Coordinate System Zone VI L

SPC27CA7 California State Plane Coordinate System Zone VII L

Colorado SPC27CO1 Colorado State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27CO2 Colorado State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone L

SPC27CO3 Colorado State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Connecticut SPC27CT1 Connecticut State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 L

Delaware SPC27DE1 Delaware State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 TM

Florida SPC27FL1 Florida State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27FL2 Florida State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

SPC27FL3 Florida State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone TM

Georgia SPC27GA1 Georgia State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27GA2 Georgia State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Hawaii SPC27HI1 Hawaii State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 TM

SPC27HI2 Hawaii State Plane Coordinate System Zone 2 TM

SPC27HI3 Hawaii State Plane Coordinate System Zone 3 TM

SPC27HI4 Hawaii State Plane Coordinate System Zone 4 TM

SPC27HI5 Hawaii State Plane Coordinate System Zone 5 TM

Idaho SPC27ID1 Idaho State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27ID2 Idaho State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone TM

SPC27ID3 Idaho State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Appendix 3: Supplied Reference System Parameter Files 316

 State File name Title Projection

Illinois SPC27IL1 Illinois State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27IL2 Illinois State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Indiana SPC27IN1 Indiana State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27IN2 Indiana State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Iowa SPC27IA1 Iowa State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27IA2 Iowa State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Kansas SPC27KS1 Kansas State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27KS2 Kansas State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Kentucky SPC27KY1 Kentucky State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27KY2 Kentucky State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Louisiana SPC27LA1 Louisiana State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27LA2 Louisiana State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

SPC27LA3 Louisiana State Plane Coordinate System Offshore Zone L

Maine SPC27ME1 Maine State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27ME2 Maine State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Maryland SPC27MD1 Maryland State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 L

Massachusetts SPC27MA1 Massachusetts State Plane Coordinate System Mainland Zone L

SPC27MA2 Massachusetts State Plane Coordinate System Island Zone L

Michigan SPC27MI1 Current Michigan State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27MI2 Current Michigan State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone L

SPC27MI3 Current Michigan State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

SPC27MI4 Old Michigan State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27MI5 Old Michigan State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone TM

SPC27MI6 Old Michigan State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Minnesota SPC27MN1 Minnesota State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27MN2 Minnesota State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone L

SPC27MN3 Minnesota State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Mississippi SPC27MS1 Mississippi State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27MS2 Mississippi State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Missouri SPC27MO1 Missouri State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27MO2 Missouri State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone TM

SPC27MO3 Missouri State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Montana SPC27MT1 Montana State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

Appendix 3: Supplied Reference System Parameter Files 317

 State File name Title Projection

SPC27MT2 Montana State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone L

SPC27MT3 Montana State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Nebraska SPC27NE1 Nebraska State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27NE2 Nebraska State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Nevada SPC27NV1 Nevada State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27NV2 Nevada State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone TM

SPC27NV3 Nevada State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

New Hampshire SPC27NH1 New Hampshire State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 TM

New Jersey SPC27NJ1 New Jersey State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 TM

New Mexico SPC27NM1 New Mexico State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27NM2 New Mexico State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone TM

SPC27NM3 New Mexico State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

New York SPC27NY1 New York State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27NY2 New York State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone TM

SPC27NY3 New York State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

SPC27NY4 New York State Plane Coordinate System Long Island Zone L

North Carolina SPC27NC1 North Carolina State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 L

North Dakota SPC27ND1 North Dakota State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27ND2 North Dakota State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Ohio SPC27OH1 Ohio State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27OH2 Ohio State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Oklahoma SPC27OK1 Oklahoma State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27OK2 Oklahoma State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Oregon SPC27OR1 Oregon State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27OR2 Oregon State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Pennsylvania SPC27PA1 Pennsylvania State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27PA2 Pennsylvania State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Puerto Rico & Virgin Islands SPC27PR1 Puerto Rico & Virgin Islands State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 L

SPC27PR2 Puerto Rico & Virgin Islands State Plane Coordinate System Zone 2 (St. Croix) L

Rhode Island SPC27RI1 Rhode Island State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 TM

Samoa -none- -not supported- L

South Carolina SPC27SC1 South Carolina State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27SC2 South Carolina State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Appendix 3: Supplied Reference System Parameter Files 318

 State File name Title Projection

South Dakota SPC27SD1 South Dakota State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27SD2 South Dakota State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Tennessee SPC27TN1 Tennessee State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 L

Texas SPC27TX1 Texas State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27TX2 Texas State Plane Coordinate System North Central Zone L

SPC27TX3 Texas State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone L

SPC27TX4 Texas State Plane Coordinate System South Central Zone L

SPC27TX5 Texas State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Utah SPC27UT1 Utah State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27UT2 Utah State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone L

SPC27UT3 Utah State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Vermont SPC27VT1 Vermont State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 TM

Virginia SPC27VA1 Virginia State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27VA2 Virginia State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Washington SPC27WA1 Washington State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27WA2 Washington State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

West Virginia SPC27WV1 West Virginia State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27WV2 West Virginia State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Wisconsin SPC27WI1 Wisconsin State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC27WI2 Wisconsin State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone L

SPC27WI3 Wisconsin State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Wyoming SPC27WY1 Wyoming State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC27WY2 Wyoming State Plane Coordinate System East Central Zone TM

SPC27WY3 Wyoming State Plane Coordinate System West Central Zone TM

SPC27WY4 Wyoming State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

US State Plane Coordinate System 1983

REF files are supplied for all US State Plane Coordinate Systems based on the Transverse Mercator and Lambert Confor-
mal Conic projections for NAD27 and NAD83. These are located in the GEOREF subdirectory of your CartaLinx pro-
gram directory. The following table lists these files for the NAD83 datum. The Proj column indicates the projection upon
which the system is based (L=Lambert Conformal Conic / TM=Transverse Mercator). Note that Samoa did not make
the change from NAD27 to NAD83.

Appendix 3: Supplied Reference System Parameter Files 319

 State File name Title Proj

Alabama SPC83AL1 Alabama State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83AL2 Alabama State Plane Coordinate Western Zone TM

Alaska SPC83AK0 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 10 TM

SPC83AK2 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 2 TM

SPC83AK3 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 3 TM

SPC83AK4 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 4 TM

SPC83AK5 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 5 TM

SPC83AK6 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 6 TM

SPC83AK7 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 7 TM

SPC83AK8 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 8 TM

SPC83AK9 Alaska State Plane Coordinate System Zone 9 TM

Arizona SPC83AZ1 Arizona State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83AZ2 Arizona State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone TM

SPC83AZ3 Arizona State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Arkansas SPC83AR1 Arkansas State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83AR2 Arkansas State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

California SPC83CA1 California State Plane Coordinate System Zone I L

SPC83CA2 California State Plane Coordinate System Zone II L

SPC83CA3 California State Plane Coordinate System Zone III L

SPC83CA4 California State Plane Coordinate System Zone IV L

SPC83CA5 California State Plane Coordinate System Zone V L

SPC83CA6 California State Plane Coordinate System Zone VI L

Colorado SPC83CO1 Colorado State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83CO2 Colorado State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone L

SPC83CO3 Colorado State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Connecticut SPC83CT1 Connecticut State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 L

Delaware SPC83DE1 Delaware State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 TM

Florida SPC83FL1 Florida State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83FL2 Florida State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

SPC83FL3 Florida State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone TM

Georgia SPC83GA1 Georgia State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83GA2 Georgia State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Appendix 3: Supplied Reference System Parameter Files 320

 State File name Title Proj

Hawaii SPC83HI1 Hawaii State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 TM

SPC83HI2 Hawaii State Plane Coordinate System Zone 2 TM

SPC83HI3 Hawaii State Plane Coordinate System Zone 3 TM

SPC83HI4 Hawaii State Plane Coordinate System Zone 4 TM

SPC83HI5 Hawaii State Plane Coordinate System Zone 5 TM

Idaho SPC83ID1 Idaho State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83ID2 Idaho State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone TM

SPC83ID3 Idaho State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Illinois SPC83IL1 Illinois State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83IL2 Illinois State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Indiana SPC83IN1 Indiana State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83IN2 Indiana State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Iowa SPC83IA1 Iowa State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83IA2 Iowa State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Kansas SPC83KS1 Kansas State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83KS2 Kansas State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Kentucky SPC83KY1 Kentucky State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83KY2 Kentucky State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Louisiana SPC83LA1 Louisiana State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83LA2 Louisiana State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

SPC83LA3 Louisiana State Plane Coordinate System Offshore Zone L

Maine SPC83ME1 Maine State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83ME2 Maine State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Maryland SPC83MD1 Maryland State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 L

Massachusetts SPC83MA1 Massachusetts State Plane Coordinate System Mainland Zone L

SPC83MA2 Massachusetts State Plane Coordinate System Island Zone L

Michigan SPC83MI1 current Michigan State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83MI2 current Michigan State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone L

SPC83MI3 current Michigan State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

SPC83MI4 old Michigan State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83MI5 old Michigan State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone TM

SPC83MI6 old Michigan State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Minnesota SPC83MN1 Minnesota State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

Appendix 3: Supplied Reference System Parameter Files 321

 State File name Title Proj

SPC83MN2 Minnesota State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone L

SPC83MN3 Minnesota State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Mississippi SPC83MS1 Mississippi State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83MS2 Mississippi State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Missouri SPC83MO1 Missouri State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83MO2 Missouri State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone TM

SPC83MO3 Missouri State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Montana SPC83MT1 Montana State Plane Coordinate System Single Zone L

Nebraska SPC83NE1 Nebraska State Plane Coordinate System Single Zone L

Nevada SPC83NV1 Nevada State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83NV2 Nevada State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone TM

SPC83NV3 Nevada State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

New Hampshire SPC83NH1 New Hampshire State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 TM

New Jersey SPC83NJ1 New Jersey State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 TM

New Mexico SPC83NM1 New Mexico State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83NM2 New Mexico State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone TM

SPC83NM3 New Mexico State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

New York SPC83NY1 New York State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83NY2 New York State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone TM

SPC83NY3 New York State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

SPC83NY4 New York State Plane Coordinate System Long Island Zone L

North Carolina SPC83NC1 North Carolina State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 L

North Dakota SPC83ND1 North Dakota State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83ND2 North Dakota State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Ohio SPC83OH1 Ohio State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83OH2 Ohio State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Oklahoma SPC83OK1 Oklahoma State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83OK2 Oklahoma State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Oregon SPC83OR1 Oregon State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83OR2 Oregon State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Pennsylvania SPC83PA1 Pennsylvania State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83PA2 Pennsylvania State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Puerto Rico & Virgin Islands SPC83PR1 Puerto Rico & Virgin Islands State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 L

Appendix 3: Supplied Reference System Parameter Files 322

 State File name Title Proj

SPC83PR2 Puerto Rico & Virgin Islands State Plane Coordinate System Zone 2 (St. Croix) L

Rhode Island SPC83RI1 Rhode Island State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 TM

Samoa -none- -not supported- L

South Carolina SPC83SC1 South Carolina State Plane Coordinate System, single zone L

South Dakota SPC83SD1 South Dakota State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83SD2 South Dakota State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Tennessee SPC83TN1 Tennessee State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 L

Texas SPC83TX1 Texas State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83TX2 Texas State Plane Coordinate System North Central Zone L

SPC83TX3 Texas State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone L

SPC83TX4 Texas State Plane Coordinate System South Central Zone L

SPC83TX5 Texas State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Utah SPC83UT1 Utah State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83UT2 Utah State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone L

SPC83UT3 Utah State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Vermont SPC83VT1 Vermont State Plane Coordinate System Zone 1 TM

Virginia SPC83VA1 Virginia State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83VA2 Virginia State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Washington SPC83WA1 Washington State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83WA2 Washington State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

West Virginia SPC83WV1 West Virginia State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83WV2 West Virginia State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Wisconsin SPC83WI1 Wisconsin State Plane Coordinate System Northern Zone L

SPC83WI2 Wisconsin State Plane Coordinate System Central Zone L

SPC83WI3 Wisconsin State Plane Coordinate System Southern Zone L

Wyoming SPC83WY1 Wyoming State Plane Coordinate System Eastern Zone TM

SPC83WY2 Wyoming State Plane Coordinate System East Central Zone TM

SPC83WY3 Wyoming State Plane Coordinate System West Central Zone TM

SPC83WY4 Wyoming State Plane Coordinate System Western Zone TM

Gauss-Kruger
The Gauss-Kruger reference system is used primarily in the countries of the former Soviet Union and Eastern Bloc. REF

Appendix 3: Supplied Reference System Parameter Files 323

files are included for zones 1-32. All use the Pulkovo 1942 datum and Krassovsky 1940 ellipsoid. The names of these files
are GK01_P42.ref through GK32_P42.ref. The Gauss-Kruger projection is identical to the Transverse Mercator projec-
tion. (Note that the alternate spelling “Gauss-Krueger” is also acceptable in a REF file.)

Miscellaneous
Note that IDRISI also includes miscellaneous regional and local reference system files. A list can be found within the
IDRISI Help System, in the Notes section of the PROJECT module.

Appendix 3: Supplied Reference System Parameter Files 324

Appendix 4: Error Propagation Formulas

Arithmetic Operations
In the formulas below, S refers to RMS error. Formulas are presented for each of the arithmetic operations performed by
the OVERLAY and SCALAR modules in IDRISI. In OVERLAY operations, Sx would refer to the RMS error in Map X,
Sy refers to the RMS error in Map Y, and Sz refers to the RMS error in the final map produced, Map Z. In SCALAR oper-
ations, K refers to a user-defined constant. Often, error is computed as a uniform value for the entire resulting map. How-
ever, in some cases, the formula depends upon the values in corresponding cells of the input maps. These are referred to
as X and Y. In these instances, the error would vary over the face of the map and would thus need to be computed sepa-
rately for each cell. Note that these formulas assume that the input maps are uncorrelated with each other.
Overlay Add / Subtract
2 2
(e.g., Z=X+Y or Z=X-Y) S z = Sx + Sy

Overlay Multiply / Divide

2 2 2 2
(e.g., Z=X*Y or Z=X/Y) S z = ( Sx ⋅ Y ) + ( Sy ⋅ X )

Scalar Add / Subtract

(e.g., Z=X+k or Z=X-k) Sz=Sx i.e., no change
Scalar Multiply
(e.g., Z=X*k) Sz=Sx*k
Scalar Divide
(e.g., Z=X/k) Sz=Sx/k
Scalar Exponentiate
2 (2(k – 1)) 2
(e.g., Z=Xk) Sz = k ⋅X ⋅ Sx

Logical Operations
For Boolean operations, logical errors may be expressed by the proportion of cells that are expected to be in error (e) in
the category being overlaid. Since a Boolean overlay requires two input maps, the error of the output map will be a func-
tion of the errors in the two input maps and the logic operation performed as follows:
Logical AND
ez=ex+ (1-ex)*ey or equivalently ez=ex+ ey - (ex*ey)
Logical OR
ez=ex*ey

Appendix 4: Error Propagation Formulas 325

Index
A
Absorption 201
Accuracy 129
Accuracy Assessment 36, 112, 205, 206
Active Sensors 22, 229
Adaptive Box Filter 191
Add Layer 66
Advanced Very High Resolution Radiometer (AVHRR) 25, 30, 37, 203, 233
Aerial Photography 27
Aerial Videography 28
Aggregation of Fuzzy Measures 174
Alber’s equal area conic projection 304
ALLOCATE 94, 262
Allocation 17
Amplitude 193
Amplitude Image 197
Analysis Menu 89
Analytical Hierarchy Process 153
Analytical Hillshading 103
Anisotropic Cost Distance 255
Anisotropic Function 255, 257, 258
Anisotropy (in variability) 280
API 122
Application Programming Interface 122
Arc/Info Files 87
ARCIDRIS 87
ArcView Files 87
AREA 90
ASCII File Type 50
Ashburn Vegetation Index (AVI) 239
ASPECT 103
ASSIGN 84, 89, 113
Atlas GIS Files 87
ATLIDRIS 87
ATMOSC 188, 223
Atmosphere 22, 187, 223, 229
Atmospheric Correction 187
Atmospheric Windows 22
Attribute Documentation Files 56
Attribute Files 48, 56
AUTOCORR 97
Automatic Display 64
Automatically-Generated Output File Name 43
Autoscaling 62, 63
AVI Files 74, 88
AVIRIS 26, 31, 202, 224
B
Background 71
Backscatter 229
Band Ratio 189
Band Sequential 131
Band-Interleaved-by-Line 131, 222
Band-Interleaved-by-Line (BIL) Files 86
Band-Interleaved-by-Pixel (BIP) Files 86
Basic Probability Assignment (BPA) 179, 214
BAYCLASS 35, 110, 205, 210, 211, 212, 213, 214
BAYES 99
Bayes' Theorum 211
Bayesian Probability Theory 110, 168, 173, 174, 175, 177, 180, 182, 209, 210, 211, 216
BELCLASS 35, 110, 205, 210, 212, 213, 214, 215
BELIEF 99, 111, 180, 181, 215
Belief 168, 173, 179, 180, 213, 214, 215, 218
Belief Interval 179, 180, 213
BILIDRIS 222
Binary File Type 50
BMP Files 72, 87
BMPIDRIS 87
Boolean Combination 148
Boolean Layer 15
Bounding Rectangle 14, 56
BRANCH 122
Bridge and Tunnel Edges 267, 269, 270
BUFFER 93
Buffer Zone 17
Byte Data Type 49
C
CA_MARKOV 101, 252, 253
Calculate 82
CALIBRATE 186, 190
CALL 122
CartaLinx 10, 113, 127, 128
CELLATOM 101, 252
Cellular Automata 101, 252
CENTER 97
Change / Time Series Submenu 100
Change Analysis 100, 247
Change Resolution 133
Change Rows and Columns 133
Change Vector Analysis 248, 251
Chlorophyll 22, 24, 25, 37
Choice Function 147
Choice Heuristic 147
Classification (of remotely-sensed images) 25, 32, 34, 35, 201, 203, 204, 205, 206, 216
Classification Error 206, 207, 208, 209
Classification Uncertainty 205, 210, 211, 213, 214, 222
Classification Uncertainty Image 205, 210
CLUSTER 36, 110, 205, 219, 220, 221
Cluster Analysis 36, 218, 219
Cokriging 281
Collection 46
Collection Linked Zoom 76
Collections 81
Color 23, 24
COLSPACE 38, 107
COM Server 122
Comments Field 53
Complementary Objectives 148, 149, 158
Composer 65, 68, 88
COMPOSITE 88, 107
Composite Generation 34
Composite Image 219
Compromise Solution 149, 158
Computer Assisted Design (CAD) 10
CONCAT 113
Conditional Probability 178
Conditional Simulation 281
Conflicting Objectives 148, 149, 158
Consistency Field 53
Consistency Ratio 154
Constrained Delaunay Triangulation 269
Constraint (in multi-criteria evaluation) 146
Context Operators 18
Context Operators Submenu 95
CONTOUR 104
CONTRACT 113
Contrast 33, 69
CONVERT 112
Convex Hull 267, 275
Conway's Game of Life 252
Coordinate Geometry (COGO) 10
Corrected Transformed Vegetation Index (CTVI) 235
CORRELATE 101, 250
COST 93, 255, 256, 262
Cost Distance 17, 255
COUNT 96, 99
CRATIO 97
Crisp Sets 149, 175
Criterion (in multi-criteria evaluation) 146
Criterion Scores 152
Criterion Weights 152, 163
Critical Point 270, 274
CRLF 86
Crossclassification 248
CROSSTAB 89, 97, 100, 248
Crosstabulation 248
CTG 87
Cursor Inquiry Mode 74
CURVATURE 103
Curve Fitting 102, 103
D
Data Compression 126
Data Entry Menu 113
Data Formats 126
Data Import 125, 129, 130
Data Input 125
Data Integration 133
Data Tables 56
Data Type 49, 54, 58
Database 9, 13
Database Development 125
Database Management System 10
Database Query 15, 18, 81, 90
Database Query by Attribute 15, 90
Database Query by Location 15, 92
Database Query Submenu 89
Database Tables 48, 56
Database Uncertainty 149, 167, 169, 171
DATABASE WORKSHOP 114
Database Workshop 81, 90
Datum 136, 285
Datum parameters 285
Datum transformation 137, 143
Decision (definition) 146
Decision Risk 149, 150, 167, 168, 169, 171, 172, 182
Decision Rule 147
Decision Rule Uncertainty 149, 168, 169, 173, 174, 182
Decision Strategy Analysis 145
Decision Support 12, 19
Decison Support Submenu 98
DECOMP 94, 255, 256
Delaunay Triangulation 267
Delphi 123
DEMIDRIS 87
Dempster-Schafer Theory 168, 173, 174, 175, 178, 179, 180, 182
Dempster-Shafer Theory 110, 210, 212, 213, 214, 216, 221, 222
Derivative Mapping 18, 128
DESTRIPE 106, 187
Dialog Box 41
Difference Vegetation Index (DVI) 239
Digital Elevation Model 267
Digital Image Processing 32, 201
Digital Number (DN) 185
Digitizing 10, 127
DISAGGREGATE 101
Disbelief 179, 181
DISPERSE 94, 255, 256, 258, 259
DISPLAY Launcher 88
DISPLAY Launcher 61
Display Menu 88
Display System 10, 61
DISTANCE 93
Distance Operators 17
Distance Operators Submenu 93
Distance-Based Vegetation Indices 233, 236
Distance-Weighted Average 263
DLG 87
Documentation File 50, 54
Documentation Files 46
DRAWFILT 108, 196, 198
DXF Files 87
DXFIDRIS 87
E
Edit 105, 113
Edit 89
Electromagnetic Energy 21, 22, 23, 201, 202
Electromagnetic Spectrum 233
Ellipsoid parameters 283
EMF Files 72, 87
Enhancement (of remotely-sensed images) 32, 33
Environ 41
Environment 41
Erdas Files 87
ERDIDRIS 87
ERRMAT 36, 99, 112, 169, 170, 206
Error 149, 167
Error Matrix 170
Error Propagation 167, 169, 170
Error Propagation Formulas 305
Errors of Commission 170, 206
Errors of Omission 170, 206
Euler's Formula 195
European Remote Sensing Satellite 229
European Remote Sensing Satellite (ERS-1 and ERS-2) 31
EXPAND 113
Export 86
EXTRACT 84, 89, 96
F
Factor (in multi-criteria evaluation) 146
Factor Weights 155
False Color Composite 25, 27
False origin 138
Feature Extraction 104
Feature Properties 72, 75
File Menu 85
File Names 45
File Type 50, 57
FILTER 95, 107, 191, 206, 230
FILTERFQ 108, 196, 198
Filtering 34
FISHER 210
Flag Definition 53
Flag Value 53
Flood Polygon Digitizing 203
Focus 66
Force (in cost distance) 255, 256
FOURIER 108, 196, 198
Fourier Analysis 108, 193
FRACTAL 103
FREQDIST 108, 196, 198
Frequency 193
Frequency Domain 195, 196, 197, 198
Frequency Domain Filter 198
Friction 17
Friction (in cost distance) 255, 256
FUZCLASS 35, 110, 205, 210, 215
FUZSIG 35, 109, 204, 216, 217, 218
FUZZY 99, 152, 160, 176, 179
Fuzzy Measure 173
Fuzzy Membership Functions 176
Fuzzy Partition Matrix 217
Fuzzy Set 147, 149, 150, 152, 167, 168, 173, 174, 175, 182
Fuzzy Set Membership 202, 210, 215, 217, 222
Fuzzy Set Theory 110, 210, 215, 218
Fuzzy Signatures 216, 217
G
Gain 248
Generalization 205, 218, 219
Geodesy 135
Geodetic coordinates 137, 295
Geographic Information System (GIS) 9
Geoid 135
Geometric Restoration 33, 191
GEOREF folder 140
Georeferencing 14, 33, 70, 129, 135–144, 191
Geostatistics 103, 264
GeoTIFF data import 86
Global Positioning System 76, 127, 128, 203
GPS 76
Graphic Insets 71
GRASS Files 87
GRASSIDR 87
Green Vegetation Index (GVI) 242
Grid north 138
Grid referencing system 138
GROUP 95
Group File 46
Gstat 102, 264, 277
H
Hammer-Aitoff grid for Africa 304
Hard Classifiers 35, 109, 202, 204, 206, 221
Hardener 202, 218
Hardening (image classification) 35
Harmonic 195
Haze 188
Heads-up Digitizing 127
Help Menu 114
Help System 44
HILLSHADE 103, 190
HISTO 88, 90, 96
HNTRLAND 96
H-Scatterplot 278
Hybrid Unsupervised/Supervised Classification 220, 221
HYPERABSORB 111, 112, 223, 226
HYPERAUTOSIG 36, 109, 111, 223
HYPERMIN 36, 111, 223, 224, 225
HYPEROSP 36, 111, 223, 225
HYPERSAM 36, 111, 223, 224
HYPERSIG 36, 109, 223
Hyperspectral Classification 202, 222, 224–??, 224, 225, ??–226
Hyperspectral Remote Sensing 26, 35, 202, 203, 222
Hyperspectral Signature File (.HSG) 223, 224
Hyperspectral Signature Library 202, 223, 224
HYPERUNMIX 111, 112, 225
HYPERUNMIX, 223
HYPERUSP 36, 111, 223, 226
I
Icon Bar 39
ID Type 55
Ideal Point 159
IDRISI File Conversion 88
IDRISI Explorer 64
IDRISI Explorer 85
Ignorance 175, 178, 179, 180, 181, 212, 213, 214
ILLUMINATE 88
Illumination Effects 189, 191, 234
Illumination Modeling 190
IMAGE CALCULATOR 90, 93, 104
Image Calculator 117, 120
Image Classification 32, 109, 110
Image Deviation 250
Image Differencing 247
Image Enhancement 106
Image Group File 210, 222, 224
Image Partitioning 190
Image Processing Submenu 105
Image Ratioing 247
Image Restoration 106, 185
Image Transformation 107
IMAGEDIFF 100
IMAGERATIO 100
Imaginary Part Image 195, 196
Import 86, 125, 129, 130
Indian Space Research Organization (IRS) 30
INITIAL 113
In-Process Classification Assessment (IPCA) 205, 212, 214, 215, 222
Input File 42
Instantaneous Field of View (IFOV) 28
Integer Data Type 49
Interaction Mechanisms 23, 201
Interactive Display Features 74
INTERCON 102, 264
INTERPOL 102, 263
Interpolation 102, 270, 274, 277, 281
ISOCLUST 36, 110, 219, 221
J
Japanese Earth Resource Satellite 229
Japanese Earth Resource Satellite (JERS) 31
J-Shaped Fuzzy Membership Function 176
K
Kappa 170
Kappa Index of Agreement 249, 253
Kauth-Thomas Tasseled Cap Transformation 242
Kriging 102, 264, 277, 281
Kriging and Conditional Simulation 102, 103
L
Lag 278
Lambert azimuthal equal area projection 304
LANDSAT 131, 233
Landsat data import 86
LANDSAT satellites and data 25, 29, 188, 202, 204
Latitude and longitude 137, 295
LATLONG REF file 295
Launcher 88
Layer 45
Layer Frame 65
Layer Properties 68
Layover Effect (in Radar data) 230
Least-Cost Pathway 17
Legend Categories 53
Legends 70
Limiting Factor 147
Lineage Field 53
Linear Discriminant Analysis Classifier 210
Linear Fuzzy Membership Function 177
Linear Spectral Unmixing 35
Link File 46
Linked-Table Collections 81
LINTOPNT 102, 268
Loadings (in PCA) 249
Logical Operations 15
LOGISTICREG 253
LOGITREG 97
M
Macro 85, 105
Macro Modeler 117
Magnitude/Direction Image Pair 256
MAKESIG 108, 204, 221
Map Algebra 16
Map Analysis Package Files 87
Map Composition 10
Map Composition Files 58
Map Grid 71
Map Layer 45
Map Layer Names 45
Map Properties 70
Map Window 65
MAPIDRIS 87
MapInfo Files 87
MARKOV 101, 251, 252
Markov Chain Analysis 251
Mathematical Operators Submenu 92
MAXBAY 212, 218
MAXBEL 218
MAXFRAC 218
MAXFUZ 218
Maximum Likelihood 209, 221
Maximum Value 52
MAXLIKE 35, 36, 110, 204, 205, 209, 210, 212, 221
MAXSET 35, 36, 110, 205, 214, 219, 221
MCE 98, 152, 154, 163, 170, 176
MDCHOICE 99
Measurement Error 167, 169, 171
Media Viewer 74, 101
Menu 85
Menu System 39
Metadata 46, 85
MIFIDRIS 87
MINDIST 35, 109, 204, 205, 206, 207, 209, 215
Minimum Distance 206
Minimum Value 52
Misra's Green Vegetation Index (MGVI) 243
BELCALC 35, 111, 214, 215
Mixed Pixels 201, 202, 205, 212, 214, 215, 216, 221, 236
Mixed pixels 35
Model Specification Error 168
Modified Soil-Adjusted Vegetation Index (MSAVI) 241
MODIS 26, 31, 203
Modules 85
MOLA 99, 160, 164, 253
Molodensky transform procedure 143
Molodensky transformation constants 143, 285
Monte Carlo Simulation 171
MOSAIC 187
Motorolla Processor 129
Move 74
Multi-Criteria Evaluation 148, 151, 154, 155, 160, 163, 177
Multi-look Processing 230
Multi-Objective Decision 151, 158
Multi-Objective Evaluation 148, 158, 160
Multi-Objective Land Allocation 151, 159, 160, 164
MULTIREG 96
N
NADCON procedure 143
NADUSLAT 143
NADUSLON 143
NDVICOMP 106
NMEA Format 77
Noise Removal 190, 191, 193, 230
Non-Constrained Delaunay Triangulation 269
NORMALIZE 101
Normalized Difference 37
Normalized Difference Vegetation Index (NDVI) 235
North Arrow 71
Nugget 280
Nyquist Frequency 193, 197
O
Objective 147
Offset 248
On-Screen Digitizing 78, 203, 204
On-screen Digitizing 127
Order Weights 155
Ordered Weighted Average 155, 174, 176
Original Point 272
ORTHO 88
Orthogonal Tranformation Vegetation Indices 234, 242
Orthographic Display 88
Output File 42
OVERLAY 89, 92
Overlay 11
Overwrite Protection 43
P
Packed Binary File Type 50
Pairwise Comparison Matrix 153, 154
Palette Files 59, 62, 88
Palette Files Import 88
PALIDRIS 88
Pan 73, 75
Parallelepiped 204, 208, 209
PARE 86
Passive Sensors 21
PATHWAY 94
PATTERN 95, 96
PCA 38, 107
PCLASS 90, 99, 171, 172
Pearson Product Moment Coefficient of Correlation 101
Pearson Product-Moment Correlation 250
PERIM 90
Perpendicular Vegetation Index (PVI) 236, 237, 238, 239
Phase 193
Philosophy of GIS 20
Photogrammetry 28, 33
Pick List 42
PIPED 35, 109, 204, 208, 218
Placemarks 72, 76
Plane reference system 139
Plate Carrée projection 139
Plausibility 173, 179, 180, 181, 213, 215
PNTGEN 268
Position Error 52
Posterior Probability 178
Potential Model 263
Power Spectrum Image 195, 196, 197
Preferences 85
Principal Components Analysis 25, 38, 187, 188, 242, 249
Print Composition 72
Prioritized Solution 149, 158
Priority 66
Process Modelling 19
PROFILE 90, 100, 223, 224, 250
Profiling 250
Progress Report 40
PROJECT 112, 139, 143
Project 143
Project File 41
Projection 137
Proportional Error 167, 170
Q
QUADRAT 97
QUERY 90
Query by Attribute 90
Query by Location 92
R
Radar 22, 30, 31, 191
RADARSAT 86, 229
RADARSAT (module) 230
RADIANCE 106, 186
Radiance Calibration 185
Radiometric Restoration 30, 32, 185
RANDOM 98, 99, 171
Range 280
RANK 98, 158, 164
Raster 12, 13
Raster Documentation File 50
Raster Files 48
Raster Surface 267, 274, 275
Raster/Vector Conversion Submenu 113
Ratio Vegetation Index (RATIO) 234
Ratio Vegetation Index (RVI) 236
Real Data Type 49
Real Part Image 195, 196
RECLASS 89
Reference ellipsoid 135, 136, 283
Reference surface 135
Reference System 133, 135
Reference system parameter file (REF) 59, 139, 140, 295
Reflectance 23, 24, 201
Reformat Menu 112
REGRESS 96, 190
Regression Differencing 247
RELOCATE 94
Remote Sensing 11, 21, 26, 201
Remove Layer 67
Representative Fraction 75
Representative Fraction (RF) 40
RESAMPLE 33, 106, 112, 191
Resize 74
Resolution 52, 128, 133
Resource Folder 41
Restoration (of remotely-sensed images) 32
Restore Original Window 76
RESULTANT 94, 255, 256
Reverse-Transform PCA 187, 188
RF 40
RGB24 Data Type 50
Risk 155
Risk-aversion (in decision making) 148
ROC 253
Root Mean Square (RMS) Error 167, 171
Run Macro 85, 105
S
SAMPLE 36, 98, 99, 112, 169, 206
Sample Size (for Accuracy Assessment) 206
Sample Variogram Modeling 102, 103
Satellite Imagery 130
Satellite Platforms 28
Satellite Sensor Calibration 185
Saturation Points 69
Save Composition 72
SCALAR 93
Scale Bar 71
Scale of Display 40
Scan Line Drop Out 187, 191
Scanner 10, 127
Scanner Distortion Correction 191
SCATTER 109
SCREEN 223
Screen Dump 72
SDTS data import 87
Semivariogram 279
Sensor Band File (.SBF) 222, 223, 224
SEPARATE 88
SEPSIG 109
SHAPEIDR 87
SIGCOMP 109, 204
Sigmoidal Fuzzy Membership Function 176
Signature (in Remote Sensing) 23, 24, 26, 34, 201, 202, 204
Signature Development 108, 204, 216, 217, 222, 223
Signature File (.SIG) 204, 217
Signature Pixel File (.SPF) 204
Sill 280
Simulation 281
Skew Correction 191
SLOPE 103
Slope-Based Vegetation Indices 233, 234
Soft Classifiers 110, 202, 204, 205, 210
Soft Constraint 147
Soil Background 233
Soil Line 234, 236
Soil-Adjusted Vegetation Index (SAVI) 239
Spatial Continuity 277
Spatial Domain 197, 198
Spatial Resolution 28
Spatial Variability 277
SPDIST 93
Specification Error 149
Speckle 190
Spectral Angle Mapper 224
Spectral Curve File (.ISC) 224
Spectral Resolution 28
Spectral Response Pattern 23, 24, 34, 201, 224
SPOT data import 86
Spreadsheet Files 86
SQL 81, 82
SRFIDRIS 87
SSTIDRIS 86
STANDARD 98, 99
Standardization of Factors 160
Standardized Distance (in Classification) 207
State plane coordinate system 295
Statistical Analysis 11
Statistics Submenu 96
Status Bar 40
STCHOICE 101, 251
STRETCH 88, 107
Striping 186, 190, 191
Sub-Pixel Classification 35, 202, 212, 214
Supervised Classification 35, 108, 201, 203
SURFACE 95, 170
Surface 261
Surface Analysis Submenu 102
Surface Interpolation 102, 267, 274
Surface Model 261
Surfer Files 87
Surrogate Data 128
Surveying 127
Symbol Files 59, 62, 88
Symbol Workshop 73
Synthetic Aperture Radar 229
System Operation 39
System Pour L'Observation de la Terre (SPOT) 29, 131, 233
T
TASSCAP 38, 108, 233, 242, 244
Tasseled Cap 234, 243
Terminate 40
Tessellation 262
Text Inset 71
TEXTURE 38, 95, 108, 230, 231
Texture Analysis 230, 231
Thematic Mapper 131
THERMAL 38, 108
Thiam’s Transformed Vegetation Index (TTVI) 235
THIESSEN 94, 103, 262
TIFF Files 87
TIFIDRIS 87
Time Series Analysis 38, 100, 249
TIN 102, 263, 265
TIN (module) 274
TINPREP 102, 268
TINSURF 102, 265, 274, 275
Titles 71
T-Norm/T-CoNorm 173, 174
Topographic Effects 189, 234
Topographic Variables 103
TOPOSHAPE 104
Tradeoff 155
Tradeoff (in multi-criteria evaluation) 147, 148
Training Sites 35, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206, 212, 214, 216, 217
TRANSFORM 93
Transformation (of remotely-sensed images) 32, 37
Transformed Soil-Adjusted Vegetation Index (TSAVI) 240
Transformed Vegetation Index (TVI) 235
Transmission (in Remote Sensing) 201
TRANSPOSE 113
TREND 97, 103, 262
Trend Surface Analysis 262
Triangulated Irregular Networks 263, 267, 270
True origin 138
TSA 38, 100, 249
U
Uncertainty 145, 149, 150, 167, 168, 179
Uncertainty Management 145
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) 295
UNMIX 35, 111, 205, 210, 211, 218
Unsupervised Classification 35, 36, 201, 218
UPDATE 113
US State plane coordinate system 295
User Preferences 85
UTMREF 113
V
VALIDATE 253
Value Error 52
Value Error Field 170, 171
Value Units 52
Values File 84
Values Files 48, 56
VAR2FIX 86
VARCOST 94, 256, 257, 258, 259
Vector 12, 13
Vector Documentation File 54
Vector Files 53
Vector Layer Type 68
Vegetation 233
Vegetation (in Remote Sensing) 201, 202
Vegetation Index 233
Vegetation Indices 37
VEGINDEX 38, 108, 233, 244
Video 74
VIEWSHED 95
Visibility of Layers 68
Visual Basic 123
Visual C++ 123
Voronoi Tessellation 262
W
WATRSHED 95
WAV Files 88
WAVES Subdirectory 223
Waypoints 77
WEIGHT 98, 154, 163
Weighted Difference Vegetation Index (WDVI) 241
Weighted Linear Combination 148, 154, 174
Wheeler-Misra Orthogonal Transformation 242, 243
WINDOW 112
Window List 114
WMF Files 72, 87
Working Folder 41
X
XYZIDRIS 86
Z
ZEROPAD 108, 196
Zoom 73, 75, 76